MOVEMENT CONTROLLER
This version incorporates all changes up to Change 433
Date 25-MAR-20
OPERATOR'S MANUAL
Copyright 1984-2020
WOODGROVE DIGITAL ENGINEERING PTY. LTD.
Australian Business Number (ABN) 44002794452
All rights reserved.
This document is the "Operator's Manual" for the "Movement Controller".
Also associated with this system are the "Technical Manual" and the
"Software Manual".
This section includes the two introductory sections: "Using this Document",
and "Introduction".
The "Using this Document" section gives an overview of each section of the
document.
The "Introduction" gives a brief overview of the plant, its function, and
an overview of this software.
Using this Document
This section gives an overview of each section of the document.
This document is divided into three major sections. These are:
Prologue
General Instructions
Specific Instructions
The "Prologue" includes the two introductory sections: "Using this
Document", and "Introduction". The "Using this Document" section
(this section) gives an overview of each section of the document, while the
"Introduction" section gives a brief overview of the system's
function.
The "General Instructions" describe the features of the Movement Controller
software common to all or several windows. Much of the information in this
section may be second nature to persons with personal computer experience,
whereas the more unique sections are best referred to when referenced from
the "Specific Instructions".
The "Specific Instructions" describe the operation of individual windows.
This section is arranged in the same way as the windows are presented in
the Movement Controller software. This section should be read in
conjunction with operating the windows to which they relate. References
are made throughout this section to the various subsections of the "General
Instructions". It should be sufficient to refer to these references the
first time they are encountered.
Note: The term, "windows" is used to refer to the Microsoft Windows
"windows" as well as occasional selection windows within "drawing
areas".
In the printed document, cross-section references are made using the
section and subsection numbers, separated by dots, followed by the final
subsection name, and the entire string enclosed in double quotation marks.
When presented via the Movement Controller's help system, cross-section
references are made using the final subsection name, enclosed in double
quotation marks and highlighted as a hyper-text link. When presented via
an HTML rendering program, cross-section references are made using the
final subsection name rendered as a hyper-text link. For example, this
section would be referred to as the section titled:
"Using this Document".
Introduction
This manual describes the operation of Woodgrove Digital Engineering's
"Movement Controller" software.
The software is designed to control: Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyors, carton
conveyors, palletisers and other machines, load storage and retrieval
cranes (herein referred to as just "cranes"), and pick-to-light systems.
The major functions of the software are:
communications to the various sub-systems,
issuing instructions to and monitoring status from these sub-systems,
coordination of the interaction between these sub-systems,
interfacing to the operator,
logging of alarms, operator actions, and load movements,
definition of the sub-systems and the operator interface,
provision of diagnostic windows.
The major function of the system definition is to configure:
the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyors PLC code and operator interface,
the carton conveyors and pick-to-light control algorithms and operator
interface,
the palletiser patterns,
the cranes and load storage racking configuration,
the definition of graphics, alarms and status for other types of machines.
Please note that there is also available an HTTP interface to the Movement
Controller. This interface is available to any HTTP client (that is an
Internet browser such as Internet Explorer, Firefox, Google Chrome, Opera,
Safari, ...) by entering the URL: "http://###.###.###.###/8080", where
"###.###.###.###" is the IP address of the main computer. This manual
does not describe the use of this interface, but, once you are familiar
with the standard operator interface described here, you should not need
further help to navigate and use the HTTP interface.
Although there is no operator instructions available for the HTTP
interface, considerable technical information is available in the section
of the SOFTWARE MANUAL titled:
"HTTP (Web
or Internet) Interface".
General Instructions
This section describes the features of the Movement Controller software
common to all or several windows.
Much of the information in this section may be second nature to persons
with personal computer experience, whereas the more unique sections are
best referred to when referenced from the "Specific
Instructions" section.
Entering Information
This section describes, firstly, the way the rest of the document will
refer to the keys, then goes on to describe the general methods of entering
data via the Movement Controller software.
Typing Instructions
Throughout this manual, instructions to type a sequence of keys will be
followed by a string of characters contained within a pair of double
quotation marks or a pair of square brackets. If the quotation marks are
used the enclosed characters are to be typed in as presented.
Certain keys (or modified keys) do not correspond to characters, so the
keys are instead described within the square brackets. Examples are:
[RETURN], [ENTER], [BACKSPACE], [INSERT], [DELETE], [UP], [DOWN], [LEFT],
[RIGHT], [PAGE UP], [PAGE DOWN], [HOME], [END], [F1] to [F10], [GREY PLUS],
and [GREY MINUS].
[UP], [DOWN], [LEFT], and [RIGHT] are collectively referred to as the
cursor control keys, and are grouped together and labelled with arrows
pointing in the appropriate direction.
[HOME], [END], [PAGE UP], [PAGE DOWN], [INSERT], and [DELETE] are labelled
as described or abbreviated.
[HOME], [END], [PAGE UP], [PAGE DOWN], [INSERT], [DELETE] and the cursor
control keys are provided on the numeric key-pad, sharing real estate with
the numbers "0" to "4", "6" to "9" and the dot. The function performed by
these keys is governed by the "Num Lock" key and the "Shift" key. If the
keyboard also provides these control keys on separate keypads, it is better
to leave the "Num Lock" engaged and use the numeric key-pad to enter
numbers. In cases where you are not expected to enter numbers or text, the
keys on the numeric key-pad will be treated as though the "Num Lock" had
not been engaged.
In some instances the Movement Controller will treat the use of the cursor
keys provided with the numeric key-pad differently to those with the
separate key-pad. Where a distinction is to be made, the key name will be
preceded by the word NUMERIC or SEPARATE to refer to the key with the
numeric key-pad or separate key-pad respectively. For example, the [RIGHT]
key will be referred to as [NUMERIC RIGHT] or [SEPARATE RIGHT].
[GREY PLUS] and [GREY MINUS] are those associated with the numeric key-pad
and marked "+" and "-" respectively, and are not equivalent with similarly
marked keys on the main key-pad.
[ESCAPE] is usually marked "Esc", while [RETURN] may be labelled with the
word "Enter" or with a left arrow with a bent shaft.
[BACKSPACE] is usually marked with a left arrow and sometimes with the word
"Backspace", and is positioned at the top right hand corner of the
main key-pad, directly above the [RETURN] key.
[ENTER] is associated with the numeric key-pad and usually labelled with
the word "Enter"
[F1] to [F10] are always marked thus and are either to the left of the main
key-pad or above it. Some keyboards also offer [F11] and [F12].
[CAPS LOCK] and [NUM LOCK] are always marked thus and are toggle keys,
whose current state is shown using appropriately labelled lamps on the
keyboard, generally towards the top right.
The modifier keys are referred to herein as SHIFT, CONTROL and ALTERNATE.
To type a modified key, first press the appropriate modifier key, keeping
it down while the key to be modified is typed in the usual manner. The
SHIFT key(s) are usually labelled with an up arrow or the word "Shift".
The CONTROL and ALTERNATE keys are usually labelled with the letters "Ctrl"
and "Alt" respectively. On some keyboards with two keys marked "Alt" the
left-hand key might be the only suitable key.
Where alphabetic characters are to be entered, they should be entered from
the correct case.
Microsoft Windows Operation
If you have opted for the more DOS-like interface, much of this section
will be irrelevant. For information on configuring a user for the more
DOS-like interface and its impact, please refer to the section titled:
"Modify
List of Users".
The windows concept is intended to provide a more instinctive operator
interface. The result is that there are many ways to do most things,
making the descriptions of these much more complex. If you find this
aspect of the manual baffling, you are probably best to ignore it and
follow your instincts.
Another aspect of the windows concept is that the operator is much more in
the driver's seat, telling the system what to do rather than being led by
the system. This provides added flexibility at the cost of simplicity.
Starting the Operator Interface
Before starting the operator interface, the "main" program must be running
on the main computer and, unless you are wanting to run the operator
interface on the main computer, the "connect" program must be running on
the computer from which you wish to run the operator interface.
The "main" program is generally opened by double-clicking on the icon
corresponding to this, and sporting the title: "Woodgrove MAIN". This icon
would simply run the "main" program without any command line arguments,
from the directory (folder/library) containing the database. There are
command line arguments that can be used, and these are described in the
section of the TECHNICAL MANUAL titled:
"Command
Line Parameters".
Similarly, the "connect" program is generally opened by double-clicking on
the icon corresponding to this, and sporting the title: "Woodgrove
CONNECT". This icon would simply run the "connect" program with two
command line arguments, the IP address of the main computer and the port
number to be used (usually 129).
Once the "main" and "connect" programs are running, you may start the
operator interface. You would, generally, do this by double-clicking on
the icon corresponding to it, and sporting the title: "Woodgrove OPERATOR".
This icon would simply run the "winmain" program without any command line
arguments, from the directory (folder/library) from which "main" or
"connect" had been run. There are command line arguments that can be
used, and these are described in the section of the TECHNICAL MANUAL
titled: "Operator
Interface in Single Display Function Mode" and the section of the TECHNICAL
MANUAL titled: "Automatic
Logging On".
When the operator interface is run, it will be presented as a bar across
the top of the screen, sporting a title and, below that, a minimal meny bar
containing the single item "File" and, below that, three status panes. The
first of these will be used to present any messages that may need to be
given the operator. The next two indicate who is logged in (initially no
one, so it is left blank) and the privilege level associated with that
operator (0 to 3).
Switching Windows
Once this application has been started, you can switch between this
application and others that you might have open by a number of means
including:
Moving the mouse pointer to window title bar of another application (you
may need to first minimise this application to view other windows), then
clicking on it (or anywhere within the window),
Moving the mouse pointer to the task-bar then clicking on the button
describing the application you wish to switch to, and
Holding down the [ALTERNATE] key as you type [TAB] a number of times until
the icon, of the application to which you wish to switch, is highlighted.
As well as there being windows for alternate applications, the Movement
Controller's application window may have a number of windows open within
it. You will need to switch between these windows as well, which you can
do a number of ways, including:
Moving the mouse pointer to window title bar of another window within the
application, then clicking on it (or anywhere within the window - though
this could cause an unintended action).
Typing the function key corresponding to the window you wish to switch to.
Holding down the [CONTROL] key as you type [TAB] a number of times until
the window, to which you wish to switch, is presented in the foreground.
Holding down both the [CONTROL] and [SHIFT] keys as you type [TAB] to take
you back to the previous window.
Typing the "`" (the back apostrohe, backtick, grave, back quote key) will
switch focus to the main window, that which includes the "File" and "View"
menu items, which can not be called up when cycling through the windows
using the [CONTROL TAB] and [CONTROL SHIFT TAB] keys, but those keys can be
used, subsequently,to return focus to one of the other windows.
Window Repositioning
This is generally achieved by moving the mouse to the window title, holding
down the left mouse button and dragging the window to a new location. The
location of any main window - not dialogue windows and the like - will be
remembered for the logged in user and used next time the window is created.
Window Resizing
This is generally achieved by moving the mouse to an edge or corner of the
window, where the mouse pointer image is changed to a both ways arrow. You
are to then hold down the left mouse button and drag the edge or corner so
as to set the size you desire. The size of any main window - not dialogue
windows and the like - will be remembered for the logged in user and used
next time the window is created.
Raising, Lowering and Minimising Windows
The presentation of windows generally allows windows to overlap one
another, with the result that one will be obscured by the other. The
obscured window is the "lower" window, while the other is the "upper".
It is, generally, sufficient to click any visible part of a window to raise
it to the top.
Widgets and Drawing Areas
Items, such as windows, buttons, scroll bars, et cetera, are collectively
known as "widgets". Also numbered among the widgets is what is known as a
"drawing area". Most main windows include this widget, and present
within it a mixture of text and drawings.
Drawings and fields of text behave similarly to widgets, in that they to
can receive "focus" (indicated by a change of background colour or the
presence of a cursor), however this focus is independent of the widget
focusing, as only one widget is focused at any one time, whereas within a
single drawing area there may be a focused drawing, and associated with
that focused drawing may be several lines of text, with one of the lines
also focused.
Button Operation
There are two types of button presented by the Movement Controller. The
operating-system-painted buttons, which are rectangular (of varying sizes),
very light grey, and inscribed, and the buttons depicted using uniform
rectangular drawings on a drawing area, providing two lines of text, with
the first character enlarged.
Both sets of buttons indicate how they can be pressed using the keyboard.
In the case of the operating-system-painted buttons this is usually
explicit, whereas in the case of the button drawings, this is indicated by
the first, enlarged, character presented in the button.
Both button types can also be clicked. The operating-system-painted
buttons will depress, and will indicate that it is in operation by
remaining depressed, while the button drawings will change colour to
indicate that they are in operation.
Certain buttons (of either type) perform opposite operations depending upon
whether the [SHIFT] key is used or not. The corresponding mouse behaviour
to using the [SHIFT] key with typing, is to click the righthand button,
rather than the left, though you can also hold down the [SHIFT] key while
left-clicking the mouse to achieve the same thing. Note, though, that you
can not use right-clicking to emulate the [SHIFT] key modification of a
typed key when that key is activating a menu item rather than a button; to
emulate the [SHIFT] key modification, when clicking on a menu item, you
must to hold the [SHIFT] key while left-clicking; right-clicking does
nothing.
Throughout this manual the key strokes needed to perform certain operations
are described. There will typically be a operating-system-painted button,
inscribed with the key-stroke (and further text if required) to perform the
same function.
Scroll Bar Operation
Most main windows are capable of providing a scroll bar if sized too small
to present all the information. These scroll bars are operated by a number
of means, including:
moving the mouse to the slider in the middle of the scroll bar and holding
down the left mouse button, and dragging it either up and down or left and
right depending on whether it is a horizontal or vertical scroll bar.
moving the mouse to the area before or after the slider and clicking with
the left mouse button, to advance the slider by a window width or height as
the case may be.
moving the mouse to the arrows at either end of the scroll bar and either
clicking or holding down the left mouse button to advance the slider
towards the arrow in finer increments (usually corresponding to a line or
column).
often the vertical scroll bars may be operated using the [PAGE UP], [PAGE
DOWN], [CONTROL HOME], and [CONTROL END] keys to advance the slider up or
down a page, or to the top or bottom of the file. Often the horizontal
scroll bars may be operated using the [CONTROL PAGE UP], [CONTROL PAGE
DOWN], [HOME], and [END] keys, to advance the slider by a window width left
or right, or to the extreme left or right. However sometimes these keys
serve other purposes for the windows and so are not available for this.
Other times there may be three or more scroll bars associated with a
window, in many of these cases, there will be a horizontal and vertical
scroll bar associated with one drawing area, and another pair associated
with the second; in these cases the separate cursor and [HOME], [END], ...
keys can be used to control the scrollbars for the upper drawing area, and
those on the numeric keypad can be used to control the other scrollbars.
often the scroll bars may be operated directly or indirectly with the
cursor control keys. These keys may manipulate the position of a cursor
(or reverse video field in many cases, or a drawing background colour in
some other cases), however as the cursor is, typically, moved past the edge
of the window, the slider may be advanced by a row or column as the case
may be. If the scroll bars can not be operated by the cursor keys, due to
their use for other purposes, try holding the CONTROL key down whilst
operating the cursor keys.
if the mouse has a wheel, this can be used to operate the vertical
scrollbar for the drawing area over which the mouse is positioned. It is
not necessary to click into the drawing area. If it does not seem to
operate, check where you have the mouse positioned.
if the mouse has a wheel, this can be used to operate the horizontal
scrollbar for the drawing area over which the mouse is positioned, by
holding the [SHIFT] key down while working the wheel. It is not necessary
to click into the drawing area. If it does not seem to operate, check
where you have the mouse positioned.
Data
All information is entered into the Movement Controller by typing
characters into entry areas in dialogue windows, referred to herein as
"fields".
When the focus falls upon a field, the current value is presented in the
field shaded, indicating that the entire field's contents are "selected"
and hence any character key you type is likely to replace this existing
data.
If the field contents are not to be modified, the entry should be
terminated appropriately, without typing any characters into the field.
[TAB] may always be used to terminate the entry, however other keys may
also be used to terminate the entry, close the dialogue window, then direct
subsequent actions. Refer to the section titled:
"Set of Fields".
There is a "cursor" provided within the field with focus. This is
generally presented as a blinking vertical line between to characters
within the field. When you type characters into a field, they will
generally be entered at the cursor, moving the cursor one place to the
right. Had there been characters "selected" at the time you typed your
character, those characters would have been deleted.
If the field contents are not to be modified, the entry should be
terminated appropriately, without typing any characters into the field.
[RETURN] or [ENTER] may always be used to terminate the entry, however
other keys may also be used to direct subsequent actions. Refer to the
section titled: "Set of Fields".
If a new entry is to be made, simply type the new entry, then terminate the
entry appropriately. Refer to the section titled:
"Set of Fields".
The term "enter" is used throughout this document to imply typing in data
then terminating the entry, usually with [RETURN] or [ENTER].
If the field contents are to be erased, type [GREY MINUS].
If the old entry is to be modified, type the [GREY PLUS] or [CONTROL Z],
which moves the cursor to the end of the old entry, so that it may be
altered. Had you been editing this, the original field contents (those at
the time the field received focus) will be restored.
The interpretation of the characters typed into these fields depends on the
type of field. Subsequent sections describe this interpretation for each
of the field types. These sections are intended as references for the
subsequent sections.
Note: The window title is provided at the top of each window, and there is
a single error line provided just below the main menu bar, usually located
at the top left of the screen.
Moving the Cursor Through the Field
The [LEFT] and [RIGHT] keys may be used to move the cursor, backwards or
forwards respectively, through the field to a position where you may wish
to insert characters.
The [CONTROL LEFT] and [CONTROL RIGHT] keys may be used to move the cursor,
backwards or forwards respectively, through the field, a word at a time, to
a position where you may wish to insert characters. In this context, a
word is a contiguous sequence of alphabetic or numeric characters, all
other characters are deemed space.
The [HOME] key can be used to move to the beginning of a field, while the
[END] key can be used to move to the end of the field.
The cursor can also be placed at an artitary position in the field, by
clicking there with the mouse.
Deleting Characters from the Field
Entries can then be edited by typing [BACKSPACE], to remove the portion to
be reentered, then typing in the desired value. Each time [BACKSPACE] is
typed, it removes the character to the left of the cursor, moving the
cursor one place left unless the cursor is at the beginning of the field,
in which case, [BACKSPACE] has no effect.
After deleting the required characters, the replacement characters may be
typed in, moving the cursor one place right, unless the cursor is at the
end of the field, in which case the characters typed in have no effect.
The [CONTROL BACKSPACE] and [CONTROL DELETE] keys may be used to delete
entire words from the cursor position, backwards or forwards respectively.
Again, in this context, a word is a contiguous sequence of alphabetic or
numeric characters, all other characters are deemed space.
Select, Cut, and Paste
In modifying the field contents, you can make use of the "select, cut, and
paste" function by first selecting a portion (or all) of the contents, then
type a control character combination to either copy or cut it to the
"clipboard". The text copied to the clipboard can subsequently be
pasted into another field, or, if you so desire, another application
altogether such as an editor or word processor.
To do this, you need to, first, create a "selection". A "selection" is a
contiguous set of characters within the field, which you highlight to copy,
delete or replace.
You can create a selection area within a field in a number of ways:
position the cursor at the start of the area, and hold down the [SHIFT]
key while using any of a number of keys, to move the cursor to the end of
the area,
double clicking with the mouse on a word to create a selection field about
that word, or
position the mouse at the start of the area, and hold down the left mouse
button as you move the mouse to the end of the area,
A selection area is shown using a blue rather than a white background.
Once the "selection" has been defined (i.e. a shaded area in the entry
field exists with some or all of the field contents included), these
characters can be "copied" or "cut" to the "clipboard", or deleted.
"Copying" leaves the exisiting field contents in tact, whilst
"cutting" removes the selection from the field. In both these
cases, the characters in the selection are written to the "clipboard". The
clipboard is a system-wide location from where these characters can be
later retrieved by this or any other application. If, instead of copying
or cutting the characters, you decide to delete the characters, the
characters will be removed from the field, just as they are when cut, but
they are not copied to the clipboard, and so can not be redeemed. If you
type any regular character key while a selection is in effect, the
characters within the selection are replaced by the character typed.
To do any of these actions:
type [CONTROL C] to copy the contents of the selection area to a
clipboard, for subseqent pasting elsewhere,
type [BACKSPACE] or [DELETE] to delete the contents of the selection area,
type any regular character key to delete the contents of the selection
area and replace it with that character,
type [CONTROL X] to copy the contents of the selection area to a
clipboard, and to delete its contents from the field being edited.
To use the characters you have copied to the clipboard, position the cursor
within this field, or some other field (generally the corresponding field
for another record within the same database), at the point at which you
require the characters to be inserted. You can then type [CONTROL V] to
redeem these characters.
Name
A name field is one in which any string of characters, referred to herein
as a "name", may be entered.
If the final character of the prompt is "a", "s" or "t" then the alphabetic
characters entered will be conditionally capitalised.
If the final character is an "a" (for "all"), all alphabetic characters
will be capitalised.
If the final character is an "s" (for "sentence"), only the first
character, if alphabetic, will be capitalised.
If the final character is a "t" (for "title"), only the first character of
each word, if alphabetic, is capitalised, unless the word is a "small
word". The "small words" are defined in a database. Refer to the
section titled: "Edit
Databases", and its sub-section,
"General"
and its sub-section,
"Small
Words".
To defeat the capitalisation of the character you are about to type,
precede the typing of the character with the typing of a "`", (the open
single-quote, or acute symbol - just above the [TAB] on most keyboards).
To defeat the de-capitalisation of the first character of a "small word",
after typing the word and before typing the subsequent [SPACE], type "`".
In some contexts the name is required to be unique. In these cases, if the
name typed in includes non-blank characters and has been used already then
the message "Name already exists" will be displayed in the error line.
Character
Character fields contain a single character, being one of those presented
in the list of the prompt for the field. No other character can be entered
into these fields.
Numeric
A numeric field is one in which a value is to be entered.
Once the value has been entered, it is interpreted as a value, so the entry
is assumed to end on the first occurrence of a character that is neither a
digit nor a decimal-point.
If the value entered is not in the inclusive range indicated in the prompt,
the entry is not accepted. The expression of the lower limit indicates the
number of significant digits following the decimal-point, so any digits
entered after these will be ignored.
If there is no range specified in the prompt, the value may range from 0
and should include no decimal places.
If the final character of the prompt is "x", "o" or "b" then the entry is
to be made in hexadecimal, octal or binary notation, respectively.
If your entry begins with a "0", you will override the selection of the
base. Instead the base will be hexidecimal if the character following the
"0" is an "x", decimal if a "d", binary if a "b", or else octal.
There is just enough room in the field to type the value in the form
expected, so if you use one of these base specifiers, the field may need to
horizontally scroll as you type in extra characters.
You may also enter an arithmetic expression, using Allen-Bradley PLC ladder
opcodes. Among these are included addition, subtraction, multiplication,
division, and parentheses, "(" and ")". The usual symbols are associated
with these operations except that Allen-Bradley use "|" in place of the
more usual "/" for division, however, "/" will also be recognised in this
context as division.
Once an expression is detected, the base, as designated by the final
character of the prompt, is disregarded and all values are interpreted as
decimal, unless they have a leading zero. You may no longer use "0d" to
specify decimal, and anyway it is now redundant.
Although the only operators you are likely to use are "+", "-", "*", "/",
"(", and ")", for the record, the full list of operations, in order of
precedence are:
Negate
Symbols: ".NEG.". Result: multiplies the left hand operand (or 1 if no
such operand) by the negated value of the right hand operand. Example:
".NEG.25" returns -25.
Integer
Symbols: ".INT.". Result: multiplies the left hand operand (or 1 if no
such operand) by the truncated integer part of the right hand operand.
Example: ".INT.25.7" returns 25.
Sine
Symbols: ".SIN.". Result: multiplies the left hand operand (or 1 if no
such operand) by the trigonometric sine of the right hand operand
interpreted as a number of radians. Example: ".SIN.0.524" returns 0.5.
Cosine
Symbols: ".COS.". Result: multiplies the left hand operand (or 1 if no
such operand) by the trigonometric cosine of the right hand operand
interpreted as a number of radians. Example: ".COS.0.524" returns 0.866.
Tangent
Symbols: ".TAN.". Result: multiplies the left hand operand (or 1 if no
such operand) by the trigonometric tangent of the right hand operand
interpreted as a number of radians. Example: ".TAN.0.524" returns 0.578.
ArcSine
Symbols: ".ASN.". Result: multiplies the left hand operand (or 1 if no
such operand) by the angle, in radians, whose trigonometric sine is the
right hand operand. Example: ".ASN.0.500" returns 0.524.
ArcCosine
Symbols: ".ACS.". Result: multiplies the left hand operand (or 1 if no
such operand) by the angle, in radians, whose trigonometric cosine is the
right hand operand. Example: ".ACS.0.866" returns 0.524.
ArcTangent
Symbols: ".ATN.". Result: multiplies the left hand operand (or 1 if no
such operand) by the angle, in radians, whose trigonometric tangent is the
right hand operand. Example: ".ATN.0.578" returns 0.524.
ToDegrees
Symbols: ".DEG.". Result: multiplies the left hand operand (or 1 if no
such operand) by the angle, in radians, represented by the right hand
operand interpreted as a number of degrees. Example: ".DEG.0.524" returns
30.
ToRadians
Symbols: ".RAD.". Result: multiplies the left hand operand (or 1 if no
such operand) by the angle, in degrees, represented by the right hand
operand interpreted as a number of radians. Example: ".DEG.30" returns
0.524.
NaturalLog
Symbols: ".LN.". Result: multiplies the left hand operand (or 1 if no such
operand) by the natural logarithm (base e) of the right hand operand.
Example: ".LN.2.72" returns 1.
LogBase10
Symbols: ".LOG.". Result: multiplies the left hand operand (or 1 if no
such operand) by the base 10 logarithm of the right hand operand. Example:
".LOG.10" returns 1.
SquareRoot
Symbols: ".SQR.". Result: multiplies the left hand operand (or 1 if no
such operand) by the square root of the right hand operand. Example:
"0.5.SQR.3" returns 0.866.
RaiseToPower
Symbols: ".XPY." or "**". Result: finds the value of the left hand operand
raise to the power of the right hand operand. Example: "2**3" returns 8.
Scale
Symbols: ".SCL.". Result: multiplies the left hand operand (or 1 if no
such operand) by the first right hand operand, then divides the result by
ten thousand then subtracts the second right hand operator. Example:
"1270.SCL.500,20" returns (1270*500)/10000-20=43.5.
Multiply
Symbols: ".MUL." or "*". Result: multiplies the left hand operand (or 1 if
no such operand) by the right hand operand. Example: "1270*500" returns
635000.
Divide
Symbols: ".DIV." or "|" or "/". Result: divides the left hand operand by
the right hand operand (or by "1" if the right hand operand is "0").
Example: "635000/10000" returns 63.5.
Add
Symbols: ".ADD." or "+". Result: adds the left hand operand (or 0 if no
such operand) by the right hand operand. Example: "43.5+20" returns 63.5.
Subtract
Symbols: ".SUB." or "-". Result: subtracts the right hand operand from the
left hand operand (or 0 if no such operand). Example: "63.5-20" returns
43.5.
Complement
Symbols: ".NOT." or "~". Result: multiplies the left hand operand (or 1 if
no such operand) by the one's (bit-wise) complement of the thirty-two bit
value represented by the right hand operand. Example: "~0x55" returns
0xFFFFFFAA=a large number.
Mask
Symbol: ".AND.". Result: performs the bit-wise "and"ing if the left hand
operand with the right hand operand. Example: "0xFF.AND.0xFFFFFF55"
returns 0x55=85.
ExclusiveOr
Symbol: ".XOR.". Result: performs the bit-wise exclusive "or"ing if the
left hand operand with the right hand operand. Example:
"0xFFFFFF0B.AND.0xFFFFFF55" returns 0x5E=94.
Set
Symbol: ".OR.". Result: performs the bit-wise "or"ing if the left hand
operand with the right hand operand. Example: "0xFFFFFF0B.AND.0xFFFFFF55"
returns 0xFFFFFF5F=a large number.
LessThan
Symbols: ".LES." or "<". Result: rounds both the left and right operands
to the nearest integer, then returns "1" if the left hand operand is less
than the right or "0" otherwise. Example: "5.4<5.45" returns 0 as both
round to "5" and are therefore equal.
GreaterThan
Symbols: ".GRT." or ">". Result: rounds both the left and right operands
to the nearest integer, then returns "1" if the left hand operand is
greater than the right or "0" otherwise. Example: "6>5" returns 1.
Limit
Symbol: ".LIM.". Result: rounds the left hand operand and both right hand
operands to the nearest integer, then returns "1" if the first right hand
operand is in the inclusive range of the other operands, or if the second
right hand operand is less than the left hand operand, returns "1" if the
first right hand operand is not in the exclusive range of the other
operands. Returns "0" otherwise. Examples: "4.LIM.5,6", "4.LIM.4,6", and
"4.LIM.6,6" all return 1; "4.LIM.3,6", "4.LIM.7,6" both return 0;
"6.LIM.3,4", "6.LIM.4,4", "6.LIM.6,4", and "6.LIM.7,4" all return 1;
"6.LIM.5,4" returns 0.
MaskEqualTo
Symbol: ".MEQ.". Result: rounds the left hand operand and both right hand
operands to the nearest integer, then exclusive "or"s the left hand operand
with the second right hand operand, and "and"s this result with the first
right hand operand, then returns "1" if this result is "0" and "0"
otherwise. Example: "0x1234.MEQ.0x00F0,0x2131" returns 1;
EqualTo
Symbols: ".EQU.", "=", or "==". Result: rounds both the left and right
operands to the nearest integer, then returns "1" if the left hand operand
is equal to the right or "0" otherwise. Example: "6.3=6.2" returns 1 as
both are rounded to "6".
NotEqualTo
Symbols: ".NEQ.", "<>", or "!=". Result: rounds both the left and right
operands to the nearest integer, then returns "1" if the left hand operand
is not equal to the right or "0" otherwise. Example: "6!=7" returns 1.
GreaterThanOrEqualTo
Symbols: ".GEQ." or ">=". Result: rounds both the left and right operands
to the nearest integer, then returns "1" if the left hand operand is
greater than or equal to the right or "0" otherwise. Example: "6>=5"
returns 1.
LessThanOrEqualTo
Symbols: ".LEQ." or "<=". Result: rounds both the left and right operands
to the nearest integer, then returns "1" if the left hand operand is less
than or equal to the right or "0" otherwise. Example: "5<=6" returns 1.
Not
Symbol: "!". Result: returns "1" if the value is less than "0.5", or "0"
otherwise, so the values returned by the above boolean expressions, "1" and
"0" would be reversed. Example: "!5<=6" returns 0.
And
Symbol: "&&". Result: compares the left and right hand operands to "0.5",
and returns "1" if both are greater than or equal to this value, or "0"
otherwise. Example: "4<5&&5<=6" returns 1.
Or
Symbol: "||". Result: compares the left and right hand operands to "0.5",
and returns "1" if either is greater than or equal to this value, or "0"
otherwise. Example: "5<4&&5<=6" returns 1.
Also note that a value appearing before a left hand parenthesis, "(", will
be multiplied by the result of the parenthesised expression. For example:
25(2+3) returns 125.
When the value is entered, it is interpreted then rewritten into the field,
right-justified. The value "0" will be displayed as blank, however, to
enter this value, type "0" so as to instruct the Movement Controller not to
retain the old value.
In some contexts the value is required to be unique. In these cases, if
the value typed in is other than the lower limit and has been used already
then the message "Value already exists" will be displayed in the error
line.
Date
Date fields contain a date, expressed in the form "24-OCT-53". They may be
altered as described in the section titled:
"Data", with some
differences.
[BACKSPACE] does not remove characters, it only moves the cursor. If, by
typing [BACKSPACE], the cursor would be left adjacent to a hyphen, then the
cursor is moved an additional place left.
If, as characters are being typed, the cursor would be in the position of a
hyphen, then the cursor is moved an additional place right. When typing
the replacement characters, colons, spaces and hyphens may be used to
delimit sub-fields prior to typing the full sub-field, and all other
characters are converted to either digits or upper case letters as
appropriate.
The entry may be terminated while the cursor is in any position in the
field.
Time
Time fields contain the time and date, expressed in the form "06:30:26
24-OCT-53". They may be altered as described in the section titled:
"Data", with some
differences.
[BACKSPACE] does not remove characters, it only moves the cursor. If, by
typing [BACKSPACE], the cursor would be left adjacent to a colon, space or
hyphen, then the cursor is moved an additional place left.
If, as characters are being typed, the cursor would be in the position of a
colon, space or hyphen then the cursor is moved an additional place right.
When typing in the replacement characters, the colons, spaces, and hyphens
may be used to delimit sub-fields prior to typing the full sub-field, and
all other characters are converted to either digits or upper case letters
as appropriate.
The entry may be terminated while the cursor is in any position in the
field.
The number of seconds must be even or will be made so.
Symbolic Numeric
Symbolic numeric fields may contain only values from a previously defined
set, or else must be blank. Presentation and editing is as described for
"Numeric" fields. Refer to the section titled:
"Numeric".
An alternative method of making this entry is to select the name from the
previously defined set. To do this click the arrow at the extreme right of
the field and a drop-down (or up) menu is provided from which the desired
number may be selected. There may be a scroll bar associated with this
menu, should the database be a large one. To select a number, use the
cursor keys to highlight, or click on it with the mouse, then press [ENTER]
or double click on it with the mouse.
If an attempt is made to enter a non-existent value (no match can be found)
then either the message, "No match found for this entry", or the message,
"Unknown: If correct, confirm by pressing [SHIFT F11], - depending
upon your privilege - will be displayed in the error line.
It is expected that the values to be entered into these fields be
previously defined, however the provision to define these values at this
point is provided if you have sufficient privilege.
To do this, after typing the value and encountering the message, "Unknown:
If correct, confirm by pressing [SHIFT F11], press [SHIFT F11] This will
open a window, through which the referenced database entity will be
presented for editing. It may also be accompanied by other fields had you
been editing a "Key" field. Refer also to the section titled:
"Key".
Symbolic Name
Symbolic name fields may contain only names from a previously defined set,
or else must be blank.
As characters are removed or typed in, the set of names is scanned for a
match. The remaining characters from the first match found are displayed
from the cursor to the end of the field. Typing [DOWN] will present the
remaining characters of the next match, while typing [UP] will present the
remaining characters of the previous match.
If the name presented is the desired name, typing [RIGHT] will save typing
in the remaining characters, placing the cursor after the last character.
Alternatively, typing the [CONTROL RIGHT] will accept the remaining
characters individually, moving the cursor one place right each time.
The [UP], [DOWN], and [RIGHT] keys only serve the above functions when the
cursor is not in the left-most position. [CONTROL UP] and [CONTROL DOWN]
can be used in place of [UP] and [DOWN] when the cursor is at the left-most
position.
An alternative method of making this entry is to select the name from the
previously defined set. To do this click the arrow at the extreme right of
the field and a drop-down (or up) menu is provided from which the desired
name may be selected. There may be a scroll bar associated with this menu,
should the database be a large one. To select a name, use the cursor keys
to highlight, or click on it with the mouse, then press [ENTER] or double
click on it with the mouse.
If a non-existent name is typed in (no match can be found) then either the
message, "No match found for this entry", or the message, "Unknown: If
correct, confirm by pressing [SHIFT F11], - depending upon your privilege -
will be displayed in the error line.
It is expected that the names to be entered into these fields be previously
defined, however the provision to define these names at this point is
provided if you have sufficient privilege.
To do this, after typing the name and encountering the message, "Unknown:
If correct, confirm by pressing [SHIFT F11], press [SHIFT F11] This will
open a window, through which the referenced database entity will be
presented for editing. It may also be accompanied by other fields if you
had been editing a "Key" field. Refer to the section titled:
"Key".
Where
This presentation is used when entering an expression to restrict the
presentation of database records. For more details on viewing database
records and restricting this view with an expression, please refer to the
section titled: "Viewing Data" and its
subsection "Records
Satisfying an Expression".
Generally, the editing of these fields is as described earlier in the
section titled: "Data", with
some differences.
Note that, generally, any spaces entered will be ignored.
Some characters entered into this field have special significance as
regards the editing.
The "[" and "]" delimit the database names. The database names are listed
as "Database name for "Where"" in the "Database Privilege" database. This
field is described in the section titled
"Database
Privilege". Within the "[" and "]" characters the characters typed are
treated as a symbolic reference to this field, and so the editing is as
described in the previous section,
"Symbolic
Name". Also, when you type "[", the "]" will also be entered ahead of the
cursor, and when you type "]", instead of entering another "]", the cursor
will be moved ahead of the next "]". If you use [BACKSPACE] to delete the
final "]", all text from the preceeding "[" up to and including the "]"
will be removed, while using [DELETE] to remove the "[", will also remove
all text from the "[" up to and including the following "]". As text is
typed between the brackets, the case will be adjusted to match a database
name.
The double quotation marks (") delimit the text strings. Normally, any
spaces entered into this field will be ignored, except when between a pair
of double quotation marks. Also, when you type a double quotation mark, a
second will also be entered ahead of the cursor, and when you type a double
quotation mark from within a pair, instead of entering another double
quotation mark, the cursor will be moved ahead of the next double quotation
mark. If you use [BACKSPACE] to delete the final double quotation mark,
all text from the preceeding double quotation mark up to and including that
double quotation mark will be removed, while using [DELETE] to remove the
first double quotation mark, will also remove all text between and
including the double quotation mark.
The dots ("."), when not within the specification of a number, can delimit
operator names. When you type a dot, a second will also be entered ahead
of the cursor, and when you type a dot from within a pair, instead of
entering another dot, the cursor will be moved ahead of the next dot. All
text between the pairs of dots will be capitalised. If you preceed a dot
with a number, it will be treated as a decimal point, however, if this is,
then followed by a letter, then the second dot will be entered ahead of the
letter that you typed.
The parentheses ("(" and ")") are used to override the normal order of
operations. When you type "(", the ")" will also be entered ahead of the
cursor, and when you type ")", instead of entering another ")", the cursor
will be moved ahead of the next ")". If you use [BACKSPACE] to delete the
final ")", the preceeding "(" will also be removed, while using [DELETE] to
remove the "(", will also remove the following ")".
Also note that when the field is entered, it will be converted to a binary
expression that is incomprehensible. This binary expression may be
presented briefly as the entry is made; please ignore this if you notice
it.
Current Time
Current time fields present the current time and date, and by editing these
fields the current time and date may be adjusted.
Presentation and editing is as described for "Time" fields. Refer to the
section titled: "Time".
Password
Password fields are used to enter or set the passwords.
Presentation and editing is as described for "Name" fields except that when
editing the password, the characters are echoed using spaces. Refer to the
section titled: "Name".
Screen Editing
These fields appear as "Name" fields. However as an attempt is made to
edit the field, a window is opened in the current window through which a
number lines are displayed.
The first line corresponds to the database field initially presented, while
the additional lines present the corresponding records from the subsequent
database fields.
These lines may be edited using the cursor control keys and [RETURN],
[ENTER], [BACKSPACE], [DELETE], [HOME], and [END] to provide their natural
function, and using the character keys in insert mode. [RETURN] and [ENTER]
provide for a carriage return and line feed but do not insert a blank line.
The cursor may be moved by clicking on the point to which it is to be
moved.
Memo
These fields appear as "Name"
fields. However as an attempt is made to edit the field, a window is
opened through which a number lines are displayed.
The first line corresponds to the database field initially presented, while
the additional lines present the remainder of the contents of a file.
The file name is comprised of three digits representing the database field
number, followed by five digits representing the record number, followed by
the file name extension ".MEM". For example, the filename corresponding to
record 1 of database field number 73 would be "07300001.MEM". Please note
that these files are outside the database and are therefore not backed up
with the database; you will need to care for these explicitly.
The database field number is the option number given on the menu presented
by the Edit Databases screen after selecting the final option from the
first menu presented by this screen. Refer to the section titled:
"Edit
Databases".
A special feature of these fields, is that, when you perform a "Match"
(refer to the section titled: "Viewing
Data"), not only is the database searched, but also the entire contents
of the associated file. This is could prove to be quite a powerful
feature, but may also become slow as the number of files to be searched
grows.
When you start to edit the file, it is loaded into the editor's memory and
any edits you make are applied to this memory - not to the file itself.
When you exit the editor, these changes will be written to the file, and
the first line to the database field.
The format of this file is simple ASCII, except that new-lines (carriage
returns and line feeds) are reserved for terminating a paragraph, so the
lines are, typically, very long.
Key Assignments
The editor allows you to allocate upto three keys to each function and
supports two modes of "select, cut and paste" in an attempt to allow the
editor to be configured to roughly mimic your usual editor.
This section describes the method to display and set these assignments.
While this may seem a rather esoteric point to embark on the description of
the editor, we begin here so that you will be able to configure the editor
to best match your previous experience, thereby reducing the level of
learning required to use it.
If you press [F1], you will be presented with a list of the key
assignments.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Edit boolean file
Enter 1c0d e00d Copy 4e2b
Up 4800 48e0 Cut 4a2d
Down 5000 50e0 Paste 5230
Left 4b00 4be0 Skip word forward 7400 74e0
Right 4d00 4de0 Skip word backward 7300 73e0
Page Up 4900 49e0 Learn 2600 4100
Page Down 5100 51e0 Terminate 1400
Beg Line/Screen/File 4700 47e0 Execute 2d00 4200
End Line/Screen/File 4f00 4fe0 Repeat 1300
Insert Overstrike 5200 52e0 Quit 1000 11b
Delete This Char 5300 53e0 Edit Macro File 1200
Delete Previous Char e08 Set Up Keys 1f00 3b00
Delete To End Line 2500 Find 3f00 2100
Delete Entire Line 2000 1519 Find Next 5900 3100
Select 532e Find and Replace 4000
Select Up 4838 Edit Address Comment 1e00
Select Down 5032
Select Left 4b34
Select Right 4d36
Select Page Up 4939
Select Page Down 5133
Editing POCOLDMEine 1 Column 1 Insert
This displays the key assignments in two columns. Each line of each column
corresponds to one key function. For each key function, the name of the
function and the scan codes of upto three keys are displayed. The three
scan codes are displayed in three columns, with one scan code highlighted.
On the right of the fourth bottom line on the window, the scan code
highlighted is explained. In the above case, the highlighted scan code is
1c0d, with the text "Return" displayed in the lower right area of the
window.
The cursor can be moved to each scan code position to present its
translation or to change the key for the function.
If you are calling up this window for help rather than to alter the key
assignments, you can have presented, next to each function description, one
of the key descriptions for the function. The key description presented
will be dependent upon which column the highlighted scan code is in. To
call this up, type [F1] again.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Edit boolean file
Enter Return Copy Grey Plus
Up 8/Up Cut Grey Minus
Down 2/Down Paste SHIFT 0/Insert
Left 4/Left Skip Word Forward CONTROL 6/Right
Right 6/Right Skip Word Backward CONTROL 4/Left
Page Up 9/Page Up Learn ALTERN' L
Page Down 3/Page DownTerminate ALTERN' T
Beg Line/Screen/File 7/Home Execute ALTERN' X
End Line/Screen/File 1/End Repeat ALTERN' R
Insert Overstrike 0/Insert Quit ALTERN' Q
Delete This Char ./Delete Edit Macro File ALTERN' E
Delete Previous Char BackSpace Set Up Keys ALTERN' S
Delete To End Line ALTERN' K Find F5
Delete Entire Line ALTERN' D Find Next SHIFT F6
Select SHIFT ./Delete Find and Replace F6
Select Up SHIFT 8/Up Edit Address Comment ALTERN' A
Select Down SHIFT 2/Down
Select Left SHIFT 4/Left
Select Right SHIFT 6/Right
Select Page Up SHIFT 9/Page Up
Select Page Down SHIFT 3/Page Down
Editing POCOLDMEine 1 Column 1 Insert
To change the key assignment for a given function, move the highlight to
the function, and across to the required scan code column, then type
[ENTER], then type the key you wish to use for this function (or [SPACE] if
you change your mind about wanting to change the key assignment).
Once you have finished interrogating or changing the key assignments, type
[ESCAPE] to return to editing you file.
This function is the "Set Up Keys" function, which, according to the above
screen dump, can be called up by typing [ALTERNATE S], whereas this section
has instructed you to type the [F1] key to call up this function. You will
notice on the previous window that two scan codes were presented for this
function, 1f00 and 3b00. These scan codes correspond to [ALTERNATE S] and
[F1] respectively.
Because of the flexibility of this editor, instructions for using it
throughout the rest of the sections of the document will refer to the keys
by their function.
Basic Editing
Most keys, when typed, result in their associated ASCII character being
added to the file's buffer and the appropriate character being displayed on
the window at the cursor position, moving the cursor one place to the
right.
Cursor Movement
The cursor may be moved about the window using the specified keys for the
"Up", "Down", "Left" and "Right" functions, in the natural manner.
Pressing any of the keys specified for the "Enter" function, will move the
cursor to the start of the next line, possibly scrolling the window
upwards.
The cursor may be moved to the beginning or end of the current line by
typing a key specified for "Beg Line/Screen/File" or "End Line/Screen/File"
function respectively when not at the beginning or end of the line
respectively.
The cursor may be moved to the beginning or end of the window by typing a
key specified for the "Beg Line/Screen/File" or "End Line/Screen/File"
function respectively when at the beginning or end of the line respectively
but not at the beginning or end of the window respectively.
The cursor may be moved to the beginning of the current string of
characters (or if already there to the beginning of the previous string) by
typing a key specified for the "Skip Word Backward".
The cursor may be moved to the beginning of the next string of characters
by typing a key specified for the "Skip Word Forward".
Screen Movement
The window displays only a portion of the file. The window can be made to
view other portions of the file by typing any of the keys specified for the
"Page Up" and "Page Down" functions to move the window a numner of
lines up or down the file.
The window may be moved to the beginning or end of the file by typing a key
specified for "Beg Line/Screen/File" or "End Line/Screen/File" function
respectively when at the beginning of the first line on the window or at
the end of the last line on the window respectively.
Find
A further means of cursor and window movement may be achieved using the
find functions.
After typing any of the keys for the "Find" function, you will be prompted
to enter the text you wish to find. When you terminate this entry, an
attempt will be made to find the specified text.
The search is conducted from the cursor position to the end of the file.
In matching the text to the file, the case of letters is ignored.
If the text is not found, a message to this effect will be presented, which
you will be required to acknowledge by typing any key.
Had the text been found, the cursor and window will be relocated within the
file to this text.
Once the text has been searched for once, a further search may be initiated
by typing one of the keys for the "Find Next" function.
Find and Replace
You can ask the editor to replace one, several or all occurrences of a
specified text string with another by typing one of the keys for the "Find
and Replace" function.
In response, you will be prompted to enter the text you wish to find and
then the text you wish to replace it with. When you terminate the second
entry (the replacement text), an attempt will be made to find the first
specified text.
The search is conducted from the cursor position to the end of the file.
In matching the text to the file, the case of letters is ignored.
As each occurrence is found, the text will be highlighted and the prompt,
"Replace/No/Global <R/N/G>", will be presented. Enter "R" to replace
the highlighted text, "N" to skip to the next occurrence or "G" to replace
this and all subsequent occurrences. Alternatively you can quit from the
replace cycle by typing [ESCAPE].
Insert or Overtype Mode
Normally as characters are being typed and the cursor is moving to the
right, the text previously at the cursor position is advanced with the
cursor, inserting the new characters between it and the character that was
previously to the left of the cursor.
Also, when typing one of the keys for the "Enter" function, before the
cursor is relocated to the beginning of the next line, the lines below the
cursor are moved down by one line and any characters to the right of the
cursor will be relocated to the start of the new line.
In overtype mode, the character at the cursor position is replaced by the
new character entered. The cursor still moves one place to the right.
Also, when typing one of the keys for the "Enter" function, only the cursor
is relocated; all the text remains where it is.
This mode is toggled between insert and overtype each time one of the keys
corresponding to the "Insert Overtype" function is typed. The current mode
is displayed just left of the centre of the third last line on the window.
Deleting Text
The character at the cursor may be deleted by typing one of the keys for
the "Delete This Char" function. The cursor will be unmoved, and any text
to the right of the cursor will be moved one place left.
The character to the left of the cursor may be deleted by typing one of the
keys for the "Delete Previous Char" function. The cursor will be moved to
the left, and any text at or to the right of the cursor will be moved one
place left.
The remainder of the line, from the character the cursor is at to the end
of the line, may be deleted by typing one of the keys for the "Delete To
End Line" function. The cursor will be unmoved.
The line the cursor is on may be deleted by typing one of the keys for the
"Delete Entire Line" function. The cursor will be unmoved, and any
lines below the cursor will be moved up by one line.
Select, Cut and Paste
There are two methods of "Select, Cut and Paste" employed. Using the first
method, you explicitly flag the beginning of the selection, using one of
the keys for the "Select" function, then move the cursor/window to the
point in the file at which you wish to end the selection. Refer the
sections titled:
"Cursor
Movement", "Screen
Movement", and "Find".
You can then either delete the selection (by typing one of the keys for the
"Delete This Char" function), copy it to the "paste" buffer (by typing
one of the keys for the "Copy" function), or cut it - copy it then delete
it - to the "paste" buffer (by typing one of the keys for the "Cut"
function).
Using this first method, you can cancel a selection by again typing one of
the keys for the "Select" function.
Using the second method, you flag the beginning of the selection the first
time you type a key corresponding to one of the following "Select and Move"
functions to extend or reduce the selection:
Select Up
moves the end of the selection up by one line
Select Down
moves the end of the selection down by one line
Select Left
moves the end of the selection left by one character
Select Right
moves the end of the selection right by one character
Select Page Up
moves the end of the selection up by twenty-two lines
Select Page Down
moves the end of the selection down by twenty-two lines
The selection can then be deleted, copied or cut as described for the first
method.
Using this second method, you can cancel a selection by typing one of the
keys for the "Cursor Movement" or "Screen Movement" functions. Refer the
sections titled:
"Cursor
Movement", and "Screen
Movement".
When using either method, the text within the selection will be
highlighted.
After copying or cutting a selection to the "paste" buffer, you would
normally move the cursor to another point in the file, then insert the
copied or cut text at this point by typing one of the keys for the "Paste"
function.
Key Sequence Macros - Learning
Sometimes it is necessary to repeat a given sequence of key strokes an
inordinate number of times when editing a file. To alleviate this, the
editor may be instructed to remember these key strokes and to play them
back time and time again.
To start the recording of key strokes, type one of the keys for the "Learn"
function. Then proceed to type the keys you wish recorded; as you do this
the keys will be treated normally, resulting in the expected changes to the
file and window.
During this phase, the text "Learning" will be displayed alongside the
"Insert" or "Overstrike" text in the third bottom line of the window.
Once you have completed the sequence of key strokes, type one of the keys
for the "Terminate" function.
You should take particular care of how you start and end the sequence,
especially if you wish it to be executed a number of times in succession.
To replay this sequence, type one of the keys for the "Execute" function.
The sequence can be terminated and executed immediately by typing one of
the keys for the "Execute" function in place of typing one of the keys for
the "Terminate" function.
During the execution of the sequence, the text "Executing" will be
displayed alongside the "Insert" or "Overstrike" text in the third bottom
line of the window.
Repeating Key Strokes and Macros
The editor may be instructed to repeat any key stroke a given number of
times by first typing one of the keys for the "Repeat" function, then
entering the number of times the key stroke is to be repeated, then typing
the key to be repeated.
The key to be repeated may be one of the keys for the "Execute" function,
allowing you to execute the key-sequence macro a given number of times.
During the execution of the repeated key strokes, the number of iterations
remaining is displayed further to the right of the "Insert" or "Overstrike"
text than the "Learning" or "Executing" text on the third bottom line of
the window.
Exiting from the Editor
To leave the editor, type one of the keys for the "Quit" function. Any
changes you have made will be written to both the file and the database.
Attribute
Attribute fields are used to alter the video attributes. They consist of
two hexadecimal digits, the first for the background and the second for the
foreground. If you enter a single digit it is assumed to be the foreground
and will be presented in the second digit position.
Presentation and editing is as described for "Numeric" fields except that
as the value is altered the associated attribute name is also presented in
the attribute typed in and the two hexadecimal digits may be altered by
positioning the cursor to the right of the digit in question and using the
[UP] and [DOWN] keys to raise or lower its value. Refer to the section
titled: "Numeric".
Attribute fields are used to alter the video attributes, used by the GUI
operator interface program when presenting database quantities. They
consist of two values, a foreground value and a background value, presented
as the foreground colour name, followed by "on" then the background colour
name, such as "Black on Red".
As characters are removed or typed in, the list of "Palette descriptions"
is scanned for a match. The remaining characters from the first match
found are displayed from the cursor to the end of the field. Typing [DOWN]
will present the remaining characters of the next match, while typing [UP]
will present the remaining characters of the previous match.
If the name presented is the desired name, typing [RIGHT] will accept one
more of the offered characters, moving the cursor one place right.
If non-matching characters are typed, they will be ignored.
Once sufficient characters have been typed to uniquely identify the colour,
the cursor will be advanced to the beginning of the next sub-field (the
background colour) or to the end of the field.
Miscellaneous Data
The miscellaneous data may be edited either as a numeric or a character
field (as indicated by the presented prompt). Refer to the sections
titled: "Numeric", and
"Character".
It may be noted that the prompt presented for the "Miscellaneous Data" is
not the prompt associated with that database field but instead the data
from the corresponding record of the "Miscellaneous Name" database field.
If this does not mean anything to you, let it pass.
When these fields are presented, specific records will present their data
in a more explicit fashion.
Baud Rates
The baud rates for the various communications channels are presented and
edited as "Symbolic Name" fields, except that the predefined set of names
varies with the channel being described and the use of the channel. Refer
to the section titled:
"Symbolic
Name".
If the channel is an asynchronous serial communications channel, the usual
set of baud rates are used, however, if the channel is on the Allen-Bradley
KTxD card, is set of baud rates is either that for the scanner mode, or the
DH-485 mode depending upon which mode is selected for the channel.
Store Reference
The store reference fields are used to reference a location in the store.
References are expressed in the form "WW:RR-H-LLL-D" (example:
"42:16-A-027-1"), where the first two characters ("WW") represent the
warehouse (either 41 or 42) and is redundant with the rack, which consists
of the first two characters ("RR") following the colon. If the warehouse
is "41", the rack must be in the range "05" to "10", otherwise the
warehouse must be "42", and the rack must be in the range "11" to "16".
Rack "05" is the left hand side of crane "6", rack "06" is the right hand
side of crane "6", rack "07" is the left hand side of crane "5", and so on
to rack "16", which is the right hand side of crane "1".
This is probably presented more clearly in the following table:
The next character is always a hyphen, followed by a letter representing
the hoist level ("H"), which uses "A" for level 1 to "H" for level 8, then
"J" for level 9 to "M" for level 12. This is followed again by a
hyphen. The next three characters ("LLL") represent the long travel
position, the next character is always a hyphen and the final character
("D") represents the depth ("1" for the location near the crane,
"2" for the location further from the crane).
These fields may be altered as described in the section titled:
"Data", with some
differences.
[BACKSPACE] does not remove characters, it only moves the cursor. If, by
typing [BACKSPACE], the cursor would be left adjacent to a character that
can not contain an alternate value, then the cursor is moved an additional
place left.
If, as characters are being typed, the cursor would be in a position that
can contain only one possible character then the cursor is moved an
additional place right. When typing in the replacement characters, a
colon, hyphen, space or period is ignored unless typed within the long
travel specification where it delimits the long travel prior to typing all
three digits.
The entry may be terminated while the cursor is in any position in the
field.
When the store reference is entered, certain checks are performed.
If the warehouse number is other than 41 or 42, the following message will
be produced: "WW Warehouse number out of range".
If the rack number is outside the range 5 to 16, the following message will
be produced: "RR Rack number out of range".
If the warehouse and rack numbers are contradictory, the following message
will be produced: "WW:RR Warehouse and rack numbers inconsistent".
If the hoist level is other than "A" to "H" and "J" to "M", the following
message will be produced: "H Hoist out of range".
If the long travel position is outside the range 1 to 70, the following
message will be produced: "LLL Long travel out of range".
If the depth is other than "1" or "2", the following message will be
produced: "D Depth out of range".
Crane and Palletiser Alarms
The crane alarm and palletiser alarm fields list, by number, the cranes or
palletisers that currently share the corresponding alarm. This field
appears as a sequence of digits.
These digits may be entered in any sequence, however they will be displayed
in increasing order (from the left), with spaces in place of the missing
digits.
These fields may be altered as described in the section titled:
"Data".
Load Detection Indices
The load detection indices are used to tie a store location to a load
detection system bit. These indices represent the bit index from the start
of the table of photocells or switches.
The start of these tables has been hard coded within the Movement
Controller and removes the discontinuity between the photocell sub-tables
for the main and remote systems.
The indices are expressed in hexadecimal to assist correlation with the
load detection system.
These indices are expressed in the form "L:02A8" or "S:0003" depending
whether the index is referencing the photocell or switch table
respectively.
These fields may be altered as described in the section titled:
"Data".
Photocell Arrangement
The photocell arrangement specifies that, for the given Heavy-Unit-Load
Conveyor position, which of the six standard photocells (clear, stop and
slow in the forward and reverse directions) are to be physically present on
the conveyor position in question.
For background on this, please refer to the section titled:
"System Definition".
Normally, during the generation of the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor PLC
software, the photocell arrangement is established from knowledge of the
transfers that need to be supported. This arrangement is presented in the
".ain" file, which is generated at that stage. In cases where the
photocell arrangement is already set, or where peculiar transfers are
required, you can nominate which photocells are available. The transfer
macros will pay attention to this arrangement, and will make the most of it
that it can, even though it may not be the ideal arrangement.
There are six "sub-fields" within this field. Each "sub-field" occupies
four or five character positions, displaying "----" or "-----" to imply
that there is no photocell at the corresponding location, and "Clear",
"Stop", or "Slow" to imply that there is a photocell.
The first three sub-fields correspond to the "Clear", "Stop" and "Slow"
photocells at the rear of the conveyor, and are separated from the second
three (which represent the "Slow", "Stop" and "Clear" photocells at the
front) by ">>>>>". The first and last sub-fields represent the "Clear"
photocells, the second and second last represent the "Stop" photocells,
while the third and third last (fourth) represent the "Slow" photocells.
Each field is set with a single character keystroke, which then advances
the cursor to the start of the next sub-field. The keys "O", "0", "-",
"_", and "N" sets the sub-field to dashes, while any other
character key will set it to "Clear", "Stop", or "Slow" depending upon the
sub-field in question.
In other respects, presentation and editing is as described for "Name"
fields, except that the cursor will always be advaanced or backed up to a
position corresponding to the start of a sub-field. Please refer to the
section titled: "Name".
Fault Assistance
This field is presented as a single line, however, as you begin to edit it,
a window will be opened, presenting a number of lines. These lines may be
edited using the cursor control keys and [RETURN], [ENTER], [BACKSPACE],
[DELETE], [HOME], and [END] to provide their natural function, and using
the character keys in insert mode. [RETURN] and [ENTER] provide for a
carriage return and line feed but do not insert a blank line.
When finished reading or modifying, type [ESCAPE] and the window will be
closed, returning you to the database you had been editing.
Destination
The destination fields are either store reference fields or a symbolic name
field referencing the conveyor names as the "previously defined" set of
names. The first character entered determines which type of field editing
will be invoked.
When defining the devices to be implemented on the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor
System, a number of inputs can be grouped together to select a graphic
image to reflect the implied condition. This group of inputs can be
represented by a number of such images, depending upon which "condition"
their state currently reflects.
For example, if three inputs are so grouped, there might be five conditions
defined to reflect their various possible states:
The valid characters for entry into the "condition" field are "0", "1" and
"X". If the "condition" bit corresponding to an input must either
match it or be "X" for it to match. If the "condition" matches all inputs,
the corresponding graphic image will be displayed.
Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor Device Character
When a device's condition is presented on the system overview, it is
represented by a non-standard eight-by-sixteen bit character in the colour
of your choice. These fields may be altered as described in the section
titled: "Screen
Editing", with some differences.
You can only enter a space or a block or an "X" in any one position to
indicate that the pixel is to be on or off, or irrelevant. By typing a
space or zero, you will effectively type a space, whilst any other regular
character typed (say a one) will be interpreted as a block.
Additional features include:
"F"
the image will be flipped upside down.
"R"
the image will be rotated 180 degrees.
"U"
the upper half of the image will be rotated by 90 degrees.
"C"
the centre half of the image will be rotated by 90 degrees.
"L"
the lower half of the image will be rotated by 90 degrees.
The state of a bit (space or block) can be toggled by double clicking on
it.
Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor Device I/O Comments
When defining device types for the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System, three
of the five lines of the Allen-Bradley address comment may be specified
generically, by typing this into a field containing three ten-character
sub-fields.
These fields may be altered as described in the section titled:
"Screen
Editing".
The remaining two fields are used for the device specific symbol and
description.
Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor Device Pause Need
When defining device types for the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System, you may
wish to indicate that loads are to stop at the corresponding conveyor
position.
When this field is presented, so is the following legend:
1: Load to pause at specified conveyor only
2: Also to pause at R/F in specified position
3: Also to pause at R/F on specified conveyor
By entering a "1", the load will only pause when it reaches the conveyor
position for which the device is defined; bear in mind that a load on a
rise-fall at this position is not in that conveyor position.
If you wish to also pause loads on the rise-fall at this position, you
should enter "2", while, if you wish to pause loads on any rise-fall along
the length of this conveyor, you should enter "3".
You would want to pause a load if you need to give the device, such as an
alignment bar, a chance to operate.
Turn Peg Pattern
The turn peg pattern specifies for a particular row of a particular layer
of a particular pattern, how many cartons are included and which cartons
should be turned. The format of this entry is the number of cartons,
followed by a sequence of "T"s and/or underscores signifying whether the
cartons are turned or not.
For example, the entry, "3TT_", would signify that there are three cartons
in the row in question and that the first two should be turned.
When interpreting your entry, "T", "t", "1", "L", and "l" are all
interpreted as "T", while any other character is interpreted as an
underscore.
These fields may be altered as described in the section titled:
"Data".
Layer Arrangement
The layer arrangement specifies that for the given product, certain layers
are not to comply with the odd/even layer pattern sequencing. This is a
thirty-two bit value, allowing for pallet loads with up to thirty-two
layers to be catered for.
Normally the entry would be "OEOEOEOEOEOEOEOEOEOEOEOEOEOEOEOE". The first
character corresponds to the first (bottom) layer, indicating - by the "O"
that it is to use the odd layer pattern, while the next layer will use the
even layer pattern and so on.
Presentation and editing is as described for "Name" fields, refer to the
section titled: "Name".
If your entry does not contain thirty-two characters, the entry is
interpreted as representing the start of the string; the remainder of the
string is taken from the default shown above.
For example, if you were to simply enter "E", the result would be
"EEOEOEOEOEOEOEOEOEOEOEOEOEOEOEOE". This implies that the first two
rows will be the same (column stacked), while the remainder will alternate.
You are expected to enter a sequence of "E"s and "O"s, however, if you type
other characters, a "1", an "L" and an "I" are translated to an "E",
anything with an ASCII code less than or equal to a space will cause the
remainder of the string to be ignored, while any other character will be
translated to an "O".
Phone Number
When entering a customer's phone number, the software references the town
specified for this customer and from this references the town's STD code
and the state specified for the town and from this references the country
specified for the state and from this references the ISD code specified for
this country.
The software also references the ISD and STD access codes.
Armed with this information, the software assists and supervises your entry
of the phone number. If you do not commence your entry with the ISD nor
STD access codes, the software will provide the appropriate access and area
codes, placing these ahead of your entry.
When you enter the phone number, the software checks it, and warns you if
it does not agree with this information; you will be able to make the entry
in spite of this warning by typing [F1] to confirm that the number is
correct.
Post Code and Post Code Mask
When entering a town's post code, the software references the state
specified for this town and from this references the country specified for
the state and from this references the post code mask specified for this
country.
The software uses this mask to control and interpret your entry. The mask
may appear similar to:
###-###
This implies that you should enter three digits (in place of the
cross-hatches) followed by a hyphen followed by another three digits.
In general you can enter any digit in a post code position corresponding to
a cross-hatch ("#") in the post code mask, any letter in the position
corresponding to a commercial-at ("@") and either a digit or a letter in
the position corresponding to an asterisk ("*"). In any other position,
the character specified in the mask must appear in the corresponding
position in the post code.
[BACKSPACE] does not remove characters, it only moves the cursor. If, by
typing [BACKSPACE], the cursor would be left in a position corresponding to
a character in the mask other than a cross-hatch, commercial-at or
asterisk, then the cursor is moved an additional place left.
If, as characters are being typed, the cursor would be in a position
corresponding to a character in the mask other than a cross-hatch,
commercial-at or asterisk then the cursor is moved an additional place
right.
The entry may be terminated while the cursor is in any position in the
field.
Pick Area Reference
The pick area reference fields are used to reference a pick area.
References are expressed in the form "31:AA01", where the first two
characters represent the zone to which the pick area belongs, the colon
(':') delimits these from the remaining characters that uniquely identify
the pick area within this zone.
These fields may be altered as described in the section titled:
"Data", with some
differences.
[BACKSPACE] does not remove characters, it only moves the cursor. If, by
typing [BACKSPACE], the cursor would be left adjacent to a colon, then the
cursor is moved an additional place left.
If, as characters are being typed, the cursor would be in a position of the
colon then the cursor is moved an additional place right. When typing in
the replacement characters, a colon delimits the zone name prior to typing
both digits.
The entry may be terminated while the cursor is in any position in the
field.
Pick Area Type Division's Address Offset
Each division within each pick area type must be given a unique address
offset within that type.
The address offset consists of two numbers, separated by a period
(full-stop, dot or "."). The first, we will call the wire number and the
second, the station number.
Your entry should consist of two digits (the wire number), followed by a
period (full-stop, dot or ".") then another two digits (the station
number).
The address offset may be edited as a numeric field. Refer to the section
titled: "Numeric".
Pick Area Address Patches
When defining the addresses of the pick area divisions using the harness
wiring concept, you will need to specify links between the "wires" at the
end of a chain of adjacent pick areas.
When defining the descriptions for the bytes and bits within the
pick-to-light unit's microprocessor memory, the reference for the byte or
bit is specified by two hexadecimal digits, followed (if referring to a
bit) by a slash ('/') and an octal digit specifying the bit number.
Presentation and editing is as described for "Name" fields, refer to the
section titled: "Name".
Compartment References
To reference, via the database, a compartment within a pick area, you will
need to enter a series of up to 12 ones and zeros. As there is higher
level software that provides you more natural access to these areas, you
will not normally need to enter this reference.
When a pick area is divided into compartments, it is first divided into two
compartments by the first division, then these may be divided in turn in
two compartments by further divisions.
Should you need to enter the compartment reference, each digit you type
indicates which side of the divisions the compartment lies. The first
digit refers to the first division made, the second to the first division
within the compartment selected by the first digit, and so on.
The above represents a pick area, first divided vertically, then both the
left and right resulting compartments are divided horizontally then finally
the lower right hand resulting compartment is divided vertically. The
references to these compartments are shown within the compartments.
Pick Compartment Length and Width
These are entered as numeric fields, however as you enter these values, the
software checks that the length is greater than the width before accepting
you entries.
Response Codes
The response codes sent to the host_computer are single ASCII characters.
There are two sets of response codes, those used in the response messages
to the hosts relocation requests and those used in the completion messages.
Unless the record is a response message, the response code will be
interpreted as if it is a completion message.
The response code may be entered as a number in the range 0 to 255, or as
an ASCII character prefixed by an apostrophe. For example, the entries
"65" and "'A" are equivalent.
When the response code is presented, if the value in the field matches a
valid character in the appropriate set of response codes, the field will
appear as the ASCII character, enclosed in apostrophes, and followed by
text explaining its significance. For example, entries "65" or "'A" for
completion response codes will be presented as "'A' Failed sizing ".
If no match can be found, the numeric value will be displayed.
These fields may be altered as described in the section titled:
"Data".
TCP-IP Host
The TCP-IP host consists of four numbers separated by three periods (".").
Each must be in the range 0 to 255. Bearing these restrictions and the two
additional periods in mind, the value may be entered as described in the
section titled: "Numeric".
TCP-IP Port
The TCP-IP port consists of two numbers separated by a comma. Each must be
in the range 0 to 255. Bearing these restrictions in mind, the value may
be entered as described in the section titled:
"Numeric".
Key
Certain fields, usually "Symbolic Name" fields and "Symbolic Numeric"
fields, may reference a database (or "set of fields"). When the value/name
has been entered into these fields, the data associated with this
value/name is presented in a "Set of Fields" below the field. Refer to the
sections titled: "Set of Fields",
"Symbolic
Name", and "Symbolic
Numeric".
This database will be displayed in the "Underline" attribute. When editing
a "Key" field, the referenced database may be edited by typing [SHIFT F11].
In response, the referenced database fields will be recoloured in the usual
attributes, and may be edited. Refer to the section titled:
"Set of Fields". For an
understanding of the use of attributes, refer to the section titled:
"Screen
Attributes".
In several of these instances, the "Key" field is symbolic of the first
field in the referenced database, so both will appear similar and may be
presented at the same window position. In this instance, when [SHIFT
F11]is typed, the cursor will appear to be merely repositioned in the same
field.
Set of Fields
A set of fields is a dialogue box that contains a number of pairs of
prompts and editing fields arranged one beneath the other.
A set of fields will normally present the contents of a database record;
that is, values from a given record number within a number of "Databases"
that have been associated together in a "Record Set". The database
concepts are described in the section of the SOFTWARE MANUAL titled:
"Database
Structure".
The [TAB] and [SHIFT TAB] keys enable the cursor to be moved to next or
previous field. As you leave a field, using the [TAB] or [SHIFT TAB], any
changes to the field contents are written away. Had you made no change,
then you will not alter the field; changes made to this field by the
software or other people editing it after you have entered the field will
not be affected by your editing of this field unless you had made a change.
Also, when you move into an editing field, its contents are refreshed from
the database.
The [ENTER] key is used to close the set of fields dialogue box. Had you
been within an editing field at the time, any editing changes you made to
that field will be written to the database. [ENTER] is equivalent to
clicking (with the mouse) the first of the buttons provided with this
dialogue box.
Menus
There are three types of menus used throughout the software. These are the
horizontal menu bar, the drop-down menu that appears upon selection of an
option from the horizontal menu bar, and the third type, the drop-down
drawing area menu that presents its options, commonly with a scroll bar.
Selections may be made from all menus by clicking with the left mouse
button on the desired option, however the drop-down drawing area menu
requires a double click, or a single click to highlight the option and a
subsequent pressing of [RETURN] or [ENTER].
Selections may also be made from a horizontal menu bar by typing the
underlined first letter, or the key described by the capitalised portion of
the option's description.
Selections may also be made from a horizontal menu bar, once one option is
raised (i.e. presented as a raised button) by using the left and right
cursor keys, then if the option does not correspond to a drop-down menu,
typing [ENTER] or [RETURN]. I only know one way to raise the option and
that is to click on it, which not only raises it but also executes it
unless it corresponds to a drop down menu. So to select from the
horizontal bar using only the keyboard, first type the letter corresponding
to an option with a drop down menu (which you will only know from
experience) then use the cursor keys to move along the horizontal menu bar
and down the drop-down menu as they appear, then type [ENTER] or [RETURN]
on the desired option.
Selections may also be made from a drop-down menu, from the main horizontal
menu bar, by typing the function key indicated at the right of the option's
description.
Selections may also be made from a drop-down drawing area menu, using the
[UP] and [DOWN] keys to highlight the desired option then pressing [RETURN]
or [ENTER].
Additionally, when using some windows (those that do not use the function
keys for their own purposes) the function keys will be available to select
another window.
When Using the More DOS-Like Interface
If you have opted for the more DOS-like interface, once you have logged in,
the window selection menu system will be presented in a window, rather than
in the horizontal menu bar. If you escape out of this window, you will be
returned to the horizontal menu bar, from which you will need to make a
selection before being again presented with the menu in this window. For
information on configuring a user for the more DOS-like interface and its
impact, please refer to the section titled:
"Modify
List of Users".
If using the DOS-like interface selections from the window selection menu
may be made by either moving the reverse/highlighted video line (using [UP]
or [DOWN]) to the desired entry then typing "S", [RETURN] or [ENTER], or by
typing the number corresponding to the option number then typing [RETURN]
or [ENTER], or, if the desired window has been programmed into a function
key ([F1] to [F9], and [F11]), by typing the function key corresponding the
option.
Windows may also be selected from any one of the other window selection
menus without the need to first call up the particular menu containing the
option. This selection may be made by typing the option number or by
typing the function key programmed with this option.
The windows programmed into the function keys are listed at the bottom
right of the window.
Setting Function Keys to Access the Menus
To do this, you will need to be familiar with the exact text of the window
names that you wish to programme onto function keys, especially the first
words in the names.
Then to programme a function key for the main horizontal menu bar's
drop-down menu' options, having, first of all, logged in with sufficient
privilege, activate "View" option from the main horizontal menu bar, then
"Function keys" from the resulting menu.
A dialogue window will then be opened, presenting the ten function keys.
Move the highlight to the key of interest, either by using the [UP] and
[DOWN] keys or by clicking with the mouse on the appropriate line. Then
select this key for change by typing "C", or [ENTER], or [RETURN] or by
double clicking on the line or single clicking on "Change".
In response, another dialogue window will open, requesting that you enter
the name of the window you wish programmed into this key.
You can start typing the name of the window, then when the rest of the name
correctly appears, press [ENTER] or [RETURN] or click on "OK".
Alternatively, you should notice that there is a button to the right of
this field that can be used to present a list of options to choose from.
Be warned that this list is quite extensive and is not restricted to
windows applicable to site, so as a result it is possible to select a
totally useless window by not recalling the exact name of the window you
wish to programme.
For example, there might be an "Overhead crane commands and alarms" window,
which deals with overhead cranes, and a "Crane status and control" window,
which deals with stacker cranes.
Also, do not select any of the windows starting with the text "Emulate",
they are for my use only.
To un-programme a function key, make a blank entry. When you exit this
dialogue, the site name will be presented against this function key.
Viewing Data
This section is best read when referred to from the
"Specific Instructions" section. It
describes a generic form of window used extensively in two major ways:
Maintenance
to select a particular set of configuration data to modify or
delete, or to create a new set.
Reports
to print a report based on a selected portion of live or
configuration data.
In all instances a file is presented to the window, with one record per
line allowing you to manipulate the data in this file. The following
section describes the features common to all these instances, whereas the
subsequent sections, describe the additional features corresponding to the
"Maintenance Viewing Data", and "Report Viewing Data" usages.
General
The features offered by all these windows are:
moving the window across the records.
highlighting a particular record for individual attention.
highlighting a particular field for individual attention.
moving the window to other records of the file.
expanding/contracting the records.
restricting the records eligible for inclusion.
limiting the display to a range of consecutive records.
If the database in question is a "linked list", then there are operations
that allow you to relocate or duplicate records, either within a list, or
from one list to another. The linked-list databases are indicated by the
menu item "Group" in the menu bar. Most of the databases automatically
sequence the records according to a "key" field or fields or the record
number occupied. With linked-lists, such as the menu structure, the
records are sequenced and grouped. Any menu item, for example, can appear
on any sub-menu (a group) and in any position in the sub-menu.
Menu Bar
At the top of each of the windows is a legend that indicates which of the
keys are active and what function they perform. On all these windows,
[RETURN] is equivalent to the first key listed. [ENTER] will behave
similarly, however, when used to select a record [ENTER] will select the
highlighted record directly, whereas [RETURN] will request the record
designation from you, while offering the highlighted record as the default.
As well as being able to type the key, you may click the mouse on that part
of the legend.
What's On the Display
The body of the window contains a number of lines of data, each line
comprising a related set of data fields (known as a record). There will be
a horizontal scroll bar provided, in case the entire record is too long to
fit on a window. The [HOME] key will move the scroll bar to the extreme
left, while [END] will move the scroll bar to the extreme right.
The lines of data are divided into fields, of varying widths. If a given
field width is sufficient, as many words from that field's prompt as will
fit, will be presented at the top of the column as a heading. The next
paragraph throws light on how to interpret the data in the remaining
columns. If there is insufficient space to present the entire prompt in
the column heading, you can move to mouse pointer to that column heading an
a tooltip will be displayed that presents the full database prompt, along
with, should your "Database" record set be defined to include the "Database
name for "Where"" field, the database name for the "Where" field. The
"Where" field is described in the section titled:
"Viewing Data" and its
subsection "Records
Satisfying an Expression".
If the display is restricted to records containing certain text (see
"Given
Text in Any Field ([CONTROL F])") or to those satisfying a given expression
(see "Records
Satisfying an Expression"), then the tooltip that is presented when the
mouse pointer is positioned above the extreme left of the column heading
(the horizontal scrollbar will need to be all the way left) will show
either the first or the second of these restrictions instead of the details
relating to the first field. Generally, the details relating to the first
field will still be available as a tooltip if you move the mouse a little
further right.
One of the records will be shown differently to the rest and one of the
fields of this record will be shown differently to the others in this
record. These are referred to as the "highlighted record" and the
"highlighted field" respectively. The prompt as well as the data
associated with the highlighted field are displayed at the bottom of the
window. [UP] and [DOWN] may be used to highlight the previous or next
record respectively, while [LEFT] and [RIGHT] may be used to highlight the
previous or next field respectively.
Moving the Window Around the File
The [PAGE UP] and [PAGE DOWN] may be used to move the window through the
file in the indicated direction to view records that do not fit on one
page. There will be a vertical scroll bar provided, and [CONTROL PAGE UP]
may be used to return the window to the top of the file, while [CONTROL
PAGE DOWN] may be used to move the window directly to the end of the file.
Expanding Record Details
If a field is a "Key" field, having a set of fields associated with it,
these may, optionally, be shown as well. Typing "E" will cause these
associated fields, if not already displayed, to be displayed, or, if
already displayed, not to be displayed. This is referred to as expanding
or contracting the field.
When expanded, a symbolic field, if also a "Key" field, will be followed by
the field it references. This will appear as a duplication. Refer to the
section titled: "Key".
Restricting the Records Displayed
You can restrict the display, so that only certain records, which pass some
criteria, will be presented.
Given Text in Any Field ([CONTROL F])
The crudest, but most straight-forward, method is to specify a pattern,
which must be contained in at least one of the fields of the record for
that record to be included. You do this by typing [CONTROL F] then typing
in the pattern. The text you type in must be in the correct case for a
match to be found, and is capitalised as if a "title" (see the section
titled: "Name"). This text
will be searched for in any of the "Name" fields making up the record, and
in any "Name" field to which symbolic references are made from fields
within the record. For further detail on symbolic fields, please refer to
the section titled:
"Symbolic
Name".
To remove this restriction, type [CONTROL F] a second time, and this time
remove the field contents.
When this restriction is in force, and there is no restriction on the first
field (see the next section,
"Given
Text in a Field (Restrict/Match)"), then the text "FIND: " followed by the
text you are searching for (or as much of it as will fit), will be
displayed above the records, in the first column, replacing the column
title had there been one. In any case, the full description of the
restriction will be presented in a tooltip, should you move the mouse
pointer to the extreme left of the column heading (the horizontal scrollbar
will need to be all the way left).
Given Text in a Field (Restrict/Match)
To restrict the records displayed to those with the same data in a given
field, highlight the field where the restriction is to apply, then type
"R". A dialogue window will open, with a single data entry
field, loaded with the data from this field. If this is the required data
for the restriction, simply type [RETURN] or [ENTER], otherwise enter the
required data.
When a restriction is in force, the restriction will be displayed above the
records, in the appropriate column, replacing the column title had there
been one.
To restrict the records displayed to those containing a given sequence of
characters in a "Name" field, highlight the field where the restriction is
to apply, then type "M". A dialogue window will open, with a single data
entry field, loaded with the current restriction or sequence. Type in the
required sequence and type [RETURN] or [ENTER]. For editing instructions
for this type of field, please refer to the section titled:
"Name".
When a sequence is in force, the sequence will be displayed above the
records, in the appropriate column, replacing the column title had there
been one.
Restrictions and sequences can not be simultaneously in force for the same
field. The later specified will override the prior.
If the record has been expanded, take care to distinguish between the
symbolic field and the following referenced field. Sequences may not be
specified for "Symbolic Name" fields.
To remove a restriction or sequence, highlight the field where the sequence
is to apply no longer, then type "R" or "M" followed [GREY MINUS] then
[RETURN] or [ENTER].
All these restrictions, associated with the unexpanded resord set, may be
edited within a single dialogue window. To bring up this dialogue window,
type [CONTROL R]. You may enter restrictions into any of the fields
presented. To enter a sequence, rather than a restriction, type [CONTROL
A] after the sequence.
A Run of Records (First/Last)
For some sets of records, you may restrict the display to a range of
consecutive records. To do this, type "F" then enter the specification of
the first record, then type "L" then enter the specification of the last
record.
The specification in each of these cases will default to the highlighted
record, so an alternative method is to highlight the first record to be
included, then type "F", then [RETURN] sufficiently often to accept the
default, then highlight the last record to be included, then type "L", then
finally [RETURN] sufficiently often to accept the default (in some cases
the specification of a record may require more than one entry).
If the file is a log file (i.e. its first database field is a time and date
field), to limit the display to a range of consecutive records, move the
highlight to first record to be included and type "F", then move highlight
to the last record and type "L". Subsequent typings of "F" and "L" will
release the corresponding limitation.
A Given Group in Linked Lists
This applies to the "linked list" databases only. These databases are
indicated by the menu item "Group" in the menu bar.
These databases present their records with the name of the group to the
left, sometimes followed by the designation of their position within the
group, then the record porper, i.e. the fields that you can highlight,
restrict upon, change, et cetera. When a group restriction is in effect,
the group designation may be removed from the presentation of the record,
as all records displayed now belong to the one group.
To restrict the display to records from within a single group, type "G". A
dialogue window will open, with a single data entry field, loaded with the
group designation for the group to which the highlighted record belongs.
If this is the required group for the restriction, simply type [RETURN] or
[ENTER], otherwise enter the required group designation.
To remove a restriction to a sigle group, type "G" followed [GREY MINUS]
then [RETURN] or [ENTER].
Records Satisfying an Expression
This feature is only available to those sites where the "Database" record
set has been defined to include the "Database name for "Where"" field.
This field is described in the section titled
"Database
Privilege". You can refer to the "Database Privilege" database listing to
obtain the field names for use in entering an expression. Alternatively,
if you move the mouse pointer to the column heading, a tooltip will be
presented, which will present the full text of the field's prompt and, on
its second line, the database name for "Where" experssion.
The editing of this expression is described in the section titled:
"Where".
To restrict the records displayed to those that satisfy some explicit
expression, click on "Where" in the menu bar or type "W". A dialogue
window will open, with a single data entry field, which would be blank
unless you have already entered an expression.
Into this field, enter an expression. An expression consists of a number
of operands and operators. A simple example is [DBWHERE]="DBPROMPT", which
would restrict the presentation to those records for which "Database name
for "Where"" field contains exactly DBPROMPT. The result of each operation
is either a text string, a floating-point number or an integer. The final
result of the entire expression should be an integer and if that integer is
zero, the record will not be presented. Floating-point numbers are rounded
down towards zero, when converting to an integer.
The operands are either numeric values, text strings, database field names,
or the special operand representing the record number.
Numeric values can be base-ten integers, floating-point numbers, or a
number in base two, eight, or sixteen. Base-ten integers must begin with
one of the digits from "1" to "9", followed only by digits, unless the
integer is zero, in which case it will consist of just the digit "0"; in
other words, it can not start with "0" unless the integer is to be zero.
Floating-point numbers contain only digits and a single decimal point,
followed by one or more digits. Base-two integers begin with the
characters, "0b", followed by the digits "0" and "1", as required to
represent the integer. Base-eight integers begin with a "0", followed by
the digits "0" and "7", as required to represent the integer. Base-sixteen
integers begin with the characters, "0x", followed by the digits "0" to
"9", and the letters "a" to "f", as required to represent the
integer. Examples are 27, 27.0, 0b11011, 033, and 0x1b, which represent
the value twenty-seven as a base-ten integer, a floating-point number, a
base-two integer, a base-eight integer, and a base-sixteen integer,
respectively.
Text strings begin with a double-quotation mark, followed by the required
characters, and is terminated using a second double-quotation mark. An
example is "Text to be matched". Most operators are arithmetic or logical,
so, when a string is presented to one such operator, an attempt is made to
convert the string to an integer (or, should the other operand be floating
point, to a floating-point value) before applying the operator. On the
other hand, the .ADD. and .SUB. operators have a special meaning should
both operands be text strings, or one a text string and the other a
database value (which may have both numeric and text values).
The database field names are to be placed within open and close brackets.
An example is [DBWHERE]. References to database fields are replaced by the
text or the integer contained within the corresponding record of the named
field. In the case of interger values, both the raw integral value and the
text that is used to present this raw value are kept. In the case of
integral fields, the text that represents raw value may differ from the raw
value. For example, should the corresponding database prompt end in a
range specification, such as "<5-10>", then the raw value of zero will be
stored in text as "5". Which representation is used depends upon the
operator that is applied to it and the other operand to which that operator
is applied. If text is required, then the text form will be used, and
otherwise the raw integer value will be used.
The special operand representing the record number is "#". References to
the record's own number are replaced by both the integer representing the
record number, and the string that is used to represent that record in the
database. Which representation is used depends upon the operator that is
applied to it and the other operand to which that operator is applied.
Consider, for example, a record within the product master database. It has
a physical position within the database (a position that is not subject to
change as other records come and go), and this physical position is not
displayed to the operator, unless the operator looks up the product code in
the list that can be presented when you opt for "Field" rather than
"Database" when using the "Edit Databases" screen (you may refer to
the section titled:
"Edit
Databases"). When these records are presented as a database, they are
identified using the product code, which must be unique. So, the '#'
operand is translated to both the integral record number and the textual
presentation of the product code. Which is used depends upon whether an
integer or a string is required.
The operators are executed according to their precedence. This means that
those with the lower precedence number (indicating a higher precedence)
will be executed before those with a higher precedence number. Those
operators with the same precedence will be executed from left to right. To
override the order of execution of the operators, parentheses may be used.
For example 2+3*4 would result in 14, while (2+3)*4 would result in 20. An
exception to the rule of precedence occurs when there is no direct
right-hand operand (that is, the right-hand operand is to be supplied as
the result of the execution of the unary operator to its right). In such
cases, the execution of the operator without a right-hand operand is
delayed until that operator is supplied. For example, in executing
.DEG..ARCSIN.[DATABASE], the .DEG. operator can not be executed until the
.ARCSIN. operator has been executed, even though it has the higher
precedence.
Some operators are unary, meaning that they operate only on the operand to
their right. Other operators are binary, meaning that they operate on two
operands, the one to their right and the one to their left. There are two
ternary operators, which take three operands, the one to their left, the
one to their right, and the one right of that, separated by a comma. Also,
there can be two names for some operators, with one consisting of two dots
with a number of letters between them and the other consisting of one or
two non-alphabetic, non-numeric characters.
The operators provided are, by and large, the same operators that are
provided by the Allen-Bradley PLCs, which this software has needed to
emulate. You might like to refer to the section titled
"Precedence
of Instructions". It is that set of operators that also forms the basis for
the editing within "Numeric" fields (see the section titled:
"Numeric").
Below are listed the operators available:
OPEN PARENTHESIS
( Precedence:0 No operands
CLOSE PARENTHESIS
) Precedence:0 No operands
REFERENCE
-> Precedence:1 Binary
RECORD NUMBER
# Precedence:1 No operands
RECORD STRING
.NO. Precedence:1 Unary
NEGATE
.NEG. Precedence:2 Unary
COMPLEMENT
.INV. & ~ Precedence:2 Unary
INTEGER
.INT. Precedence:2 Unary
TO DEGREES
.DEG. Precedence:2 Unary
TO RADIANS
.RAD. Precedence:2 Unary
SINE
.SIN. Precedence:3 Unary
COSINE
.COS. Precedence:3 Unary
TANGENT
.TAN. Precedence:3 Unary
INVERSE SINE
.ARCSIN. Precedence:3 Unary
INVERSE COSINE
.ARCCOS. Precedence:3 Unary
INVERSE TANGENT
.ARCTAN. Precedence:3 Unary
NATURAL LOGARITHM
.LN. Precedence:3 Unary
BASE 10 LOGARITHM
.LOG. Precedence:3 Unary
SQUARE ROOT
.SQRT. Precedence:3 Unary
TO BCD
.BCD. Precedence:3 Unary
TO BINARY
.BIN. Precedence:3 Unary
RAISE TO THE POWER
.EXP. Precedence:4 Unary
MULTIPLY
.MUL. & * Precedence:4 Binary
DIVIDE
.DIV. & / Precedence:4 Binary
MODULUS
.MOD. & % Precedence:4 Binary
MASK
.MSK. & & Precedence:5 Binary
ADD
.ADD. & + Precedence:6 Binary
SUBTRACT
.SUB. & - Precedence:6 Binary
SET
.SET. & | Precedence:7 Binary
EXCLUSIVE OR
.XOR. & ^ Precedence:7 Binary
LESS THAN
.LT. & < Precedence:8 Binary
GREATER THAN
.GT. & > Precedence:8 Binary
LIMIT
.LIM. Precedence:8 Ternary
MASKED EQUAL TO
.MEQ. Precedence:8 Ternary
EQUAL TO
.EQU. & = Precedence:8 Binary
INCLUDES
.HAS. & } Precedence:8 Binary
NOT EQUAL TO
.NEQ. & <> Precedence:8 Binary
NOT LESS THAN
.GEQ. & >= Precedence:8 Binary
NOT GREATER THAN
.LEQ. & <= Precedence:8 Binary
LIKE
.LIKE. & : Precedence:9 Binary
NOT
.NOT. & ! Precedence:9 Unary
AND
.AND. & && Precedence:10 Binary
OR
.OR. & || Precedence:11 Binary
ASSIGN
:= Precedence:12 Binary
NEXT
.NEXT. & , Precedence:13 Binary
The use of these operators is:
OPEN PARENTHESIS
CLOSE PARENTHESIS
These are used to override the normal order of operations. For example
2+3*4 would result in 14, while (2+3)*4 would result in 20.
RECORD NUMBER
This allows you to reference the actual physical record number. It is
anticipated that this would be of use in those circumstances where the
record number relates to some extrinsic quantity, such as a racking
location or an alarm number. It requires no parameters.
RECORD STRING
This allows you to reference the actual physical record number in the ASCII
form that is used to present it to users. It is anticipated that access to
the record number would be of use in those circumstances where the record
number relates to some extrinsic quantity, such as a racking location or an
alarm number. The ASCII representation is often just the ASCII
representation of the actual number, but in some circumstances, such as in
the case of racking locations, it is somewhat different. In order for the
system to know how to translate this value into ASCII, it needs to know
which record set to reference because all non-standard representations of
the record numbers are determined by the record set in question. In order
to identify this record set, you need to provide a reference to the first
database (field) in that record set. This is then used to scan through all
record sets, looking for the first that has this database as its first
field. Should there be multiple record sets with this database as their
first field, chances are that the record number representation scheme
employed by each is the same. If this is not the case and you particularly
wanted to use the representation of a subsequent record set, then it is
unfortunate. For example, ".NO.[RACKFILLED]" would present the record
number in the form used to represent a racking location, "WW:RR-H-LLL-D"
(such as: "42:16-A-027-1"), where the first two characters ("42") represent
the warehouse (either 41 or 42) and is redundant with the rack, which
consists of the first two characters, ("16") following the colon. The
character following the hyphen is the hoist level ("A"). The final digit,
"1", represents the depth ("1" for the location near the crane, "2"
for the location further from the crane). I have no idea what the
corresponding record number would be, but the correspondence is fixed.
REFERENCE
This allows you to reference a value in another database. For example, if
you were looking at the list of conveyor alarms and wanted to highlight
those associated with any conveyor with, say, three active alarms, you
could enter the expression, [CNACONVEYOR]->[CNNALARMS]=3.
NEGATE
You can not enter a negative number, so should you require the value, -32,
you could enter .NEG.3 (or use the binary subtract operator, with or
without a left-hand operand: 0-3 or -3).
COMPLEMENT
This allows you to take the binary complement of an integer. For example,
the value 27, which in binary is 11011, becomes, in binary, 111...11100100.
INTEGER
This allows you convert a text string or floating-point number to an
integer. You can also use it to obtain the integral value corresponding to
the presentation of a database field, rather than its raw value. For
example, if a database field contained the raw value zero, which happens to
be presented to an operator as "5", the [DATABASE] would return 0, while
.INT.[DATABASE] would return 5.
TO DEGREES
TO RADIANS
Should you ever need to use the trigonometric functions, the operand needs
to be specified in radians and the results of the corresponding inverse
functions are in radians, so this pair of functions are provided to allow
you to convert from degrees to radians. For example, for the sine of 45
degrees, you would write .SIN..RAD.45 and to obtain the inverse sine of
some database value you would write .DEG..ARCSIN.[DATABASE].
SINE
COSINE
TANGENT
These trigonometric functions are provided because they were there. Should
you ever have need to use them, you'll need to specify the operand in
radians.
INVERSE SINE
INVERSE COSINE
INVERSE TANGENT
These inverse trigonometric functions are provided because they were there.
Should you ever have need to use them, the results will be in radians.
NATURAL LOGARITHM
BASE 10 LOGARITHM
SQUARE ROOT
This set of arithmetic functions are provided because they were there.
TO BCD
TO BINARY
BCD is an alternate means of storing numbers in binary form, that is ideal
for presentation on a numeric display. For example, the number 123 would
be stored, in binary as 1111011 or, in hexadecimal, as 0x7B. When coded as
BCD, the hexadecimal representation would be 0x123, which, in binary, is
100100011. That number, should it be interpreted as ordinary binary, would
correspond to 291 in decimal, not 123. This pair of functions are provided
to convert between these alternate representations. Examples are .BCD.123
would return 291, while .BIN.291 or .BIN.0x123 would return 123.
RAISE TO THE POWER
This function raises the left-hand value to the power represented by the
right-hand value. For example, 2.EXP.3 would return 8.
MULTIPLY
This function multiplies the left-hand value by the right-hand value. For
example, 2.MUL.3 would return 6.
DIVIDE
This function divides the left-hand value by the right-hand value. For
example, 2.DIV.3 would return 0, while 2.0.DIV.3 or 2.DIV.3.0 would return
0.666667, or thereabouts. If either operand is floating point, then
floating-point arithmetic is used, otherwise, integer arithmetic is used.
MODULUS
This function divides the left-hand value by the right-hand value and
records the remainder. For example, 5.MOD.3 would return 2.
MASK
This function ANDs the left-hand and right-hand values together. For
example, 51.MSK.7 would return 3; 51 is 0b110011 and 7 is 0b000111, so
ANDing these results in 0b000011, which is 3.
ADD
This function add the left-hand and right-hand values together. For
example, 2.ADD.3 would return 5. Should both operands be text strings, or
one a text string and the other a database value (which may have both
numeric and text values), this operator concatenates the strings. So, if
[DATABASE] has a raw value of zero and a text representation of "5", the
expression, "Value is ".ADD.[DATABASE] would return "Value is 5".
SUBTRACT
This function subtracts the right-hand value from the left-hand value. For
example, 3.SUB.2 would return 1. Should both operands be text strings, or
one a text string and the other a database value (which may have both
numeric and text values), this operator removes the first occurrence of the
right-hand operand from the left-hand operand. So, if [DATABASE] has a raw
value of zero and a text representation of "5", then the expression, "Value
is 505".SUB.[DATABASE] would return "Value is 05".
SET
This function ORs the left-hand and right-hand values together. For
example, 51.SET.7 would return 55; 51 is 0b110011 and 7 is 0b000111, so
ORing these results in 0b110111, which is 55.
EXCLUSIVE OR
This function exclusively ORs the left-hand and right-hand values together.
in this operation the only bits that are set in the result are those that
are set in one of the operands but not in both. For example, 51.XOR.7
would return 52; 51 is 0b110011 and 7 is 0b000111, so exclusively ORing
these results in 0b110100, which is 52.
LESS THAN
GREATER THAN
EQUAL TO
NOT EQUAL TO
NOT LESS THAN
NOT GREATER THAN
These operators can be used on strings or integers or floating-point
numbers. In the case of strings, the two strings are compared, looking for
the first character from the left that is different, and the comparison is
then based on the relative ASCII values of those two characters. If, one
of the operands is a floating-point then the other will be converted to
floating point prior to the comparison. Otherwise, if one is an integer,
the other will be converted to an integer before comparison. A true result
becomes the integer 1, while a false result becomes the integer 0.
LIKE
This operator tests the left-hand operand to see if it satisfies the
pattern that is contained in the right-hand operand. If the pattern is
satisfied, the result will be 1 and otherwise it will be 0. The syntax for
the pattern is based on the SQL syntax for its LIKE pattern. Most
characters in the pattern are used to match that same character in the
left-hand operand. The exceptions are the backslash character ('\'), the
per-cent sign ('%'), the underscore ('_'), the open square-bracket ('['),
the minus sign or hyphen ('-'), the circumflex ('^'), the close
square-bracket (']'), and the asterisk ('*'). The backslash character is
used to restore the literal meaning to the character that follows it, which
is expected to be one of the exceptional characters just listed. The
backslash character is equivalent to the character nominated using the
ESCAPE keyword in SQL. The per-cent sign will match any number of
characters, even zero characters. It will match as many characters as
needed to give the remainder of the pattern its maximum chance of matching
the left-hand operand. The underscore will match any one character, even a
space; it is used to shift the focus in the left-hand operand along one
place. The open square-bracket introduces a range of characters so that
the next character in the left-hand operand will be deemed as matching if
it matches any one of those in the range specification. The minus sign,
circumflex, and close square-bracket only have special significance when
the open square-bracket has been used to introduce the range of characters.
Under these conditions, the close square-bracket terminates the range
specification. The minus sign is used between two other characters to
indicate that all the characters whose ASCII value lies between those of
the two characters are also included in the range specification. The
circumflex, if it appears immediately after the open square-bracket,
directs that the range specifies a list of unacceptable, rather than
acceptable, characters. Finally, the asterisk is used to modify the
previous element of the pattern (usually a single character but sometimes a
range specification if it follows a close square-bracket). It states that
the left-hand operand needn't match, but that if it does match, then the
point of interest in the left-hand operand should be advanced to the first
character that doesn't match the previous element of the pattern. Unlike
SQL, all comparisons are case sensitive, so "A" .LIKE. "a" will return 0.
I hope that that is all clear. Examples: "The Quick Brown Fox Jumps"
.LIKE. "%Quick%Fox%" will return 1, "5% of Nothing" .LIKE. "5\%%" will
return 1, "5% of Nothing" .LIKE. "[0-9]\% of %" will return 1, "25% of
Nothing" .LIKE. "[0-9]*\% of %" will return 1, as would "% of Nothing"
.LIKE. "[0-9]*\% of %", and "[^8]*" would match any left-hand operand that
did not have an "8" anywwhere in it. Note: the pattern "_*" will behave
like the per-cent sign when it appears at the end of a pattern, but, should
you follow the "_*" with anything at all, it matches nothing. This
operator can result in the use of considerable computer power, so please
use with caution; try to restrict the number of candidate records using
other means before applying this operator. The computing involved on
behalf of the per-cent character is particularly onerous, except when it
appears at the end of the pattern.
NOT
This operator compares the right-hand operand to 0. If it is 0, then the
result is 1. Otherwise the result is 0.
LIMIT
This operator only accepts integral operands. An attempt will be made to
convert the operands to integers. The result is 1 if the second operand is
within the inclusive range of the first and third, provided that the first
is less than the third. If the first is greater than the third, the result
will be 1 if the second operand is not within the inclusive range of the
third and first. If the result is not 1, it will be 0. For example,
2.LIM.3,5, would result in 1, as would any second operand in the set
{2,3,4,5}. Any other value in the second operand would result in 0. A
second example, 5.LIM.3,2, would result in 0, as would a second operand of
value 4. Any other value in the second operand would result in 1.
MASKED EQUAL TO
This operator only accepts integral operands. An attempt will be made to
convert the operands to integers. The first and third operands are bitwise
anded with the second operand and the two results are compared for
equality. For example, 0b11011.MEQ.0b01110,0b11111, would produce
intermediate results of 0b01010 and 0b01110, which are not equal, while
0b11011.MEQ.0b01010,0b11111, would produce intermediate results of 0b01010
and 0b01010, which are equal.
INCLUDES
This operator accepts text operands only. If the right-hand operand is
included, contiguously, within the left-hand operand, then the result is
the integer value 1, rather than 0. For example, "Text to be
tested".HAS."be" will return 1, while "Text was tested".HAS."be"
will return 0.
AND
This operator returns 1 if both the left-hand and right-hand operands are
other than 0.
OR
This operator returns 1 if either of the left-hand and right-hand operands
are other than 0.
ASSIGN
This operator is only to be used in the "Set" expression, which will be
described shortly. This operator is only available for left-hand operands
that are database names. Since it has a very low precedence, it can only
have a left-hand database operand if that operand is either the first or is
preceeded by the NEXT operator, which is the only one with a lower
precedence. Any use of this operator in a "Where" expression will be
replaced by the "EQUAL TO" operator. On the other hand, should you, when
writing a "Set" expression, use the "EQUAL TO" operator where the left-hand
operand is the first, or the first after the "NEXT" operator, and that
operand is a database name, then it will be replaced by the "ASSIGN"
operator.
NEXT
This operator is used to enable the provision of a third parameter for the
ternary operators, "LIMIT" and "MASKED EQUAL TO". For example
0b11011.MEQ.0b01110,0b11111 or 0b11011.MEQ.0b01110.NEXT.0b11111. It will
also be used in the "Set" expression, which will be described shortly.
To remove this restriction, type "W" a second time, and this time remove
the field contents.
When this restriction is in force, and there is no restriction on the first
field (see the section,
"Given
Text in a Field (Restrict/Match)"), then the text "WHERE: " followed by the
expression that you entered (or as much of it as will fit), will be
displayed above the records, in the first column, replacing the column
title had there been one. In any case, the full description of the
restriction will be presented in a tooltip, should you move the mouse
pointer to the extreme left of the column heading (the horizontal scrollbar
will need to be all the way left).
This expression may accompany restrictions and sequences. It is
recommended that the listing be first restricted using the restrictions and
sequences before entering the expression, as expressions take more computer
time to implement. Again, please refer to section,
"Given
Text in a Field (Restrict/Match)")
Modify All Satisfying Records
The "Where" dialogue window, if you have logged in with the highest
privilege level, offers a "Set" button. When this is clicked on, the
"Where" expression is applied, just as it would have been had you
clicked the "OK" button, but, additionally, a new dialogue window is
presented allowing you to enter a second expression. This second
expression is to include assignments for one or more databases.
The editing of this expression is described in the section titled:
"Where".
Only those records of the databases that satisfy the "Where" expression and
any other restrictions that may be also in force, will be altered. Each
assignment should consist of a database field name, followed by the
assignment operator (":="), then followed by an expression. Should there
be multiple assignments, then each should be separated from the previous
assignment by the "NEXT" operator.
A simple example would be [DBWHERE]:=[DBWHERE]+"_NAME",[DBSEC]:=2, which
would append "_NAME" to each member of the DBWHERE database that satisfies
the restrictions and would also set the same records of the DBSEC database
to the value 2.
After clicking on the "OK" button, you will be asked to confirm that you
wish these alterations to be made before the statement will be executed.
Should you opt not to have the statement executed, it will still be kept,
so that you can, subsequently, open the "Where" dialogue and then the "Set"
dialogue to review the statement again, before considering whether or not
to execute it.
Move Up/Down in Linked Lists
This applies to the "linked list" databases only. These databases are
indicated by the menu item "Group" in the menu bar.
The object here is to gather together records from within a single group
within the linked-list database, into a "selection", and to relocate this
"selection" within the group. Subsequently, you can "copy" or "cut"
the "selection" in order to "paste" it into another group; this will be
covered in the next section titled:
"Copy
or Cut from Linked Lists".
It is important to understand the distinction between a "selection" of
records, as described here, and a "collection" of records, as described in
the section titled:
"Multiple
Record Editing (Kollecting)". In each case, multiple records are
highlighted, and the operation of the "Change" and "Select" for editing
functions (see
"Changing
the Field Contents" and
"Editing
the Entire Record and Deleting") will serve to affect all records in either
the selection or the collection. The important difference is that
including a record in a selection, reorders that record in the record set,
whereas including a record in a collection does not affect its position in
a record set. You should be using this feature, primarily, if it is your
intention to reorder the records.
In this section and the next, we will use the terms "select", "copy",
"cut", and "paste". These terms date from the earliest word
processors, and were used to relate these electronic manipulations to the
editing a paper document by cutting out words and pasting them elsewhere.
Before proceeding further, you must first restrict the display to a single
"group" by typing "G" then entering the designation of that "group".
For further details, please refer to the section titled:
"A
Given Group in Linked Lists".
You can then define a "selection" by either highlighting a record and then
typing [CONTROL M], or else you can hold down the [CONTROL] key as you
click on a record.
Now that a "selection" is defined, it may be extended. You can do this by
holding down either the [SHIFT] or [CONTROL] key and clicking on other
records from the same list. You can also use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to
highlight other records, then hold down [SHIFT] or [CONTROL] while typing
"M".
If you use the [SHIFT] key, and the record is above or below the
"selection", then all intervening records will be added to the
"selection". If the record is at the bottom of the "selection", the
"selection" will be disolved. If the record is within or at the top
of the "selection", the "selection" will be reduced to include only those
records from the record to the top of the "selection".
If you use the [CONTROL] key, and the record is above or below the
"selection", then the "selection" will be moved to the record and the
record will be added to the bottom of the "selection". If the record is at
the top of the "selection", the "selection" will move its top down by one
record, releasing the top record from the "selection". If the record is
within or at the bottom of the "selection", the record will be repositioned
at the bottom of the "selection", then the bottom of the selection will be
raised by one record, releasing this record from the "selection".
You can also create a "selection" by positioning on a record, and holding
down the [SHIFT] key, as you click on another record. In this instance,
all records from the record positioned on initially, to the record you
clicked on with the [SHIFT] key down, will be included in the "selection".
Also [CONTROL A] (for "add") is equivalent to [CONTROL M], and [CONTROL E]
(for "extend") is equivalent to [SHIFT M].
Also, you can extend the "selection" by highlighting a record at one end of
the "selection", then typing [SHIFT SEPARATE UP] or [SHIFT SEPARATE DOWN]
to add its neighbour, in the corresponding direction, to the "selection".
If the direction is towards the inside of the "selection", then,
highlighted record will be released from the "selection" and its neighbour
is unaffected. If you do not have sufficient privilege to create
"collections" (see the section titled:
"Multiple
Record Editing (Kollecting)"), or a "copying" or "cutting" region is defined
(see the section titled:
"Copy
or Cut from Linked Lists"), and no "collection" is defined, then these
keystrokes can also be used to start the definition of a "selection".
Once the records to be moved are in the "selection", these records can be
moved by clicking on another position within the list, without using either
[SHIFT] nor [CONTROL]. If the position is above the "selection", the top
of the "selection" will be moved to the position that record was occupying,
and the record, and all below it, will be moved down to make room for it.
If the position is below the "selection", the bottom of the "selection"
will be moved to the position that record was occupying, and the record,
and all above it, will be moved up to make room for it.
Also, once a "selection" has been defined, the changing field contents and
editing of entire record operations will be altered. The data presented
will be blank or zero, unless all records in the "selection" share the same
value for a given field. If a field is altered, you will be prompted, upon
closing the dialogue, to confirm that all records in the "selection" are to
have their corresponding field altered to this value. Also upon closing
the dialogue, any restrictions on the field that was the subject of the
change, or all fields, if editing the entire record, will be removed.
Please note, that, unless all records agree with the value of a given
field, that field can not be edited to blank or zero.
Please also bear in mind that, if the prompt specifies a range of numbers
that does not begin at zero, zero will be presented as a non-zero number.
For example, the prompt, "How many in pack <1-4>" will present 0 as "1", 1
as "2", and so on, as zero corresponds to the lowest value in the range, in
this case "1". There might also be other data presentations where zero is
not presented as a blank field.
After the move, the "selection" remains in place. You will need to
explicitly release the "selection". This can be done as mentioned in
passing earlier, or by right clicking, or by typing [CONTROL U].
Copy or Cut from Linked Lists
This applies to the "linked list" databases only. These databases are
indicated by the menu item "Group" in the menu bar.
The object here is to use the "selection" already defined, to be the basis
for the creation of a duplicate set of records in this or another group of
this linked-list database. You must, therefore, first define a
"selection". Please refer to the section titled:
"Move
Up/Down in Linked Lists".
Having defined a "selection", you can mark it as the base for "copying", by
typing [CONTROL C], or for "cutting" by typing [CONTROL X]. Initially
there is no difference between "copying" and "cutting", except that the
records are presented in different colours. When you later go to "paste"
the records elsewhere, had they been marked for "copying", the original
records will be left alone and copies of them made at the location of the
"paste". On the other hand, had they been marked for "cutting", the
original records will be relocated to the location of the "paste".
Once a "copy" is defined, the records constituting it may be copied to
other parts of this group or to other groups. First, you will need to
highlight the position at which you wish the records to be pasted. If this
location is within another group, you will need to switch to this group by
typing "G" then entering the designation of that "group". For further
details, please refer to the section titled:
"A
Given Group in Linked Lists".
After highlighting the location at which you wish the records to be
relocated or copied to, type [CONTROL V] to paste the records. After the
paste, the "copy" is released. You may explicitly release the "copy", by
right clicking, or by typing [CONTROL U].
Maintenance Viewing Data
These windows are presented to allow you to select a particular set of
configuration data to modify or delete, or to create a new set. The
additional features offered by these windows are:
changing the contents of a field.
selecting a record to edit.
creating new records.
Changing the Field Contents
To change the contents of a particular field, highlight the target field of
the target record then type "C", or click on the "Change" menu item, then
enter the new contents.
If the record has been expanded, take care to distinguish between the
symbolic field and the following referenced field. Changing the contents
of the former selects a different referenced field and hence a different
referenced "Set of Fields".
Changing the contents of the latter changes the contents of the referenced
field leaving the symbolic field still referencing the same referenced "Set
of Fields". The change to the referenced field will be reflected as an
apparent change to the symbolic field.
Editing the Entire Record and Deleting
To select a record for editing, type "S", or [RETURN], or click on the
"Select" menu item, then enter the specification of the required
record. The specification will default to the highlighted record, so an
alternative method is to highlight the required record, then type "S", then
[ENTER], or [RETURN] sufficiently often to accept the default, or just
double click on the record in question.
Once selected, a new dialogue window is opened, presenting this record as a
"Set of Fields". This data may now be modified as required. Refer to
the section titled: "Set of Fields".
While editing the "Set of Fields", [PAGE UP] and [PAGE DOWN] may be used to
select the previous or next records, [DELETE] may be used in conjunction
with [F1] to delete the record and [INSERT] may be used to create a new
record.
Add New Records (Insert)
Back at the "Viewing Data" window, you can, by typing [INSERT] or "I" or
clicking on the "Insert" menu item, select a data set containing wiped
data. The wiped data sets are usually excluded from the "Viewing Data"
windows automatically and so can not be selected using "S", [RETURN],
[ENTER], or double-clicking.
As in the case of selecting a field using "S", a dialogue window is opened,
presenting a record as a "Set of Fields", only this time they will be
substantially blank.
Restrict to a Single Record
Back at the "Viewing Data" window, if you restrict display to those records
that contain the given data in a field that is required to contain unique
data, the will therefore specify a single record, which will be
automatically selected for editing. When you return to the "Viewing Data"
window, the restriction will be removed.
Multiple Record Editing (Kollecting)
This function is only available if you have sufficient privilege. This
privilege level is specified in the "Configuration Data" record, titled
"Level: kollect records". Please refer to the section titled:
"Configuration
Data".
You may edit several records at once, by first defining a "collection".
Subsequent to defining the "collection", any changing or editing will be
applied to all records of the "collection". You will be asked to confirm
each field to be altered, but not each record to be affected, so you should
make sure that only the desired records are collected.
In the case of "linked list" databases, it is important to understand the
distinction between a "collection" of records, as described here, and a
"selection" of records, as described in the section titled:
"Move
Up/Down in Linked Lists". In each case, multiple records are highlighted,
and the operation of the "Change" and "Select" for editing functions (see
"Changing
the Field Contents" and
"Editing
the Entire Record and Deleting") will serve to affect all records in either
the selection or the collection. The important difference is that
including a record in a selection, reorders that record in the record set,
whereas including a record in a collection does not affect its position in
a record set. You should be using a "selection", primarily, if it is your
intention to reorder the records. Otherwise, you are in the right place.
When records are included within a "collection" they will be displayed
differently to the other records.
Throughout this section, several keystroke and mouse methods will be
described. If you are dealing with a linked-list database, you are best to
restrict your keystrokes to those that are not shared with the creation of
"selections" (such as "k" and [SHIFT K]), and to avoid the mouse
operations. For information on "selections", please refer to the section
titled: "Move
Up/Down in Linked Lists". The records of a "collection" will not only be
coloured differently from regular records, they will also be coloured
differently to records in "selections".
Now down to business. The simplest approach is to highlight each record of
interest and type "k" (or click on "Kollect"). If you type "k" for a
record, that is already in the "collection", it will be removed from the
"collection". If you type [SHIFT K], you will release all records
from the "collection".
You can also select records for inclusion in a "collection", by
highlighting one, then typing [SHIFT SEPARATE UP] or [SHIFT SEPARATE DOWN]
to add the highlighted record, and its neighbour in the corresponding
direction, to the "collection". If the neighbouring record was already in
the "collection", both records will be removed from the "collection". When
dealing with linked-lists, if a "selection" is defined, or a "copying" or
"cutting" region is defined, then these keystrokes can not be used to
start a "collection", as they will instead start or extend a "selection".
For more information on "selections" and the "copying" and "cutting"
regions, please refer to the sections titled:
"Move
Up/Down in Linked Lists" and
"Copy
or Cut from Linked Lists".
Alternatively, unless using a linked-list database, you can highlight a
record, then, while holding down [SHIFT], click on another record. This
causes the two records and all intervening records to be added in the
"collection". If, while holding down [CONTROL], you click on another
record, only the record clicked on will be added to the "collection". If
in either of these operations, the record clicked upon was already within
the "collection", the records involved will be removed from the
"collection". You can release all records from a "collection" by
right clicking.
Once a "collection" has been defined, the changing field contents and
editing of entire record operations will be altered. The data presented
will be blank or zero, unless all records in the "collection" share the
same value for a given field. If a field is altered, you will be prompted,
upon closing the dialogue, to confirm that all records in the "collection"
are to have their corresponding field altered to this value. Also upon
closing the dialogue, any restrictions on the field that was the subject of
the change, or all fields, if editing the entire record, will be removed.
Please note, that, unless all records agree with the value of a given
field, that field can not be edited to blank or zero.
Please also bear in mind that, if the prompt specifies a range of numbers
that does not begin at zero, zero will be presented as a non-zero number.
For example, the prompt, "How many in pack <1-4>" will present 0 as "1", 1
as "2", and so on, as zero corresponds to the lowest value in the range, in
this case "1". There might also be other data presentations where zero is
not presented as a blank field.
Refreshing the Display
The records that are presented in a "Maintenance Viewing Data" window are
selected when the window is opened, and then, afterwards, as restrictions
are applied, so as to include all records that satisfied those restrictions
at that time.
Also, if you were to edit a record, then the selection of records would be
reviewed in response to this.
It is possible, however, for there to be database changes by others or the
Movement Controller itself, which would change the selection of records to
be displayed. If this happens, you will find that the selection of records
presented no longer satisfy the requirements for inclusion.
If you suspect that this has or might have happened, and want to present
only those records that now qualify for inclusion, you should type "U" or
click on the "Update" menu option.
Report Viewing Data
These windows are presented to allow you to apply restrictions prior to
requesting a report.
Once any desired restrictions have been entered, typing "P", [RETURN],
[ENTER], or clicking on the "Print" menu item terminates the restriction
stage. Before printing commences, further options may be presented, then
finally you will be asked whether you wish to have the report
sent to the "Printer", or
sent to the "Viewer", or
written to a "Rich Text Format" or "RTF" file (suitable for viewing by
most word-processing program such as Microsoft Word), or
written to a "Comma Separated Variable" or "CSV" file (suitable for
importing into many database programs such as Microsoft Excel).
You can select "Printer" by typing "P" or by clicking on the "Printer"
button. You can select "Viewer" by typing "V", or by clicking on the
"Viewer" button. You can select "Rtf file" by typing "R", or by
clicking on the "Rtf File" button. You can select "Csv file" by typing
"C", or by clicking on the "Csv File" button.
If you select "Printer" the report will be sent to the print spooler. The
report file may be configured to suit an IBM-PC printer or an HP PCL
printer - see the "Using HP DeskJet" variable in the section titled:
"Configuration
Data"
If you select "Viewer", you will be presented with the report in a new
dialogue window. This window will have a vertical scroll bar, which you
can use to scroll through the report. The [PAGE DOWN], [PAGE UP], [DOWN],
[UP], [CONTROL PAGE DOWN], and [CONTROL PAGE UP] keys may also be used to
operate the scroll bar. To quit viewing the report, type [ESCAPE].
The "Rich Text Format" is a standard format recognised by all common word
processors. These files have the extension ".rtf". Had you specified that
you wanted the files to go to the printer, the Movement Controller would
have produced a temporary file that contained instructions for control of
an IBM-PC style dot-matrix printer or an HP DeskJet or similar printer
(depending upon database settings - see "Using HP DeskJet" variable in the
section titled:
"Configuration
Data"). If you do not have one of these types of printers, then by
producing an RTF file, you can use other word processors to print the
report. So, if you select "Rtf file", you will be asked to enter or select
a filename to contain the report. The file will not be automatically
spooled to the printer; you'll need to do this yourself.
The "Comma Separated Variable" format is a standard format recognised by
all common database and spreadsheet programs. These files have the
extension ".csv". If you request files of this type, the column headings
and column totals will be included, along with the bulk of the report,
however, the report title and the report qualifying statements, usually
included at the start of the report will be omitted, as these would not fit
with the column format of the rest of the report. If you select "Csv
file", you will be asked to enter or select a filename to contain the
report.
Help
Most of the windows provide the "Help" feature. This feature, if active,
is called up by typing [F12].
There is usually a "HELP" button or menu item that can also be pressed to
call up the "Help" feature.
A quick aside for those reading this through the Movement Controller help
windows: type [GREY PLUS] to advance the cursor to the topic of interest
within the list presented below, then type [ENTER] to read the topic. When
done, type [BACKSPACE] to return to this section.
Display Format
In response to typing [F12], a window is opened in the current window,
through which portions of this manual, the TECHNICAL MANUAL, and the
SOFTWARE MANUAL may be displayed. The section of the OPERATOR'S MANUAL
(this manual), relevant to the window you are using will be displayed.
Otherwise, a list of the major sections of this manual will be displayed.
The help window is normally divided into two parts, the header and the text
sections. There is also a vertical scroll bar and a menubar at the top of
the display to provide, via the mouse, the features that are provided by
the keyboard.
The header section is at the top of the window and shows the name of the
major section of the manual that is currently open, and below this it shows
the name of the section within this section that is currently open, and so
on.
To the right of the final subsection is shown the page of this subsection
that is being displayed. Should the window be showing parts of two pages,
the page number will reflect the first, and a plus sign ("+") will be
appended to the page number.
In the text section is first presented the text from the indicated section
of the manual (barring window dumps), followed by the list of sections
subordinate to this section. This text is presented in a number of
colours. One colour is reserved for references to other sections of the
manual and for the list of subordinate sections.
When no section is being displayed, there will be no division of the
window; either the list of major sections or the list of manuals will be
displayed in the undivided window.
Moving by Lines and Columns
There is a cursor, which is initially presented at the start of the first
blank line in the text section. This cursor may be moved throughout the
text section using the cursor keys.
Attempts to move down past the bottom of the text section will result in
the text scrolling upwards. The page number will be advanced from "1" to
"1+". After continuing to scroll the text upwards, eventually you
will reach page "2", given sufficient text.
Attempts to move up past the top of the text section will result in the
text scrolling downwards until the start of the section is displayed.
The cursor may be moved to an arbitrary point on the help page by clicking
there with the left mouse button.
Moving by Pages
The window may be moved through the section, page by page, by typing [PAGE
DOWN] for the next page or [PAGE UP] for the previous page.
Attempts to page down past the last page of the section, will present the
first page of the next section still subordinate to its encompassing
section, or, if there is no such next section, the first page of the
section next to the encompassing section, or, if there is no such next
section, the first page of the section next to the section that encompasses
the encompassing section, et cetera.
Attempts to page up past the first page of the section, will present the
last page of the previous section still subordinate to its encompassing
section, or, if there is no such previous section, the first page of the
encompassing section.
The pages may be advanced using the scroll bar.
Moving to Beginnings and Ends
You can move to the beginning of the line, or, if at the beginning of the
line, to the top of the window, or if at the top of the window, to the
start of the section, by typing [HOME].
You can move to the end of the line, or, if at the end of the line, to the
bottom of the window, or if at the bottom of the window, to the last page
of the section, by typing [END].
Moving to References
You can relocate the cursor to the displayed references to other sections
of the manual and to entries in the list of subordinate sections, by typing
[GREY PLUS] to move forward, or [GREY MINUS] to move backwards. These
references and the entries in the list will be shown differently to the
regular text.
Once the cursor has been relocated to a section reference or an entry in
the list of subordinate sections, that section can be displayed by typing
[ENTER].
The section may also be called up by double-clicking on it.
Moving to an Arbitrary Section
If you know the name of the section you wish to read, or some text you
would expect to appear in its name, type [F1], "s", "S", "f", or "F". In
response, you will be asked to enter the text.
The text should be entered in lower case and will match names found in
upper or lower case.
Once you enter the text, it will search the names of the major sections,
then the names of the sections below these, then the names of the sections
below these and so on, starting however at the section after the current
section, and wrapping around till it again reaches this section.
Once it finds this text in a section name, it stops searching further and
displays the corresponding section. Should it fail to find the text at
all, it will again display the current section.
Should the text you enter be expected to be found in several sections, you
can display each of the matching sections in turn by typing [F2], "a", or
"A".
Help on Using Help
If you type [F12] when already in Help, the "Help" section of the
OPERATOR'S MANUAL will be displayed. This provides help for using the help
feature.
Moving Directly to the Encompassing Sections
The encompassing section may be reached, as described previously, by typing
[PAGE UP] sufficiently often. Alternatively, this encompassing section may
be called up directly by typing "Z" or [BACKSPACE].
Once you have reached the major section, typing "Z" or [BACKSPACE] once
more will result in a list of the major sections being presented as the
list of subordinate sections to the manual.
Changing Manuals
To change manuals, you must first move out through the encompassing
sections, by typing, "Z" or [BACKSPACE]. Once the list of major sections
has been reached, the list of manuals can be reached by typing "Z" or
[BACKSPACE] once more.
You may then move the cursor to the manual you wish to read, then type
[ENTER]. In response, either the list of the major sections of the
TECHNICAL MANUAL or the SOFTWARE MANUAL, or the section of the OPERATOR'S
MANUAL relevant to the window you are using will be displayed.
Exitting
To exit from help, type [ESCAPE]. The original window will be restored.
Changing the Colours
On the main menu, under "View", are three options, "Fonts", "Colours", and
"Function Keys". The "Colours" option allows you access to the
adjusting of the display colours.
This option is only provided if you have sufficient privilege. The
privilege level required is that that corresponds to the database field
known, within the software, as "GraphicPaletteColour", which is usually
presented with the prompt, "Palette description".
To change the colours, select this option. You will be requested to enter
the colour purpose, a "Symbolic Name" field. For editing instructions for
this type of field, please refer to the section titled:
"Symbolic
Name".
The software uses sixteen colours to display its information. For some
purposes, when it requires a particular colour to be presented, it will
refer to this colour, using a number from one to sixteen. More commonly,
the software will refer to the purpose it wants the colour for, and
retrieve the "colour number" - a number from one to sixteen - from a table.
The table has many more entries than the sixteen possible colours, however
each entry in the table is confined to the range one to sixteen. This is
the "colour purpose" table.
The first sixteen colour purposes are the sixteen colours themselves. This
inclusion of the colours themselves among the colour purposes allows the
definition of devices to select colours based on either their purpose, for
example "photocell on", or colour, for example red and yellow for fire and
grey for smoke.
If you wish to alter the shade of a colour, for example make the red a
little darker, you would select one of the first sixteen colour purposes.
However, if you wish to use a different colour for a particular purpose,
for example have the "Selected Backdrop" colour purpose use blue rather
than dark green, you would select one of the colour purposes beyond the
first sixteen.
Each of the sixteen possible colours has a single name, however, the shade
corresponding to the colour can be set individually for each user.
Similarly, each of the colour purposes has a single name, however, the
colour referenced by the colour purpose can be set individually for each
user.
So the first step is to select the colour purpose. As indicated already,
this may either be one of the first sixteen, which coincide with the
colours themselves, or more usually, one of the latter purposes.
Once the colour purpose is selected, there are four things that you can do:
select a different colour for the chosen purpose,
alter the shade of the colour that corresponds to the chosen purpose,
rename the colour that corresponds to the chosen purpose, and
rename the chosen purpose.
Select the Colour for the Chosen Purpose
Having selected a colour purpose (or one of the sixteen colours), you will
be presented with a "Set of Fields" and a number of buttons. The "Set of
Fields" includes only the colour assigned to chosen purpose (a "Symbolic
Name" field). Refer to the sections titled
"Set of Fields", and
"Symbolic
Name".
Do not alter the colour assigned to the first sixteen colour purposes, as
the colour purpose "red" must always be assigned the colour "red" and so
on.
The push-buttons allow you to alter
the shade of the colour,
the raw RGB components of the colour,
the name of the colour, and
the name of the colour's purpose,
Edit the Shade of the Colour
As well as being able to alter the colour assigned to the colour purpose,
you may also edit the hue of the colour assigned to the chosen purpose, by
pressing the "Edit palette" button. In response, you will be presented
with the "Color" dialogue window (featuring the usual american spelling
mistakes).
When you enter this dialogue window, all of your colours are written to the
"custom" colours in the set of squares at the lower left of this
dialogue window. You can now modify any or all of these colours.
You need first to select a colour into the "Color" square in the lower
portion of the dialogue window, just right of centre. This can be done a
number of ways, but first of all you should click on the custom colour you
wish to change. In response the custom colour will be surrounded by a
solid and a dotted square. Bear in mind, that each time you click on "Add
to Custom Colors" (see below) this selection will change - the dotted
square will be removed, and the solid square, even if it remains, will no
longer ensure that this will be the custom colour to which the colour will
be written.
The simplest way to set the colour in the "Color" square is by clicking on
one of the "basic" colours. This will move both the solid and dotted
squares from the custom color, but leave it selected, at least until you
click on "Add to Custom Colors" (see below).
Alternatively, you can create your own colour. You will find the range of
colours presented as a cube (or more correctly, an inverted triangular
pyramid), represented by the base square (presenting a triangle of colours)
and the "luminosity" column based on the selected point in the square.
To create your own colour, you can select a combination of hue and
saturation, by clicking in the large square, just to the right of the
"basic colors" boxes, then adjust the luminosity (brightness) of the
colour by clicking in the vertical strip to the right of this square.
There is also a pointer that can be dragged to adjust the luminosity.
The square is coloured with increasing hue in the horizontal direction
(from red, through green and then blue, and back to red again) and
increasing saturation in the vertical direction.
As you move from a point at the top of the square towards the base, the
"saturation" is decreased from 240 to 0. This means that the
quantities of red, green, and blue are uniformly increased so that they all
reach their full value at the base. At the base of the square the colour
is grey (and hence the reference to a triangle rather than a square).
The "luminosity" column allows you to darken the colour selected from the
square. The "luminosity" ranges from 240 representing the colour at the
selected point in the square, at full brightness, to 0 representing black
(and hence the reference an inverted triangular pyramid rather than a
triangular prism).
As you adjust the colour, a sample of the colour is presented in the
rectangle titled "Color", just below the "hue-saturation" square.
There are two ways to specify a point in the three dimensional colour
space. The first, and most obvious, is to specify the quantities of "red",
"green", and "blue", in the range from 0 to 255. The second is to
specify the values for "hue", "saturation" and "luminosity" as described
above.
In addition to being able to select a point in the "hue-saturation" square
and a level on the "luminosity" column, any of the six dimensions, "hue",
"saturation", "luminosity", "red", "green", and "blue" may be set
directly using the numeric entry fields. Note that as there are only three
orthogonal dimensions, changes to any one of the first three are reflected
by changes to the second three dimensions, and, conversely, changes to any
one of the second three are reflected by changes to the first three
dimensions.
By way of clarification, this is analogous to controlling your shower. In
this situation there are two orthogonal dimensions, which can be hot and
cold (which most of us use). Alternatively these orthogonal dimensions can
be temperature and pressure, which would probably be more user-friendly and
certainly more difficult to implement.
Having created a shade, you need to add it to the "custom" colours. You do
this by clicking on "Add to Custom Colors". As well as adding this to the
selected custom colour, it will advance the custom colour selection
(without indication), so you should then click again on the custom colour
of interest, to place the solid and dotted squares around it, before again
clicking on "Add to Custom Colors".
Having done this you can now click on "OK" and have all the "custom"
colours replace your current set of colours. Should you not wish this to
happen, click on "OK".
Should you so alter a colour, that its name no longer reflects its colour,
you should change both its name and the name of the corresponding colour
purpose from among the first sixteen colour purposes. Bear in mind that as
you change the colour, it only affects the presentation of that colour for
the currently logged-in user, however, the name of the colour is common to
all users, so you should try to reach a consensus with the other users
before renaming the colour. Refer to the sections titled:
"Edit
the Colour's Purpose".
Edit the Colour's Palette Directly
You may also edit the colour's Red, Green, and Blue components directly, by
pressing the "Edit palette directly" button. In response, you will be
presented with a "Set of Fields". The "Set of Fields" includes the three
colour components assigned to the colour (all "Numeric" fields). Refer to
the sections titled "Set of Fields", and
"Numeric".
Here the values for red, green, and blue are hexadecimal, ranging from 0 to
FFFF (65535 in decimal).
When finished editing these details, press [ESCAPE] to return to editing
the colour purpose details.
Edit the Colour's Name
You may also edit the colour's name, by pressing the "Edit colour name"
button. In response, you will be presented with a "Set of Fields". The
"Set of Fields" includes only the colour name (a unique "Name" field).
Refer to the sections titled: "Set of
Fields", and "Name".
The main reason for calling up this "Set of Fields" is to rename the colour
once the values have been so altered that the name no longer describes the
colour. Once you do this you should also alter the name of the
corresponding colour purpose (one of the first sixteen).
Bear in mind that when you changed the colour, it only affected the
presentation of that colour for the currently logged-in user, however, the
name of the colour is common to all users, so you should try to reach a
consensus with the other users before renaming the colour.
Edit the Colour's Purpose
This allows you to change the text used to describe this purpose, by
pressing the "Edit colour purpose" button. In response, you will be
presented with a "Set of Fields". The "Set of Fields" includes only the
colour's purpose (a unique "Name" field). Refer to the sections titled:
"Set of Fields", and
"Name".
Bear in mind when you changed the colour that was associated with this
purpose, it only affected the presentation of that colour purpose for the
currently logged-in user, however, the text used to describe the colour
purpose is common to all users, so you should try to reach a consensus with
the other users before changing the text that describes the colour purpose.
Finish Changing the Purpose
When done editing the colour purpose details, press [ESCAPE] to return to
the selection of a colour purpose.
Finish Changing the Colours
When done, press [ESCAPE] to exit colour change mode.
Select the Font
There are three font uses within the Movement Controller software.
The first use employs a font derived from an IBM-PC BIOS. This is required
when characters outside the standard ASCII range are used, for the large
character at the left of the uniform buttons on drawing areas, and for
"character" primitives used in the graphical representation of
user-defined devices. No alternative font may be selected for this use,
however you may edit this font. This font is referred to as the "Button"
font use.
The fonts for the second and third uses can be selected.
The second use requires a fixed-pitch (monospaced, typewriter) font and is
employed within the drawing areas and text entry fields. This font use is
referred to as the "Fixed" font use.
The font, for the third use, may be a proportional font. This font is
employed in all other instances. This font use is referred to as the
"Proportional" font use.
On the main menu, under "View", are three options, "Fonts", "Colours", and
"Function Keys". The "Fonts" option allows you select fonts for the
proportional and fixed uses in the displays, and to edit the font used for
the large letter in buttons.
To select a different font for either the proportional and fixed font uses
or to edit the font for the button use, select this option. If you have
sufficient privilege to edit both font uses, you will be then requested to
enter either an "F" for the "Fixed" font use or a "P" for the
"Proportional" font use. If you have only sufficient privilege
to edit one of these uses, it will be assumed that this is the font use you
will be editing. Of course, if you didn't have sufficient privilege to
edit either of these, the "FONT SELECT" would not have been displayed and
typing "F" would have had no effect.
Once it has been determined whether you are editing the "Fixed" or the
"Proportional" font use, the "Font Selection" dialogue window will be
presented.
These options are only provided if you have sufficient privilege. The
privilege level required is that that corresponds to the database fields
known, within the software, as "UserFixedPitchFont" and
"UserProportionalFont", which are usually presented with the prompts,
"User's font for fixed pitch", and "User's font for proportional"
respectively. The first of these sets the privilege level needed to obtain
access to the fixed font, and the second for access to the proportional
font. You will need to have access to both of these in order to have
access to the button font.
Edit Bitmap (Button) Font
This window presents all the characters in the font, arranged in ascii
numerical order in sixteen rows of sixteen columns (with sixteen
intervening blank columns). The first sixteen characters are arranged from
left to right along the forst row, and the second, similarly, along the
second row, an so forth.
The cursor position is presented by the change in background colour at a
character in the font (or between characters). The cursor can be moved
using the cursor keys or by clicking with the mouse.
To modify a character, move the cursor to the character of interest, then
type "Z", or click on the "Zoom" menu option, or double-click on the
character.
In response, the display will be repainted to present each pixel of the
character as a full character, using "#" to represent pixels that are
turned on and space to represent those that are turned off. You can now
edit the pixels of the character by positioning the cursor on the "#"
representing an unwanted pixel, or on the space where you wish there to be
a pixel, and then typing "T", or clicking on the "Toggle" menu option, or
double-clicking on the "#".
Should you attempt to turn on a pixel that is between character positions,
a message to this effect will be presented.
To return to the view of the complete font, type "Z", or click on the
"Zoom" menu option.
Changes to the font will come into effect immediately, however, they will
not be saved until you close this window.
Finish Selecting the Font
Irrespective of which page is presented, there are three buttons at the
bottom of the dialogue window, "OK", "Cancel", and "HELP".
When done, click on the "OK" button to save your selection and exit the
"Font Selection" dialogue window.
Should you wish to exit the "Font Selection" dialogue window without saving
your selection, click on the "Cancel" button.
If you were sufficiently privileged to have had a choice between the
"Fixed" and the "Proportional" font uses, you will be again be
given the opportunity to make this choice, otherwise you will have exited
from selecting the fonts. When presented with the choice of font uses, you
may exit from selecting the fonts by making a blank entry.
Specific Instructions
This section describes the operation of individual windows, using the
Movement Controller's own screen and keyboard.
This section should be read in conjunction with operating the windows to
which they relate.
References are made throughout this section to the subsections of the
"General Instructions" section. It should
only be necessary to look these references up the first time they are
encountered.
It is assumed that you are familiar with the subsections of
"General Instructions" section titled:
As knowledge of the remaining subsections is required, these references are
given.
The subsections within the "Specific Instructions"
section are arranged as the options of the main menu and its sub-menus are
arranged in the application.
Single Display Function Mode
There is an option to run the Movement Controller's operator interface in
single display-function mode, as described in the section of the TECHNICAL
MANUAL titled: "Operator
Interface in Single Display Function Mode".
In this mode, when the Movement Controller's operator interface software is
started, the main menu will not be presented. Instead the nominated
display-function will be presented, filling the display.
A dialogue box will also be opened, requiring that you enter your user name
(a "Symbolic Name" field) and password (a "Password" field). Please refer
to the sections titled:
"Symbolic
Name", "Password", and
"Modify
List of Users". You might also like to reference the section titled:
"Log Off".
Should you choose not to enter your name and password, the operator
interface will close.
Once you have entered your name and password, the dialogue box will close,
and you will have access to the nominated display-function.
To exit the operator interface, type [ESCAPE] or [ALTERNATE F4].
Main Menu
The main menu will be presented when the Movement Controller's operator
interface software is started. The options presented will depend upon the
privilege with which you have logged on, which before logging on will be
minimal, and upon the configuration that has been created and may be
altered by editing the database.
The main menu is contained in a horizontal menu bar presented at the top
left of the screen. Below is how the main menu would appear for the
maximum configuration (which is assumed throughout this document).
If you have opted for the more DOS-like interface, once you have logged in,
the main menu will be presented in a window, rather than in the horizontal
menu bar. If you escape out of this window, you will be returned to the
horizontal menu bar, from which you will need to make a selection before
being again presented with the menu in this window. For information on
configuring a user for the more DOS-like interface and its impact, please
refer to the section titled:
"Modify
List of Users".
This menu window may be returned to from most windows by typing [ESCAPE]
(or clicking on it) a sufficient number of times to wind back through
windows and sub-menus. In the default, maximum configuration (which is
assumed throughout this document), the menu will appear, roughly, as shown
below:
Movement Controller (C) Copyright 1998 to 2009 Woodgrove Digital Engineering
File View
┌───────────────────────┐
│New User │
│Operations████████████>│
│Reports >│
│Communication reports >│
│Configuration >│
│Maintenance >│
│Definition >│
│Special Functions >│
│Exit │
└─-─────────────────────┘
This menu provides for the user to log off, or to choose between the major
sub-menus, or to exit.
Log Off
This window is presented when the Log Off (or New User) option is selected
from the main menu.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
New User
keys usually active:
ESCAPE : exit current display ALT-H : show help screen
keys active when editing a record:
MINUS : erase field PLUS : restore field
HOME : move to first field END : move to last field
PAGE UP : move to previous record PAGE DOWN : move to next record
UP : previous field or symbol DOWN : next field or symbol
LEFT : erase previous character RIGHT : accept one character
ALT-Q : show function keys SHIFT F10 : force and edit symbol
(function keys may be set by pressing CTRL-F1, CTRL-F2 etc.)
keys active when viewing a file or menu:
ENTER : same function as first entry in legend (reverse blue band at top)
HOME : move to top of file END : move to bottom of file
PAGE UP : move back 19 records PAGE DOWN : move forward 19 records
UP : select previous record DOWN : select next record
LEFT : select previous field RIGHT : select next_field
CTRL-LEFT: display first fields CTRL-RIGHT: display last fields
(these allow the display of fields which would not otherwise fit)
WOODGROVE DIGITAL ENGINEERING NSW
designed and written by W.D.E. P/L
User t ███████████████████V
Please enter password a ████████████████████
This window enables you to enter your user name (a "Symbolic Name" field)
and password (a "Password" field). Refer to the sections titled:
"Symbolic
Name", "Password", and
"Modify
List of Users".
The body of this window contains some abbreviated instructions for general
control of the Movement Controller software.
There are four privilege levels, 0, 1, 2, and 3. When you log in without
entering a user name, you are given privilege level 0. This is intended to
provide you with access to view the system but not to control it.
If you enter your user name and then password, you will be given the
privilege level that has been assigned to you.
There is provision for users with privilege levels of 2 or higher to be
automatically logged out once a certain number of minutes have expired.
This is specified in the "Configuration Data" record, titled "Auto logout
if >=2 (minutes)". Please refer to the section titled:
"Configuration
Data".
Operations
This menu provides access to the windows involved in the display of live
data.
Below is a rough text-representation of this menu:
Movement Controller (C) Copyright 1998 to 2009 Woodgrove Digital Engineering
File View
┌─-─────────────────────┐
│New User │ ┌─-────────────────────────────────┐
│Operations████████████>│ │Heavy-unit-load conveyors█████████│
│Reports >│ │Conveyor alarms │
│Communication reports >│ │Stores diagram │
│Configuration >│ │Crane status and control │
│Maintenance >│ │Retrieve from stores by location │
│Definition >│ │Store expected loads │
│Special Functions >│ │Store loads from part-load picking│
│Exit │ │Retrieve wanted loads │
└─-─────────────────────┘ │Start movements within the store │
│Review loads being retrieved │
│Enter orders for picking │
│Cartons within the conveyor system│
│Replenish the pick areas │
│Carton conveyor system │
│Palletiser status and commands │
│Machine status display │
└─-────────────────────────────────┘
Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyors
The Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyors diagram provides a back-drop representing the
static features of the plant, against which the movement of loads is
displayed.
The loads are presented as either squares, representing a load of cartons,
with a thick edge of a different colour, representing the pallet on which
they are supported, or as a circle, representing a roll of news print, a
coil of steel, or a basket of cans, again with a thick edge of a different
colour. For instructions on selecting the presentation of loads, please
refer to the section titled:
"Presentation
of Loads".
The window will appear as shown overleaf:
When the diagram has been zoomed in, the square loads are presented as a
pallet with four boxes arranged within its perimeter.
The colours described in this and other sections of this manual, assume
that you have kept the default colours. If you have seen fit to change
these colours, you will need to make allowance for this when reading. For
more information, please refer to the section titled:
"Changing the
Colours".
Push Buttons
There are "push buttons" presented at the top of this window. The purpose
of these push buttons is indicated by the text within them. The first
letter of this text is larger and is to be typed to "press" the button.
The button may also be clicked with the mouse.
If the button is grey, it is available. If it is dark green with black
text it is unavailable. If it is light green, it is either available with
there being some particular reason that you might wish to "press" it or it
is "pressed".
There are also two operating-system-painted buttons. One of which,
"ESCAPE: exit", is for exiting from a "push button" selection or from
the window completely if no such selection is active. The other, "HELP",
calls up the help feature, refer to the section titled:
"Help".
Presentation of Loads
Loads in the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System are shown in the positions
indicated to Movement Controller by the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System
PLC.
The loads are coloured to indicate where they are destined. In
applications where the destination is not used, the colour may be used to
indicate whether the load is empty, not-empty or fiddled-with.
Further detail is available concerning the loads in the "load details
tablet" at the top left of the display. Please refer to the section
titled: "Control
of Loads".
If the loads are in a "collection", they will be coloured to reflect this,
and this condition will override all other colours. Please refer to the
section titled:
"Modifying
Several (KOLLECT TO EDIT)".
The representation of the loads can be set to resemble a pallet of cartons
or a reel of paper, according to the setting of the "Configuration Data"
record "Load square Circle/Big". Please refer to the section titled:
"Configuration
Data".
Presentation of the Plant
The Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System will be coloured to indicate whether it
is in automatic (red), disabled (grey), enabled for manual (yellow),
requested to run in the nominally east or south directions (green) or
requested to run in the nominally west or north directions (light blue).
For some sites, there is a provision to disable groups of conveyors. If a
group has been disabled, and the conveyors are in automatic, they will be
shown in the disabled colour (black). The disabling and enabling of groups
of conveyors is performed from the control mode of operation window.
Please refer to the section titled:
"The
Variables Intended to be Presented".
The immediate background of the conveyor is shown in mid-blue, unless the
conveyor (or a device associated with it) is in alarm, in which case it
will be shown in red, or is a destination for loads, in which case it will
be coloured the same colour as the loads that are directed to it.
Other devices associated with the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System are shown
in their approximate relative positions and in a way that reflects their
condition. These devices may include: a pallet dispenser, alignment bars,
a palletiser, the forklift floor loops, sizing stations, detierers, load
stands, gates, doors, sirens, lights, load stops, miscellaneous photocells,
emergency stops, the field supply and the MCR.
Details of Conveyor or Device
The status of a conveyor position or a device may be presented as text by
placing the cursor on the conveyor position or device in question, then
typing [SHIFT M] or right clicking the location with the mouse.
In response, the status of the plant item in question will be presented in
a window, with three buttons, "OK", "HELP", and "ESCAPE". To close this
window, activate the "ESCAPE" button.
The first line in a window corresponding to a conveyor, presents the
conveyor position name, while, for devices, the first line describes the
device type and the second line indicates the conveyor position to which it
is associated. The conveyor, with which a device is associated, needs to
be set to manual before the device itself may be manually controlled.
The status includes, mostly, the states of processed inputs. These inputs,
if single bit, will generally directly reflect the physical input, though
they may at times be inverted. Some single bit inputs may refer to
internal bits within the PLC, such as the colour bits for "fault lamps"
that are only capable of a single colour. Some single bit inputs may not,
at times, reflect the physical input at all, if the PLC needs to override
its true state so as to, for example, drive a load past its stop photocell
into a squaring end stop.
Some "single bit inputs" are reflections of outputs rather than inputs.
For example, the status of a "fault lamp" is a reflection of the output
turning it on.
The status of analogue inputs is commonly scaled from the raw input, and in
some instances might reflect the result of a computation based on two or
more physical analogue inputs.
Also included with the status is the manual control that is asserted at the
terminal in question over the conveyor or device.
If the location corresponds to a rise-fall conveyor, the status of the base
conveyor will be first presented, then upon activating the "OK" button, the
status of the rise-fall conveyor will be presented, then upon pressing the
"OK" button once more, the status of the rise-fall device (whether it
is up or down) is presented.
If the location corresponds to a turntable or elevator, the status of the
conveyor will be presented first, then upon activating the "OK" button, the
status relating to its turning or elevating will be presented.
If the location corresponds to more than one device, or to a conveyor and
one or more devices, then, if there is a conveyor position at this
position, its status will be first presented, otherwise, the status of one
of the devices. Then upon subsequent activations of the "OK" button, the
remaining devices will be presented in turn.
If a conveyor has been taken out of automatic by a terminal other than the
one you are using, then the location of that terminal will be presented, if
known.
If the plant item, on which you right click, has a special window for it
(for example: a crane), then in response to right clicking on its
representation, that window will be opened.
Devices for Americold
In addition to the standard photocells and rise-fall conveyors, the devices
added to this Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyors diagram include:
Access gate status
Emergency stops
Sirens
Various lamps
Detierers and their doors and consoles
Fork lift detection loops
Sizing stations
Board checkers
Controlled doors
Alignment bars
Pallet stands
Crane fork detection and other guard photocells
Fire alarms
Smoke detectors
Scissor lifts
Start/stop push-buttons
Barcode readers
Hold on MCR
Access Gate Status
The gate status is shown as an unbroken line if the gate is closed, or as a
broken line (resembling an open gate) if the gate is open and is coloured
differently depending upon whether it is open or closed.
If any gate is open, the cranes will be instructed to stop, once they have
completed their current operation, or sooner, if it is taking too long to
complete.
Emergency Stops
This status is displayed only if an emergency stop is off, and would then
be presented in the area corresponding to the location of the emergency
stop in question.
On the overview, this status is represented by the small letters "ES",
while, when zoomed in, it is represented by a large red "E" in a white
circle.
Sirens
When a siren is operating, an image, intended to resemble a klaxon, is
presented on both the overview and zoomed-in displays.
Various Lamps
This status is displayed only if the lamp is on. There are several lamps
about the conveyors system to indicate fault conditions or the presence of
pallets at the various outfeeds.
Detierers, Their Doors & Consoles
An attempt is made to provide all the status from the detierer, apart from
the state of its doors and console, within the area of the corresponding
conveyor. This is very crowded, and requires considerable experience to
interpret. As a result, I have provided this status via the "Machine
Status" display, which can be conveniently reached from here by zooming in
from the conveyor. Please refer to the section titled:
"Machine
Status Display".
The detierer door status is shown as an unbroken line if the door is
closed, or as a broken line (resembling an open door) if the door is open
and is coloured differently depending upon whether it is open or closed.
The detierer doors are shown in the location on either side of the
detierers.
The detierer console status is presented in the location next to the
detierer, corresponding to where the physical console is with respect to
the actual detierer. The detierer console always shows whether the
automatic/manual switch is in the automatic ("A") or manual ("M") position,
whilst the states of the push-buttons are only shown for those that are
pressed.
Fork lift Detection Loops
There are fork-lift detection loops at the infeed and outfeed conveyors
M01A, M06A, M40A, M51A, M56A, and M89A. These are presented on the
overview and zoomed-in displays as rectangles, in the "Disabled" colour if
inactive, and in the "Enabled" colour if active.
Sizing Stations
The sizing station status in only presented when zoomed-in.
All sizing station photocells and other optical devices are shown in the
"Photocell On" colour when obstructed, and the "Photocell Off" colour
when clear.
The sizing station consists of an optical plane (shown as a line across the
conveyor position), the rear and front trigger photocells (shown using the
standard photocell representation in the corresponding position along the
conveyor), the height check (shown as a small rectangle across the middle
of the conveyor), and the left and right side-check photocells, shown as
small circles on the corresponding side of the conveyor.
Board Checkers
The board checker status in only presented when zoomed-in.
All board checker photocells are shown in the "Photocell On" colour when
obstructed, and the "Photocell Off" colour when clear.
The board checker consists of a centre photocell (shown as a small
rectangle across the middle of the conveyor), and the left and right check
photocells, shown as small circles on the corresponding side of the
conveyor.
Controlled Doors
The controlled doors are each shown, when closed, as an unbroken line
across the conveyor and, when open, as two short lines at either edge of
the conveyor.
Alignment Bars
The alignment bars are located at conveyors M03A and M53A, and each consist
of two bars, which operate alternately. The image shows, for each
individual bar, whether it is back (a line along the corresponding side of
the conveyor), fully extended (a line somewhat in from that side of the
conveyor, with the rams showing), or in between.
Pallet Stands
The pallet stands are used to present pallets for pickup by the cranes or
to receive pallets from the cranes. If down they are not shown. If up,
they are shown, when zoomed-in, as two rectangles in the "Enabled" colour,
or, when looking at the overview, as two rectangles in the "Other Device"
colour (usually black). If neither up nor down, they are shown, when
zoomed-in, as two rectangles in the "Disabled" colour (usually grey), or,
when looking at the overview, as two sets of dots in the "Disabled" colour.
Crane Fork Detection, Guard Photocells
There are photocells positioned so that they look along the side of the
crane infeed and outfeed conveyors (and, for the other guard photocells,
along or accross the corresponding conveyor) so as to detect the presence
of the crane's forks (or other objects), and thereby prevent the conveyors
from running under these circumstances.
These are presented on both the overview and the zoomed-in displays, in the
"Photocell Off" colour when not blocked, and in the "Photocell On"
colour when blocked.
Fire Alarms
If the fire alarm (which has never been commissioned) is active, it will be
represented near conveyor M10C, by what is supposed to resemble flames.
Smoke Detectors
If a smoke detector is active, it will be represented near conveyor M36A or
M86A, by what is supposed to resemble smoke.
Scissor Lifts
Scissor lifts are used at the conveyor infeeds and outfeeds (except where
is interfaces to the cranes). Their status is presented, using the text,
"UP", if up, "DOWN" if down, and "BETWEEN" if neither up nor down.
Start/Stop Push-Buttons
There are two sets of start/stop push buttons. Their images are shown when
zoomed in. This image comprises the depiction of two buttons, one with a
red cap representing the stop and the other with a green cap representing
the start.
The stop push-button breaks the circuit when pressed, whilst the start
push-button makes the circuit when pressed. This arrangement is shown in
the image.
The start would be latched with a contact from the relay (not shown in the
image), so for the system to be running, the start needs to be pressed,
thereby energising the relay and latching the circuit on, and released,
while the stop needs to be left alone. Similarly, to stop the system, the
stop needs to be pressed, thereby denergising the relay and unlatching the
circuit, and released.
Barcode Readers
There are two barcode readers, one associated with conveyor M03A, and the
other with M53A. When the readers are asked to scan and you are zoomed-in,
there will be a series of red lines shown across the conveyor, intended to
depict the raster scan of the barcode readers.
The barcodes are relayed to Movement Controller via serial communications
ports P7 and P8 (Com 12 and Com 13) for the chiller (M53A) and freezer
(M03A) respectively. You can monitor this data transmission using the
"Monitor Communications" window. Please refer to the section titled:
"Monitor
Communications".
Hold on MCR
This output is used to prevent the fire doors from closing and the conveyor
electrical system from shutting down, in the event of a fire, until the
pallets are clear of the fire doors.
Anytime this output is energised, the text, "MCR HELD ON" will be presented
on the zoomed-in display, near conveyor M40A.
Stacks of Pallets
Rather than the loads at conveyors M01A, M02A, M51A, and M53A representing
single pallet loads, they, generally, represent stacks of pallets. The
number of pallets in these stacks are presented, in the "Disabled" colour,
as a single digit, on both the overview and zoomed-in displays, placed
alongside the corresponding conveyor position.
When zoomed-in, the load's sequence numbers for the first four pallets in
each stack are printed over the single digit.
Control of Loads
The cursor may be moved around the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System using
the cursor keys, or using [GREY PLUS] and [GREY MINUS] to jump to conveyor
positions that are in alarm. The cursor may also be moved by clicking the
mouse on the desired location.
As it reaches each possible load position, the details associated with the
position are displayed in the left hand portion of a grey rectangle that
will be referred to as the "load details tablet".
These details, and others associated with the load, may be presented more
explicitly and, if you have sufficient privilege, altered. In either case
you will, first need to present the details by, with the cursor on the
load, either clicking on "MODIFY ..." button or double-clicking on the load
or pressing "m" or [ENTER].
On some sites there may be a button commandeering the "m" for another
purpose, so there will not be presented a "MODIFY ..." button. If this is
the case, you will need to either double-click on the load or, with the
cursor on the load, type [ENTER].
Once selected, a "Set of Fields" is presented containing the load's
details. If you are sufficiently privileged you will be asked to confirm
that you wish to modify the details by pressing [F1].
The software may be configured so as to allow "generic" users. The concept
of "generic" users is discussed in the section titled:
"Modify
List of Users". If you are logged in as a generic user, then, after
pressing [F1] (as described above) you will be required to enter your
specific name (a "Symbolic Name" field) and password (a "Password" field)
before proceeding. For editing instructions for these types of fields,
please refer to the sections titled:
"Symbolic
Name", and "Password", while
for more information on the "Users" database, please refer to the section
titled: "Modify List
of Users".
After pressing [F1] and, if asked for a reason and/or your name and
password, entering those details, the "Set of Fields" will be presented in
a dialogue box for editing. After making the desired modifications, type
[ESCAPE]. Please refer to the section titled:
"Set of Fields".
Changing the load's destination field will result in the load being
redirected, if possible, to this new destination.
Additional Details for Americold
For Americold, the load details displayed in the tablet also include the
load's sequence number (the five character barcode).
Modifying Several (KOLLECT TO EDIT)
This button is only available if you have sufficient privilege. This
privilege level is specified in the "Configuration Data" record, titled
"Level: kollect records". Please refer to the section titled:
"Configuration
Data".
If you need to change one or more fields of several loads, you can make the
task a little quicker by first gathering the loads into a "collection".
When you, subsequently, go to modify a load's details, you will, instead,
modify the details of all loads in the collection.
The first step is to gather the loads into a "collection". You can do this
by moving the cursor to a load, then activating the "KOLLECT TO EDIT"
button (by clicking on it or typing "k"). The "KOLLECT TO EDIT" button
will be highlighted whenever there is at least one load in the collection.
Repeat this procedure for each other load you wish to include. If you type
"k" a second time for a given load, the load will be removed from the
collection.
When a load is included in the collection, its colour will be changed to
indicate this.
You can also achieve this using the [SHIFT] and the separate cursor keys.
If you hold down the [SHIFT] and type one of the separate cursor keys, the
cursor will be moved in the usual way, however, the load moved away from
and that moved to will both (if there are, indeed two) be added to the
collection, unless the load moved to is already in the collection, in which
case both loads will be removed from the collection. If there is no load
in the position moved to, then no action will occur.
You can also use the mouse to collect loads. To do this, click on the
first load to be included, and keeping the mouse button down, drag the
mouse over each other load to be included in the collection. Any load
visited, in this manner, a second time, will be released from the
collection.
Once the collection has been formed, when you attempt to edit a load
contained in the collection (as described in the section titled:
"Control
of Loads"), you will be presented, instead, with the details common to all
loads in the collection - all other fields will be set to blank or zero
(note that zero is not always presented as blank). Once you confirm that
you intend to modify these details, and are presented with the fields in a
dialogue window. Any changes you make are recorded, so that when you close
the dialogue window, you will be prompted to confirm that the change to
each modified field was intentional. Note that you get to confirm each
field but not each load affected, so you will need to be sure that you have
gathered the correct loads into the collection.
You can release all loads from the collection by typing [SHIFT K], or by
right clicking on "KOLLECT TO EDIT" or by right clicking on any load within
the collection.
Zoomed Display
The display may be zoomed into by typing "Z". The window now displays
fewer positions, (as many as will fit, given the size set for the window)
along with the status or positions of the sensors and other devices along
the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System.
The window will appear as shown overleaf:
The Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System will now be coloured to indicate
whether it is stopped in automatic (red), disabled (grey), enabled for
manual (yellow), running in the nominally east or south directions (green)
or running in the nominally west or north directions (light blue).
The immediate background of the conveyor is still shown in mid-blue, unless
the conveyor (or a device associated with it) is in alarm, in which case it
will be shown in red.
While in "zoomed" mode, the use of the cursor keys (and mouse) is altered.
These are now used to pan and tilt the view of the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor
System. The position at which the mouse is clicked will be shifted to the
centre of the view.
The push-button advertising the "Z" key will be changed from "ZOOM" to
"ZOOM OUT O'VIEW", indicating that a subsequent typing of the "Z" key
will return you to the overview display. However, provided that the
Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyors diagram had been called up via the menu system
(the usual way) and that it is not in push-button mode, when at the cranes
and other nominated positions, the button will display the text, "ZOOM TO
CRANES" or "ZOOM TO DISPLAY" respectively, indicating that a subsequent
pressing of the "Z" key will result in the appropriate window being
presented. To return to the overview, in spite of the button not
advertising "ZOOM OUT O/VIEW", type either [SHIFT Z] or [ESCAPE] or right
click on the "ZOOM ..." button.
To return to the overview display, type "Z", unless the corresponding
push-button no longer displays "ZOOM OUT O'VIEW", or [SHIFT Z] or [ESCAPE].
Push Button Control of the Plant: Overview
Push button control of the plant is restricted to those terminals listed in
the set of terminal locations and, there, flagged as allowing manual
control. Please refer to the section titled:
"Terminal
Locations".
To control the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System via the "push buttons", it
is necessary to first enter push-button mode by typing "P". To exit from
push-button mode, type "P" a second time.
This button is also only provided if you have sufficient privilege to
activate it. This privilege level is specified in the "Configuration Data"
record, titled "Level: conveyor manual". Please refer to the section
titled: "Configuration
Data".
Irrespective of whether the conveyor is in push-button or automatic mode,
all the interlocks will continue to apply to the operation of conveyors and
devices. As a result, you may find that a conveyor or device refuses to
respond to a push button.
When push-button control is enabled, the window will appear as shown
overleaf:
The conveyors can be controlled via push buttons by moving the cursor to a
load position on the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System, then typing "E" to
enable the conveyor, which includes this position, for push button
operation, or typing "M" to deselect it from automatic operation.
The conveyors for which "E" was typed will be shown in yellow, whilst those
for which "M" was typed will be shown in grey, leaving the remainder shown
in red for automatic. This assumes the system is running, otherwise all
conveyors will be shown in grey and of course none may operate.
Once the conveyors you wish to run are enabled (shown in yellow) you may
run these in one or more of the four orthogonal directions and in either
slow or fast speed, by pressing one or more (sequentially) of the function
keys [F1] to [F8]. The function of each of these keys is indicated by the
diamond that replaced the load details tablet when push-button mode was
entered.
Push buttons can be latching (meaning that you need to operate them once to
turn them on and a second time to turn them off) or momentary action
(meaning that they will remain on only so long as you hold them on).
Momentary action push buttons sport a circle to indicate that they need to
be held down.
Whether the [F1] to [F8] keys are latching or momentary action can be
toggled by typing the [F9] key, provided that you have sufficient privilege
to use this key. The latching/momentary-action setting is indicated by the
text and colour of the triangle in the upper left corner left by the
diamond; "LATCHING" on a grey background implies latching, while "HOLD ON"
on a light green background implies momentary action. If "F9: hold on" or
"F9: latching" is presented beneath this, you have sufficient
privilege to toggle this setting. The latching/momentary-action setting is
also indicated by the presence of the circles on the buttons corresponding
to the [F1] to [F8] keys.
The requested motions will be reflected in the diamond by colouring the
appropriate push buttons light green, and on the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor
System by colouring the appropriate conveyors either blue or green (light
or dark to distinguish between fast and slow speed respectively).
Pressing [SPACE] stops all push-button control.
To control the devices associated with the conveyors, the associated
conveyor must first be set to manual (shown in light grey or yellow). The
cursor should then be moved to the device (which might not be on the
conveyor). When the cursor is in the position of a device, the buttons to
control the device will appear. If these buttons are shown in dark green
with black text, the associated conveyor has not been selected for push
button control. The associated conveyor is in a straight line left, right,
above or below the depiction of the device on the window. You can right
click on the depiction of the device to find out the name of the conveyor
position with which it is associated.
Whether the push buttons for the device are latching or momentary action is
configurable on a device type basis. Please refer to the section titled:
"Enter
or Modify Device Types" and, in partiicular, its subsection titled:
"Defining
the Device Type's Output".
Control of Standard Devices
The standard devices are turntables, rise-fall (or transfer) conveyors, and
elevators.
The control of turntables is via two push-buttons, usually marked "90
DEGREES" and "0 DEGREES". Operating one of these will rotate the turntable
one way, whilst operating the other will rotate it back the other way.
When neither is activated, the turntable will stop rotating. When you
return the conveyor to automatic, the turntable will be instructed to
rotate to the position required by the automatic control.
The control of rise-fall conveyors and elevators is via two push-buttons,
usually marked "UP" and "DOWN". Operating "UP" will raise the conveyor,
whilst operating the "DOWN" will lower it. When neither is activated, the
conveyor will stop rising or lowering. When you return the conveyor to
automatic, the conveyor will be instructed to rise or lower to the position
required by the automatic control.
Controlling Devices for Americold
In addition to the standard rise-fall conveyors, the devices, which can be
controlled from this Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyors diagram, include:
Sirens
Various lamps
Detierers
Controlled doors
Alignment bars
Pallet stands
Scissor lifts
Barcode readers
Hold on MCR
Sirens
The sirens are associated with conveyors M38 and M86 (which will need to be
set to manual before you can operate the corresponding siren manually).
Once the conveyor has been set to manual, move the cursor to where the
representation of the siren would be displayed, and the "SIREN ON" and
"QUIET SIREN" buttons will be provided, allowing you to manually
control the siren.
Various Lamps
These need to be enabled for manual, by setting their corresponding
conveyor to manual. Once this has been done, move the cursor to where the
representation of the lamp would be displayed, and the push-buttons, "TURN
ON LAMP" and "DOUSE LAMP" are presented, and may be operated to turn the
lamp on or off.
Detierers
There is a local, physical, push-button console available for controlling
the detierers in manual, however, to save you that walk, most of the
functions provided by that console are also provided on this conveyor
diagram display. The operation of the conveyors has already been covered,
so what follows are the remaining controls, i.e. the raising and lowering
of the pegs and the inserting and withdrawing of them.
The detierers need to be enabled for manual, by setting their corresponding
conveyor to manual. Once this has been done, the push-buttons, "INSERT
PEGS", "WITHDRAW PEGS", "RAISE DETIERR" and "LOWER DETIERR" are presented,
and may be operated to work the detierer manually.
This can also be done using the "Machine Status" display, which can be
conveniently reached from here by zooming in from the conveyor. Please
refer to the section titled:
"Machine
Status Display".
Of particular interest, is that, when the detierer's pegs are at the top
and the physical console's conveyors reverse push-button is operated, the
detierer resets itself, allowing you to recommence the detiering operation
with a clean slate.
Controlled Doors
These need to be enabled for manual, by setting their corresponding
conveyor to manual. Once this has been done, the push-buttons, "OPEN
DOOR", and "CLOSE DOOR" are presented, and may be operated to work the
door manually.
Alignment Bars
These need to be enabled for manual, by setting their corresponding
conveyor to manual. Once this has been done, the push-buttons, "LEFT
ALIGN", "RIGHT ALIGN", and "OFF AL. BAR" are presented, and may be
operated to work the bars manually.
Pallet Stands
These need to be enabled for manual, by setting their corresponding
conveyor to manual. Once this has been done, the push-buttons, "RAISE
STAND", and "LOWER STAND" are presented, and may be operated to work the
pallet stand manually.
Scissor Lifts
These need to be enabled for manual, by setting their corresponding
conveyor to manual. Once this has been done, the push-buttons, "UP", and
"DOWN" are presented, and may be operated to work the lifts manually.
Barcode Readers
These need to be enabled for manual, by setting their corresponding
conveyor to manual. Once this has been done, the push-buttons, "BARCODE
READ", and "QUASH READ" are presented, and may be operated to instruct the
barcode reader to start or stop scanning.
The barcodes are relayed to Movement Controller via serial communications
ports P7 and P8 (Com 12 and Com 13) for the chiller (M53A) and freezer
(M03A) respectively. You can monitor this data transmission using the
"Monitor Communications" window. Please refer to the section titled:
"Monitor
Communications".
Hold on MCR
This need to be enabled for manual, by setting its corresponding conveyor
(M40) to manual. Once this has been done, move the cursor to where the
representation of the output would be displayed, and the push-buttons,
"HOLD MCR ON" and "RELEASE MCR" are presented, and may be operated to
turn the output on or off.
Push Button Control of the Plant: Zoomed
Push-button control of the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System is also
available in the "zoomed" display mode. You can achieve the zoomed
push-button mode by either typing "Z" when in push-button mode, or by
typing "P" when in the "zoomed" display mode.
To exit from the zoomed push-button mode and return to the normal "zoomed"
display mode, type "P", or click on "P-BUTTON CONTROL" again.
Alternatively, to exit from the zoomed push-button mode and return to the
overview push-button mode, type [SHIFT Z], [ESCAPE] or click on "ESCAPE:
exit", or right-click on the "ZOOM..." button. In most cases, you can also
type "Z" or click on "ZOOM OUT O'VIEW", however, in certain positions this
button changes its text and function allowing you to open a window
associated with the device presented at this position.
Irrespective of whether the conveyor is in push-button or automatic mode,
all the interlocks will continue to apply to the operation of conveyors and
devices. As a result, you may find that a conveyor or device refuses to
respond to a push button.
When zoomed push-button control is enabled, the window will appear as shown
overleaf:
Once in zoomed push-button mode, the cursor will be represented by
"telescope cross hairs", which remain in the centre of the view; the
Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System is moved rather than the cursor. Therefore
the use of the cursor keys (and mouse) is altered. These are now used to
pan and tilt the view of the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System. The position
at which the mouse is clicked is shifted to the centre of the view.
The conveyors can be controlled via push buttons by moving the cursor to a
load position on the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System, then typing "E" to
enable the conveyor, which includes this position, for push button
operation, or typing "M" to deselect it from automatic operation.
The conveyors for which "E" was typed will be shown in yellow, whilst those
for which "M" was typed will be shown in grey, leaving the remainder shown
in red for automatic. This assumes the system is running, otherwise all
conveyors will be shown in grey and of course none may operate.
Once the conveyors you wish to run are enabled (shown in yellow) you may
run these in one or more of the four orthogonal directions and in either
slow or fast speed, by pressing one or more (sequentially) of the function
keys [F1] to [F8]. The function of each of these keys is indicated by the
diamond displayed to the left of the push buttons at the top of the window.
Push buttons can be latching (meaning that you need to operate them once to
turn them on and a second time to turn them off) or momentary action
(meaning that they will remain on only so long as you hold them on).
Momentary action push buttons sport a circle to indicate that they need to
be held down.
Whether the [F1] to [F8] keys are latching or momentary action can be
toggled by typing the [F9] key, provided that you have sufficient privilege
to use this key. The latching/momentary-action setting is indicated by the
text and colour of the triangle in the upper left corner left by the
diamond; "LATCHING/hold on" on a grey background implies latching, while
"latching/HOLD ON" on a light green background implies momentary
action. If "F9" is presented beneath this, you have sufficient privilege
to toggle this setting. The latching/momentary-action setting is also
indicated by the presence of the circles on the buttons corresponding to
the [F1] to [F8] keys.
The requested motions will be reflected in the diamond by colouring the
appropriate push buttons light green. The requested motions are not
reflected by the conveyors in zoomed push button mode; instead the actual
running status is shown by colouring the appropriate conveyors either blue
or green (light or dark to distinguish between fast and slow speed
respectively).
Typing [SPACE] stops all push-button control.
To control the devices associated with the conveyors, the associated
conveyor must first be set to manual (shown in light grey or yellow). The
cursor should then be moved to the device (which might not be on the
conveyor). When the cursor is in the position of a device, the buttons to
control the device will appear. If these buttons are shown in dark green
with black text, the associated conveyor has not been selected for push
button control. The associated conveyor is in a straight line left, right,
above or below the depiction of the device on the window.
Deleting and Creating Loads
A load may be deleted or created by moving the cursor to the position and
typing "D" or [DELETE] or "I" or [INSERT] respectively and confirming with
[F1].
The software may be configured so as to allow "generic" users. The concept
of "generic" users is discussed in the section titled:
"Modify
List of Users". If you are logged in as a generic user, then, after
pressing [F1] (as described above) you will be required to enter your
specific name (a "Symbolic Name" field) and password (a "Password" field)
before proceeding. For editing instructions for these types of fields,
please refer to the sections titled:
"Symbolic
Name", and "Password", while
for more information on the "Users" database, please refer to the section
titled: "Modify List
of Users".
When a load is deleted it is moved from the location into a special logical
location referred to as "Deleted". This special location is displayed in
the load details tablet.
When the next load is deleted, it replaces the load that was previously in
the "Deleted" location, that load is now "really deleted". The load in the
"Deleted" location can also be deleted by the standard means, thereby
"really deleting" it.
When a load is inserted into the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System or onto a
crane or a trolley or into the stores diagram (refer to the section titled:
"Stores
Diagram"), if the "Deleted" location contains a load, that load will be
moved to the position where the load is being inserted. If the "Deleted"
location does not contain a load, a load will be created at the position.
Using the "Deleted" location, a load may be moved from one position to
another by first deleting the load from the first position (moving it to
the "Deleted" location) and then inserting it at the second location
(moving it from the "Deleted" location).
When moving a load, by deleting and inserting it, it is most important that
you stop the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System to prevent other loads,
reacting to the deletion of the load in question, driving into it, or
rise-fall conveyors operating, or another load transferring to the position
into which you intend to reinsert the load in question.
If a number of loads need to be relocated, they should be moved one at a
time; deleting the first and reinserting it then deleting the second and so
forth.
Deleting Loads Unknown to the System
When deleting loads, the Movement Controller first finds the load at the
designated conveyor position within its database. If it fails to do this
the load within the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System is considered to be a
"ghost" load, since it does not correspond to any information on loads
within the database. In these circumstances it is harder for the Movement
Controller to delete the load, since it can not check that the load being
deleted is the load on which the operator had clicked (since the
Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System is moving loads about).
Under these circumstances, the Movement Controller will delete any load tag
that it finds at this conveyor position within the conveyor PLC.
Prior to deleting a "ghost" load, you will be advised of this, and should
only proceed if you are satisified that the load is not likely to move
while the deletion attempt is being made.
Presentation of the Cranes
A crane will be shown at either the crane pickup/deposit position, or away
from it. It will show whether the crane is in alarm or not and whether it
is enabled for automatic or retrievals by the colour of the crane body
(blinking red/blue implies alarm, black implies that automatic is disabled,
blue that retrievals are disabled, and orange implies no alarm) and whether
it is in automatic, manual or out of service by the colour of the forks or
the border of the load (red implies automatic, yellow implies manual, and
grey implies out of service, but not in manual). For details on turning on
and off automatic or just retrievals, please refer to the sections titled:
"Turning
Off and On Automatic Commands", and
"Turning
Off and On Retrieval Commands".
The crane is deemed to be in alarm if it reports an alarm, or it is idle
and its loaded status is not as expected by the Movement Controller.
The crane must not only be in automatic but must also be communicating for
it to be presented as in automatic.
When zoomed in, it will also show the state of its load sensing, load
off-centre, bin occupied and height check photocells and the extension of
its forks and, if the forks are not centred, whether at high stop or not;
if at high stop, a load will be shown at the forks extension, otherwise the
forks will be shown.
If the forks are centred, the crane will instead show whether the
computer's inventory has it holding a load.
Also, when zoomed in, the colour of the forks (or the border of the load)
will be red if in automatic, yellow if in manual or grey if otherwise out
of service.
Keep No-Reads at Scanner (HOLD NO READ)
Normally, if a load has failed barcode scanning, it will proceed through
sizing and then be diverted down the reject lane. After the load has been
scanned, and before it proceeds to the sizing station, it is in a
convenient position for its sequence number to be read.
So, you have the option to have loads that either failed scanning, or were
found to have a barcode that has not been supplied to the Movement
Controller from the host_computer, to wait at the barcode scanning
location for manual entry of the details.
If the "HOLD NO READ" button is presented in the "Unavailable" colouring
(dark green with black text), then this feature is disabled, however,
contrary to standard button behaviour, this button can still be operated
(by typing "H") to enable this feature. After operating this button in
this condition, you will be asked to confirm that you wish the feature
enabled by pressing the [F1] key. Because this button is "unavailable",
you will not be able to use the mouse to operate this button whilst in this
state.
If the "HOLD NO READ" button is presented in the "Available" colouring
(grey), then the feature is enabled, however there are no loads waiting at
barcode readers. If you operate the button in this situation you will be
asked to confirm that you want the feature disabled by pressing the [F2]
key.
If, on the other hand, the "HOLD NO READ" button is coloured light green,
then you will find that there is a load waiting at a barcode reader, and,
in fact, the text of the button will have changed to "HOLDING NO READ". If
you operate the button at this time, you will be advised of the situation -
whether there is a load waiting at the chiller or the freezer or both, and
whether the problem is that the barcode could not be read or that the
barcode read has not been supplied to the Movement Controller.
If there are bad barcode reads at both the chiller and freezer, then you
will be asked, first of all, to nominate which load you wish to deal with.
When presented with this dialogue window, you should select either
"Chiller" or "Freezer".
If there was only the one load, or you have selected the load with which to
deal, then you will be presented with two or, in the case of a no-read,
three options. These options are:
"Modify load":
You will be presented with a dialogue window, into which
you must enter a barcode and a destination, and, in order to keep Americold
happy, a load number.
"Reject load":
There is no further dialogue required; the load will
proceed to the corresponding reject.
"Select barcode":
This option is provided only if the barcode could not be
read and barcodes have been supplied for the detierer in question. These
barcodes are listed in this dialogue window, so you can tell immediately
whether it would be worthwhile selecting this option. If you do select
this option, you will be then asked to select the barcode, by activating
the corresponding button.
Retrieve Empty Pallets (FETCH EMPTIES)
There are regular means to retrieve empty pallets from the pickface, as
described in the section titled:
"Retrieve
from Stores by Location (new)". However, this feature is intended to make
this operation more convenient.
This button is enabled by setting the "Configuration Data" record, titled
"Fetch empty ok/auto", to "O" meaning that the operator is required to
OK the preparation of a schedule for the retrieval of the empty pallets
from the pickface. Please refer to the section titled:
"Configuration
Data".
You also need to be logged on in order for this button to be presented.
If the racking photocells report that there is something in a location that
is used for the return of empty pallets from the pickface for a particular
crane, and there is no manual retrieval schedule, referencing such
locations on that crane, then this button will be highlighted.
On the other hand, should there be no cranes satisfying this condition,
then if there are cranes for which there are manual retrieval schedules
that reference such locations, then this button will be lit (differently
highlighted) to indicate that such retrievals are underway.
Otherwise the button will be shown as disabled.
Anytime the button is highlighted (showing that there are stacks of empty
pallets that need attention), then the button can be operated (by typing
"F" or clicking on it). In response, you will be advised which
cranes have such stacks and be given the options of:
No cranes
Do nothing about it.
Chiller cranes
Having a manual retrieval schedule created (if necessary) to retrieve from
all such locations in the chiller.
Freezer cranes
Having a manual retrieval schedule created (if necessary) to retrieve from
all such locations in the freezer.
Select cranes
Having manual retrieval schedules created (if necessary) to retrieve from
all such locations in each of the cranes that are then nominated. In
response to selecting this option, you will be asked to nominate the cranes
that the schedule(s) are to cover. You will need to specify the cranes as
described in the section titled:
"Crane
and Palletiser Alarms".
All cranes
Having manual retrieval schedules created (if necessary) to retrieve from
all such locations in both the chiller and the freezer.
Once schedules have been created, they can be monitored, modified, or
deleted using the "Retrieve from Stores by Location (new)" window, as
described in the section titled:
"Retrieve
from Stores by Location (new)".
Reject Control (1/2 REJECT FREEZER/CHILLER)
These buttons are enabled by setting the "Configuration Data" record,
titled "No reject automatically", to "N" for "No reject". Please refer to
the section titled:
"Configuration
Data".
If this record has been so set, then when pallets arrive at the reject
junction, they will wait, and the appropriate one of these buttons will be
highlighted.
In response to activating one of these buttons, you will be presented with
a dialogue window, detailing the reasons for rejecting the pallet, and
allowing you to elect to infeed or reject the pallet.
Fast Putaway (GO ANY-WHERE)
When infeeding, and all loads are destined to a single crane, the system
will be not utilised to its full capacity, since this one crane becomes a
bottle-neck.
You can relieve this situation, in either the freezer or chiller conveyors
by operating the "GO ANY-WHERE" button. When the "go anywhere" function is
in force, any pallets that are destined for regular store locations (not
flow-through locations) will be redirected to a crane that is less snowed
under.
After typing "G", or clicking on the button, you will be asked whether you
wish to enable or disable this function for the freezer or chiller cranes.
You must first click of "Freezer" (or type "F") to select the freezer, or
click of "Chiller" (or type "C") to select the chiller. You will then be
asked whether you wish this turned on or off.
If this function is in force for either the chiller or freezer, the button
will be lit. The second line of text on the button will change to indicate
whether it is the chiller, freezer, or both that have this function
enabled.
Trunk Line Purge (TRUNK PURGE)
When the arrangement of loads along the inside trunk line has become
confused, you may, rather than attempt to correct the situation by deleting
and inserting loads, send all these loads to the outfeed.
Prior to invoking this function, you should ensure that all loads along
this trunk line and out to the outfeed are either completely on the
conveyors in this path, or clear of them. Failure to check this will cause
loads to twist and collide, damaging the product and the Heavy-Unit-Load
Conveyor System.
Once you have done this, you need to type "T" to turn on the "TRUNK PURGE"
push-button. In response, the system will advise you of your
responsibility to check the trunk line and request that you type "F" or "C"
to confirm whether you wish to purge the freezer or the chiller, or to type
[ESCAPE] otherwise.
All conveyors will need to run for a couple of minutes, however as
conveyors need to stop as the loads are being taken from the outfeed, the
time for the purge to run to completion will be considerably longer than
this couple of minutes.
Once this period has expired, the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System will
return automatically to its normal operation.
Outfeeding Loads (OUTFEED LOAD)
A load may be redirected by the operator to any location within the store,
or to the reject or outfeed. As the outfeed is a common destination for
the operator to direct the load to, a push-button has been provided for
this.
First, position the cursor on the load to be redirected, then type "O" to
turn on the "OUTFEED LOAD" push-button, then confirm your intention (as you
will be prompted to do) by pressing [F1].
Multilevel Conveyor Systems (LEVEL CHANGE)
For multilevel Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor Systems, the upper levels may be
displayed by typing "L" (turning on the "LEVEL CHANGE" button). This
results in the lower levels being shown in orange. To return to the lower
level display, type [SHIFT L], or "L" sufficiently often to cycle around to
it.
There are options that can be set to cause the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor
System to be presented as though it were a single level (sensible where
there is no interaction - such as elevators - between the various levels),
or to allow the "LEVEL CHANGE" button to cycle around to a summarising
position.
The text of the "LEVEL CHANGE" button will be "LEVEL 1 CHANGE" when the
button is selecting level 1 (off), "LEVEL 2 CHANGE", when selecting level
2, "LEVEL 3 CHANGE" when selecting level 3, and so on, and, finally, "LEVEL
* CHANGE" when selecting the summary.
This option can be set via the "Configuration Data" record, titled
"Flat/Extra conv level". Please refer to the section titled:
"Configuration
Data".
Displaying Conveyor Alarms (ALARM LIST)
From the overview display, you may enter the conveyor alarms window by
typing "A". The push button advertising this will be in flashing if there
is an alarm.
If the cursor is positioned at a conveyor position that is shown to be in
alarm at the time you type "A", the conveyor alarms window will be
restricted to displaying only those alarms associated with this conveyor
position.
When you exit the conveyor alarms window, you will be returned here.
Changing the Appearance (EDIT DIAGRAM)
The conveyors and the load details tablet on the overview may be moved by
typing "E" to enter edit mode (turning on the "EDIT DIAGRAM" button, and
renaming it "END EDIT DIAGRAM"), then moving the cursor to the conveyor to
be moved (or the tablet), then using [CONTROL UP], [CONTROL DOWN], [CONTROL
LEFT], and [CONTROL RIGHT] to relocate the selected item. Type "E" to exit
edit mode.
The overview (non-zoomed) can be expanded in the "X" and "Y" directions by
typing "X" or "Y" respectively. Similarly, the overview can be contracted
by typing [SHIFT X] or [SHIFT Y] respectively.
Additionally, finer adjustments to the expansion in the "X" and "Y"
directions can be achieved, simultaneously for both directions, by typing
[CONTROL X] to expand, in both directions, slightly or [CONTROL Y] to
contract slightly.
The overview and zoomed displays may be rotated in 90 degree increments by
typing "R" for one direction and [SHIFT R] for the other.
The zoomed conveyors can be shown as either roller or chain conveyors. To
change this option for a given conveyor position, first enter the zoomed
display, then enter edit mode by typing "E", then locate the cross hairs on
the conveyor position to be changed, then type "R" for rollers or "C" for
chains.
To change the fonts, refer to the section titled:
"Select the Font".
Conveyor Mode (CONVEYOR MODE)
Typing "C" when at the overview display (turning on the "CONVEYOR MODE"
button) will replace the load details tablet with a description of the
conveyor's operating mode. The push button advertising this will be shown
in light green if the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System is not in
full-automatic mode.
To return to the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyors diagram, press any key other
than "Z" and keys such as [SHIFT], [CONTROL], [ALTERNATE] et cetera.
Provided that the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyors diagram had been called up via
the menu system (the usual way), the "Z" button will be highlighted and
display the text, "ZOOM TO CONTROL", indicating that by pressing the "Z"
key will result in the control mode of operation window being displayed.
Refer to the section titled:
"Control
Mode of Operation".
Archive Log Files (FLOPPY ARCHIVE)
This function may be disabled, and the "FLOPPY ARCHIVE" button removed from
the display by setting the"Configuration Data" record, titled "No floppy
archive". Please refer to the section titled:
"Configuration
Data".
Typing "F" when at the overview display (turning on the "FLOPPY ARCHIVE"
button) will replace the load details tablet with a list of files requiring
archiving. If some of these files are about to lose un-archived data the
push button advertising this will be shown in light green.
In response, the load details tablet will be replaced by another presenting
the list of log files, each accompanied by an asterisk. The asterisk will
be highlighted if there is something to be archived, whilst the text will
only be highlighted if the log file is more than 80% full.
You can archive a log file by moving the cursor to one of the highlighted
asterisks and typing either [RETURN] or [ENTER]. You may also double-click
the mouse on the desired asterisk to archive the log file.
This will present you with the appropriate archive window, such as "Archive
List of Events to Floppy Disc". Refer to the sections titled:
"Archive
List of Events to Floppy Disc" et cetera.
It is not mandatory that the log files be archived; this is a decision that
can be made depending upon the anticipated benefit these archives may have.
You may decide only to archive certain log files or only to archive a log
file during some troublesome period.
Pick Face Loads Not Seen
As a load is placed in a pick face location, by a crane, the Movement
Controller waits to see that the load has rolled forward sufficiently to be
seen by the pallet detection system photocells (PDS). The photocells
should be adjusted so that they can see the pallet as soon as it is placed
in the pick back location, or else the pallet is expected to roll forward
so that it can be seen by the photocell.
Once the crane has completed its deposit into the back location of a pick
face, the load is allowed ten seconds to be detected by the PDS. This ten
seconds is adjustable via the database variable, "Secs for PDS to see";
please refer to the section titled:
"Configuration
Data". When one or more loads have failed to have been detected by the PDS,
then a dialogue box will be opened, presenting the operator with a list of
locations where the load has failed to be detected by the PDS.
In addition to this message being presented, an entry will be made in the
event log file for each such location. Please refer to the section titled:
"Event
Log Historic Report".
Checking the Linked Lists
This check is performed automatically upon selection of the Heavy-Unit-Load
Conveyors diagram from the menu. Normally all you might notice would be a
flicker before the window appears, unless problems are found, in which case
it will present a message corresponding to the list in which it found
problems, along with a request that you note what you have been doing and
contact Greg Wood.
If you have sufficient privilege, you will be asked whether you wish the
Movement Controller to attempt to correct the problem. It is probably
prudent to first stop the crane and the conveyors, then exit all software
and save a copy of the database. Once you have done this, run the
software, call up this window and enter "Y" in reply to the question.
Then check that everything appears to be correct before restarting the
system.
Checking the Communications Ports
This check is performed automatically upon selection of the Heavy-Unit-Load
Conveyors diagram from the menu. It checks that the communications ports
needed to present the information on this diagram have been opened and that
they are still accessible.
If all is as it should be, there will be no report, however, should it find
something wrong, a dialogue box will be presented, indicating that this has
happened.
For these ports not to be open or accessible, would be a rare occurrence
with communications ports that have been installed directly into the
computer.
On the other hand, if these ports are presented to the software via a
terminal server, from some remote location, then there is a real
possibility that, due primarily to network problems, one of the channels of
the terminal server might be out of action.
When you encounter this problem, it will usually be necessary to cycle the
power to the terminal server, and to stop the main Movement Controller
application and restart it. For information on stopping and restarting the
main Movement Controller application, please refer to the section of the
TECHNICAL MANUAL titled: "Installing
and Running the Software".
This check is also performed from other windows, when opened or switched to
a device on a different communications port, to check the communications
ports needed for those windows as well.
Conveyor Alarms
After selecting "Conveyor Alarms" from the Operation Menu, the
Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System alarms window will be presented.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Computer system alarms
Select Change Restrict Where Match Expand Insert Kollect First Last
Conveyor Alarm Alarm # Old
94|Turntable T11 to T12 transfer watchdog |T11 |A| 2| 1^
161|Conveyor A2 indexing forward transfer watchdog |A2-5|A| 2| 1█
272|Turntable T1 conveyor motor isolated |T1 |A| 2| 1█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
V
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
Database: Conveyor Alarms
Conveyor alarm s Turntable T11 to T12 transfer watchdog
This window shows the currently active Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System
alarms, arranged one alarm per line. This window shows one alarm per line,
presenting, at least, the following information:
the alarm number, which is used by the PLC and computer software,
the description assigned to it by the computer (a unique "Name" field),
the individual conveyor to which it has been assigned (a "Symbolic Name"
field),
whether it is in alarm (a "Character" field),
the number of times this alarm has occurred in the current and previous
reporting periods ("Numeric" fields, also refer to:
"Conveyor
Alarm Summary Report"),
the fault category (a "Symbolic Name" field - also refer to:
"Fault
Assistance" ), and
whether this alarm has been enabled or not (a "Character" field),
whether occurences of this alarm are to be recorded in the event log and
summary reports (a "Character" field) (not all sites),
whether this alarm may be reset by an operator (a "Character" field) (not
all sites).
The window is restricted to active alarms, however, if alarms deactivate
they will remain displayed (in a different colour) until the window is
repainted, in response to you typing "U" or clicking on "Update". If
alarms occur while observing the window, they will not be written to the
window until you cause it to be repainted.
All features provided by the "Maintenance Viewing Data" windows except
editing an alarm, are active. These features are:
moving the window across the records.
highlighting a particular alarm for individual attention.
highlighting a particular field for individual attention.
If you have sufficient privilege, these alarms may be cleared manually, by
highlighting the appropriate line and typing [ENTER] or by double clicking
on the appropriate line, in order to select the alarm, then typing the
[DELETE] key, in order to clear the alarm.
When the alarm is selected, a generic explanation may be presented along
with the alarm, explaining the sorts of things that are likely to have
caused the alarm, and whether there is any use in resetting the alarm.
This should be read before pressing the [DELETE] key.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Reset conveyor alarm
Transfer watchdog alarms occur when a load fails to reach the next
photocell in time. The possible causes include:
1. Motor failing to operate - either jammed or stalled or failure
of a control relay or contactor.
2. Load jammed - not moving with the conveyor.
3. Photocell failing to see load - rare unless stretch wrap used.
The cause should be established then the alarm may be reset allowing a
further attempt to be made to advance the load.
╒══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╕
│Conveyor alarm s Load transferring from S3-5 was not detected in t│
│Alarm conveyor a S3-5 │
│Conveyor alarm state <A>a A │
│# conveyor alarms <0-999> │
│Old # conveyor alarms<0-999> │
│Fault category s Transfer watchdog │
│Conveyor alarm logging <N>a │
╘══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
╔══════════════════╗┌──────────────────┐┌──────────────────┐┌──────────────────┐
║ OK ║│ HELP ││ ESCAPE: exit ││DELETE:reset alarm│
╚══════════════════╝└──────────────────┘└──────────────────┘└──────────────────┘
Conveyor system alarms can be broadly grouped into either motion watchdog
alarms or status alarms.
A motion watchdog alarm is latched when an action has not completed in the
allowed time and prevents the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System from
continuing with that action until the alarm has been reset. Examples of
motion watchdog alarms are the transferring of a load from one location to
another and the feedback of a motor contactor.
A status alarm is active while a PLC input remains in an unexpected state
for normal operation. The alarm will be removed once the PLC input agrees
with the expectation of the PLC. Examples of status alarms are photocell
conflicts and emergency stops. If a photocell is blocked when it should
not be or is clear when it should not be, the alarm is raised. Such an
alarm can be cleared by removing the obstruction, advancing the load under
manual control to the photocell, or adjusting the inventory of the
Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System. There is no point in clearing alarms of
this sort.
A common alarm is the failure of the system to transfer a load from one
position to another. To transfer a load the system attempts to run the
conveyor, from which the load is to be moved, and the conveyor, to which
the load is to be moved. Typically, the transfer is deemed to be completed
when the photocell at the position, from which it is to be moved (the
source), is cleared and the photocell at the position, to which it is to
reach (the destination), is blocked.
In this instance, a transfer alarm will result if either the source
photocell remains blocked or the destination remains clear after the
transfer has been running sufficiently long to expect that the load has
transferred.
So when this alarm results, the status of the photocells should be checked,
to see the situation through the eyes of the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor
System, and the physical situation should be checked. Look for stretch
wrap hanging from the load, cartons fallen from the load, loose boards on
the pallet, photocells out of alignment or damaged et cetera. Should you
be unable to ascertain the cause of the alarm, remain and watch the
transfer as you have someone reset the alarm.
Communications Failure Alarms
As well as the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System alarms, this display
presents whole-system-related alarms, such as the failure of the Movement
Controller to successfully communicate to a remote device, such as a PLC.
There is no point in resetting alarms of this sort.
The text of these alarms is set by the communications logic, so, should you
decide to edit this text, your edits may be lost when the alarm is raised.
If the device connected to this port is not responding at all, then the
text of the alarm will be something like "Failed to communicate to
communications port ...". If it succeeded in communicating to a
DataHighway modem, but that modem failed to communicate to the end device,
then the text of the alarm will show the diagnostic data that is being
returned by the modem. Finally, if there is no problem with the
communications, but there is a bad indication being presented in the PLC's
status data file, then that condition will be described. In the last
instance, the system may still be fully operational.
In the cases where those PLCs are Allen-Bradley PLC5 or SLC-500, then those
alarms are also used to present bad status from the corresponding PLC.
When these alarms report bad status from the PLC, rather than an actual
communications failure, the text of the alarm will be altered to reflect
this.
Some of the status that is reported, in this fashion, are the PLC's minor
faults. When these are presented, the individual minor faults may be
acknowledged by resetting the alarm. Once the minor fault has been
acknowledged, the alarm will be removed until it is needed to present an
actual communications failure or another status failing needs to be
reported. Once the minor fault is removed, it will be automatically
unacknowledged, so that the next time it occurs, an alarm will be raised.
The minor fault acknowledgements are stored on an individual PLC basis in
the database fields, "Minor fault word 1" and "Minor fault word 2". These
may be edited directly, via the PLC setup database - see
"PLC
Setup".
Task Killed Alarms
All communications to a specific PLC is expected to originated by the task
that is dedicated to that PLC. Mostly each PLC has its own serial channel.
In some cases, however, several PLCs can be accessed through the one serial
channel, which connects to a DataHighway modem, which, in turn, connects to
each of the remote PLCs on the DataHighway. In this situation, there is a
task dedicated to the DataHighway serial channel, and all tasks wanting to
communicate to any of those PLCs, do so by queueing their requests to the
DataHighway task. In this way, there should be a single task corresponding
to each serial channel.
There is a check that the task that first uses a serial communications
channel is the only one that ever uses that channel. Should another task,
subsequently, attempt to use that channel, it will be killed and this alarm
will be raised and its text will indicate which task has been killed.
This check has, in the past, killed a crane task, which used a function
from within the conveyor task to remove a load tag, for a load in a
specific conveyor position, from the database. This was normally harmless
enough, but, in the event that the tag in question appeared in multiple
conveyor positions, the function would read the tags directly from the
conveyor PLC, thereby causing the crane task to access the conveyor PLC's
serial channel. This first occurred five years after the check was
installed, in the wake of a crash of the virtual crane server hosting the
Movement Controller. It was not immediately apparent, then, what the cause
of their problem was, so this alarm was added to the system, in place of
the event log that had, previously, noted this problem. Also, that bug has
been rectified. More details on the indicent are provided in the SOFTWARE
MANUAL titled: "Change Log" for Change 427.
Stores Diagram
After selecting "Stores Diagram" from the Operation Menu, the layout of the
near (if double-deep racking) right-most rack will be displayed.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Stores diagram
Select Change Restrict Where Match Expand Insert Delete Fast movers Kollect G
Number of loads: 370 Empty locations: 729 ^
┌───┬────┬────┬────┬────┬────┬────┬────┬────┬────┬────┬────┬────┬────┬───┐█
│■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪■■■■▪▪■■▪▪■■■■■▪■■▪■■■■■■■■▪■■│█
│▪▪▪▪■▪■▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪▪■■▪▪▪▪▪■■▪▪▪■■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪│█
│■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■▪■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■▪■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■▪■■■■■│█
│▪■■■▪▪■▪■■■▪■■■■■■■■■■■■▪■▪■■■■■■■■■■■■■■▪■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■▪■■■■■■■■■■■▪■■│█
│■■▪■■■▪■■■■■▪▪■■■■■■■■■■■■■▪■■■■■▪■■■■■■▪■■■■■■■▪■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■│█
│▪▪▪▪▪■■■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■▪■■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■▪■▪│█
│▪▪■▪▪■■▪▪▪▪▪■▪■▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■■■▪■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪■▪▪■■▪▪■▪▪■▪■▪▪■■▪▪■│█
│▪▪▪▪■■▪▪▪■■▪▪■▪■▪■■▪■■■▪■■▪■▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■■▪▪▪▪■■▪■▪■■■▪▪▪▪■■■■▪■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■│█
│▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪■▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪■■▪▪■▪▪■│█
│▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪■▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■■▪▪▪▪▪■▪■■■▪■■▪■■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪■■■■▪■│█
│▓▓■▪▪▪▪ ▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪■■▪■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪ ▪▪▪▪■▪▪■■▪■▪■■■■■■■▪■■▪■■■▪▪▪■▪■▪■│█
└───┴────┴────┴────┴────┴────┴────┴────┴────┴────┴────┴────┴────┴────┴───┘█
█
█
V
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
1002010|O| | | | | |207680|593100720030023457|
Rack slot inhibited <I/S/R>a Rack Rack Rack SSCC
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
Rack slot occupied <O>a O
At the top of the window is a legend that indicates which of the keys are
active and what function they perform. The [RETURN] and [ENTER] keys are
equivalent to the first key listed in the legend. As well as being able to
type the key, you may click the mouse on that part of the legend.
Graphical Representation
Towards the top of the window, is the graphical representation of the store
layout.
Presentation of the Locations
In this description, references to colours will be made using the name used
to describe its purpose, as the actual colour used to present the condition
in question may be altered as described in the section titled:
"Changing the
Colours".
The window shows loads using a drawing of a load, on a pallet, on supports
to show occupied locations, or just the supports to show vacant locations.
There are also other special characters used for specific conditions.
Full and Part Loads
The loads are shown in the "Full Load" colour. If the database has
knowledge of the product on the pallet, then it will be able to determine
whether it is a full load or not, and will alter its presentation of the
load accordingly, including showing the load in the "Part Load" colour
(which may not differ from the "Full Load" colour, if we prefer to rely on
the shape of the load to present this information).
Total Numbers of Loads & Vacancies
The total number of loads and the total number of empty locations, in the
rack face displayed, is shown at the top of the window.
Presenting Vacant, Disabled, Etc
Non-existent locations are shown containing a space, disabled locations are
shown containing a cross, and vacant locations are shown containing a
drawing of the pallet supports in the "Vacant" colour (initially set to
"Blue").
Pallet Detection System
If the location is supported by load detection photocells, the state of the
photocell rather than the occupancy record is used to determine whether a
load will be presented in that location or not. Generally, under these
circumstances, I would use the "Part Load" colour to present these loads,
leaving the load shape to distinguish between the full and part pallets.
Bad Configuration Data
There is the possibility for some sites that the data associated with a
location be inconsistent. If such is detected, the load image will be
replaced, on a flashing basis, with a full block in the alarm colour. When
presented as a full block in the alarm colour, it will be included in the
tally of neither loads nor vacancies. Hence, when a rack face is
presented, if there are any such locations included, the first thing to
look for is to see whether the total number of loads or vacancies is
alternating (as it will on that same flashing basis).
Movement Class and Product Group
There may be options, depending upon the software requirements for this
site, to present the movement class or product group to which the product
in the location belongs or, if the location is empty, that to which the
location is dedicated, instead of the above described occupancy. The
movement class display is presented in response to typing "F" or clicking
on "Fast movers", while the product group display is presented in response
to typing "F" or clicking on "Fast movers" a second time, while typing or
clicking a third time will return you to the occupancy display. In
response, the pallet representations will be replaced by the first
character of the description of the corresponding movement class or product
group of the pallet in the location, or, if there is none, of the location
itself. The colour of the character will reflect the occupancy status.
Presentation of the Crane
The position of the crane is indicated by a rectangle, occupying the whole
area dedicated to the location that the crane is in front of, and the
locations neighbouring it. If the crane is loaded, there will be a smaller
rectangle (occupying the single location that the crane is in front of),
representing the load, painted on top of the rectangle representing the
crane.
The colour used for the crane's rectangle, is:
Alarm/Conveyor
flashing if in alarm,
Crane/Conveyor
flashing if loading or unloading,
Shadow
if automatic is disabled,
Conveyor
if retrievals are disabled,
Automatic
if in service, or
Disabled
if out of service.
The colour used for the load's rectangle, is:
Destination 1
if in service, or
Disabled/Dest1
flashing if out of service.
This presentation is painted behind the presentation of the location, so
the information relating to the location can still be read when the crane
is at that location.
Moving the Window About the Store
A pair of scroll bars are provided in case the rack layout is too large for
the window. The horizontal scroll bar may be controlled using the [CONTROL
SEPARATE RIGHT], [CONTROL SEPARATE LEFT], [CONTROL SEPARATE HOME], and
[CONTROL SEPARATE END] keys. The vertical scroll bar may be controlled
using the [CONTROL UP], [CONTROL DOWN], [CONTROL PAGE UP], and [CONTROL
PAGE DOWN] keys.
Note that not all the keyboard keys, normally available to manipulate the
scroll bars, can be used for this because the [SEPARATE LEFT], [SEPARATE
RIGHT], [UP], [DOWN], [PAGE UP], [PAGE DOWN], [HOME], and [END] keys are
used for controlling graphical representation of the stores, while the
[NUMERIC LEFT], [NUMERIC RIGHT], [CONTROL NUMERIC RIGHT], [CONTROL NUMERIC
LEFT], [CONTROL NUMERIC HOME], and [CONTROL NUMERIC END] keys are used for
controlling the display of location details.
Moving the Cursor About the Store
The cursor is initially positioned in the bottom right hand corner of the
layout. The cursor control keys (those not part of the numeric key-pad)
may be used to move from location to location within the store. The cursor
may also be moved by clicking the mouse on the desired location.
Use [PAGE UP] and [PAGE DOWN] to move through the depths, sides and aisles
in the logically implied direction and use [END] to move to the left, far
(if double-deep racking), side of the left most aisle and [HOME] to move
back to the right, near (if double-deep racking), side of the right-most
aisle.
To move directly to an arbitrary aisle, side, long travel and hoist level,
type in the address in the standard form. This is described more fully in
the section titled:
"Store
Reference". Once you have typed the leading digit, a dialogue window will
be opened, with the digit in place. You may also activate this function by
typing "G" then entering the address into the field provided.
If you have accessed this window from the "Retrieve from Stores by
Location" window, the location addressed in this way will be selected
for the retrieval schedule. Refer to the section titled:
"Retrieve
from Stores by Location".
Examining and Modifying Location
The details of the location at the cursor are presented in the lower
portion of the window. These details include the occupancy status, the
type of racking (storage, pickup/deposit or flow through), the
enabled/disabled status and the existent/non-existent status, (all
"Character" fields).
For editing instructions for these types of fields, please refer to the
sections titled:
"Character".
In addition, there are details specific to this site: the barcode of the
pallet label (a "Name" field), the location the pallet was originally
destined for (a "Destination" field), whether the location is reserved for
use by the Movement Controller (a "Character" field), indexes into the
load-detection data (a "Load Detection Indices" field), the number of times
the load has been moved (regular locations) or the number of times the
crane has found the location full (pickface locations) (a "Numeric" field).
Immediately below the location details, the restriction details are
presented.
A horizontal scroll bar is provided in case the details extend beyond the
width of the window. This horizontal scroll bar may be controlled using
the [CONTROL NUMERIC RIGHT], [CONTROL NUMERIC LEFT], [CONTROL NUMERIC
HOME], and [CONTROL NUMERIC END] keys.
One of the details will be shown in reverse video. This is referred to as
the "highlighted field".
The prompt as well as the data associated with the highlighted field are
displayed at the top of the window. The [LEFT] and [RIGHT] keys from the
numeric key pad may be used to highlight the previous or next detail
respectively.
Displaying the Full Location Details
The details of a load may be displayed in full by positioning cursor at the
load (using the cursor keys), then typing [ENTER]. You can also achieve
this by double clicking on the location.
Once selected, the stores window is partially replaced with a "Set of
Fields" containing the details.
If you are sufficiently privileged, this window will include a button
labelled, "F1: modify". If you have sufficient privilege, the
corresponding function can also be activated without first displaying the
location details in full. To activate the function without presenting this
window, move the cursor there and type [SHIFT F1].
For some sites, there might be additional buttons provided, with the first
sporting a label starting with "F2:". If there is such a button, the
corresponding function can also be activated without first displaying the
location details in full. To activate the function without presenting this
window, either right click on the location in question or move the cursor
there and type [SHIFT F2].
Pallet Coming to Location
Having selected to display the location details, if there is a pallet on
its way to this location or scheduled to be brought here, the barcode of
the pallet and, if still only scheduled, its priority and, in any case,
where it currently is, will be presented above the location details
themselves.
Modifying the Location Details
Having selected to display the location details, if you are sufficiently
privileged you will be asked to confirm that you wish to modify the details
by pressing [F1].
The software may be configured so as to allow "generic" users. The concept
of "generic" users is discussed in the section titled:
"Modify
List of Users". If you are logged in as a generic user, then, after
pressing [F1] (as described above) you will be required to enter your
specific name (a "Symbolic Name" field) and password (a "Password" field)
before proceeding. For editing instructions for these types of fields,
please refer to the sections titled:
"Symbolic
Name", and "Password", while
for more information on the "Users" database, please refer to the section
titled: "Modify List
of Users".
After making the desired modifications, type [ESCAPE]. The stores diagram
will be returned. Refer to the section titled:
"Set of Fields".
The "Set of Fields" includes the location's occupancy status, its
enabled/disabled status and its existent/non-existent status (all
"Character" fields). For editing instructions for this type of field,
please refer to the sections titled:
"Character".
Prioritising Replenishment
If there is no pallet on its way, but there is one scheduled, then an extra
button will be presented, which will allow you to alter the priority of
this movement. This button will advertise the [F2] key, indicating that,
rather than clicking on the button, you can, instead, press that key.
Modifying Several Locations At Once
This function is also only available if you have sufficient privilege.
This privilege level is specified in the "Configuration Data" record,
titled "Level: kollect records". Please refer to the section titled:
"Configuration
Data".
If you need to change one or more fields of several locations, you can make
the task a little quicker by first gathering the locations into a
"collection". When you, subsequently, go to modify a location's
details, you will, instead, modify the details of all locations in the
collection.
The first step is to gather the locations into a "collection". You can do
this by moving the cursor to a location, then activating the "Kollect" menu
item (by clicking on it or typing "k"). Repeat this procedure for each
other location you wish to include. If you type "k" a second time for a
given location, the location will be removed from the collection.
You can also achieve this using the [SHIFT] and the separate cursor keys.
If you hold down the [SHIFT] and type one of the separate cursor keys, the
cursor will be moved in the usual way, however, the location moved away
from and that moved to will both (if there are, indeed two) be added to the
collection, unless the location moved to is already in the collection, in
which case both locations will be removed from the collection. If there is
no location in the position moved to, then no action will occur.
When a location is included in the collection, its colour will be changed
to indicate this.
You can also use the mouse to collect locations. To do this, click on the
first location to be included, and keeping the mouse button down, drag the
mouse over each other location to be included in the collection. Any
location visited, in this manner, a second time, will be released from the
collection.
Once the collection has been formed, when you attempt to edit the location
details of a location contained in the collection (as described in the
section titled:
"Examining
and Modifying Location"), you will be presented, instead, with the details
common to all locations in the collection - all other fields will be set to
zero (though zero is not always blank). Once you confirm that you intend
to modify these details, and are presented with the fields in a dialogue
window. Any changes you make are recorded, so that when you close the
dialogue window, you will be prompted to confirm that the change to each
modified field was intentional. Note that you get to confirm each field
but not each location affected, so you will need to be sure that you have
gathered the correct locations into the collection.
You can release all locations from the collection by typing [SHIFT K] or by
right clicking on any location within the collection.
Deleting and Inserting Loads
If you are privileged, a load may be added to or removed from a location by
positioning cursor there (using the cursor keys), then typing [INSERT] or
[DELETE] respectively. You will be requested to confirm that it is your
intention to delete a load, by typing [F1].
As with the modification of a location (described above), you may find that
you are required to enter a reason for adding or removing a load from the
location, before the requested action is performed.
When a load is deleted it is moved from the location into a special logical
location referred to as "Deleted".
This special location is displayed in the load details tablet on the
Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyors diagram. Please refer to the section titled:
"Heavy-Unit-Load
Conveyors".
When the next load is deleted, it replaces the load that was previously in
the "Deleted" location, that load is now "really deleted". The load in the
"Deleted" location can be explicitly deleted, via the Heavy-Unit-Load
Conveyors diagram.
When a load is inserted into the racking or into the Heavy-Unit-Load
Conveyors (refer to the section titled:
"Heavy-Unit-Load
Conveyors"), if the "Deleted" location contains a load, that load will be
moved to the position where the load is being inserted. If the "Deleted"
location does not contain a load, a load will be created at the position.
Using the "Deleted" location, a load may be moved from one position to
another by first deleting the load from the first position (moving it to
the "Deleted" location) and then inserting it at the second location
(moving it from the "Deleted" location).
If a number of loads need to be relocated, they should be moved one at a
time; deleting the first and reinserting it then deleting the second and so
forth.
Inhibited Locations
Should the crane, while attempting to deposit a load to the store, find its
photocells reporting the location as occupied, the location will be
automatically flagged as "Inhibited".
Should the crane, after attempting to pickup a load, find itself unloaded
on high stop, the location will be flagged as "Inhibited".
Locations flagged as inhibited should be inspected regularly.
In cases where the inventory shows the location to be vacant, should the
location be found to be clear of loads, the "Inhibited" status should be
removed. Should a load be found in the location, the inventory should be
updated and the "Inhibited" status should be removed. Should there be a
problem with the location, such as cartons fallen from a neighbouring
location, the location should be rectified before the "Inhibited" status is
removed.
Should a large number of locations on one particular rack be found to be
"Inhibited" you should check the adjustment of the appropriate rack
occupied photocell on board the crane.
In cases where the inventory shows the location to be occupied, should the
location be found to be clear of loads, the inventory should be corrected
and then the "Inhibited" status removed. Should a load be found there, in
good order, the "Inhibited" status should be removed. Otherwise, you will
need to rectify the problem, then possibly adjust the inventory and then
remove the "Inhibited" status.
Changing the Appearance
The presentation of the stores can be expanded in the "X" and "Y"
directions by typing "X" or "Y" respectively. Similarly, the overview can
be contracted by typing [SHIFT X] or [SHIFT Y] respectively.
Additionally, finer adjustments to the expansion in the "X" and "Y"
directions can be achieved, simultaneously for both directions, by typing
[CONTROL X] to expand, in both directions, slightly or [CONTROL Y] to
contract slightly.
Select Loads for Retrieval
If this window had been called up from the location retrieval window, you
have only to type in the address in the standard form (refer to the section
titled: "Store
Reference"), for the location to be added to the schedule. Once you have
typed the leading digit, a field, with a prompt will be presented at the
top of the window with the digit in place.
The "S", [RETURN] and [ENTER] keys may be used to select and deselect loads
at the cursor to be included in the retrieval. Had this window not been
called up from the location retrieval window, the "S", [RETURN] and [ENTER]
keys would have served to modify the location details. You may also
double-click the mouse on the desired load to select or deselect it.
The loads will be shown in the "Highlight" colour if available to be
selected, in the "Basic Colour" colour if the retrieval of this load is
either under way or complete, in the "Selected Full Load" colour when part
of this schedule and in the "Reverse" colour when part of another schedule.
For an understanding of the use of colours, refer to the section titled:
"Changing the
Colours".
Restricting the Display
The locations displayed within the layout, may be restricted to those whose
details satisfy certain requirements. These requirements may be that the
locations be occupied. Locations that do not satisfy all requirements will
be displayed as a space.
All features provided by the "Maintenance Viewing Data" windows (except
that the [LEFT] and [RIGHT] keys used to highlight a field must be those on
the numeric key-pad) are active. These features are:
moving the window across the records.
highlighting a particular field for individual attention.
After selecting "Crane Commands and Alarms" from the Operation Menu, the
crane status and control window will be presented.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Crane status and control
Select crane Automatic on/off Retrieval on/off Put in service Commands HELP
Crane 1 Status Alarms
░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ LT out of position
░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ HL out of position
░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ Forks are centred
░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░
Next: Deposit 42:16-B-003-2
Current: Pickup 42:16-A-001-1
Position: 42:16-A-001-1
Command: Store
Stage: Waiting to issue pickup
This window shows the commands, status and alarms relating to the crane 1,
and provides a list of commands that the operator may send to the crane.
The blanked out section in the upper left quarter of the screen is a
graphical representation of the crane, showing the position of its forks
and the condition of its photocells.
To present this window for other cranes, select the "Select crane" item
from the menu bar. This opens a dialogue window, allowing you to enter the
desired crane number. Alternatively, you can use the [PAGE DOWN] and [PAGE
UP] keys to move from one crane to the next, or back again.
Status List
The crane states appear beneath the heading, "Status", in the middle of the
window.
If you right-click on a status line in this window, you will be presented
with the help page relating to that status - one of the following
subsections.
LT in/out of position
This status is always present and indicates whether the crane is positioned
on a long travel screen.
HL in low/in high/out of position
This status is always present and indicates whether the crane is positioned
on a hoist level screen.
Forks position
This status is always present and indicates the current position of the
forks to a resolution of about 3% of full extension.
Manual
This is set when the crane is has been switched to manual or is in remote
manual. This should be off for automatic operation.
Out Of Service
This is set when an alarm occurs, the MCR drops out, the crane is switched
to manual or it has been set out of service by Movement Controller. If an
alarm has occurred the fault must be rectified and the alarm reset. If the
MCR had dropped out, the cause must be rectified and the MCR must be
energised. If the crane has been switched to manual it should be returned
to automatic. Once the corrective action has been taken, the crane may be
set in service.
Light Curtain
This bit indicates that a light curtain on the infeed or outfeed of the
Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System has been entered, so there is no power
provided to the crane. You would expect the crane to be not communicating
under these circumstances.
Conveyor Alarm
This bit indicates that an alarm from the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System
that inhibits the operation of the crane is active.
Alarm change
This bit toggles on and then off to register each change in the alarm
state. It should only be on for a short duration unless communications has
failed or the processor has faulted.
Loaded Status
A load has been detected on the crane forks. If the crane is idle and this
status is inconsistent with the inventory state of the crane, this state's
text (or the text "Not loaded") will be highlighted.
MCR deenergised
The Master control relay is off.
LT no speed enable
The crane is in a long-travel speed restricted region.
HL no speed enable
The crane is in a hoisting speed restricted region.
Key switch manual
This is set when the crane has been switched to manual. This should be off
for automatic operation.
Correction limit
The crane is permitted to travel with the load not centred, provided that a
second, wider, forks-not-centred switch is still made. This is an
electrical interlock. If this interlock is wired into the PLC, this status
will reflect that it is no longer made. Otherwise, the PLC will attempt to
simulate the likely state of this switch by counting pulses from the
centre, setting this status accordingly.
It is expected that this status should be shown during fork cycles, but not
during travel.
Catching dev bypass
When the catching device is tripped, no motion is permitted by the crane
PLC, unless this switch is set. If this switch is set, automatic operation
is not permitted, however, you are allowed to raise the hoist in manual,
from the controls on board the crane.
Off-centre to left
This is set when the load has broken the left side off-centre photocell.
An alarm is not generated immediately, as the crane will try to rectify the
problem by shifting the load to fit between the photocells. Once it has
failed to do this, it will then generate an alarm. This alarm is latched
and will remain even if the status is cleared.
Off-centre to right
This is set when the load has broken the right side off-centre photocell.
An alarm is not generated immediately, as the crane will try to rectify the
problem by shifting the load to fit between the photocells. Once it has
failed to do this, it will then generate an alarm. This alarm is latched
and will remain even if the status is cleared.
Bin occupied left
This state may be used in conjunction with the Bin Occupied or Empty alarms
to provide more detail.
Bin occupied right
This state may be used in conjunction with the Bin Occupied or Empty alarms
to provide more detail.
Bin occ'd far left
This state may be used in conjunction with the Bin Occupied or Empty alarms
to provide more detail.
Bin occ'd far right
This state may be used in conjunction with the Bin Occupied or Empty alarms
to provide more detail.
Hoist down stop
This indicates that the hoist has tripped the down stop magnetic switch.
It should be accompanied by an alarm to this effect.
Hoist up stop
This indicates that the hoist has tripped the up stop magnetic switch. It
should be accompanied by an alarm to this effect.
LT reverse stop
This indicates that the long travel has tripped the reverse stop magnetic
switch. It should be accompanied by an alarm to this effect.
LT forward stop
This indicates that the long travel has tripped the forward stop magnetic
switch. It should be accompanied by an alarm to this effect.
LT drive failure
This state summarises the circuit breaker, thermal overload and drive fault
indications for the long-travel motor. It should be accompanied by an
alarm that will be latched and provide indication of the actual fault.
HL drive failure
This state summarises the circuit breaker, thermal overload and drive fault
indications for the hoist motor. It should be accompanied by an alarm that
will be latched and provide indication of the actual fault.
Forks drive failure
This state summarises the circuit breaker, thermal overload and drive fault
indications for the forks motor. It should be accompanied by an alarm that
will be latched and provide indication of the actual fault.
Hoist safety fault
This state summarises the hoist safety inputs, such as slack rope and
catching device. It should be accompanied by an alarm that will be latched
and provide indication of the actual fault.
MCC 24V Power Fail
Loss of DC Power.
24V supply failure
Loss of DC Power.
No conveyor system
This status is a reflection of the state sent to the crane from the
computer indicating that either the gate into the crane area is open (as
reported by the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System) or the Heavy-Unit-Load
Conveyor System is not capable of reporting. This should be accompanied by
a gate open alarm, a Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System alarm.
Communications fail
This state is set by the computer and indicates that either it can not
communicate with the crane, or that the toggling with the crane has not
completed or that there is something in the PLC's status data file that is
indicating a problem. This will be highlighted.
This is to be expected when the key to the communications switch has been
removed.
If the communications switch is turned on, first of all, check the
"Computer system alarms" window (as described in the section titled:
"Conveyor
Alarms"). Towards the bottom of the list of alarms, the communications
alarms will be found. If this "Communications fail" is a result of a
condition that is reported as a computer system alarm, then the text of
that alarm will give a further indication of what the problem is. If the
crane is not responding at all, the text of the alarm will be something
like "Failed to communicate to communications port ...". If it succeeded
in communicating to a DataHighway modem, but that modem failed to
communicate to the crane (note that we never use such an arrangement to
communicate with cranes), then the text of the alarm will indicate what
status is being returned by the modem. Finally, if there is no problem
with the communications, but there is a bad indication being presented in
the PLC's status file, then that condition will be described. Some of
these causes for the "Communication fail" alarm will leave the system still
operational. If there is no communications alarm among the computer system
alarms, then the problem must be that the toggle has stopped. Normally,
such a condition would be expected to be accompanied by a bad indication
within the PLC's status file.
Had there been an accompanying computer system alarm with the text of the
alarm starting with something like "Failed to communicate to communications
port ...", then check that power is available to the crane, that the
Infrared Serial Devices (ISD) are not obstructed, that they are correctly
aligned and that the crane PLC is in run. If all this is so, have an
electrician check the wiring and power supplies to these devices.
Cabinet too cold
This alarm is relevent to cranes operating in freezer conditions, where it
is necessary to regulate the temperature of the electrical cabinet. This
status, if it persists, may indicate that the regulation of the cabinet
temperature has failed, or that someone has left the door open.
Cabinet too warm
This alarm is relevent to cranes operating in freezer conditions, where it
is necessary to regulate the temperature of the electrical cabinet. This
status, if it persists, may indicate that the regulation of the cabinet
temperature has failed.
Full current bypass
This indicates that the full current bypass switch is turned on. This
should only be turned on to allow the hoist to be lowered after the full
current switch itself has been tripped. It must be off to allow automatic
operation.
Cabin position
If the cabin is one that moves, its position (up, down, or in between) will
always be present. The cabin must be up to allow the hoist to lower to the
lowest level and down to allow the hoist to raise to the highest level.
Over-height 1
This indicates that the first (lowest) height check photocell is currently
blocked. If the crane is given an automatic command to put the load away
where it will not fit, the "High load automatic" alarm will be raised. If
the crane is in manual and the driver attempts to place the load where it
will not fit, then "High load manual" alarm will be raised.
Over-height 2
This indicates that the second height check photocell is currently blocked.
If the crane is given an automatic command to put the load away where it
will not fit, the "High load automatic" alarm will be raised. If the crane
is in manual and the driver attempts to place the load where it will not
fit, then "High load manual" alarm will be raised.
Over-height 3
This indicates that the third height check photocell is currently blocked.
If the crane is given an automatic command to put the load away where it
will not fit, the "High load automatic" alarm will be raised. If the crane
is in manual and the driver attempts to place the load where it will not
fit, then "High load manual" alarm will be raised.
Over-height 4
This indicates that the fourth height check photocell is currently blocked.
If the crane is given an automatic command to put the load away where it
will not fit, the "High load automatic" alarm will be raised. If the crane
is in manual and the driver attempts to place the load where it will not
fit, then "High load manual" alarm will be raised.
Over-height 5
This indicates that the fifth height check photocell is currently blocked.
If the crane is given an automatic command to put the load away where it
will not fit, the "High load automatic" alarm will be raised. If the crane
is in manual and the driver attempts to place the load where it will not
fit, then "High load manual" alarm will be raised.
Over-height 6
This indicates that the sixth height check photocell is currently blocked.
If the crane is given an automatic command to put the load away where it
will not fit, the "High load automatic" alarm will be raised. If the crane
is in manual and the driver attempts to place the load where it will not
fit, then "High load manual" alarm will be raised.
Over-height 7
This indicates that the seventh height check photocell is currently
blocked. If the crane is given an automatic command to put the load away
where it will not fit, the "High load automatic" alarm will be raised. If
the crane is in manual and the driver attempts to place the load where it
will not fit, then "High load manual" alarm will be raised.
Over-height 8
This indicates that the eighth height check photocell is currently blocked.
If the crane is given an automatic command to put the load away where it
will not fit, the "High load automatic" alarm will be raised. If the crane
is in manual and the driver attempts to place the load where it will not
fit, then "High load manual" alarm will be raised.
Long Travel Motion
This indicates whether there is any long travel motion, and in which
direction and at what speed that motion is supposed to be taking place.
Should a long travel screen be over shot, the word "oops!" will be
displayed. Should the long travel find itself off a screen and stopped,
the crane will enter the "lost!" state for the long travel and display that
text.
Hoist Motion
This indicates whether there is any hoist motion, and in which direction
and at what speed that motion is supposed to be taking place. Should a
hoist screen be over shot, the word "oops!" will be displayed. Should the
hoist find itself off a screen and stopped, the crane will enter the
"lost!" state for the hoist and display that text.
Forks Motion
This indicates whether there is any fork motion, and in which direction and
at what speed that motion is supposed to be taking place. Should the crane
be set back in service while the forks are extended, its first operation
will be to centre its forks; while doing this it will display "lost!"
against the forks. If, during travel, the crane finds the load is
off-centre, it will try to correct, and displays "fix OC" while attempting
this.
Graphical Status
To the left of the list of status conditions is shown a diagram of the
crane, showing the state of its load sensing, load off-centre, bin occupied
and height check photocells and the extension of its forks and, if the
forks are not centred, whether at high stop or not; if at high stop, a load
will be shown at the forks extension, otherwise the forks will be shown.
If the forks are not centred, the crane will instead show whether the
computer's inventory has it holding a load.
The colour of the forks, or the colour of the border around the load will
be red if the crane is in automatic, yellow if in manual or grey if
otherwise out of service.
The body of the crane will be shown in orange if healthy, or red if in
alarm.
Alarms
The crane alarms appear beneath the heading, "Alarms" towards the right of
the window.
Please bear in mind that all these alarms are based on the PLC's view of
the system and may therefore be the result of a failure in the sensing
mechanisms and/or circuitry or in the control mechanisms and/or circuitry.
This is not reiterated in the following discussions of the individual
alarms.
The sensing mechanisms include limit switches, relay contacts, proximity
switches, and photocells, while the sensing circuitry includes wiring,
terminations, PLC inputs, the field input power supply, and circuit
breakers.
The control mechanisms include motors and associated gearboxes, sprockets,
chains, drums, and cables, while the control circuitry includes circuit
breakers, the field output power supply, PLC outputs, relays, motor
contactors, variable speed drives, motor circuit breakers, thermal
overloads, and motor isolators. In particular, check that the motor
isolators are turned on.
Typically, after an alarm has been encountered, investigated and the cause
removed, the alarms reset, the MCR will need to be energised, and the crane
set back into service.
Bear in mind, that when rectifying problems on the crane, using manual
controls, the crane PLC is watching, trying to determine what has happened
to the load. Therefore, if you centre the forks with the load left in the
racking then pickup the load, the load will be assumed to be left in the
racking (as indicated by your first action) and, when back in service, the
next load to be picked up is likely to generate a "Pickup but loaded"
alarm, which, if you abort that pickup, will lead the system to believe
this second load to have been picked up by the crane, rather than the first
causing considerable confusion.
The assumptions made by the system when a cycle has been completed while
the crane is in alarm, are entered into the event log and should be checked
to determine whether they are correct.
If you right-click on an alarm in this window, you will be presented with
the help page relating to that alarm - one of the following subsections.
For some sites, there is referenced, for each of these alarms, another
alarm from this list, which, if active, is considered as the prime cause of
the fault, while the referencing alarm is considered to be parasitic. Such
alarms, though active, will be suppressed from being presented in this
list. For more information on defining the parasitic nature of certain
alarms, please refer to the section titled:
"Enter
or Modify the Crane Alarms".
MCR is off
The main control relay had dropped out. The MCR is released by the PLC
program when the crane enters alarm state, under which conditions it will
be accompanied by that alarm.
24VDC is off
The 24VDC field power supply had been lost.
This will result normally when someone accesses the crane via security
gates that are wired to drop the power to the crane. You should only be
concerned about this alarm should it occur at other tmes.
In particular, bear in mind that if this alarm does occur, it may be
accompanied by parasitic false alarms. Although we do not suppress the
reporting of parasitic alarms, there is a data file within the crane PLC
that has a bit associated with each alarm that the crane can raise. If
this bit is set for a given alarm, then, should the field power supply
recover, that alarm will be automatically cleared. We have tried to list,
in this data file, each of the alarms that would be dependent upon the
field power supply. Hence, a momentary failure of the field power supply
would latch this field power supply alarm but it would cause the parasitic
alarms to be cleared when that moment passes.
Should this alarm occur at times when the security gate has been opened or
when you know that power has been disrupted to the crane, you should refer
this fault to an electrician.
HL circuit breaker
The hoist motor circuit breaker had tripped.
Please refer this fault to an electrician.
LT circuit breaker
The long travel motor circuit breaker had tripped.
Please refer this fault to an electrician.
Forks circuit b'ker
The fork motor circuit breaker had tripped.
Please refer this fault to an electrician.
HL drive fault
The hoist motor's drive had reported a fault.
Please refer this fault to an electrician.
LT drive fault
The long travel motor's drive had reported a fault.
Please refer this fault to an electrician.
Forks drive fault
The fork motor's drive had reported a fault.
Please refer this fault to an electrician.
HL thermal overload
The hoist motor's drive or brake had experienced a thermal overload.
Please refer this fault to an electrician.
LT thermal overload
The long travel motor's drive or brake had experienced a thermal overload.
Please refer this fault to an electrician.
Forks thermal O/L
The fork motor's drive or brake had experienced a thermal overload.
Please refer this fault to an electrician.
HL thermistor trip
The hoist motor's drive or brake had experienced a thermistor trip.
Please refer this fault to an electrician.
LT thermistor trip
The long travel motor's drive or brake had experienced a thermistor trip.
Please refer this fault to an electrician.
Forks thermistor tr
The fork motor's drive or brake had experienced a thermistor trip.
Please refer this fault to an electrician.
Cabin too cold
The PLC cabinet had become too cold.
Cabin too warm
The PLC cabinet had become too warm.
Load Off Centre
Either the crane was unable to centre its load without extending its forks
unacceptably far ("Load Off Centre"), or it has spent too much time
attempting to centre its load ("Load correct'n fail"), or both off-centre
photocells were blocked at once ("Load seems too wide"), or one of the
off-centre photocells was blocked while the crane was unloaded ("Off-centre
fouled").
There are a multitude of causes for these alarms, such as badly stacked
loads, badly stacked empty loads, rubbish hanging from the loads, rubbish
or loads protruding from the racking, the crane attempting to pickup from
double deep while the single deep is occupied, the crane attempting to
pickup an incorrectly positioned load, et cetera.
This fault will require that you inspect the situation and adjust the load
physically or by using the manual controls at the electrical cabinet or
from the cabin.
Load correct'n fail
Either the crane was unable to centre its load without extending its forks
unacceptably far ("Load Off Centre"), or it has spent too much time
attempting to centre its load ("Load correct'n fail"), or both off-centre
photocells were blocked at once ("Load seems too wide"), or one of the
off-centre photocells was blocked while the crane was unloaded ("Off-centre
fouled").
There are a multitude of causes for these alarms, such as badly stacked
loads, badly stacked empty loads, rubbish hanging from the loads, rubbish
or loads protruding from the racking, the crane attempting to pickup from
double deep while the single deep is occupied, the crane attempting to
pickup an incorrectly positioned load, et cetera.
This fault will require that you inspect the situation and adjust the load
physically or by using the manual controls at the electrical cabinet or
from the cabin.
Off-centre fouled
Either the crane was unable to centre its load without extending its forks
unacceptably far ("Load Off Centre"), or it has spent too much time
attempting to centre its load ("Load correct'n fail"), or both off-centre
photocells were blocked at once ("Load seems too wide"), or one of the
off-centre photocells was blocked while the crane was unloaded ("Off-centre
fouled").
There are a multitude of causes for these alarms, such as badly stacked
loads, badly stacked empty loads, rubbish hanging from the loads, rubbish
or loads protruding from the racking, the crane attempting to pickup from
double deep while the single deep is occupied, the crane attempting to
pickup an incorrectly positioned load, et cetera.
This fault will require that you inspect the situation and adjust the load
physically or by using the manual controls at the electrical cabinet or
from the cabin.
Load seems too wide
Either the crane was unable to centre its load without extending its forks
unacceptably far ("Load Off Centre"), or it has spent too much time
attempting to centre its load ("Load correct'n fail"), or both off-centre
photocells were blocked at once ("Load seems too wide"), or one of the
off-centre photocells was blocked while the crane was unloaded ("Off-centre
fouled").
There are a multitude of causes for these alarms, such as badly stacked
loads, badly stacked empty loads, rubbish hanging from the loads, rubbish
or loads protruding from the racking, the crane attempting to pickup from
double deep while the single deep is occupied, the crane attempting to
pickup an incorrectly positioned load, et cetera.
This fault will require that you inspect the situation and adjust the load
physically or by using the manual controls at the electrical cabinet or
from the cabin.
Catch block set
The "Catch Block" hoist safety device had tripped.
Please refer this fault to a crane maintenance person.
Slack rope
The "Slack Rope" hoist safety device had tripped.
Please refer this fault to a crane maintenance person.
Rope overload
The "Rope Overload" hoist safety device had tripped.
Please refer this fault to a crane maintenance person.
Hoist over-speed
The "Hoist Over-Speed" hoist safety device had tripped.
Please refer this fault to a crane maintenance person.
Speed govenor trip
The "Speed Governor" hoist safety device had tripped.
Please refer this fault to a crane maintenance person.
Hoist whole current
The "Whole Current" hoist safety device had tripped.
Please refer this fault to a crane maintenance person.
Hoist too slow
The crane has taken too long to reach the destination Hoist screen,
possibly because the destination screen is missing.
This fault will require that you inspect the situation and position the
hoist and long travel on a screen appropriately by using the manual
controls at the electrical cabinet or from the cabin.
HL hunting too slow
The crane has taken too long to position on the destination Hoist screen.
This fault will require that you inspect the situation and position the
hoist and long travel on a screen appropriately by using the manual
controls at the electrical cabinet or from the cabin.
LT too slow
The crane has taken too long to reach the destination Long Travel screen,
possibly because the destination screen is missing.
This fault will require that you inspect the situation and position the
hoist and long travel on a screen appropriately by using the manual
controls at the electrical cabinet or from the cabin.
LT hunting too slow
The crane has taken too long to position on the destination Long Travel
screen.
This fault will require that you inspect the situation and position the
hoist and long travel on a screen appropriately by using the manual
controls at the electrical cabinet or from the cabin.
Forks 2 slow left
The forks took too long to reach the limit switch for either single or
double deep or the centre switch.
This could be a result of the forks trying to extend into another load, the
load on the forks fouling the racking, cartons coming loose from the load
an obstructing the progress of the forks, the clutch being set too light or
mechanical problems with the forks.
This fault will require that you inspect the situation and adjust the load
physically or by using the manual controls at the electrical cabinet or
from the cabin.
Forks 2 slow right
The forks took too long to reach the limit switch for either single or
double deep or the centre switch.
This could be a result of the forks trying to extend into another load, the
load on the forks fouling the racking, cartons coming loose from the load
an obstructing the progress of the forks, the clutch being set too light or
mechanical problems with the forks.
This fault will require that you inspect the situation and adjust the load
physically or by using the manual controls at the electrical cabinet or
from the cabin.
Hoist too high
The magnetic switch to detect the limit of travel has tripped.
This fault will require that you inspect the situation and position the
hoist on a screen appropriately by using the manual controls at the
electrical cabinet or from the cabin.
Hoist too low
The magnetic switch to detect the limit of travel has tripped.
This fault will require that you inspect the situation and position the
hoist on a screen appropriately by using the manual controls at the
electrical cabinet or from the cabin.
LT overrun
The magnetic switch to detect the limit of travel has tripped. A common
cause of "LT overrun", in cold stores, is a build up of ice on the rail.
This fault will require that you inspect the situation and position the
long travel on a screen appropriately by using the manual controls at the
electrical cabinet or from the cabin.
Cabin door open
Either the cabin door or one of its windows had been opened. You will need
to close the offending door or window.
Gate is open
The computer had informed it that its access gate had been opened or that
it could not rely on the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System to report the
gate's condition.
Trolley problems
Either the communications with the trolley PLC has failed (this would
produce this alarm on all cranes at once) or the trolley PLC reports that
the trolley is not at the crane position, while the crane is attempting to
pickup or deposit a load at the trolley.
Communications bad
The crane had detected a prolonged loss of communications. This alarm is
raised only if the crane is idle or at the end of a cycle.
This alarm can only be raised once the communications has been restored.
You need only to energise the main contactor, reset the alarm, and set it
back in service. This is most common after the key has been restored to
the communications switch.
Pickup got nothing
The 'Loaded' photocell was not blocked at the completion of a pickup cycle.
This is usually an indication that the location in question is vacant,
however, this can also result from leaving the crane unloaded and on high
stop after correcting an earlier problem. You should leave the crane on
low stop if unloaded and high stop if loaded.
If the "Crane to find vacancy" is set, the computer will handle this alarm
on its own, inhibiting the location, provided it did not occur at the crane
infeed.
Deposit still loaded
The 'Loaded' photocell was blocked at the completion of a deposit cycle.
This is expected to be rare and must be inspected.
Pickup but loaded
The 'Loaded' photocell was blocked at the commencement of a pickup cycle.
The command must be aborted, however, this is likely to result in the
Movement Controller becoming confused about the actual locations of the
loads in question. After aborting the command and before resetting the
alarm and setting the crane back in service, you should check the inventory
in the areas likely to be affected.
Deposit but no load
The 'Loaded' photocell was not blocked at the commencement of a deposit
cycle.
The command must be aborted, however, this is likely to be the result of
the Movement Controller becoming confused about the actual locations of the
loads in question. After aborting the command and before resetting the
alarm and setting the crane back in service, you should check the inventory
in the areas likely to be affected.
Forbidden slot
An attempt was made to extend the forks into a location where there is no
racking. Note that the forks are allowed into non-existent single depth
locations if there are existent locations behind them.
Bad command
An automatic command requested the crane to access a location where there
is no racking. Note that the forks are allowed into non-existent single
depth locations if there are existent locations behind them.
This should be rare unless the command was issued by the operator. You may
need to use the "Modify Current Command" to provide an alternate
destination for the load.
LT location bad
An automatic command requested the crane to move to a long travel position
that is out of range of the crane.
This should not occur.
HL location bad
An automatic command requested the crane to move to a hoist level position
that is out of range of the crane.
This should not occur.
Empty or blocked
An automatic command requested the crane to pickup a load from a location
in which it could not see a load, or from a double deep location while it
could see a load in front. If the "Crane to find vacancy" is set, or there
are pickface linkages set for that location, the computer will handle these
alarms on its own, provided it did not occur at the crane infeed.
If the computer does not handle it automatically, you should abort the
current command.
Location empty
An automatic command requested the crane to pickup a load from a location
in which it could not see a load, or from a double deep location while it
could see a load in front. If the "Crane to find vacancy" is set, or there
are pickface linkages set for that location, the computer will handle these
alarms on its own, provided it did not occur at the crane infeed.
If the computer does not handle it automatically, you should abort the
current command.
Location full
An automatic command requested the crane to deposit a load into a location
in which it could already see a load. If the "Crane to find vacancy" is
set, the computer will handle these alarms on its own, provided it did not
occur at the crane outfeed.
If the computer does not handle it automatically, you should use the
"Modify Current Command" to issue a deposit to an alternate location.
HL bad screen
After positioning on a screen, the reader found the screen not to have the
correct number of tabs.
The screen the crane is positioned at may need to be replaced, or rubbish
may need to be removed from the reader, or the reader may need repair.
LT bad screen
After positioning on a screen, the reader found the screen not to have the
correct number of tabs.
The screen the crane is positioned at may need to be replaced, or rubbish
may need to be removed from the reader, or the reader may need repair.
HL stalled
This alarm reflects the situation where the crane has asked for hoist
motion and has seen no evidence of this. There are a number of possible
causes, including the motors being isolated, and failure of hoist position
reader.
In this case, you will need to inspect the situation and adjust the load
physically or by using the manual controls at the electrical cabinet or
from the cabin.
LT stalled
This alarm reflects the situation where the crane has asked for long travel
motion and has seen no evidence of this. There are a number of possible
causes, including the motors being isolated, and failure of long travel
position reader. In cranes where the forks off-centre switch is not wired
into the PLC, the most common cause of "LT stalled", is the forks being
slightly off centre resulting in the relay logic, unbeknown to the crane,
preventing long travel motion.
In this case, you will need to inspect the situation and adjust the load
physically or by using the manual controls at the electrical cabinet or
from the cabin.
LT stalled/centred?
This alarm reflects the situation where the crane has asked for long travel
motion and has seen no evidence of this. There are a number of possible
causes, including the motors being isolated, failure of long travel
position reader. In cranes where the forks off-centre switch is not wired
into the PLC, the most common cause of "LT stalled", is the forks being
slightly off centre resulting in the relay logic, unbeknown to the crane,
preventing long travel motion.
In this case, you will need to inspect the situation and adjust the load
physically or by using the manual controls at the electrical cabinet or
from the cabin.
Lost fork limit sw.
This indicates that the forks have travelled past the target limit switch.
This is likely to result from the forks failing to slow down beforehand.
This in turn can be caused by the fork centre proximity being falsely
triggered away from centre or by the fork counter photocell either not
operating or else not operating correctly.
To correct the situation, position the forks on the appropriate limit
switch, using the manual controls at the electrical cabinet or from the
cabin. It may assist to recentre the forks first, then extend the forks to
the limit switch, where it should either pause (if single deep) or stop (if
double deep). Had you centred the forks, you should use the "Modify
Current Command", specifying the same command so as to start the command
again from scratch.
Forks switch lost
This indicates that the forks have travelled past the target limit switch.
This is likely to result from the forks failing to slow down beforehand.
This in turn can be caused by the fork centre proximity being falsely
triggered away from centre or by the fork counter photocell either not
operating or else not operating correctly.
To correct the situation, position the forks on the appropriate limit
switch, using the manual controls at the electrical cabinet or from the
cabin. It may assist to recentre the forks first, then extend the forks to
the limit switch, where it should either pause (if single deep) or stop (if
double deep). Had you centred the forks, you should use the "Modify
Current Command", specifying the same command so as to start the command
again from scratch.
Overall Watchdog
This indicates that the crane failed to complete its command within a
reasonable time. Its probable cause is that the crane has entered a
looping mode switching from one state to another and back again without
triggering the associated watchdogs within these states. The cause for
this is likely to be associated with physical problems, such as rubbish in
the long travel or hoist readers, missing screens or the T1 and/or T2
photocells being incorrectly adjusted.
It can also be caused by conflicting readings from its inputs such as
having the double deep left switch activated at the same time as the forks
centred switch.
The quick fix is to check the readers for rubbish then position the hoist
and long travel on the appropriate screen by using the manual controls at
the electrical cabinet or from the cabin.
High load manual
An attempt was made to extend the forks into a location that can not
accommodate a load of this load's apparent height.
High load automatic
An automatic command requested the crane to access a location that can not
accommodate a load of this load's apparent height.
You may need to use the "Modify Current Command" to provide an alternate
destination for the load.
Cabin too slow down
The crane has taken too long to lower the cabin. This implies that either
the cabin has not moved fast enough or has not been seen to move fast
enough.
If it has failed to move, check for obstructions.
If it has not been seen to move, check the adjustment of the proximity
switches.
This fault will require that you inspect the situation and position the
hoist and long travel on a screen appropriately by using the manual
controls at the electrical cabinet or from the cabin. Raising the hoist
above the third top level causes the cabin to lower, while lowering it
below the fourth top level causes the cabin to rise.
Pickup not going
The crane is in its pickup cycle (B18/11) but has been spending too long
waiting for conditions to be appropriate for the next phase of the pickup
cycle to commence (B18/14 - extend left, B18/24 retract from left, B18/15 -
extend right, or B18/25 - return from right).
This is a type of catch-all alarm that is here because insufficient care
has been taken to report the actual problem that has lead to the situation
that prevents this operation from continuing.
Possible causes include the load-on-forks photocell being blocked, or,
else, with the forks off the centre sensor, having one of the
load-off-centre photocells obstructed.
Empty Pallet in Way
This alarm was originally designated "Deposit not going" and has been
renamed in honour of its most common cause.
The crane is in its deposit cycle (B19/11) but has been spending too long
waiting for conditions to be appropriate for the next phase of the deposit
cycle to commence (B19/14 - extend left, B19/24 retract from left, B19/15 -
extend right, or B19/25 - return from right).
This is a type of catch-all alarm that is here because insufficient care
has been taken to report the actual problem that has lead to the situation
that prevents this operation from continuing.
We have found that, generally, this is a result of an empty pallet being
left in the pickface after all product has been picked from it.
Cabin too slow up
The crane has taken too long to raise the cabin. This implies that either
the cabin has not moved fast enough or has not been seen to move fast
enough.
If it has failed to move, check for obstructions.
If it has not been seen to move, check the adjustment of the proximity
switches.
This fault will require that you inspect the situation and position the
hoist and long travel on a screen appropriately by using the manual
controls at the electrical cabinet or from the cabin. Raising the hoist
above the third top level causes the cabin to lower, while lowering it
below the fourth top level causes the cabin to rise.
Pickup not centred
Once the photocells indicate that conditions are safe to pickup a load,
then, provided that the forks are centred, the forks cycle will start. Had
the forks not been centred, this alarm will be raised. This is not
expected to be a common event; most likely resulting from the crane being
left, after manual intervention, with its forks off centre.
Deposit not centred
Once the photocells indicate that conditions are safe to deposit a load,
then, provided that the forks are centred, the forks cycle will start. Had
the forks not been centred, this alarm will be raised. This is not
expected to be a common event; most likely resulting from the crane being
left, after manual intervention, with its forks off centre.
LT wrong card
The long travel axis has counted its way to the screen, then when its
photocells had settled on the screen, it found that it was on the wrong
place. Had the location been sufficiently close to the intended target,
the crane would have had a second attempt to find the correct screen before
raising this alarm.
This alarm can result from rubbish in the aisle blocking the reader,
causing it to miscount the screens, an incorrectly placed or programmed
screen, a damaged screen, or a fault with the reader box.
Hoist wrong card
The hoist axis has counted its way to the screen, then when its photocells
had settled on the screen, it found that it was on the wrong place. Had
the location been sufficiently close to the intended target, the crane
would have had a second attempt to find the correct screen before raising
this alarm.
This alarm can result from rubbish in the aisle blocking the reader,
causing it to miscount the screens, an incorrectly placed or programmed
screen, a damaged screen, or a fault with the reader box.
Can't centre forks
After the crane is set in service, it first tries to centre its forks. If
it fails to do so within a reasonable period of time, this alarm is raised.
The most likely cause is that the crane was between high and low stop, or
came off high or low stop during forking, preventing this operation from
taking place.
Other causes include, the load on the forks fouling the racking, cartons
coming loose from the load an obstructing the progress of the forks, the
clutch being set too light or mechanical problems with the forks.
This fault will require that you inspect the situation and adjust the load
physically or by using the manual controls at the electrical cabinet or
from the cabin.
Fork recovery fail
After the crane is set in service, it first tries to centre its forks. If
it fails to do so within a reasonable period of time, this alarm is raised.
The most likely cause is that the crane was between high and low stop, or
came off high or low stop during forking, preventing this operation from
taking place.
Other causes include, the load on the forks fouling the racking, cartons
coming loose from the load an obstructing the progress of the forks, the
clutch being set too light or mechanical problems with the forks.
This fault will require that you inspect the situation and adjust the load
physically or by using the manual controls at the electrical cabinet or
from the cabin.
Off LT when forking
This alarm is produced if the crane is no longer on the screen during the
forking operation (picking up or depositing). The degree to which this is
policed, is settable, and if set loosely, will allow the forking to
continue so long as the crane is partially on the screen.
This fault will require you to centre the forks, then set the crane
correctly on the long travel screen, then reset the alarms and set it back
in service.
Off HL when forking
This alarm is produced if the crane is no longer on the screen during the
forking operation (picking up or depositing). The degree to which this is
policed, is settable. It may be set so that the crane must remain on high
stop or low stop (as the case may be), see either T1 or T2 tab for the
appropriate position, or see T1 or T2 for either position.
This fault will require you to centre the forks, then set the crane
correctly on the hoist screen, then reset the alarms and set it back in
service.
LT reader blocked
The long travel screen reader box found that at least one of its location
or parity photocells was blocked when both its T1 and T2 photocells were
clear.
This alarm can result from rubbish in the aisle, or caught up in the
reader, blocking the reader, or grime on or damage to the body of the
screen causing either the T1 or T2 photocell not to be reflected or blocked
(depending upon the method used). If this alarm can be reset, without
needing to attend to the crane's reader box, it implies that the cause was,
most likely, grime on or damage to a screen. This grime or damage should
be corrected as it will also impact on the crane's positioning performance.
HL reader blocked
The hoist screen reader box found that at least one of its location or
parity photocells was blocked when both its T1 and T2 photocells were
clear.
This alarm can result from rubbish in the aisle, or caught up in the
reader, blocking the reader, or grime on or damage to the body of the
screen causing either the T1 or T2 photocell not to be reflected or blocked
(depending upon the method used). If this alarm can be reset, without
needing to attend to the crane's reader box, it implies that the cause was,
most likely, grime on or damage to a screen. This grime or damage should
be corrected as it will also impact on the crane's positioning performance.
LT brake release on
The LT brake release is used to release the brake, to allow the crane to be
pushed when the motor has failed. While the brake is released, neither
manual nor automatic operation can not take place.
If this has been left on erroneously, have an electrician correct it.
Buffer shifted back
This indicates that the crane has gone beyond the end stop (in the reverse
direction) and has thereby shifted its buffer.
Depending on the type of buffer used, it may be sufficient to move the
crane back off the buffer. Other types of buffers need to be mechanically
reset.
Buffer shifted fwd.
This indicates that the crane has gone beyond the end stop (in the forward
direction) and has thereby shifted its buffer.
Depending on the type of buffer used, it may be sufficient to move the
crane back off the buffer. Other types of buffers need to be mechanically
reset.
Emergency stop
An emergency stop has been operated. The reason for pressing the stop
should be established, then, when safe to do so, the stop should be
released, allowing the operation of the system to continue.
LT at both ends
The long travel forward and reverse end inputs have indicated that the
crane is at both ends at once - an impossible state.
This could be due to failure of one of the switches involved, a fault in
the cabling, or badly adjusted magnets.
HL at both ends
The hoist high and low inputs have indicated that the crane is towards the
top of its travel and the bottom of its travel at once - an impossible
state.
This could be due to failure of one of the switches involved, a fault in
the cabling up the mast, or badly adjusted magnets.
Cabin up and down
The cabin up and down inputs have indicated that the crane's cabin is both
up and down at once - an impossible state.
This could be due to failure of one of the switches involved, a fault in
the cabling up the mast, or badly adjusted magnets.
HL at low & hi stop
All the hoist reader box's "T" photocells are blocked, indicating that it
is simultaneously in both high and low stop.
This alarm can result from rubbish in the aisle, or caught up in the
reader, blocking the reader, or grime on or damage to the body of the
screen causing either the T1 or T2 photocell not to be reflected or blocked
(depending upon the method used). If this alarm can be reset, without
needing to attend to the crane's reader box, it implies that the cause was,
most likely, grime on or damage to a screen. This grime or damage should
be corrected as it will also impact on the crane's positioning performance.
HL wrong for magnet
The hoist axis has encountered a magnet where it should not be, or else has
not encountered a magnet where it had expected one to be.
This is either because it failed to read the magnet, or else has miscounted
a screen. The miscount could have resulted from rubbish in the aisle
blocking the reader, an incorrectly placed or programmed screen, a damaged
screen, or a fault with the reader box.
LT wrong for magnet
The long travel axis has encountered a magnet where it should not be, or
else has not encountered a magnet where it had expected one to be.
This is either because it failed to read the magnet, or else has miscounted
a screen. The miscount could have resulted from rubbish in the aisle
blocking the reader, an incorrectly placed or programmed screen, a damaged
screen, or a fault with the reader box.
Automatic Command Queue
At the bottom of the window are the two motion commands currently written
into the crane's PLC - the current command below the pending command.
Below these again is the done command that should appear briefly at the
completion of a command. When the done command is not shown, the current
position of the crane is shown instead.
Beneath this is the "governing command", when one is present. If present,
the governing command is shown next to the text "Command:", if it does not
correspond to a single crane command, the stage, at which the governing
command is up to, will be presented below the governing command.
If either all-automatic-commands or just-automatic-retrievals are turned
off, then, when there is no governing command, a message to this effect
will be presented in place of the governing command. For instructions for
disabling automatic commands or just retrievals, refer to the sections
titled: "Turning
Off and On Automatic Commands", and
"Turning
Off and On Retrieval Commands".
If the Movement Controller is attempting to issue a command, which the
Movement Controller's checking software is deeming to be unwise, a message
to this effect will be presented beneath the governing command and in place
of the automatic-commands-off message. For more detail on these messages,
please refer to the section titled:
"Checking
Software Messages".
Command Presentation Format
The formats of the two motion commands and the done command or position,
are all the same.
The first field in each command indicates whether the command is a travel,
pickup or deposit command by displaying the text "Travel", "Pickup", or
"Deposit" respectively. If there is no command this field will be
blank.
The second field presents the store slot coordinates to which the command
refers, or, in the case of the "done command or position" when there is no
done command, the slot nearest the crane.
Governing Command
Most of the commands issued to the crane are issued so as to move a pallet
from one location to another. This is referred to as the governing
command. The governing command, usually a "Store", "Retrieve", or
"Relocate" is presented below the command queue, along with the stage
it is at, for example, "Waiting to issue pickup".
Associated with a governing commands may be a number of crane commands,
such as pickup from the racking, and deposit to the outfeed.
Once the deposit command has been written to the crane, the governing
command is finished, and a new governing command may start. This new
governing command may be at the stage "Waiting to issue pickup", while it
waits for the deposit command, from the previous governing command, to be
shifted into the current command position. The point to bear in mind here
is that the governing command presented at any time does not necessarily
have anything to do with what the crane is currently doing, or about to do,
as the crane might still be following the instructions from the last
governing command.
You might regard the governing command as an indication of what's coming
up.
Checking Software Messages
The messages you are likely to see, which can impact upon what the crane is
wanting to do, include:
PAUSED
At certain sites, the Movement Controller may find it necessary, in, say,
the event of fire, to instruct the crane to pause its operations, in order
to allow people to evacuate the warehouse, via the passages that cross the
crane aisles. This might also result from someone requesting access to the
warehouse.
NOT PERMITTED TO TRAVEL
At certain sites, the Movement Controller may determine that it is not safe
for the crane to travel (long travel or hoisting) due to, say, the
detection of an obstruction in the aisle. When this status is set, the
crane will be allowed to complete its fork cycles, but not to move to
another position.
TRYING TO PICKUP FROM OUTFEED
TRYING TO DEPOSIT TO INFEED
Somehow, the Movement Controller has found itself trying to issue an
illegal command to a crane. This would usually require some investigation,
however, in the end, you'll probably need to abort commands so as to allow
the crane to resume its normal operations.
Turning Off and On Automatic Commands
This menu option is only presented if you have sufficient privilege to use
it. This privilege level is specified in the "Configuration Data" record,
titled "Level: crane auto off". Please refer to the section titled:
"Configuration
Data".
The Movement Controller issues governing commands to the crane to move
pallets about the warehouse as it thinks fit. If you wish to issue these
governing commands yourself, using the commands, "Store a load", "Retrieve
a load", and "Relocate a load in the rack" (discussed in the next section),
then you might wish to disable the Movement Controller from issuing these
commands itself.
To do this, click on the menu bar item, "Automatic on/off", or type "A",
then click on "Off" or type "O".
In response the text, "AUTOMATIC ISSUING OF COMMANDS IS OFF", will be
displayed in place of the governing command. Disabling of the automatic
issuing of commands has no effect on any governing command that may already
be in place.
To allow the system to again issue governing commands automatically, click
on the menu bar item, "Automatic on/off", or type "A", then click on
"Automatic on" or type "A".
Inhibiting the Crane
There is a provision to let the host_computer know that a crane is out of
action. Once you turn off the automatic issuing of crane commands, you
will be asked whether you wish to inform the host_computer of this.
Informing the host_computer of the crane being down will result in it not
issuing further requests for this crane, and to have its existing requests
cancelled.
You should only do this if you are intending that the crane be left out of
automatic operation for some time.
To inform the host_computer of this, enter a reason for the crane being
down. The reason is a "Symbolic Name" field that references the "Crane
Down Reasons" database. For editing instructions for this type of field,
please refer to the section titled:
"Symbolic
Name".
The host_computer will be informed of the crane being again available
once you have turned automatic commands back on.
The reason the crane is down will be presented alongside the text,
"AUTOMATIC ISSUING OF COMMANDS IS OFF".
Turning Off and On Retrieval Commands
This menu option is only presented if you have sufficient privilege to use
it. This privilege level is specified in the "Configuration Data" record,
titled "Level: crane auto off". Please refer to the section titled:
"Configuration
Data".
The Movement Controller issues governing commands to the crane to retrieve
loads from the warehouse in accordance with the retrieval schedules.
Please refer to the section titled:
"Retrieve
from Stores by Location".
If you wish to suspend the retrieval of loads, without deleting the
schedules themselves, then you can do this using this function.
To do this, click on the menu bar item, "Retrieval on/off", or type "R",
then click on "Off" or type "O".
In response the text, "AUTOMATIC RETRIEVAL OF ... IS OFF", will be
displayed in place of the governing command. Disabling of the automatic
issuing of retrieval commands has no effect on any governing command that
may already be in place, and the message, , will only be displayed if there
is no governing command, and if you have not also disabled all automatic
commands as well. Please refer to the section titled:
"Turning
Off and On Automatic Commands".
To allow the system to again issue retrieval commands automatically, click
on the menu bar item, "Retrieval on/off", or type "R", then click on
"Retrieval on" or type "R".
Putting the Crane Back Service
This menu option is only presented if you have sufficient privilege to use
it. This privilege level is specified in the "Configuration Data" record,
titled "Level: crane auto off". Please refer to the section titled:
"Configuration
Data".
Additionally, certain sites have a restriction upon which terminals allow
an operator to use this command. If this is one of these sites, this
function is restricted to those terminals listed in the set of terminal
locations and, there, flagged as allowing crane control. Please refer to
the section titled:
"Terminal
Locations".
If you do not have sufficient privilege to use this command, you will need
to issue the individual, non-motion commands, "Reset Alarms", "Energise
Main Contactor", and "Set in Service", via the "Command" menu bar item.
Please refer to the section titled:
"Operator
Commands".
When the crane encounters an alarm, as well as raising the alarm, it may
drop its main contactor, and will always set itself out of service. To get
it back into service, you need to reset its alarms, energise its main
contactor and set it back into service. This command performs these three
functions.
To do this, click on the menu bar item, "Put in service", or type "P", then
click on "Put in service" or type "P" a second time.
For some sites, there may be required further dialogue, in order to obtain
a reason for the action and/or to obtain the identity of the person putting
the crane back in service.
In response, you should see the crane's status gradually change so that
first its main contactor is energised, then its alarms are reset, and
finally it is set back into service.
Operator Commands
There are several operator commands, however, depending upon you privilege
level, you may not be allowed access to all or any of these. Please refer
to the section titled:
"Crane
Commands and Security",
Additionally, certain sites have a restriction upon which terminals allow
an operator to use the crane commands. If this is one of these sites, this
function is restricted to those terminals listed in the set of terminal
locations and, there, flagged as allowing crane control. Please refer to
the section titled:
"Terminal
Locations".
Of the many commands, which an operator may issue to a crane, the first six
are non-motion commands. The next group of commands are either individual
instances of the two motion commands or higher level (governing) commands
requiring two or more motion commands.
The remaining commands allow the modification of the current crane command,
without upsetting the next command, the killing of the governing command
(which does not directly involve communications with the crane), and manual
control of the crane (which may not be supported by the crane's
manufacturer).
Commands may be sent by clicking on the "Commands" menu item or typing
[ALTERNATE C], then selecting the command from the resulting drop-down menu
then filling in the required parameters for the command, then typing
[ENTER] or clicking on the "DO IT" button.
Alternatively, there is a list of commands shown to the right of the
window. Associated with each command in this list is a number, and one of
these commands is highlighted. Any command can be selected by either
typing the corresponding number and pressing [ENTER], or by moving the
highlight, using the [UP], [DOWN], [HOME], and [END] keys, to the desired
command and typing [ENTER], or by clicking the desired command with the
mouse and typing [ENTER], or by double clicking the command with the mouse.
However you selected the command, you will then be required to fill in the
required parameters, just as if you had selected it via the "Command" menu
item, and confirm by typing [ENTER] or clicking on the "DO IT" button.
If you right-click on a command in the list at the right of the window, you
will be presented with the help page relating to that command.
Sometimes you might be warned that it might not be a good idea to do what
you have chosen to do - if you get such a message you should review what
you are about to do.
In particular, the Movement Controller prefers the crane to be idle before
you issue relocation-style commands, as this helps to ensure that it has
correct stack height data available. If you are issuing relocation-style
commands, it might be best to first turn off the automatic issuing of
commands to the crane.
For some sites, there may be required further dialogue, for one or more of
the commands, in order to obtain a reason for the action and/or to obtain
the identity of the person issuing the command.
For many of the commands, it is a good idea to be familiar with how the
commands are sent to the crane. For a discussion of this procedure, please
refer to the section titled:
"Automatic
Command Queue".
Non-Motion Commands
The Movement Controller has six non-motion commands that it may send to the
crane and three motion commands.
Reset alarms
Used to unlatch the alarms in the crane PLC after the faults have been
rectified.
Energise main contactor
Used to energise the main contactor after the cause of its deenergisation
has been rectified.
Set out of service
Prevents Movement Controller from issuing further commands to the crane and
the PLC from executing those it has.
Set in service
Allows the automatic control of the crane to recommence. A crane can be
set out of service due to a blockage to the aisle-clear scanners. If this
is the case, you will not be able to set the crane back into service. Once
the scanners are clear, you will still not be able to set the crane back in
service until confirming that you have checked that the obstruction is now
clear. You may be asked to provide your login before you may make such a
confirmation (this is set by the "Configuration Data" record "Get password:
clear crane" - see
"Configuration
Data").
Abort current cycle
Kills the currently executing command in the PLC. May only be issued when
the crane is out of service.
Kill next cycle
Kills the pending command in the PLC. This may result in another command
replacing the pending command. It too may be killed by repeating this
command.
Motion Commands
The motion commands are:
Movement test cycle
Sends the crane to a given long travel and hoist level.
Pickup test cycle
Sends the crane to a given long travel and hoist level to pickup a load.
Deposit test cycle
Sends the crane to a given long travel and hoist level to deposit a load.
The motion commands that an operator may send to a crane are either
specific instances of the above, or combinations of two or more of these
commands.
Movement test cycle
Sends the crane to a given long travel and hoist level.
Pickup test cycle
Sends the crane to a given long travel and hoist level to pickup a load.
Deposit test cycle
Sends the crane to a given long travel and hoist level to deposit a load.
Goto crane infeed
Issues a test travel command specifying the coordinates of the infeed
station.
Goto crane outfeed
Issues a test travel command specifying the coordinates of the outfeed
station.
Park at Maintenance Bay
This command is offered for several sites. It allows you to issue a test
travel command, specifying the coordinates of the maintenance bay.
Store a load
Issues a pickup half cycle specifying the infeed station then a deposit
half cycle specifying the given store location.
Retrieve a load
Issues a pickup half cycle specifying the given store location then a
deposit half cycle specifying the outfeed station (or the given outfeed
station, if more than one exists). The ultimate destination is also
entered and assigned to the load when it is picked up.
Deposit the load on board
Issues a deposit half cycle specifying the given store location.
Relocate a load in the rack
Issues a pickup half cycle specifying the given store location then a
deposit half cycle specifying another given store location.
Run test cycles
Issues a series of test cycles ultimately sending the crane to every store
location. It is stopped by issuing another of these eleven commands.
Modify Current Command
The next command, "Modify current command", allows the modification of the
current command in the crane PLC to allow an alternate location to be
specified.
You would typically use this command if a deposit command fails due to a
problem with the destination. Had you used the "Abort" command, there may
have been a pickup command, corresponding to the next governing command, in
the crane's next command position, which would also need to be killed,
along with its governing command. This command allows you to leave the
next command and its associated governing command in place, while you
instruct the crane to unload itself elsewhere.
You should also take the opportunity to disable this location so that the
Movement Controller does not attempt to place another load here until the
problem has been rectified.
Kill Governing Command
The command, "Kill governing command", allows you to kill the governing
command, which is responsible to the issuance of the individual crane
commands.
You would typically need to do this if you have made an adjustment to the
inventory and so you need to have the Movement Controller work out its next
move based on this new data - the previous governing command could be in
error as it was constructed based on erroneous data.
Please bear in mind that the Movement Controller considers a load to have
been delivered to an outfeed once it has put the corresponding governing
command in place, so if you kill one of these commands you may find that
you do not receive the number of loads you had asked for.
Remote Manual Crane Control
The remote manual commands should only be used to rectify crane faults once
the physical situation has been checked.
Typically, if you have returned from fixing the crane and found you had
left it so that the "Hoist too low" or "LT overrun" alarms resulted, you
could raise or reverse the crane until the "In Position" lamps flash, then
position the crane on these lamps. Similarly had you failed to centre the
forks, You could use these controls to centre the forks.
After selecting manual control, the window will appear as shown overleaf:
This window presents "push buttons" for long travel forward and reverse,
slow and fast, hoist up and down, slow and fast, and forks left and right.
The rim of one push button is highlighted and several of the push buttons
advertise a function key.
The highlighted rim can be moved about the "push buttons" using the cursor
control keys. The push button with the highlighted rim can be "pressed" by
pressing on the space bar, while those advertising function keys may be
"pressed" by pressing the advertised function key. The mouse may be
used to push a push button, however it does not relocate the highlighted
rim.
The window also provides several "lamps", which show whether the crane is
in high stop, low stop, long travel position and whether it has a load
off-centre to the left or right.
In the top right corner of the window is shown a diagram of the crane,
showing the state of its load sensing, load off-centre, bin occupied and
height check photocells and the extension of its forks and, if the forks
are not centred, whether at high stop or not; if at high stop, a load will
be shown at the forks extension, otherwise the forks will be shown.
If the forks are not centred, the crane will instead show whether the
computer's inventory has it holding a load.
The colour of the forks, or the colour of the border around the load will
be red if the crane is in automatic, yellow if in manual or grey if
otherwise out of service.
The body of the crane will be shown in orange if healthy, or red if in
alarm.
Initialise Crane PLC
If you are working with the current version of the crane PLC code, there
will be an option enabling you to write the racking data to the crane.
This option draws on the information contained within the stores diagram -
the non-existent locations and the slot heights - to initialise the
corresponding data files within the crane PLC. Refer to the section
titled: "Stores Diagram".
If you are working with the current version of the crane PLC code, there
may be an option enabling you to save the current configuration of this
crane to a file on the hard disc. This is normally performed using "Save
and Restore Crane PLC Configuration" window, please refer to the section
titled: "Save
and Restore Crane PLC Configuration".
Restore Crane PLC Configur'n
If you are working with the current version of the crane PLC code, there
may be an option enabling you to restore the previously saved configuration
of this crane from a file on the hard disc. This is normally performed
using "Save and Restore Crane PLC Configuration" window, please refer to
the section titled:
"Save
and Restore Crane PLC Configuration".
Retrieve from Stores by Location (new)
This window allows the operator to create and review location retrieval
schedules.
There are four methods of retrieving loads.
The first of these methods we call "Stores". This method allows you to
select loads to retrieve by moving about the stores diagram, pressing
[ENTER] or double-clicking as you go. This is the traditional method
offered by the Movement Controller. The remaining three methods have been
written specifically for Americold to assist them in the way that they
enter retrievals.
The second method (the first of the three written specifically for
Americold) we call "Replenishment". This method allows you to specify
movements from within the store to the pick-face, more conveniently.
The third method we call "Outfeed". This method allows you to specify
movements from several store locations to the appropriate outfeed.
The fourth and final method we call "Empties". This method creates a
schedule to retrieve all empty pallets, allowing you to delete any you do
not want to retrieve, before submitting the schedule.
So when you first enter the screen, you will be presented with a dialogue
box allowing you to select one of these four methods. You need to type "S"
or click on "Stores" to select the first method (as described in the
dialogue box). Similarly, you need to type "R" or click on "Replenishment"
to select the second method, type "O" or click on "Outfeed" to select the
third method, and type "E" or click on "Empties" to select the fourth
method.
Had you selected the first method, you would proceed as described for the
traditional method in the section titled:
"Retrieve
from Stores by Location".
The remaining three methods are very different to the traditional method,
but very similar to one another. So the instructions that follow will
refer to all three of these remaining methods, indicating the differences
between them when necessary.
After selecting one of the three remaining methods, you will be presented
with a window in which the records corresponding to each retrieve request
are listed. Each retrieve request consists of a barcode, a source
location, a destination, and the priority.
This is a "Maintenance Viewing Data" screen, so the features shared by all
such screens will not be described here; for these, please refer to the
sections titled: "Viewing Data", and
"Maintenance
Viewing Data".
Initially these screens will be substantially blank, except in the case of
"Empties", where it will be populated by retrieval requests for each
empty pallet stack location that the PDS system shows to be loaded,
provided that the location has not been inhibited.
Creating Retrieval Requests
To get started (or if using the "Empties" yet still needing to add
requests), press [INSERT]. In response you will be presented with a
dialogue window.
For the "Replenishment" method, there will be two fields to fill in, namely
the source location (which should be an occupied regular storage location),
and the destination (which should be a vacant pick-face location). After
typing in the source location, press the [TAB] key and commence to type in
the destination location. After typing in the destination, you should type
[ENTER] or [RETURN].
For the "Outfeed" method, you will only need to fill in the source
location, which should be an occupied regular storage location. After
typing in the source location, you should type [ENTER] or [RETURN]. The
destination will be automatically set to either "M89A", or "M40A" depending
upon which is appropriate.
For the "Empties" method, you will only need to fill in the source
location, which should be an empty pallet location, which the PDS system is
reporting as occupied. Unlike the other methods, which will offer blank
fields, this will provide the reference to the next empty pallet stack
location, irrespective of whether the stack can be seen or the location is
inhibited. The "next" refers to the first location after that specified in
the highlighted retrieve request. After typing in the source location, you
should type [ENTER] or [RETURN]. The destination will be automatically set
to either "M89A", or "M40A" depending upon which is appropriate.
In all cases, the priority will be set to 0 or blank, indicating the
highest priority. Don't concern yourself with the priority at this stage.
Should you need to alter the priority, you may do so, on an individual
record basis, when you have returned to the "Maintenance Viewing Data"
screen. The altering of priorities is described in the section titled:
""Prioritise,
Modify, or Delete".
In response to typing [ENTER] or [RETURN], certain checks are made of your
entry. If your entry fails one of these checks, you will be informed of
this. If the failure is due to a location being inhibited, you will be
given the opportunity to clear the inhibited status. Certain, of the other
possible causes for the failure of these checks, may also be overridden.
If your entry passes these checks, the dialogue box will be presented
again, allowing you to immediately enter the next request. In the case of
the "Replenishments" and "Outfeeds", the dialogue box will provide you with
the barcode corresponding to the request that you had just entered,
allowing you to check that you had entered the correct source location.
Once you have entered all the requests that you need to, either press
[ENTER] or [RETURN] with blank entries, or press [ESCAPE]. If you press
[ESCAPE], then anything that had been entered into the fields in the
current dialogue box will be discarded. In either case, you will be
returned to the "Maintenance Viewing Data" screen, now including your new
requests. These will not, yet, be acted upon.
Deleting Retrieval Requests
To remove a request, simply highlight the request in question, then type
"D" twice. The first "D" invokes the menu bar option "Delete",
whilst the second confirms the deletion request by activating the "Delete"
button in the resulting dialogue box.
Prioritise, Modify, or Delete
The difference between this window and a standard "Maintenance Viewing
Data" window is that, as well as modifying a load, the operator has
the option to conveniently adjust the priority of the load.
When selecting a record, if "U" or [RETURN] is used, you will be asked,
after specifying the record, whether you wish to prioritise (type "U" or
click on "Urgency"), modify (type "M" or click on "Modify"), or delete the
load (type "D" or click on "Delete").
On the other hand, had you used [ENTER] to select the record, it will be
assumed that you wish to prioritise the load. Double-clicking the mouse on
the desired load is equivalent to typing [ENTER].
Had you opted to prioritise the load, you will be presented with the
prompt, "Please enter new urgency for the load, Urgent 0:most 10:stop
<0-10>". Enter the desired priority.
Submitting the Schedule
When happy with the schedule, you can submit it by exiting the screen. In
response, these requests will be transfered to the "Waiting" queue. You
can monitor the requests from this point by using the "Review Loads Being
Retrieved" screen. Please refer to the sections titled:
"Review
Loads Being Retrieved".
Retrieve from Stores by Location
This window allows the operator to create and review location retrieval
schedules.
This screen will appear substantially blank unless some retrieval requests
have been entered. Once this has been done, each schedule will be
represented by a box at the bottom of the screen, arranged in the order in
which they are created, with the first at the left.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Retrieve loads by location
Select Change Restrict Where Match Expand Insert First Last
Number of loads 370 ^
┌───┬────┬────┬────┬────┬────┬────┬────┬────┬────┬────┬────┬────┬────┬───┐█
│■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪■■■■▪▪■■▪▪■■■■■▪■■▪■■■■■■■■▪■■│█
│▪▪▪▪■▪■▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪▪■■▪▪▪▪▪■■▪▪▪■■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪│█
│■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■▪■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■▪■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■▪■■■■■│█
│▪■■■▪▪■▪■■■▪■■■■■■■■■■■■▪■▪■■■■■■■■■■■■■■▪■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■▪■■■■■■■■■■■▪■■│█
│■■▪■■■▪■■■■■▪▪■■■■■■■■■■■■■▪■■■■■▪■■■■■■▪■■■■■■■▪■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■│█
│▪▪▪▪▪■■■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■▪■■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■▪■▪│█
│▪▪■▪▪■■▪▪▪▪▪■▪■▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■■■▪■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪■▪▪■■▪▪■▪▪■▪■▪▪■■▪▪■│█
│▪▪▪▪■■▪▪▪■■▪▪■▪■▪■■▪■■■▪■■▪■▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■■▪▪▪▪■■▪■▪■■■▪▪▪▪■■■■▪■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■│█
│▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪■▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪■■▪▪■▪▪■│█
│▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪■▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■■▪▪▪▪▪■▪■■■▪■■▪■■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪■■■■▪■│█
│▓▓■▪▪▪▪ ▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪■■▪■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪ ▪▪▪▪■▪▪■■▪■▪■■■■■■■▪■■▪■■■▪▪▪■▪■▪■│█
└───┴────┴────┴────┴────┴────┴────┴────┴────┴────┴────┴────┴────┴────┴───┘█
█
█
V
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
1002010|O| | | | | |207680|593100720030023457|
Rack slot inhibited <I/S/R>a Rack Rack Rack SSCC
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
■■■■
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
If the schedule is in the extreme left position, it is being executed.
When the schedule has been completed, it is removed from the window and the
string of schedules is shifted one place left.
Reading Schedules
As the cursor is moved (using the [SEPARATE LEFT] and [SEPARATE RIGHT]
keys, or clicking with the mouse) among the schedules, the box will be
shown open, and its contents are displayed in the rack face display.
There will also be a horizontal scroll bar, in case the window is not large
enough to present the maximum number of schedules. This scroll bar can
only be operated using the mouse - this is the fourth scroll bar on this
window, so all the usual keys have been otherwise used.
As the commands to retrieve a load are issued, the box representing its
location in the rack face display, is darkened.
Creation of Schedules
A schedule may be created by typing [INSERT]. The cursor will be moved to
the "Set of Fields", this data may now be set as required. Refer to the
section titled: "Set of Fields".
This "Set of Fields" typically includes the destination (a "Destination"
field) and a load number (a "Numeric" field). For editing instructions for
these types of fields, please refer to the sections titled:
"Numeric", and
"Destination".
After setting the destination and load number, the cursor will be relocated
into the rack face display. The normal functions associated with this
display are available. Refer to the section titled:
"Stores
Diagram", and in particular, its subsection titled:
"Select
Loads for Retrieval". In the rack face display, selecting a location allows
you to edit the database details associated with the location, but, in this
case, selecting a location will, instead, add it to the schedule (or,
should it already be on the schedule, remove it from the schedule).
When all required locations have been selected, type [ESCAPE].
At the bottom of the window, each schedule is represented by a box. As you
create more schedules these will be arranged in the order in which they are
created and will be executed, with the first at the left.
Modification of Schedules
A schedule may be modified by moving the cursor to that schedule then
typing the "S", [RETURN] or [ENTER] key. The cursor will return to the
"Set of Fields".
Proceed from here as you did to create the schedule. Refer to the section
titled: "Creation
of Schedules".
Sequencing Schedules
If the order of the schedules requires modification, move the cursor to the
schedule that needs to be repositioned, then type the [SEPARATE UP] key.
The schedule is then positioned one line above its current position, and if
possible the cursor is moved one position left. Clicking on the schedule
at the cursor will alternately raise and lower it, leaving the cursor at
the schedule.
By using the [SEPARATE LEFT] and [SEPARATE RIGHT] keys this schedule may be
moved along the string, one place to the right of the cursor whenever
possible, while the contents of the schedule at the cursor position are
displayed. When its new location has been found type [SEPARATE DOWN]. The
schedule will be lowered into position and the cursor moved back to it.
The schedule may also be moved to a given place in the queue by clicking
the mouse on the schedule currently in that location. This moves the
schedule into this position, moving the other schedules left or right to
fill the vacancy left, while placing the cursor one position to the left of
the schedule if possible.
Deleting Schedules
Any schedule may be deleted by moving the cursor to that schedule then
typing [DELETE]. If you type [DELETE] you will be prompted to confirm your
intention by typing [F1].
Review Loads Being Retrieved
This window allows the operator to create or modify requests for loads to
be retrieved from the high-rise. These loads are entered into this area as
they are requested to be retrieved, either by the operator or via a message
from the host_computer, and will remain here until the crane is commanded
to retrieve the load.
The operator may need to alter the priority of the loads on this list. A
priority of "0" is the highest, and "9" is the lowest. A priority of "10",
prevents the load from being retrieved. The default priority is "9".
This is a "Maintenance Viewing Data" window that lists each of the loads to
be retrieved.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Review loads to be retrieved
Urgency Change Restrict Where Match Expand Insert
Loads to be retrieved |51-3-046|23987|88654|137| 9|'0' ^
Loads to be retrieved |52-3-121| 2997|88651| 23| 9|'0' █
Loads to be retrieved |54-5-023| 68|88649| 34|10|'0' █
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
V
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
Database: Details of Loads
Load's origin 51-3-046
All features provided by the "Maintenance Viewing Data" windows are active.
These features are:
creating, modifying, and deleting records.
moving the window across the records.
highlighting a particular alarm for individual attention.
highlighting a particular field for individual attention.
The difference between this window and a standard "Maintenance Viewing
Data" window is that, as well as modifying a load, the operator has
the option to conveniently adjust the priority of the load.
When selecting a record, if "U" or [RETURN] is used, you will be asked,
after specifying the record, whether you wish to prioritise (type "U" or
click on "Urgency"), modify (type "M" or click on "Modify"), or delete the
load (type "D" or click on "Delete").
On the other hand, had you used [ENTER] to select the record, it will be
assumed that you wish to prioritise the load. Double-clicking the mouse on
the desired load is equivalent to typing [ENTER].
Had you opted to prioritise the load, you will be presented with the
prompt, "Please enter new urgency for the load, Urgent 0:most 10:stop
<0-10>". Enter the desired priority.
Enter Orders for Picking
This window allows the operator to enter orders for picking cartons.
Corresponding to each order, a barcode is printed, which is to be fixed to
a carton. Should the carton become filled, the packer is to press the
"split case" button, calling for an additional barcode to be printed
and fixed to a fresh carton.
This window will appear substantially blank unless some orders have already
been entered locally or down loaded from the host_computer. Once this
has been done, each schedule will be represented by a box at the bottom of
the window, arranged in the order in which they are created (if created
locally) or received (if created on behalf of the host_computer), with
the first at the left.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Enter orders for picking
CODE ORDERED ISSUED QUANTITY
GEFFEN GEFD-24612 |Judy Collins 5 100 ^
FIE! RECORDS FIE9115 |Guy Evans and Peter Hammill 5 450 █
EMI CDP 7 46605 2 |Animals, The 5 60 █
DEMON FIEND CD 704 |Beausoleil 5 85 █
CAPITOL CDP 7 46069 2 |Band, The 5 95 █
BLUE NOTE CDP724385548420|Jacky Terrasson & Cassandra 5 450 █
ATLANTIC 7 82526-2 DISC 9|Led Zeppelin 5 █
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
V
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
■■■ ■■
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
The cursor will be positioned initially at the first of the boxes at the
bottom left of the window. These characters each represent a customer's
order. The boxes at the bottom right hand side of the window represent
templates for schedules. More about templates later.
Reading Schedules
As the cursor is moved (using the [LEFT] and [RIGHT] keys or clicking on
the schedule with the mouse) among the schedules, the box will be shown
open, and the details of the schedule will be displayed.
There will also be a horizontal scroll bar, in case the window is not large
enough to present the maximum number of schedules. This scroll bar can
only be operated using the mouse - this is the fourth scroll bar on this
window, so all the usual keys have been otherwise used.
At the top of the window is displayed the order's customer, while in the
main body of the window are the requirements of the order. Each
requirement consists of the product code and description and the quantity
required.
Creation of Schedules
To create a schedule, press [INSERT]. You will be presented with a "Set of
Fields" for you to edit.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Enter orders for picking
Order's customer t P & O Cold Storage
Customer address t 69 Mandoon Road
Customer town or suburb t Girraween
Town in state/province t N.S.W.
State in country t Australia
Country's ISD (NZ=64) a
Zip mask (Canada: ###-###) a ####
Town or suburb post code a 2145
Town STD (Melb=3) a
Customer's phone number a 96362666
Customer's facsimile no. a 96882610
Customer's delivery notes s
Order number a 111111
Special instructions a
Order destination lane a 81
■
■■■ ■■
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
This data may now be set as required. Refer to the section titled:
"Set of Fields".
This "Set of Fields" includes the customer (a "Symbolic Name" field), the
customer's order number and any special delivery instructions - additional
or overriding the customer's standard instructions - (both "Name" fields)
and a destination pick area zone (a "Symbolic Name" field). For editing
instructions for these types of fields, please refer to the sections
titled: "Symbolic
Name", and "Name".
Once you have entered this "Set of Fields", you will be presented with a
substantially blank window on which the entries of the schedule will be
displayed as they are entered. To create an entry in the schedule, type
[INSERT], then enter a product code and then the number required. Repeat
this for each product the order specifies.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Enter orders for picking
CODE ORDERED ISSUED QUANTITY
GEFFEN GEFD-24612 |Judy Collins 5 100 ^
FIE! RECORDS FIE9115 |Guy Evans and Peter Hammill 5 450 █
EMI CDP 7 46605 2 |Animals, The 5 60 █
DEMON FIEND CD 704 |Beausoleil 5 85 █
CAPITOL CDP 7 46069 2 |Band, The 5 95 █
BLUE NOTE CDP724385548420|Jacky Terrasson & Cassandra 5 450 █
ATLANTIC 7 82526-2 DISC 9|Led Zeppelin 5 █
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
V
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
■■■ ■■
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
The lines will be presented in the order (with the latest at the top) they
are entered until you delete a line. Once a line has been deleted, the
next entry will fill its place.
To modify an entry, highlight the line, then type [RETURN] or [ENTER].
Then in response to being presented with the product code, you must press
[RETURN] or [ENTER] again; if, instead, you enter a different product code
you will create a fresh entry. You may now change the number required. If
you set this number to zero, you will delete the entry.
To delete an entry, refer to the previous paragraph.
If you make an entry requesting a product code that is not in stock, the
entry will not be displayed but will remain. Once you exit from the
creation process, these entries will be displayed.
The above discussion has assumed that the window has been set to show only
ordered and stocked product codes.
If you wish to show all product codes that are not stocked, enter "QU", if
you wish to display product codes irrespective of whether they are stocked
or not, enter "QA", and if you wish to return to displaying only stocked
product codes, enter "QS". This selection will be remembered only until
you exit from the creation of this schedule. You may also click on the
menu item "Quantity", then click on either the "Unstocked", "Stocked" or
"All" button.
If you wish to show all stocked (or unstocked - refer previous paragraph)
product codes, enter "OA", and if you wish to return to displaying only
ordered product codes, enter "OO". This selection will be remembered for
the user until the software is next rebooted. You may also click on the
menu item "Ordered picked", then click on either the "Ordered" or "All"
button.
In this mode (showing all product codes - not only those ordered), each
product code is shown in alphabetical order.
Once you have made all entries, type [ESCAPE]. The original display will
again be presented, with the new schedule positioned at the end of the
queue of boxes.
Modification of Schedules
To modify a schedule, use the [LEFT] and [RIGHT] keys to move the cursor to
the schedule you wish to modify. the cursor may also be moved to a
schedule by clicking the mouse on the desired schedule. Then type [ENTER]
or [RETURN].
Once selected, a "Set of Fields" is presented containing the schedule's
details. If you are sufficiently privileged you will be asked to confirm
that you wish to modify the details by pressing [F1]. You will, then, be
presented with a "Set of Fields" in a window, for you to edit.
From this point, proceed as described for the creation of schedules. Refer
to the section titled:
"Creation
of Schedules".
Sequencing Schedules
The first schedule (or order/carton) to be executed will be the one
corresponding to the box at the extreme left of the window. The order of
execution of the schedules may be changed.
This reordering is conducted by picking up a schedule, moving it to a new
position in the queue and then lowering it into this position. Use the
[LEFT] and [RIGHT] keys to move the cursor to a schedule, then the [UP] key
to pick it up, then again the [LEFT] and [RIGHT] keys to move it to its new
position and, finally, the [DOWN] key to lower the schedule into this
position. Clicking on the schedule at the cursor will alternately raise
and lower it, leaving the cursor at the schedule.
When the schedule is first picked up, the cursor remains beneath it. The
Movement Controller takes its first opportunity to separate the cursor and
schedule, keeping the cursor one position to the left of the schedule, when
you first type [LEFT] or [RIGHT]. As a result the first time you type the
[LEFT] key only the cursor is moved or the first time you type the [RIGHT]
key only the schedule is moved. The schedule may also be moved to a given
place in the queue by clicking the mouse on the schedule currently in that
location, placing the cursor one position to the left of the schedule if
possible.
The cursor is kept one position left of the schedule to show you the
contents of the schedule currently in front of the raised schedule. The
cursor is not initially moved automatically left because you may wish the
cursor to remain beneath the schedule in order to copy it to the templates
(or to the schedules if working with the templates). More about templates
later.
Using Templates
The only differences between the schedules and the templates are that the
schedules appear at the left whilst the templates are on the right and that
the schedules are being executed whilst the templates are not.
You can switch from side to side by typing [CONTROL RIGHT] to move to the
template side and [CONTROL LEFT] to return. If at the time you switch to
the templates, the schedule at the cursor is raised, a template will be
created identical to the schedule; the schedule will be unaffected. You
can switch to or from the template side by merely clicking on that side
with the mouse.
If at the time you switch back to the schedules, the template at the cursor
is raised, you will be presented with a "Set of Fields" for you to edit.
From this point, proceed as described for the creation of schedules. Refer
to the section titled:
"Creation
of Schedules".
Once you have completed any modifications you might wish to make to the new
schedule, and have pressed [ESCAPE], The original display will again be
presented, with the new schedule positioned at the end of the queue of
boxes. The original template will still exist and will be unaffected by
the changes made when creating the schedule based on it.
Replenish the Pick Areas
This window allows the operator to define the contents for cartons
containing the replenishment for the pick areas. Corresponding to each
replenishment carton, a barcode is printed, which is to be fixed to a
carton with the specified contents.
This window will appear substantially blank unless some replenishments have
already been entered locally or down loaded from the host_computer. Once
this has been done, each schedule will be represented by a box at the
bottom of the window, arranged in the order in which they are created (if
created locally) or received (if created on behalf of the host_computer),
with the first at the left.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Replenish the pick areas
Select Change Restrict Where Match Expand First Last On hand stored Quantity
ATLANTIC 7 82526-2 DISC 2|Led Zeppelin 100 480 ^
HANNIBAL HNCD 1326 |Danny Thompson 100 20 █
GEFFEN GEFD-24612 |Judy Collins 100 100 █
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
V
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
■■■ ■■
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
The cursor will be positioned initially at the first of the boxes at the
bottom left of the window. These characters each represent a replenishment
schedule. The boxes at the bottom right hand side of the window represent
templates for schedules. More about templates later.
Reading Schedules
As the cursor is moved (using the [LEFT] and [RIGHT] keys or clicking the
mouse on the desired schedule) among the schedules, the box will be shown
open, and the details of the schedule will be displayed.
There will also be a horizontal scroll bar, in case the window is not large
enough to present the maximum number of schedules. This scroll bar can
only be operated using the mouse - this is the fourth scroll bar on this
window, so all the usual keys have been otherwise used.
The top line of the window will be blank, while in the main body of the
window are the contents of the replenishment carton. Each replenishment
consists of the product code and description and the quantity contained.
Creation of Schedules
To create a schedule, press [INSERT]. You will be presented with a
substantially blank window on which the entries of the schedule will be
displayed as they are entered. To create an entry in the schedule, type
[INSERT], then enter a product code and then the number contained in the
replenishment carton. Repeat this for each product in the carton.
Below, once you have made a number of entries in the schedule, is a rough
text-representation of this window:
The lines will be presented in the order (with the latest at the top) they
are entered until you delete a line. Once a line has been deleted, the
next entry will fill its place.
To modify an entry, highlight the line, then type [RETURN] or [ENTER].
Then in response to being presented with the product code, you must press
[RETURN] or [ENTER] again; if, instead, you enter a different product code
you will create a fresh entry. You may now change the number of items on
hand. If you set this number to zero, you will delete the entry.
To delete an entry, refer to the previous paragraph.
If you make an entry for a product code that is completely out of stock,
the entry will not be displayed but will remain. Once you exit from the
creation process, these entries will be displayed.
The above discussion has assumed that the window has been set to show only
on-hand and stocked product codes.
If you wish to show all product codes that are not stocked, type
"QN"[ENTER], if you wish to display product codes irrespective of
whether they are stocked or not, type "Q"[SPACE][ENTER], and if you wish to
return to displaying only stocked product codes, type "QS"[ENTER]. This
selection will be remembered only until you exit from the creation of this
schedule. You may also click on the menu item "Quantity", then enter "N",
"S" or a [SPACE] into the field provided.
If you wish to show all stocked (or unstocked - refer previous paragraph)
product codes, type "O"[SPACE][ENTER], and if you wish to return to
displaying only product codes on hand, type "OO"[ENTER]. This selection
will be remembered for the user until the software is next rebooted. You
may also click on the menu item "Ordered picked", then enter "O" or a
[SPACE] into the field provided.
In this mode (showing all product codes - not only those on hand), each
product code is shown in alphabetical order.
Once you have made all entries, type [ESCAPE]. The original display will
again be presented, with the new schedule positioned at the end of the
queue of boxes.
Modification of Schedules
To modify a schedule, use the [LEFT] and [RIGHT] keys to move the cursor to
the schedule you wish to modify. The cursor may also be moved to a
schedule by clicking the mouse on the desired schedule. Once at the
desired schedule, type [ENTER] or [RETURN].
Once selected, a "Set of Fields" is presented containing the schedule's
details. If you are sufficiently privileged you will be asked to confirm
that you wish to modify the details by pressing [F1]. You will, then, be
presented with a "Set of Fields" in a window, for you to edit.
From this point, proceed as described for the creation of schedules. Refer
to the section titled:
"Creation
of Schedules".
Sequencing Schedules
The first schedule (or replenishment carton) to be executed will be the one
corresponding to the box at the extreme left of the window. The order of
execution of the schedules may be changed.
This reordering is conducted by picking up a schedule, moving it to a new
position in the queue and then lowering it into this position. Use the
[LEFT] and [RIGHT] keys to move the cursor to a schedule, then the [UP] key
to pick it up, then again the [LEFT] and [RIGHT] keys to move it to its new
position and, finally, the [DOWN] key to lower the schedule into this
position. Clicking on the schedule at the cursor will alternately raise
and lower it, leaving the cursor at the schedule.
When the schedule is first picked up, the cursor remains beneath it. The
Movement Controller takes its first opportunity to separate the cursor and
schedule, keeping the cursor one position to the left of the schedule, when
you first type [LEFT] or [RIGHT]. As a result the first time you type the
[LEFT] key only the cursor is moved or the first time you type the [RIGHT]
key only the schedule is moved. The schedule may also be moved to a given
place in the queue by clicking the mouse on the schedule currently in that
location, placing the cursor one position to the left of the schedule if
possible.
The cursor is kept one position left of the schedule to show you the
contents of the schedule currently in front of the raised schedule. The
cursor is not moved automatically left because you may wish the cursor to
remain beneath the schedule in order to copy it to the templates (or to the
schedules if working with the templates). More about templates later.
Using Templates
The only differences between schedules and the templates are that the
schedules appear at the left whilst the templates are on the right and that
the schedules are being executed whilst the templates are not.
You can switch from side to side by typing [CONTROL RIGHT] to move to the
template side and [CONTROL LEFT] to return. If at the time you switch to
the templates, the schedule at the cursor is raised, a template will be
created identical to the schedule; the schedule will be unaffected. You
can switch from side to side by simply clicking on the side with the mouse.
If at the time you switch back to the schedules, the template at the cursor
is raised, you will be presented with a "Set of Fields" for you to edit.
From this point, proceed as described for the creation of schedules. Refer
to the section titled:
"Creation
of Schedules".
Once you have completed any modifications you might wish to make to the new
schedule, and have pressed [ESCAPE], The original display will again be
presented, with the new schedule positioned at the end of the queue of
boxes. The original template will still exist and will be unaffected by
the changes made when creating the schedule based on it.
Cartons Within the Conveyor System
This window allows the operator to view, modify, delete or add cartons to
the carton conveyor system. These cartons may correspond to either orders
for picking or replenishment cartons for the pick areas.
This window will appear substantially blank unless some cartons are in the
carton conveyor system.
The details for these cartons are normally entered via the Enter Orders for
Picking and Replenish the Pick Areas windows. The schedules corresponding
to these cartons are transferred to this window once the cartons are
scanned on the carton conveyor system.
The ability to add cartons to the carton conveyor system (logically) is
also provided by this window.
Once there are cartons on the carton conveyor system, the corresponding
schedules will be represented by a boxes at the bottom of the window,
arranged in the order in which they are scanned into the carton conveyor
system.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Cartons within the conveyor system
CODE ORDERED ISSUED QUANTITY
GEFFEN GEFD-24612 |Judy Collins 5 100 ^
FIE! RECORDS FIE9115 |Guy Evans and Peter Hammill 5 450 █
EMI CDP 7 46605 2 |Animals, The 5 60 █
DEMON FIEND CD 704 |Beausoleil 5 85 █
CAPITOL CDP 7 46069 2 |Band, The 5 95 █
BLUE NOTE CDP724385548420|Jacky Terrasson & Cassandra 5 450 █
ATLANTIC 7 82526-2 DISC 9|Led Zeppelin 5 █
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
V
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
■■■ ■■
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
The cursor will be positioned initially at the first of the boxes at the
bottom left of the window. These characters each represent a carton on the
carton conveyor system.
Reading Schedules
As the cursor is moved (using the [LEFT] and [RIGHT] keys or clicking on
the desired schedule) among the schedules, the box will be shown open, and
the details of the schedule will be displayed.
There will also be a horizontal scroll bar, in case the window is not large
enough to present the maximum number of schedules. This scroll bar can
only be operated using the mouse - this is the fourth scroll bar on this
window, so all the usual keys have been otherwise used.
If the schedule corresponds to a customer's order, at the top of the window
is displayed the order's customer, while in the main body of the window are
the requirements of the order. Each requirement consists of the product
code and description and the quantity required.
If the schedule corresponds to a replenishment carton, the top line of the
window will be blank, while in the main body of the window are the contents
of the replenishment carton. Each replenishment consists of the product
code and description and the quantity contained.
Creation of Schedules
This is not a normal activity, as these schedules are not usually created
here but transferred here from the Enter Orders for Picking and Replenish
the Pick Areas windows as cartons are scanned onto the conveyor system.
However, to create a schedule, press [INSERT]. You will be presented with
a "Set of Fields" for you to edit.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Cartons within the conveyor system
Order's customer t P & O Cold Storage
Customer address t 69 Mandoon Road
Customer town or suburb t Girraween
Town in state/province t N.S.W.
State in country t Australia
Country's ISD (NZ=64) a
Zip mask (Canada: ###-###) a ####
Town or suburb post code a 2145
Town STD (Melb=3) a
Customer's phone number a 96362666
Customer's facsimile no. a 96882610
Customer's delivery notes s
Order number a 111111
Special instructions a
Order destination lane a 81
■
■■■ ■■
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
This data may now be set as required. However if you are entering the
details for a replenishment carton, these details should be left blank,
indicating that it is a replenishment. Refer to the section titled:
"Set of Fields".
This "Set of Fields" includes the customer (a "Symbolic Name" field), the
customer's order number and any special delivery instructions - additional
or overriding the customer's standard instructions - (both "Name" fields)
and a destination pick area zone (a "Symbolic Name" field). For editing
instructions for these types of fields, please refer to the sections
titled: "Symbolic
Name", and "Name".
Once you have entered this "Set of Fields", you will be presented with a
substantially blank window on which the entries of the schedule will be
displayed as they are entered. To create an entry in the schedule, type
[INSERT], then enter a product code and then the number required. Repeat
this for each product the order specifies.
Below, once you have made a number of entries in the schedule, is a rough
text-representation of this window:
Cartons within the conveyor system
Select Change Restrict Where Match Expand First Last Ordered picked Quantity
GEFFEN GEFD-24612 |Judy Collins 5 100 ^
FIE! RECORDS FIE9115 |Guy Evans and Peter Hammill 5 450 █
EMI CDP 7 46605 2 |Animals, The 5 60 █
DEMON FIEND CD 704 |Beausoleil 5 85 █
CAPITOL CDP 7 46069 2 |Band, The 5 95 █
BLUE NOTE CDP724385548420|Jacky Terrasson & Cassandra 5 450 █
ATLANTIC 7 82526-2 DISC 9|Led Zeppelin 5 █
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
V
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
■■■ ■■
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
To modify a schedule, use the [LEFT] and [RIGHT] keys to move the cursor to
the schedule you wish to modify. The cursor may also be moved to a
schedule by clicking the mouse on the desired schedule. Once at the
desired schedule, type [ENTER] or [RETURN].
Once selected, a "Set of Fields" is presented containing the schedule's
details. If you are sufficiently privileged you will be asked to confirm
that you wish to modify the details by pressing [F1]. You will, then, be
presented with a "Set of Fields" in a window, for you to edit.
From this point, proceed as described for the creation of schedules. Refer
to the section titled:
"Creation
of Schedules".
Sequencing Schedules
There is no control purpose served by reordering the schedules in this
list, however you may wish to do this so as to arrange schedules
corresponding to cartons of particular interest towards the front of the
list for ease of reference.
This reordering is conducted by picking up a schedule, moving it to a new
position in the queue and then lowering it into this position. Use the
[LEFT] and [RIGHT] keys to move the cursor to a schedule, then the [UP] key
to pick it up, then again the [LEFT] and [RIGHT] keys to move it to its new
position and, finally, the [DOWN] key to lower the schedule into this
position. Clicking on the schedule at the cursor will alternately raise
and lower it, leaving the cursor at the schedule.
When the schedule is first picked up, the cursor remains beneath it. The
Movement Controller takes its first opportunity to separate the cursor and
schedule, keeping the cursor one position to the left of the schedule, when
you first type [LEFT] or [RIGHT]. As a result the first time you type the
[LEFT] key only the cursor is moved or the first time you type the [RIGHT]
key only the schedule is moved. The schedule may also be moved to a given
place in the queue by clicking the mouse on the schedule currently in that
location, placing the cursor one position to the left of the schedule if
possible.
The cursor is kept one position left of the schedule to show you the
contents of the schedule currently in front of the raised schedule.
Carton Conveyor System
The carton conveyor diagram shows the status of the carton conveyors and
their associated devices, the status of the pick-to-light system, the
occupancy of the shelving and the progress of the picking.
The window will appear as shown overleaf:
All graphics on this window are shown to scale.
Push Buttons
There are "push buttons" presented at the foot of this window. The purpose
of these push buttons is indicated by the text within them. The first
letter of this text is larger and is to be typed to "press" the button.
The button may also be clicked with the mouse.
There are also two operating-system-painted buttons. One of which,
"ESCAPE: exit", is for exiting from a "push button" selection or from
the window completely if no such selection is active. The other, "HELP",
calls up the help feature, refer to the section titled:
"Help".
If the button is grey, it is available. If it is dark green with black
text it is unavailable. If it is light green, it is either available with
there being some particular reason that you might wish to "press" it or it
is "pressed".
In response to activating certain push-buttons, the mode of control
changes. This is reflected by a change in the push-buttons available.
Carton Conveyor System Status
Running conveyors are shown in green, stopped in yellow and those in alarm
in red.
Clear photocells, undiverted diverters and deflated air-bags are shown
dark, whereas those blocked, diverted or inflated are shown in blue.
Any alarms in the carton conveyor system are presented in the bottom right
hand corner of the window.
Alarms
This section discusses each alarm that can be raised by the carton conveyor
PLC.
Please bear in mind that all these alarms are based on the PLC's view of
the system and may therefore be the result of a failure in the sensing
mechanisms and/or circuitry or in the control mechanisms and/or circuitry.
This is not reiterated in the following discussions of the individual
alarms.
The sensing mechanisms include reed switches, relay contacts, proximity
switches and photocells, while the sensing circuitry includes wiring,
terminations, PLC inputs, the field input power supply and circuit
breakers.
The control mechanisms include cylinders and associated gates and levers,
motors and associated gearboxes, belts et cetera, while the control
circuitry includes circuit breakers, the field output power supply, PLC
outputs, relays, solenoids, motor contactors, variable speed drives, motor
circuit breakers, thermal overloads and motor isolators. In particular,
check that the motor isolators are turned on.
The following alarms may be reported:
Emergency stop
An emergency stop has been operated. The reason for pressing the stop
should be established, then, when safe to do so, the stop should be
released, allowing the operation of the system to continue.
PLC battery flat
This is an alarm reported to the PLC program by the PLC. For further refer
to the appropriate Allen-Bradley SLC-500 manual.
CI Tect DH+ link off
There is a flag within the PLC that is set to zero by the CiTect system.
The PLC is continually setting this flag. If the CiTect system fails to
zero the flag within a given time, this alarms will be raised.
This alarm, therefore, indicates that the CiTect system is unable to
communicate or is not functioning correctly.
Field power lost
The power supply for the inputs and outputs from the PLC is monitored. If
this fails, this alarm will be raised. While this alarm is present, any
other alarm should be ignored as it is very likely to be parasitic.
Main power lost
The main power supply for conveyor motors, et cetera, is monitored. If
this fails, this alarm will be raised.
Air pressure low
This indicates that the air pressure is low. Any alarms associated with
the actions of cylinders (such as the diverter) should be attributed to
this cause.
Conveyor didn't start
There are a series of these alarms, one for each conveyor. There is
contactor feedback for each conveyor. If this feedback is not seen within
a given time of requesting the conveyor to run or is removed while the
request is still in force, this alarm will be raised. You should have an
electrician investigate the cause.
Conveyor didn't stop
There are a series of these alarms, one for each conveyor. There is
contactor feedback for each conveyor. If this feedback is not removed
within a given time of requesting the conveyor to stop or is asserted while
there is no request, this alarm will be raised. This is not expected to be
at all common. You should have an electrician investigate the cause.
VSD not running
There are a series of these alarms, one for each variable speed drive.
There is a signal from each variable speed drive indicating whether it is
running. If this signal is not seen within a given time of requesting the
drive to power up or is removed while the request is still in force, this
alarm will be raised. You should have an electrician investigate the
cause.
Conveyor case jam
There are a series of these alarms, one for each conveyor. As cases are
seen to move onto a conveyor, the case is recorded on the conveyor, and as
it is removed from the conveyor, this record is removed. Each case is
allowed a given time to reach the end of the conveyor, if it fails to do so
within this time, then this alarm will be raised.
This could be the result of the case being caught, or the PLC failing to
distinguish the gap between the cases and, therefore, failing to remove its
record of the case.
Resetting the alarm allows the case more time to reach the end of the
conveyor. If the problem is that the PLC failed to see the gap, then the
record will need to be removed from the PLC. Please refer to the section
titled: "Conveyor
Mode".
Diverter failed
The diverter has failed to operate within the time expected. This could be
because the diverter has not moved, or has not been seen to move.
If it has failed to move, check for obstructions, especially cases caught.
If it has not been seen to move, check the adjustment of the proximity
switches.
Certain alarms within the carton conveyor system are "latched". These
alarms are usually associated with an action not completing within a
reasonable amount of time. Once these alarms are corrected, it is
necessary to reset them before normal operation may recommence. To reset
these alarms type 'A'.
Other alarms, such as emergency stops, need no resetting, once the stop has
been released.
Tally of Cases
In the place where the alarms are normally displayed, the tally of cases
produced on the two lines may be displayed by typing "T", or, after noting
the tallies, the alarms may be again displayed by typing "T" a second time.
Conveyor Mode
Conveyor mode is entered for more information or more control over the
conveyors. This is achieved by typing "C". In response a new set of push
buttons is presented, along with a list of the conveyors with the estimated
number of cases on each.
The list may be scrolled using [UP] and [DOWN], [PAGE UP] and [PAGE DOWN].
These keys no longer perform vertical scrolling of the carton conveyor
diagram.
One conveyor in the list will be highlighted and the border of that
conveyor in the diagram will be shown in white.
You may simultaneously enter "Conveyor Mode" and select a conveyor by
clicking on the conveyor.
The colour of the conveyors will be as before, except that, should the
conveyor be in automatic, it will be shown in red. The devices will all be
shown in grey, indicating that they are irrelevant to what you are
currently about.
Each conveyor can be set to automatic, by typing "A", manually stopped by
typing "M" or manually running by typing "G". Subsequent typings of "G"
will switch the conveyor between manually stopped and running.
The inventory for each conveyor may be zeroed by typing "K".
The contents of each conveyor may be displayed by typing "C" (for case
listing). In response, the list of conveyors will be replaced by a list of
cartons on the highlighted conveyor. In this mode, individual cartons may
be deleted by typing "D". To return to the conveyor mode type [ESCAPE].
You may call up the contents of a conveyor by double clicking on the
conveyor.
To exit conveyor mode type [ESCAPE].
Device Mode
Device mode is entered for more information or more control over the
devices. This is achieved by typing "D". In response a new set of push
buttons is presented, along with a list of the device types.
It is first necessary to select a type of device to view or control. Once
done, this list is replaced by a list of the devices of that type.
The lists may be scrolled using [UP] and [DOWN], [PAGE UP] and [PAGE DOWN].
These keys no longer perform vertical scrolling of the carton conveyor
diagram. A selection of device type is made by pressing [ENTER] once the
desired entry has been highlighted - the devices do not need to be
selected, only highlighted.
One device in the list will be highlighted and that device in the diagram
will be shown in yellow.
You may simultaneously enter "Device Mode", and select a device type, and
select an individual device by clicking on the device.
The colour of the devices will be as before, except that, should the device
be in automatic, it will be shown in red. The conveyors will all be shown
in grey, indicating that they are irrelevant to what you are currently
about.
Each device can be set to automatic, by typing "A", manually deactivated by
typing "M" or manually activated by typing "G". Subsequent typings of "G"
will switch the device between manually deactivated and activated.
A different type of device may be chosen by typing "T" then making a new
selection.
To exit device mode type [ESCAPE].
Setting Case Lengths
The carton conveyor PLC is informed by others as to what product it is
conveying from each cartoner. For it to make intelligent use of this data
it needs to know the case lengths and number of cases per pallet load for
this product.
Anytime this information is changed or added to it should be written to the
carton conveyor system. This is done by typing "S".
Pick-To-Light System Status
Each pick area is displayed as a blue rectangle, representing a unit of
shelving viewed from above, with black lines around three of its sides,
leaving no such border on the side from which the picking will occur.
A unit of shelving may consist of several shelves, with each shelf
consisting of several compartments arranged across the shelf. Less
orthodox arrangements may also be configured.
In the centre of this rectangle is a small circle, which will be coloured
to reflect the state of the pick-to-light system within this unit of
shelving. These colours (in order of precedence) are:
YELLOW
The pick area is being picked.
RED
The pick area has a problem.
GREY
The pick area has stock.
BLACK
The pick area contains no stock.
Pick Area Mode
Pick area mode is entered for more detailed information or to adjust the
data associated with individual pick areas or to access the pick-to-light
units. This is achieved by typing "P". In response a new set of push
buttons is presented, along with a list of the picking zones.
A picking zone corresponds to a carton stopping position, where the carton
is expected to be loaded. These tie the carton stopping positions to a
group of pick areas.
It is first necessary to select a zone (i.e. a group of pick areas) to view
or adjust. Once done, this list is replaced by a list of the pick areas in
that zone.
The lists may be scrolled using [UP] and [DOWN], [PAGE UP] and [PAGE DOWN].
These keys no longer perform vertical scrolling of the carton conveyor
diagram. A selection is made by pressing [ENTER] once the desired entry
has been highlighted.
One picking zone in the list will be highlighted and that zone in the
diagram will be shown normally; the others will be grey.
One pick area in the list will be highlighted and that pick area in the
diagram will be shown in light blue.
You may simultaneously enter "Pick Area Mode", and select a zone, and
select a pick area by clicking on the pick area.
After selecting a zone and before examining a pick area, all pick areas may
be enabled by typing "A". This resets the "Shelf Disabled" status for all
divisions of all pick areas of all zones. This is particularly convenient
when a communications link has been restored, having caused a large number
of pick areas to be disabled.
A different zone may be chosen, at this time, by typing "S" then making a
new selection.
To exit pick area mode, type [ESCAPE].
Examining a Pick Area
To examine a pick area, first highlight the desired pick area (as described
above) then type "E". Once a pick area has been selected for examination,
the window is replaced with a face view of the selected pick area shown
within a yellow border, with its neighbouring pick areas shown alongside
it.
You may examine a pick area by double clicking on the pick area.
The window will appear as shown overleaf:
The pick area selected may be changed, without returning to the pick area
selection window, by pressing [PAGE DOWN] for its right hand neighbour or
[PAGE UP] for its left hand neighbour.
The top-left division will be shown in light blue and its details (contents
and whether disabled) will be shown below the depiction of the pick areas.
Other divisions may be alternatively highlighted by using the cursor keys.
In addition, the [END] key moves you to the bottom-right division, while
the [HOME] key returns you to the top-left division.
Within each division is shown the number of items to be picked, or if there
is no picking, the number of items on-hand in the division. This number
will be coloured to reflect the status of the division. These colours (in
order of precedence) are:
YELLOW
The pick area division is being picked.
RED
The pick area division has a problem.
GREY
The pick area division has stock.
A new set of push buttons are now provided, primarily to manipulate the
data of these divisions.
The contents of the division shown in light blue may be manipulated by
pressing:
"I"
to modify the details.
"D"
to delete/destroy/wipe the details.
"Z"
to zoom-into/expand the details.
"C"
to copy the details to memory/scrap-buffer/clip-board.
"G"
to get the details from memory/scrap-buffer/clip-board.
"S"
to swap the details with memory/scrap-buffer/clip-board.
The expanded details include the shelf pick-to-light address, the quantity
to be picked, whether picking is in progress, and the reason the division
is disabled.
The expansion of these details may be at the expense of the pick area
window. Once expanded, you may return to the non-expanded mode by pressing
"Z" a second time.
The division could be disabled either because it could not be communicated
with, or because it reported a fault with its display. If the fault is
with its display, the offending digit and segment is indicated, otherwise
the text "Separate LED" is displayed.
When the memory (scrap buffer or clip-board equivalent) is set its details
will be shown alongside the division's details.
The remaining push buttons allow you to access the pick-to-light unit's
memory (by pressing "M") or to exit this window (by pressing [ESCAPE] or
"E").
Monitor Memory
This option should only be used by people with knowledge of the hardware
and software of the pick-to-light system, or under the guidance of someone
who has this knowledge.
The window is now substantially green. Within this green area is displayed
the memory of the selected division.
The window will appear as shown overleaf:
In the top left of the green, following the text "PTL Address:" is the
address of this division (a pick-to-light unit) - its communications
address or station number, not its memory address. This will not change as
you page through the memory - it will only change if you select another
division.
This is followed by the text "READ/WRITE". Alternatively, you may access
the division's program memory by pressing "P". In response the text
"READ/WRITE" will be replaced with "PROGRAM". To return to the
display of the division's read-write memory, press "R".
Below this the memory is displayed twice. The first time in decimal and
the second in hexadecimal. The memory is displayed as eight-bit bytes in
five rows of sixteen columns. The row starting addresses are shown at the
left of the rows in hexadecimal and the column offsets from these addresses
are shown as a single hexadecimal digit above the columns.
An asterisk (star) is shown in the hexadecimal memory area to the right of
the memory location currently being interrogated.
In both the decimal and hexadecimal memory areas, one location is displayed
in reverse video. The address of this location is shown below the
hexadecimal area at the right, followed by a colon, then the binary
representation of the value, followed, usually, by a less-than ("<") sign
then, if read-write memory and known, the description of the byte.
The reverse video may be moved using the cursor keys. The cursor may also
be moved by clicking on the desired memory location.
Some individual bits within the read-write memory have descriptions. These
may be presented by typing [CONTROL LEFT] or [CONTROL RIGHT] to move
through the bits. In response:
The less-than sign is removed and a circumflex ("^") is presented beneath
the corresponding bit.
The bit number is appended to the byte address.
The byte description is replaced with the bit description.
The [LEFT] and [RIGHT] move through bits not bytes, until you move beyond
the last bit.
A bit can also be selected by clicking on the bit.
At the bottom of the green is presented the base address of the memory
being displayed, in hexadecimal.
The base address may be increased or reduced by 50 hex by typing [PAGE
DOWN] or [PAGE UP] respectively. Alternatively, the base address may be
set to an arbitrary value by typing "A" then entering the desired address.
Alternate divisions may be interrogated by typing in the pick-to-light
address of the division.
To exit monitor memory mode, type [ESCAPE].
Read-Write
These features are only available when the read-write memory is selected.
The memory location highlighted in reverse video may be altered in a
variety of ways. You can set the value of the byte to a given decimal
number by pressing "C" then entering the new value, or you can set the
value of the byte to a given hexadecimal number by pressing "H" then
entering the new value, or you can invoke the circumflex and move it to an
individual bit of the byte and toggle this bit by pressing "T".
You can double click on the location rather than move the cursor there and
type "C".
Any changes made to the read-write memory will be lost whenever power is
removed from the device. Upon restoration of power, part of this memory is
restored from EEROM. If you make changes to this part of the memory, you
can have these changes secured to EEROM by pressing "S".
In addition, you can specify that the changes and the securing you are
about to perform are to apply to all divisions by pressing "G". In
response the "GLOBAL WRITING" push button will be illuminated indicating
that the changes you are making are global.
Changing the Appearance
The diagram can be scrolled (panned and tilted), rotated, and zoomed.
The [LEFT], [RIGHT], [CONTROL LEFT], [CONTROL RIGHT], [HOME], [END],
[CONTROL PAGE UP], and [CONTROL PAGE DOWN] keys are used to horizontally
scroll (pan) the view past the conveyors, with the [LEFT], [CONTROL PAGE
UP], and [HOME] keys moving the view left while the [RIGHT], [CONTROL PAGE
DOWN], and [END] keys moving the view right. The [HOME] and [END] keys
scroll to the ends while the [CONTROL PAGE UP] and [CONTROL PAGE DOWN] keys
scroll by larger increments than do the [LEFT] and [RIGHT] keys. The
[CONTROL LEFT] and [CONTROL RIGHT] keys do the same as the [LEFT] and
[RIGHT] keys, respectively.
The [UP], [DOWN], [PAGE UP], [PAGE DOWN], [CONTROL HOME], and [CONTROL END]
keys are used to vertically scroll (tilt) the view past the conveyors, with
the [UP], [PAGE UP], and [CONTROL PAGE UP] keys moving the view "higher".
The [CONTROL HOME] and [CONTROL END] keys scroll to the ends, while the
[PAGE UP] and [PAGE DOWN] keys scroll by larger increments, than do the
[UP] and [DOWN] keys. The [CONTROL UP] and [CONTROL DOWN] keys do the same
as the [UP] and [DOWN] keys, respectively.
By typing "R" or [SHIFT R] the display may be rotated or rotated back in 15
degree increments. [CONTROL R] will rotate the display in 1 degree
increments in the reverse direction to the last "R" or [SHIFT R] key.
[ALTERNATE R] will reverse the direction for future typings of [CONTROL R].
Clicking on the "ROTATE SH.: CCW" button, with the left button, rotates the
display clockwise while clicking, with the right button, rotates the
display counter-clockwise.
By typing "Z" or [SHIFT Z] the display may be zoomed in or out. [CONTROL
Z] will zoom by a finer amount in the opposite direction to the last "Z" or
[SHIFT Z] key. [ALTERNATE Z] will reverse the direction for future typings
of [CONTROL Z]. Clicking on the "ZOOM IN SH.: OUT" button, with the left
button, zooms the display in while clicking, with the right button, zooms
the display out.
These changes can be made permanent for this terminal by pressing "W" to
store them. To return to the settings last made permanent, press "L".
Defining Views of the Conveyor System
This window is entered from the first by pressing "V". When you wish to
examine a portion of the conveyor system you can pan, tilt, rotate and zoom
the diagram as described previously. Alternatively, these settings may be
stored and recalled as "views".
When you enter this window, the carton conveyor diagram will be returned to
the settings last made permanent. The pan, tilt, rotate and zoom functions
are disabled.
A view is defined by providing it with a name, the coordinates of its
centre in millimetres, the rotation in degrees and the scale in millimetres
per pixel. All these parameters, except for the name, can be set
interactively and explicitly; the name must be set explicitly.
To add a view, you need to press "A" or [INSERT]. You will be then
prompted to pan, tilt, rotate and zoom the window to create the desired
view, then to type "D" when done. These functions are now enabled. Refer
to the section titled:
"Changing
the Appearance". Once you are satisfied with the appearance of the system
for this view, type "D". In response, you will be presented with a set of
fields. You will need to set the name of the view and may, optionally,
make adjustments to the other parameters, which have been set from the pan,
tilt, rotate and zoom operations you have just completed.
This set of fields includes the view's name (a unique "Name" field), the x
and y coordinates of the centre of the view, the angle of rotation, and the
scaling (all "Numeric" fields). For editing instructions for these types
of fields, please refer to the sections titled:
"Name", and
"Numeric".
As views are defined, they will be listed to the right of the push buttons,
with one entry highlighted. The highlight may be moved to other entries
using the following keys:
[UP]
Move the highlight up one line
[DOWN]
Move the highlight down one line
[PAGE UP]
Move the highlight up seven lines
[PAGE DOWN]
Move the highlight down seven lines
[CONTROL PAGE UP]
Move the highlight to the first line
[CONTROL PAGE DOWN]
Move the highlight to the last line
These views are also presented on the carton conveyor diagram as thin
rectangles. The rectangles will be coloured black, except for the
rectangle corresponding to the highlighted entry, which will be coloured
yellow.
A view may be highlighted by clicking within the corresponding thin
rectangle.
The highlighted entry may be modified by pressing "M". In response, the
carton conveyor diagram will be panned, tilted, rotated and zoomed in
accordance with the selected view. You will be then prompted to pan, tilt,
rotate and zoom the window to create the desired view, then to type "D"
when done, as was the case when adding a new type. After typing "D", you
will not be required to enter a name for the view as it already has one,
however, the name and the other parameters may now be edited explicitly if
so desired.
It is desirable to be able to set the parameters explicitly if creating a
series of views that you wish to be same in all respects except for, say,
the x coordinate.
The highlighted entry may be deleted by pressing "D" or [DELETE].
Finally, the highlighted view may be selected as the current view, by
typing "S" or [ENTER]. In response, the carton conveyor diagram will be
panned, tilted, rotated and zoomed in accordance with the selected view and
you will be returned to the first carton conveyor diagram window.
A view may be selected by double clicking within the corresponding thin
rectangle.
To return to the first carton conveyor diagram window, without selecting a
view, press [ESCAPE].
To cancel a view, when back at the first carton conveyor diagram window,
type "L" to return to the settings last made permanent.
This window shows the states of all the devices making up the palletiser,
along with the expected positions of the cartons on the palletiser.
The window will appear as shown overleaf:
Blocked photocells and proximity switches are shown in yellow, while clear
photocells are shown in grey. Risen gates are shown in blue, while lowered
gates are shown in a dark colour. Running conveyors are shown in green,
while stopped are shown in red for automatic or yellow for manual. If the
palletiser is off, these are shown in grey.
Light barriers are shown in yellow if in tact or grey otherwise. Pilot
lamps are shown in a variety of colours if on, or dark if off.
The lift chains are shown in green if the lift is rising and in blue if
lowering. The position of the lift is estimated from knowledge of the load
and the states of the sensors.
Any alarms associated with the palletiser are shown in the top right hand
corner of the window. When there are no alarms to display, one of the
following messages will be displayed:
I'm happy, check the pallet conveyors
if an alarm is present in the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System. This should
be accompanied by the push button advertising the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyors
diagram being lit in light green.
I'm happy, check the infeed conveyors
if an alarm is present in the carton conveyor system. This should be
accompanied by the push button advertising the carton conveyors diagram
being lit in light green.
I'm happy, what's your problem
if unaware of any alarm.
Push Buttons
There are "push buttons" presented at the lower right hand side of this
window. The purpose of these push buttons is indicated by the text within
them. The first letter of this text is larger and is to be typed to
"press" the button. The button may also be clicked with the
mouse.
There are also three operating-system-painted buttons. One of which,
"Palletiser select", can be used to select another palletiser. The
"ESCAPE: exit" button is for exiting from a "push button" selection or
from the window completely if no such selection is active. The "HELP"
button calls up the help feature, refer to the section titled:
"Help".
If the button is grey, it is available. If it is dark green with black
text it is unavailable. If it is light green, it is either available with
there being some particular reason that you might wish to "press" it or it
is "pressed".
In response to activating certain push-buttons, the mode of control
changes. This is reflected by a change in the push-buttons available.
Alarms
This section discusses each alarm that can be raised by the palletiser PLC.
Please bear in mind that all these alarms are based on the PLC's view of
the system and may therefore be the result of a failure in the sensing
mechanisms and/or circuitry or in the control mechanisms and/or circuitry.
This is not reiterated in the following discussions of the individual
alarms.
The sensing mechanisms include reed switches, relay contacts, proximity
switches, photocells, fork lift detection loops and light curtains, while
the sensing circuitry includes wiring, terminations, PLC inputs, the field
input power supply and circuit breakers.
The control mechanisms include cylinders and associated gates and levers,
motors and associated gearboxes, sprockets, chains, pulleys, belts et
cetera, while the control circuitry includes circuit breakers, the field
output power supply, PLC outputs, relays, solenoids, motor contactors,
variable speed drives, motor circuit breakers, thermal overloads and motor
isolators. In particular, check that the motor isolators are turned on.
There are two classes of palletiser alarms: alarms that stop the
palletiser, alarms that advise that an operator action is required.
The following alarms belong to this first class:
Open case flap
Open or no barcode
There are three photocells at the metering belt. Depending on the product
believed to be at this position, one of these photocells, at least, will be
expected to be clear. If this photocell is blocked, either because a case
flap is open or the carton is not of the expected product, the metering
belt will stop and this alarm will be raised.
Had there been a no-read from the barcode scanner in the last five seconds,
there is an increased chance that the cause is that the carton is not of
the expected product, being falsely assumed to be the same as the previous
carton as a result of a no-read. Under these circumstances, the second of
these alarms is raised instead.
To clear this alarm, you will need either to reseal the flap or amend the
expected cartons.
Infeed guide fault
The infeed guide's reed switches did not indicate that the guide had moved
to the intended position within the time allowed. This could result from
insufficient air pressure, an obstruction (such as a carton in the wrong
orientation or of the wrong product) or badly adjusted reed switches on the
cylinders.
Meter belt PE
Turn peg PE
Row entry PE
Row gate A PE
Row gate B PE
Row gate C PE
Row gate D PE
Row gate E PE
Row gate F PE
Glue spray PE
The nominated photocell has been blocked for too long while the belt or
rollers have been running. This could indicate that the photocell is out
of adjustment, there is a carton stuck at this position or two or more
cartons passed without the photocell seeing a gap.
Row sweep intrusion
The row sweep intrusion photocell is just beyond the row sweep bar. This
photocell must be clear for a row sweep to be able to run. If this
photocell is blocked at this time, then this alarm is latched.
Generally you will find a carton in front of this photocell that will need
to be relocated according to the arrangement of cartons shown on the
window.
Row sweep failed
This indicates that the row sweep bar failed to travel out and back within
the expected time. Check for cartons (or other items) blocking its
progress.
Layer exit gate flt
This indicates that the layer exit gate failed to lower in the time
expected. Check the air pressure and then the reed switch adjustment.
Layer side fault
Apron side fault
Apron end fault
This indicates that the corresponding compression operation failed to
either extend or retract in the time expected. Check the air pressure and
then the reed switch adjustment.
Layer transfer fail
There is a photocell just beyond the layer exit gate. This is expected to
be clear before the layer transfer is deemed to be complete. Check that
cartons are not straggling behind and that the photocell is correctly
aligned.
Layer VSD fault
Apron VSD fault
Lift VSD fault
These faults indicate that the corresponding variable speed drive has
signaled that it has a fault. You should refer to the drive's display for
further details. To reset the fault, you can cycle the power to the drive
by dropping the master control relay. This is accomplished by hitting any
emergency stop associated with this system.
Apron open/close fl
The apron has failed to open or close within the time expected. This could
be because the apron has not moved, or has not been seen to move.
If it has failed to move, check for obstructions. Should you need to enter
the lift to do this you should follow the isolation procedure.
If it has not been seen to move, the apron is likely to have overrun the
proximity. Check the adjustment of the proximity switches.
Pallet part in lift
This implies that either the photocell at the rear of the lift or the
photocell beyond the load stop is blocked while the Heavy-Unit-Load
Conveyor System has deemed the transfers into and out of the lift to have
been completed.
This could result from problems with the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor system
transfers. For more details on these problems, refer to the section of the
TECHNICAL MANUAL titled: "Transferring
Loads".
To correct the problem, you will need to relocate the loads on the
Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System to the positions shown on the
Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyors diagram. This can be achieved using the "push
button control" via the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyors diagram. Please refer to
the section titled:
"Control
of Loads".
Lift gone too high
There is an overrun proximity at the top of the permitted lift travel. If
the lift contains a good pallet, of the correct dimensions, the lift should
have stopped a short time after the first of the six photocells below the
curtain have been blocked.
The most common cause is the lift not having a pallet on board, however
other causes include the proximity switch or slow down photocells being out
of adjustment and the variable speed drive not reacting fast enough
(incorrect settings).
The alarm can not be reset until the lift is lowered; this must be done in
manual. If you intend to reject the load, return to automatic mode on the
window and type "R", before resetting the alarm, so that the system does
not immediately attempt to raise the load again.
Lift up PE when down
One of the six photocells under the apron is blocked while the lift is
down. This should indicate a photocell that is out of adjustment, or that
a piece or cardboard has been left behind blocking one of these photocells.
Another cause could be the palletiser attempting to load too many layers on
the pallet.
Lift up PE disagree
The lift rises until the first of the six photocells under the apron is
blocked, then travels for a little longer expecting the remaining
photocells to become blocked in this time. If this fails to happen, this
alarm is raised.
Typical causes include bad pallets, cartons not sitting down, carton flaps
sticking up, or photocells out of adjustment.
Lift up/down failed
The lift is allowed a certain amount to time to travel from the down
proximity to the overrun proximity (and reverse). If it did not complete
within this time, this alarm is raised.
This could be because the lift has not moved, or has not been seen to move.
If it has failed to move, check for obstructions.
If it has not been seen to move, the lift is likely to have overrun the
proximity. Check the adjustment of the proximity switches.
PLC battery flat
This is an alarm reported to the PLC program by the PLC. For further refer
to the appropriate Allen-Bradley SLC-500 manual.
Lower light curtain
Upper light curtain
There is or was an obstruction to the light curtain. This obstruction
should be removed and the appropriate light curtain reset push button
operated before the alarm can be reset.
Should the alarm remain, the alignment of the light curtain should be
checked and adjusted. Otherwise there may be a fault with the unit.
Please note that the light curtains appear to have a "bug filter", allowing
them to be automatically reset after a momentary violation. There is no
corresponding filter in the PLC software, so it is possible that these
alarms may be set while the light curtain appears not to have been
interrupted.
No case @ turn peg
No case @ row entry
These alarms arise when a carton is expected at these locations but has
either failed to arrive or pass within a reasonable time. The problem
could be that the machine has failed to count correctly at an earlier
photocell, or that the carton was delayed in its travels.
You should relocate the cartons to reflect the arrangement shown on the
window.
The following alarms belong to the second class (advice):
Stopped:Press start
This is a reminder that the system will not run until the start button is
pressed.
No empty pallets
This is a reminder to load some more pallets at the heavy-unit-load
conveyor infeed.
Outfeed chockers
This is a request to remove the loads from the outfeed so that the system
may continue to operate.
Many barcodes late
The barcode reader is expected to return a barcode within a given time
after the carton has passed the photocell.
This alarm indicates that, recently, the number of missed barcodes is
excessive.
To be more explicit, if a barcode is not received in time, a tally is
incremented. If a barcode is received, the tally is decremented. If the
tally reaches 5, this alarm is raised, whereas if it makes it back to 0,
this alarm is cleared.
If the rate exceeds 50% eventually the alarm will be raised, whereas if the
rate is below 50% eventually the alarm will be cleared. There is no point
resetting this alarm.
Many barcode noread
The barcode reader should report for every carton, with either a barcode or
a no-read.
This alarm indicates that, recently, the number of no-reads is excessive.
To be more explicit, if a no-read is reported, a tally is incremented. If
a barcode is reported, the tally is decremented. If the tally reaches 5,
this alarm is raised, whereas if it makes it back to 0, this alarm is
cleared.
If the rate exceeds 50% eventually the alarm will be raised, whereas if the
rate is below 50% eventually the alarm will be cleared. There is no point
resetting this alarm.
Most alarms within the palletiser are "latched". These alarms are latched
either because they are associated with an action not completing within a
reasonable amount of time, or so that the alarm, if possibly fleeting or
intermittent, is captured. Once these alarms are corrected, it is
necessary to reset them before normal operation may recommence. To reset
these alarms type 'A'.
Other alarms, such as emergency stops, need no resetting, once the stop has
been released.
Tally of Cases
In the place where the push buttons are normally displayed, the tally of
cases produced on the two lines feeding the palletiser may be displayed by
typing "C". After noting the tallies, the push buttons may be again
displayed by typing any key.
Finish Load
This function causes all cartons known to the palletiser to be gathered
onto the pallet, without waiting for the complete load. This would
typically be done when shutting down. Type "F" to invoke this function.
Reject Pallet
This function causes the pallet in the lift to be lowered and transferred
from the lift. This would typically be done when you are dissatisfied with
the pallet in the lift. Type "R" to invoke this function.
Palletiser Semi-Automatic
In automatic, the PLC decides when to perform its various cycles and
controls a number of devices to achieve each cycle. In semi-automatic, you
leave the coordination of the devices to the PLC but take over the decision
as to when each cycle is to be performed. Type "S" to enter this mode.
Once you do so the PLC will cease to start any new cycles.
The push buttons will be replaced with a new set listing the keys that
control the semi_automatic operations.
If one of these buttons is grey, there is no outstanding action. If it is
light green, it has requested the PLC to perform a semi-automatic operation
and has not yet been informed by the PLC of its compliance. If it is dark
green, it has been informed by the PLC that it has started/completed
(depending on how the PLC handles the operation) the requested operation
and has removed its request. Once the PLC acknowledges that it has seen
the request removed, the button will be returned to grey.
The semi-automatic cycles are:
"C"
Release a case from the metering belt
"R"
Sweep a row onto the layer area
"T"
Transfer a layer onto the apron
"A"
Release the layer onto the lift
"D"
Discharge the load on the lift
Type [ESCAPE] to exit semi-automatic mode. The palletiser will immediately
resume automatic operation.
Palletiser Manual Mode
In automatic, the PLC decides when to perform its various cycles and
controls a number of devices to achieve each cycle. In manual, you take
over all these responsibilities. Type "M" to enter this mode. Once you do
so, the PLC will stop all motors it controls and will freeze all other
outputs until you instruct it otherwise.
The push buttons will be replaced with a new set listing the keys that
control the manual operation for most of the devices.
If one of these buttons is grey, it is untouched. If it is light green, it
is turned on. If it is dark green with black text it is turned off.
The manual control keys are:
"S"
corresponds to the enabling/disabling of the glue spray unit.
"I"
corresponds to the operation of the infeed guide.
"T"
corresponds to the operation of the turn peg (off = turn).
"M"
corresponds to the running of the metering belt.
"W"
corresponds to the running of the wider infeed rollers.
"R"
corresponds to the running of the row form area rollers.
"N"
corresponds to the running of the row sweep arm.
"L"
corresponds to the running of the layer area rollers.
"H"
corresponds to the selection of speed for the layer area rollers.
"A"
corresponds to the running of the apron rollers.
"O"
corresponds to the running of the apron open or close.
"U"
corresponds to the running of the lift up.
"D"
corresponds to the running of the lift down.
In addition, the keys "C", "G" and "P" allow you to enter the sub-manual
modes to control the compressing of the loads, the gates and the pilot
lamps respectively. These sub-modes may be exited by typing [ESCAPE].
Type [ESCAPE] to exit manual mode. The palletiser will immediately resume
automatic operation.
Motors Versus Solenoids
To control a motor, the key corresponding to a push button must remain
pushed for it to run, as distinct to controlling a solenoid, where the
state of the solenoid is switched with each alternate key press. Do not
hold on keys corresponding to the manual control of solenoids.
When controlling a solenoid, the corresponding push button becomes
illuminated light green when turned on or dark green when turned off.
When controlling a motor, the corresponding push button becomes illuminated
light green when on and reverts to grey when off.
The infeed guide push button relates to several cylinders and will cycle
through the positions with alternate presses.
High speed push buttons behave as the solenoid push buttons, as the actual
control of the motor is handled by another button.
Palletiser Gates
There are many gate controls, each corresponding to one of the possible
gates within a palletiser. Initially, the manual control of these devices
will cause them to remain in the state they were left in by the automatic
control.
These controls allow the user to raise then lower each gate individually.
The main row entry gate is controlled by pressing "R", while the remaining
row entry gates are controlled by pressing "!", "@", "#" and "$". These
correspond to [SHIFT 1], [SHIFT 2], [SHIFT 3] and [SHIFT 4] and refer to
the first, second, third and fourth gates prior to the main row entry gate.
The row form area gates are referred to as "A" to "F" and are controlled by
pressing the corresponding keys. These gates are usually allocated
starting from the gate nearest the main row entry, however, gates may be
added later in the design and may therefore not fit this pattern. You are
best to refer to the drawings.
The end stop, though not actually a gate, is controlled by pressing "S".
The layer gates are referred to as "1" to "4" and are operated by pressing
the corresponding key.
The layer exit gate is controlled by pressing "L".
The state of these controls will toggle each time the corresponding key is
pressed. As the state toggles, the corresponding push button becomes
illuminated light green when compressing or dark green when retracting.
To return to the main manual control functions, press "M" or [ESCAPE].
Palletiser Compress
There are three compress controls. Initially, the manual control of these
devices will cause them to remain in the state they were left in by the
automatic control.
The three controls relate to the side compression of the layer area ("L"),
and the side ("S") and end ("E") compression of the apron area.
The state of these controls will toggle each time the corresponding letter
is pressed. As the state toggles, the corresponding push button becomes
illuminated light green when compressing or dark green when retracting.
To return to the main manual control functions, press "M" or [ESCAPE].
Palletiser Pilot Lamps
There are several pilot lamps. Initially, the manual control of these
devices will cause them to reflect the status they were designed to
reflect.
These controls allow the user to exercise these lamps.
The pilot lamp manual control keys are:
"D"
corresponds to the main dome lamp.
"U"
corresponds to the upper light curtain pilot lamp.
"L"
corresponds to the lower light curtain pilot lamp.
"M"
corresponds to the manual mode pilot lamp.
"A"
corresponds to the automatic mode pilot lamp.
"S"
corresponds to the stopped mode pilot lamp.
The state of these controls will toggle each time the corresponding key is
pressed. As the state toggles, the corresponding push button becomes
illuminated light green when turned on or dark green when turned off.
To return to the main manual control functions, press "E" or [ESCAPE].
Edit Cartons
When the palletiser's knowledge of the position of cases is in error, it is
usually simplest to rearrange the cases as shown on the window.
If this is impractical, you may clear up the situation using the
semi-automatic commands, then zero the case counters. This is done by
typing "E" to enter the edit cartons mode, then typing "Z" to zero the
counters. The load in the lift is then discharged.
Alternatively, you may, should you be of sterner stuff, attempt to correct
the palletiser's view of the cartons by editing this data. The data at the
glue spray, the metering belt, the turn peg, the row entry, the layer form,
the apron and the lift are presented in the top centre of the window.
Each line of data consists of the product code (accompanied by the pattern
name), followed by the coordinates of the next carton expected at these
locations. When editing these, horizontal and vertical pointers are
provided to indicate which datum is to be edited. Once the pointers are
positioned using the cursor keys or clicking on the location, type [ENTER]
then enter the new value.
This is further complicated should the end of a load occur. Here a single
line may contain two sets of data, one black relating to the end of the
load and the other indicating how far into the next load we have
progressed. In these circumstances, after editing one line vertically
scroll to the next and edit it as well.
Once happy, press [ESCAPE] to exit and see how it goes.
Running Without a Barcode Reader
Should the barcode reader fail, it can be disabled by typing "B" followed
by entering the product code of the expected cartons. It is then necessary
to type "B" again and enter the product code each time the line is cleared
for a new product.
When disabled the push button advertising this will be coloured light
green.
To bring the barcode reader back into service type "B" and enter a blank
product code.
If however, contrary to these settings you require the current batch not to
be glued, type "G".
When disabled the push button advertising this will be coloured light
green.
To bring the glue spray back into operation type "G" a second time.
Writing Pattern Data
The palletiser PLC is informed by its barcode reader of the product it is
receiving. For it to make intelligent use of this data it needs to know
the product code to which the barcode relates, the pattern to be used for
this product et cetera.
Anytime this information is changed or added to it should be written to the
palletiser. This is done by typing "W". The palletiser is switched to
manual while the transfer takes place.
Accessing the Pallet Conveyor System
You can call up the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyors diagram from this window by
typing "P". Subsequently, when you exit the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyors
diagram, you will be returned here.
Accessing the Carton Conveyor System
You can call up the carton conveyors diagram from this window by typing
"I". Subsequently, when you exit the carton conveyor diagram,
you will be returned here.
Machine Status Display
A "machine" is a mechanism that requires more status monitoring than is
afforded by the definition of devices within the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor
System and has not had explicit software developed for it (as in the case
of cranes and palletisers).
The window will appear as shown overleaf:
Alternative machines may be selected by activating the "Machine" option
from this window's horizontal menu bar. In response a dialogue window will
appear with a "Symbolic Name" field that should be used to select the
desired machine. Refer to the section titled:
"Symbolic
Name". You can also page through the different machines using [PAGE UP] and
[PAGE DOWN], or by clicking on "PAGE-UP" and "PAGE-DOWN" in the window's
menu.
In the top left corner of the window is the name of the machine, while the
status and alarms, active in the machine at this point in time, are shown
in dedicated areas of the window. There may also be an area dedicated to
push-buttons to control the machine.
The status is also displayed graphically.
Push-buttons may be presented in a number of colours. These colours are:
Off
indicating that the button is off but able to be pushed.
On
indicating that the button is on.
Disabled
indicating that nothing can happen by pressing it.
Alarm
indicating a abnormal condition is associated with it.
Push-buttons may be activated by either typing the first, enlarged,
character presented in the button, or by clicking on it. The button will
change colour to indicate that it is in operation.
Most of these buttons are latched; do not hold them down, but rather, in
the case of manual operations, be prepared to reactivate them to toggle
them off and, thereby, stop the operation.
If, however, the button is presented with an etched circle, then the button
is active only while it is being held down. You hold the button down by
either holding down the corresponding key, or pressing the mouse button
down while the mouse is over the button and keeping it down. If the mouse
moves off the button while the button is held down, the button is not
released.
There are two "machines", the "Freezer Detierer", and the "Chiller
Detierer".
These windows allow you to, more conveniently than via the conveyor
diagram, observe the state of a detierer and to control it manually.
These windows provide buttons that can be used to set the corresponding
conveyor (M02A or M52A) to manual or automatic. The corresponding conveyor
must be set to manual before the manual control buttons can be used.
When these conveyors are set to manual in this way, they must be set back
to automatic in the same way, though any terminal on the network can be
used to do this. If you right click on the conveyor on the conveyor
diagram, while it is set to manual via this window, it will show the
controlling location to be "Indirect", rather than a specific terminal;
this is intended to tell you that it is held in manual via the machine
status window.
These windows present their status, graphically, in the following areas:
Elevation
Plan view
Below these areas are the control buttons, while to the right is presented
the status in text form.
In the "Elevation" area, it presents the entry and exit height photocells,
the photocells that look to find the gap in a pallet and that to see below
the pallet, and the vertical position of the forks.
In the "Plan view" area, it presents the too-far left and right exit
photocells and whether the forks (or pegs) are back, extended, or fully
inserted into a pallet.
Controls
Firstly, at the right, are the push-buttons to set the corresponding
conveyor to manual or automatic ("MANUAL MODE" and "AUTO MODE").
The remaining buttons are only operable when the conveyor is in manual and
allow you to raise and lower the detierer's forks, and to extend or
withdraw them.
Produce Reports
This menu provides access to the windows required to generate the reports
(other than the communications reports).
The physical printing of a file is handled by the MS-DOS batch file
"prnqueue.bat". If you wish the reports to be sent to a network
printer, you should modify this file, replacing "/D:\\.\LPT1" with the
suitable description for the network printer you wish to use, such as:
"/D:\\server\printer", where "server" is the machine name (which might
be an IP address), and "printer" is the name of the printer on that machine
(which might be something like "HPLaserJ").
The reports can be produced for the old style IBM printers, or those
emulating the Hewlett-Packard PCL language. You may make this selection
and alter other parameters controlling the formatting of the report on a
page by setting the "Using HP DeskJet", "Print wide reports A4", "Print
wide in landscape", "Lines in portrait", and "Lines in landscape" records
of the "Configuration Data" database. Please refer to the section titled:
"Configuration
Data".
Below is a rough text-representation of this menu:
Most of the report windows are "Report Viewing Data" windows. For these
refer to the sections titled: "Viewing
Data", and "Report
Viewing Data".
Event Log Historic Report
This "Report Viewing Data" window is used to set up the restrictions, then
produce a report listing each of the event logs, with time and date of the
event and the description. For further general instructions on using this
type of window, please refer to the sections titled:
"Viewing Data", and
"Report
Viewing Data".
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Event log historic report
Print Restrict Match Expand First Last
19:52:59 19-JAN-99|ALARM 1000 Standby computer is not responding ^
19:47:49 19-JAN-99|Graham Moore at Console has logged on █
19:47:49 19-JAN-99|Clear 999 Crane communications failure █
19:40:49 19-JAN-99|Clear 998 Conveyor communications failure █
19:40:49 19-JAN-99|ALARM 999 Crane communications failure █
19:40:49 19-JAN-99|ALARM 998 Conveyor communications failure █
16:55:56 19-JAN-99|Software started █
19:11:19 19-JAN-99|ALARM 1000 Standby computer is not responding █
18:03:08 19-JAN-99|Graham Moore at Console has logged on █
18:03:08 19-JAN-99|Clear 999 Crane communications failure █
17:35:37 19-JAN-99|Clear 998 Conveyor communications failure █
17:03:07 19-JAN-99|ALARM 999 Crane communications failure █
17:00:07 19-JAN-99|ALARM 998 Conveyor communications failure █
17:00:07 19-JAN-99|Software started █
17:00:07 19-JAN-99|Des Hindes at Console : Set Inhibit shuttle S2█
16:59:56 19-JAN-99|Des Hindes at Console : Issued a manual shuttl█
16:58:56 19-JAN-99|Des Hindes at Console : Crane command - Set Cr█
16:57:56 19-JAN-99|Clear 7 Crane: Loaded low vac hd 2 █
16:56:56 19-JAN-99|Des Hindes at Console : Crane command - Reset V
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
Database: Event log
Event: Time 19:52:59 19-JAN-99
Load Log Historic Report
This "Report Viewing Data" window is used to set up the restrictions, then
produce a report listing each of the load movement logs, with time and date
of the movement log, the load details, the location to which it has moved
and whether it has completed the journey at that point. For further
general instructions on using this type of window, please refer to the
sections titled: "Viewing Data", and
"Report
Viewing Data".
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
The load movement log logs the significant moves made by each load. A move
is significant if it causes the Movement Controller to adjust its inventory
to show the load in a new location.
Conveyor Alarm Summary Report
This "Report Viewing Data" window is used to set up the restrictions, then
produce a report listing each of the conveyor alarms with the number of
instances of these alarms during the reporting period. For further general
instructions on using this type of window, please refer to the sections
titled: "Viewing Data", and
"Report
Viewing Data".
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Produce conveyor alarm summary
Print Restrict Match Expand First Last
1|Transfer C202 to C205 failed to complete in the time allowed|C202A| |Tran^
2|Index C205B to C205A failed to complete in the time allowed |C205B| |Tran█
3|Transfer C205 to CR05 failed to complete in the time allowed|C205A| |Tran█
4|Transfer C203 to C204 failed to complete in the time allowed|C203A| |Tran█
5|Index C204B to C204A failed to complete in the time allowed |C204B| |Tran█
6|Transfer C204 to CR04 failed to complete in the time allowed|C204A| |Tran█
7|Transfer C209 to C210 failed to complete in the time allowed|C209A| |Tran█
8|Transfer C210 to C211 failed to complete in the time allowed|C210A| |Tran█
9|Transfer C211 to C212 failed to complete in the time allowed|C211A| |Tran█
10|Transfer C212 to C213 failed to complete in the time allowed|C212A| |Tran█
11|Transfer C213 to C214 failed to complete in the time allowed|C213A| |Tran█
12|Transfer C214 to C215 failed to complete in the time allowed|C214A| |Tran█
13|Transfer C215 to CR16 failed to complete in the time allowed|C215A| |Tran█
14|Transfer C218 to C219 failed to complete in the time allowed|C218A| |Tran█
15|Transfer C219 to C220 failed to complete in the time allowed|C219A| |Tran█
16|Transfer C220 to C221 failed to complete in the time allowed|C220A| |Tran█
17|Transfer C221 to C222 failed to complete in the time allowed|C221A| |Tran█
18|Transfer C222 to C223 failed to complete in the time allowed|C222A| |Tran█
19|Transfer C223 to C224 failed to complete in the time allowed|C223A| |TranV
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
Database: Conveyor alarms
Conveyor alarm Transfer C202 to C205 failed to complete in the time
After terminating the restrictions, you will be asked whether you wish "All
tallies" to be listed, or the "Non-zero only", allowing you to get a report
covering all alarms, even those which have not been active during the
reporting period, or, as is more normal, a report listing only those alarms
that have been active during the reporting period.
Upon answering this question, you will be asked whether you wish to print
tallies fo the "Current period" or the "Last period", allowing you to
request either the completed period (the "last" period) or the current,
incomplete period to report on.
This "Report Viewing Data" window is used to set up the restrictions, then
produce a report listing each of the store locations (a
"Store
Reference" field), with its occupancy status, whether it exists, its
enable/inhinit status, and storage type - storage, flow-through or
pickup/deposit to conveyor - (all
"Character"
fields).
This is then followed by the barcode, whether its available for use by the
Movement Controller when it needs to relocate a front load and its index
into the load detection system.
For further general instructions on using this type of window, please refer
to the sections titled: "Viewing Data", and
"Report
Viewing Data".
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Having made any restrictions, and asking to print the report, you will be
asked to nominate whether you wish the report to include "All" locations,
or only the "Occupied" locations.
For editing instructions for this type of field, please refer to the
section titled:
"Character".
Produce Report Showing Store Matrix
This report produces a store map showing locations of loads.
This window first presents a store layout, to allow the restriction of the
report.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Produce report showing store matrix
Select Change Restrict Where Match Expand Insert First Last
Number of loads 370 ^
┌───┬────┬────┬────┬────┬────┬────┬────┬────┬────┬────┬────┬────┬────┬───┐█
│■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪■■■■▪▪■■▪▪■■■■■▪■■▪■■■■■■■■▪■■│█
│▪▪▪▪■▪■▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪▪■■▪▪▪▪▪■■▪▪▪■■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪│█
│■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■▪■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■▪■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■▪■■■■■│█
│▪■■■▪▪■▪■■■▪■■■■■■■■■■■■▪■▪■■■■■■■■■■■■■■▪■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■▪■■■■■■■■■■■▪■■│█
│■■▪■■■▪■■■■■▪▪■■■■■■■■■■■■■▪■■■■■▪■■■■■■▪■■■■■■■▪■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■│█
│▪▪▪▪▪■■■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■▪■■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■▪■▪│█
│▪▪■▪▪■■▪▪▪▪▪■▪■▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■■■▪■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪■▪▪■■▪▪■▪▪■▪■▪▪■■▪▪■│█
│▪▪▪▪■■▪▪▪■■▪▪■▪■▪■■▪■■■▪■■▪■▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■■▪▪▪▪■■▪■▪■■■▪▪▪▪■■■■▪■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■│█
│▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪■▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪■■▪▪■▪▪■│█
│▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪■▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■■▪▪▪▪▪■▪■■■▪■■▪■■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪■■■■▪■│█
│▓▓■▪▪▪▪ ▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪■▪▪▪▪■■▪■▪▪▪▪▪▪▪▪ ▪▪▪▪■▪▪■■▪■▪■■■■■■■▪■■▪■■■▪▪▪■▪■▪■│█
└───┴────┴────┴────┴────┴────┴────┴────┴────┴────┴────┴────┴────┴────┴───┘█
█
█
V
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
1002010|O| | | | | |207680|593100720030023457|
Rack slot inhibited <I/S/R>a Rack Rack Rack SSCC
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
Rack slot occupied <O>a O
The normal functions associated with this window are available. Refer to
the section titled: "Stores
Diagram".
Once you have made any desired restrictions, type "P" or click on "Print"
menu item. You will be presented with a dialogue window allowing you to
further modify the report. The question, "Crane (0 = all) <0-8>" (please
refer to the section titled:
"Numeric")
allows you to restrict the printout to a single crane.
You will then be presented with the "Viewer/Printer/Rtf file/Csv file"
options. Please refer to the section titled:
"Report
Viewing Data".
Crane Alarm Summary Report
This "Report Viewing Data" window is used to set up the restrictions, then
produce a report listing each of the crane alarms with the number of
instances of these alarms for each crane during the reporting period. For
further general instructions on using this type of window, please refer to
the sections titled: "Viewing Data", and
"Report
Viewing Data".
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Produce crane alarm summary
Print Restrict Match Expand First Last
1|MCR is off ^
2|24VDC is off █
3|HL circuit breaker █
4|LT circuit breaker █
5|Forks circuit breaker █
6|HL drive fault █
7|LT drive fault █
8|Forks drive fault █
9|HL thermal overload █
10|LT thermal overload █
11|Cabin too cold █
12|Cabin too warm █
13|Load off centre █
14|Catch block set █
15|Slack rope █
16|Rope overload █
17|Hoist over-speed █
18|Speed govenor fault █
19|Hoist whole current V
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
Database: Crane alarms
Crane alarm MCR is off
After terminating the restrictions, you will be asked whether you wish "All
tallies" to be listed, or the "Non-zero only", allowing you to get a report
covering all alarms, even those that have not been active during the
reporting period, or, as is more normal, a report listing only those alarms
that have been active during the reporting period.
Upon answering this question, you will be asked whether you wish to print
tallies fo the "Current period" or the "Last period", allowing you to
request either the completed period (the "last" period) or the current,
incomplete period to report on.
For some sites, there is referenced, for each of these alarms, another
alarm from this list, which, if active, is considered as the prime cause of
the fault, while the referencing alarm is considered to be parasitic. For
such alarms, efforts are made to not include the count of their occurrences
that occurred while the referenced is or becomes active. For more
information on defining the parasitic nature of certain alarms, please
refer to the section titled:
"Enter
or Modify the Crane Alarms".
Crane Movement Tally Report
This report provides a tally of the number of moves each crane has made in
the current hour, day, week, and month, along with the number of moves made
in the previous five hours, days, weeks, and months, along with the totals
across all cranes.
This report has no window; once selected, you will be immediately presented
with the "Viewer/Printer/Rtf file/Csv file" options. Please refer to the
section titled: "Report
Viewing Data".
Crane Cycle Log Report
This "Report Viewing Data" window is used to set up the restrictions, then
produce a report listing all load movements performed by the six stacker
cranes. For further general instructions on using this type of window,
please refer to the sections titled:
"Viewing Data", and
"Report
Viewing Data".
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
The records consist of the time and date that the load relocation was
completed, the crane involved, the source location, the destination to
which it was taken, the destination that it was asked to be taken, the time
it took excluding down time, the time it took including down time, the
number of extra locations that it had to be taken to, and the number of
times that it stopped because of faults.
These same fields are included in the subsequent report.
Once the restrictions are in place, type "P", or click on the "Print" menu
item. You will be asked where to send the report. You may select
"Printer", "Viewer", "Rtf file", or "Csv file".
Communication Reports
This menu provides access to the windows required to generate the
communications reports.
The physical printing of a file is handled by the MS-DOS batch file
"prnqueue.bat". If you wish the reports to be sent to a network
printer, you should modify this file, replacing "/D:\\.\LPT1" with the
suitable description for the network printer you wish to use, such as:
"/D:\\server\printer", where "server" is the machine name (which might
be an IP address), and "printer" is the name of the printer on that machine
(which might be something like "HPLaserJ").
Below is a rough text-representation of this menu:
Movement Controller (C) Copyright 1998 to 2009 Woodgrove Digital Engineering
File View
┌─-─────────────────────┐
│New User │
│Operations >│
│Reports >│ ┌─-─────────────────────────────────────┐
│Communication reports█>│ │Produce report of PLC communications │
│Configuration >│ │Produce report of pick-to-light comm's │
│Maintenance >│ │Produce report of barcode scanner comm'│
│Definition >│ │Produce report of TCP-IP communications│
│Special Functions >│ └─-─────────────────────────────────────┘
│Exit │
└─-─────────────────────┘
Each of these windows show the recent communications between the Movement
Controller and some remote equipment or computer system. This history is
presented as records of a database. The first field of these records are
the time and date, followed by a field providing the originator of the
message, and, possibly, another providing the channel number. The final
field will provide the message contents. The message contents, for
non-ASCII protocols, will be converted to hexadecimal.
Opening a Communications Report Window
If logging is currently enabled on the communications link corresponding to
the window you select from this menu, then upon entry into the window you
will be asked whether you wish to "Continue logging" or to "Suspend
logging" as you examine the log.
If do not you wish to suspend logging, you need only type [RETURN] or
[ENTER] or type "C" or click on "Continue logging" to accept the offered
default. Otherwise enter type "S" or click on "Suspend logging". It is an
advantage to suspend logging if you want to capture the information already
gathered (i.e. prevent it from being overwritten) or to enable simpler
control of the file.
Leaving a Communications Report Window
When the you leave the window, you will be asked whether you want to
a)
Leave as it was (i.e. continue logging with whatever restrictions might
have been in place previously),
b)
Enable and restrict (i.e. continue or start logging but apply the
restrictions that were just imposed), or
c)
Stop logging.
The "Leave as it was" option will be default, and so can be selected by
typing [RETURN] or [ENTER]. Alternatively you can click on your desired
option or type the first letter of the corresponding button, "L", "E", or
"S".
Help with the Protocol
For some channels, a terse explanation of the protocol used by the channel
can be obtained by pressing "H" or clicking on "Help on protocol". If
further pages of explanation are available, these will be available by
pressing "H" or clicking on "Help on protocol" subsequently.
PLC Communications Report
This "Report Viewing Data" window is used to set up the restrictions, then
produce a report listing each of the messages communicated between the
Movement Controller and PLCs, with time and date of the message, the PLC,
the originator and message contents. For further general instructions on
using this type of window, please refer to the sections titled:
"Viewing Data", and
"Report
Viewing Data".
Instructions related to entering and exiting this window are given in the
section titled: "Communication
Reports".
The message contents begin with a file number, then the address within the
file, then a colon, then the contents of each address being written or read
within the file.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
For further general instructions on using this type of window, please refer
to the sections titled: "Viewing Data", and
"Report
Viewing Data".
Produce Report of Pick-to-Light Comm's
This "Report Viewing Data" window is used to set up the restrictions, then
produce a report listing each of the messages communicated between the
Movement Controller and pick-to-light units, with time and date of the
message, the channel number, the originator and message contents. For
further general instructions on using this type of window, please refer to
the sections titled: "Viewing Data", and
"Report
Viewing Data".
Instructions related to entering and exiting this window are given in the
section titled: "Communication
Reports".
The message contents begin with a four-digit unit address, the flag
(message type) and then the three-digit data field.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
This "Report Viewing Data" window is used to set up the restrictions, then
produce a report listing each of the messages communicated between the
Movement Controller and barcode scanners, with time and date of the
message, the channel number, the originator and message contents. For
further general instructions on using this type of window, please refer to
the sections titled: "Viewing Data", and
"Report
Viewing Data".
Instructions related to entering and exiting this window are given in the
section titled: "Communication
Reports".
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
This "Report Viewing Data" window is used to set up the restrictions, then
produce a report listing each of the messages communicated between the
Movement Controller and the host_computer over the FTP control and data
channels of the TCP/IP interface, with time and date of the message the
originator and message contents. For further general instructions on using
this type of window, please refer to the sections titled:
"Viewing Data", and
"Report
Viewing Data".
Additionally, TELNET control channel messages are also included.
Instructions related to entering and exiting this window are given in the
section titled: "Communication
Reports".
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Produce report of TCP-IP communications
Print Restrict Match Expand First Last
10:52:50 18-JAN-95|O|QUIT!! ^
10:48:40 18-JAN-95|I|226 Transfer complete.!! █
10:48:40 18-JAN-95|I|150 Opening data connection for 18019500.INV (165.69.72.22█
10:48:40 18-JAN-95|O|STOR 18019500.INV!! █
10:48:40 18-JAN-95|I|200 PORT command okay.!! █
10:48:40 18-JAN-95|O|PORT 165,69,72,22,254,275!! █
10:48:40 18-JAN-95|I|502 Unimplemented MODE type.!! █
10:48:40 18-JAN-95|O|MODE B!! █
10:29:20 18-JAN-95|I|226 Transfer complete.!! █
10:29:20 18-JAN-95|I|150 Opening data connection for 18019500.SHP (165.69.72.22█
10:29:20 18-JAN-95|O|STOR 18019500.SHP!! █
10:29:20 18-JAN-95|I|200 PORT command okay.!! █
10:29:20 18-JAN-95|O|PORT 165,69,72,22,254,275!! █
10:29:20 18-JAN-95|I|502 Unimplemented MODE type.!! █
10:29:20 18-JAN-95|O|MODE B!! █
10:29:20 18-JAN-95|I|226 Transfer complete.!! █
10:29:20 18-JAN-95|I|150 Opening data connection for 18019500.STK (165.69.72.22█
10:29:20 18-JAN-95|O|STOR 18019500.STK!! █
10:29:20 18-JAN-95|I|200 PORT command okay.!! V
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
Database: TCP-IP communications
Host message: Time 10:52:50 20-FEB-97
The exclamation marks in the above window diagram represent the
non-printing ASCII codes within the messages.
If communications between the host_computer and the Movement Controller
use directories rather than the Movement Controller's native FTP, then the
directories themselves can be looked into in order to establish what has
and has not been communicated. However, the contents of these files will
be logged in this communications report, as though they had come via TCP-IP
direct to the Movement Controller.
Configuration
This menu provides access to the windows required to maintain the
configuration data.
Below is a rough text-representation of this menu:
Movement Controller (C) Copyright 1998 to 2009 Woodgrove Digital Engineering
File View
┌─-─────────────────────┐
│New User │
│Operations >│
│Reports >│
│Communication reports >│ ┌─-───────────────────────────────────────┐
│Configuration█████████>│ │Control mode of operation │
│Maintenance >│ │Enter or modify conveyor alarms │
│Definition >│ │Enter or modify products for loads │
│Special Functions >│ │Enter or modify the crane alarms │
│Exit │ │Enter or modify the crane states │
└─-─────────────────────┘ │Enter or modify the countries │
│Enter or modify the states/provinces │
│Enter or modify the towns/suburbs/cities │
│Enter or modify the customers │
│Enter or modify the products │
│Enter or modify the pick area shelving │
│Enter or modify palletiser alarms │
│Enter or modify palletiser patterns │
│Enter or modify palletiser product data │
│Enter or modify machine states & alarms │
└─-───────────────────────────────────────┘
Many of the configuration windows are "Maintenance Viewing Data" windows.
For these refer to the sections titled:
"Viewing Data", and
"Maintenance
Viewing Data".
Control Mode of Operation
This screen allows you to alter certain configuration variables in a
straight-forward manner:
find the line describing the quantity you wish to change,
double click on this line, and,
when the dialogue window opens, enter the new value.
Full Description of this Window
This is a very limited version of the "Maintenance Viewing Data" window
that lists certain records from the "Configuration Data" database. The
[LEFT] and [RIGHT] keys are still effective for setting restrictions
(should you want to) however their action is not visible on the window and
has no effect on the operation of the "C" key used to change the contents
of a field. Instead, the "C" key always refers to the setting of the
miscellaneous data and never its description. Also typing the "S", [ENTER]
or [RETURN] key has the same effect as typing "C". You may also double
click the line.
The "Configuration Data" database includes the "Miscellaneous Name" field
(a unique "Name" field), "Miscellaneous Data" field (a "Miscellaneous Data"
field) and the "Initial/Run/Network <I/R/N>a" field (a "Character" field).
For editing instructions for these types of fields, please refer to the
sections titled: "Name",
"Character",
and "Miscellaneous
Data".
Only those records of the "Configuration Data" with the
"Initial/Run/Network <I/R/N>a" field set to "R" will be included on
this window. Please refer to the section titled:
"Configuration
Data". You should also refer to that section of the manual for more
information about the meaning of the records presented here.
The miscellaneous data field is also coloured to highlight those fields not
containing 0 and therefore likely to be in the abnormal state.
The records from the "Configuration Data" database chosen for inclusion on
this window are those records that are most likely to be altered after the
commissioning of the system is complete.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Control mode of operation
Select Change Restrict Where Match Expand Insert First Last 1-nine
Seconds before screen save 600 ^
Product Code <0-999999> █
Crane to find vacancy <V>a █
Crane 1 Ret:Sto <R/2/F/1/S>a store always █
Crane 2 Ret:Sto <R/2/F/1/S>a store always █
Crane 3 Ret:Sto <R/2/F/1/S>a store always █
Crane 4 Ret:Sto <R/2/F/1/S>a store always █
Start of Alarm Report Period 00:00:00 21-JAN-99 █
Alarm Report Period (days) 7 █
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
V
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
Database: Configuration Data
Retrieve:Store <R/1/F/2/S>a retrieve always
The Variables Intended to be Presented
As was described in the section titled:
"Full
Description of this Window", which variables are included in this window may
be altered by yourself, from the set of variables contained in the
"Configuration Data" record set.
The variables that are included in this window by default are described in
the following sub-sections.
Override Palletiser Barcode Scanner
The "Product number" if set, disables the palletiser barcode reader, and
indicates to the system that all future product will be of this type.
Stacker Crane To Find Vacancy
The "Crane to find vacancy" if set ('V') allows the crane to recover from
"Location full" and "Pickup got nothing" alarms automatically
(provided the problem was encountered away from the infeed or outfeed)
relocating the load to another location within the crane aisle.
Stacker Crane Store:Retrieve Ratio
The "Retrieve:Store" ratios allow you to control the arbitration between
the crane servicing its infeed and retrieving or replenishing.
Irrespective of this setting, if it has no infeeding, it will retrieve or
replenish and if it has no retrievals or replenishments it will infeed.
Otherwise: if the ratio is set to "store always" infeeding will be done
whenever there is infeeding to do, if set to "retrieve always", retrieval
or replenishment will be done whenever there is one to do, if set to
"retrieve 2:store 1" an infeed will be done once two retrieval or
replenishments have been done, if set to "fifty/fifty" an infeed will be
done once a retrieval or replenishment has been done, if set to "retrieve
1:store 2" a retrieval or replenishment will be done once two infeeds have
been done.
If it is set to "store always", then crane, when idle, will move to the
infeed position.
High Level Crane Inhibiting
The variables, "No automatic crane commands" and "Suspend crane
retrievals", allow you to stop the Movement Controller from sending,
automatically, any new jobs or any new retrieval jobs, respectively, to the
crane.
Alarm Summary Period
The "Start of Alarm Report Period" and the "Alarm Report Period" values are
used together to define the periods, over which the crane and conveyor
alarms are summarised. Please refer to the sections titled:
"Crane
Alarm Summary Report", and
"Conveyor
Alarm Summary Report".
When the time passes the "Start of Alarm Report Period" plus the "Alarm
Report Period" number of days, the currently aggregating counts will be
captured as the "last" period counts and then be reset to zero. The "Alarm
Report Period" number of days will then be added to the "Start of Alarm
Report Period".
Enter or Modify the Conveyor Alarms
This is a "Maintenance Viewing Data" window that lists each of the conveyor
alarms. These are defined to associate text with the alarms raised.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Enter or modify the conveyor alarms
Select Change Restrict Where Match Expand Insert First Last 1-nine
1|Transfer C202 to C205 failed to complete in the time allowed|C202A |Tran^
2|Index C205B to C205A failed to complete in the time allowed |C205B |Tran█
3|Transfer C205 to CR05 failed to complete in the time allowed|C205A |Tran█
4|Transfer C203 to C204 failed to complete in the time allowed|C203A |Tran█
5|Index C204B to C204A failed to complete in the time allowed |C204B |Tran█
6|Transfer C204 to CR04 failed to complete in the time allowed|C204A |Tran█
7|Transfer C209 to C210 failed to complete in the time allowed|C209A |Tran█
8|Transfer C210 to C211 failed to complete in the time allowed|C210A |Tran█
9|Transfer C211 to C212 failed to complete in the time allowed|C211A |Tran█
10|Transfer C212 to C213 failed to complete in the time allowed|C212A |Tran█
11|Transfer C213 to C214 failed to complete in the time allowed|C213A |Tran█
12|Transfer C214 to C215 failed to complete in the time allowed|C214A |Tran█
13|Transfer C215 to CR16 failed to complete in the time allowed|C215A |Tran█
14|Transfer C218 to C219 failed to complete in the time allowed|C218A |Tran█
15|Transfer C219 to C220 failed to complete in the time allowed|C219A |Tran█
16|Transfer C220 to C221 failed to complete in the time allowed|C220A |Tran█
17|Transfer C221 to C222 failed to complete in the time allowed|C221A |Tran█
18|Transfer C222 to C223 failed to complete in the time allowed|C222A |Tran█
19|Transfer C223 to C224 failed to complete in the time allowed|C223A |TranV
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
Database: Conveyor alarms
Conveyor alarm s Transfer C202 to C205 failed to complete in the time
The "Set of Fields" includes the alarm description (a unique "Name" field),
the conveyor associated with the alarm (a "Symbolic Name" field), the state
of the alarm (a "Character" field) the fault category (a "Symbolic Name"
field), whether this alarm has been enabled or not (a "Character" field),
and, for some sites, whether occurences of this alarm are to be recorded in
the event log and summary reports (a "Character" field) and whether this
alarm may be reset by an operator (a "Character" field). Refer to the
sections titled: "Name",
"Symbolic
Name", and "Character".
Below, once a set of fields has been selected for editing, is a rough
text-representation of this window:
Conveyor alarms - 1
Conveyor alarm s Transfer C202 to C205 failed to complete in the time
Alarm conveyor a C202A
Conveyor alarm <A>a
Fault category s Transfer watchdog
╔════════════════════════╗┌────────────────────────┐┌────────────────────────┐
║ OK ║│ DELETE ││ HELP │
╚════════════════════════╝└────────────────────────┘└────────────────────────┘
If the option to prevent the operator from resetting specific alarms is
provided, then this flag must be clear for the alarm in question as well as
for, if there is a fault category, the fault category to which it is
assigned. So, if it does belong to a fault category, you would normally
want to leave the flag clear for the specific alarms that belong to the
fault category, and use the fault category to control whether an operator
has the right to reset an alarm. For further information on fault
categories, please refer to the section titled:
"Fault
Assistance".
Enter or Modify Products
This is a "Maintenance Viewing Data" window that lists each of the products
expected in the warehouse. These are defined to associate a description
with product code and to provide other details such as the number of
packages comprising a full load.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Enter or modify products on loads
Select Change Restrict Where Match Expand Insert First Last
000034|PETERS DRUMSTICKS 24 L/P |144 ^
000035|PETERS TRUMPETS 24 L/P |144 █
000136|CADBURY PICNIC 24 L/P | 80 █
000137|CADBURY CRAVE 24 L/P | 80 █
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
V
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
Database: Products
Product code 000034
The "Set of Fields" includes the product code, product description (both
unique "Name" fields) and the number of packages on a full load (a
"Numeric" field). For editing instructions for these types of
fields, please refer to the sections titled:
"Name", and
"Numeric".
Enter or Modify the Crane Alarms
This is a "Maintenance Viewing Data" window that lists each of the crane
alarms. These are defined to associate text with the alarms raised by the
cranes.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Enter or modify crane alarms
Select Change Restrict Where Match Expand Insert First Last 1-nine
1|MCR is off ^
2|24VDC is off █
3|HL circuit breaker █
4|LT circuit breaker █
5|Forks circuit breaker █
6|HL drive fault █
7|LT drive fault █
8|Forks drive fault █
9|HL thermal overload █
10|LT thermal overload █
11|Cabin too cold █
12|Cabin too warm █
13|Load off centre █
14|Catch block set █
15|Slack rope █
16|Rope overload █
17|Hoist over-speed █
18|Speed govenor fault █
19|Hoist whole current V
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
Database: Crane alarms
Crane alarm MCR is off
The "Set of Fields" includes the alarm description (a unique "Name" field),
whether to record alarms of this sort in the event log and the alarm
summary (a "Character" field), for some sites there is a reference to
another alarm which, if active, would be deemed to have caused this alarm
(a "Symbolic Name" field), and the crane alarms field (a "Crane and
Palletiser Alarms" field). For editing instructions for these types of
fields, please refer to the sections titled:
"Name",
"Character",
"Symbolic
Name", and "Crane
and Palletiser Alarms".
Be warned, that if you change the text, the software may fail to correlate
the alarm with the text in the manual, by which the alarm is described. As
a result, it will not be able to call up the correct page of the help in
response to the right-click request (for details on this "request", please
refer to the section titled:
"Alarms").
Below, once a set of fields has been selected for editing, is a rough
text-representation of this window:
Crane alarms - 1
Crane Alarm Names s MCR is off
Don't log crane alarm <D>a
Crane Alarms
╔════════════════════════╗┌────────────────────────┐┌────────────────────────┐
║ OK ║│ DELETE ││ HELP │
╚════════════════════════╝└────────────────────────┘└────────────────────────┘
Enter or Modify the Crane States
This is a "Maintenance Viewing Data" window that lists each of the crane
states. These are defined to associate text with the states reported by
the cranes.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Enter or modify crane states
Select Change Restrict Where Match Expand Insert First Last 1-nine
1|LT in position ^
2|HL in low position █
3|HL in high position █
4|Forks position bt 0 █
5|Forks position bt 1 █
6|Forks position bt 2 █
7|Forks position bt 3 █
8|Forks position bt 4 █
9|Manual █
10|Out of service █
11|Alarm change █
12|Loaded █
13|MCR deenergised █
14|LT speed enable █
15|HL speed enable █
16|Key switch manual █
17|Too high on left █
18|Too high on right █
19|Off-centre to left V
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
Database: Crane states
Crane State Names In Automatic
The "Set of Fields" includes only the state description (a unique "Name"
field). For editing instructions for this type of field, please refer to
the section titled: "Name".
Be warned, that if you change the text, the software may fail to correlate
the state with the text in the manual, by which the state is described. As
a result, it will not be able to call up the correct page of the help in
response to the right-click request (for details on this "request", please
refer to the section titled:
"Status
List").
The "Crane Commands and Alarms" window takes some liberties with the text
entered here.
If the "LT in position" bit is not set, the text "LT out of position" is
displayed; this is hard-coded.
If neither the "HL in low position" nor the "HL in high position" bit is
set, the text "HL out of position" is displayed; this is hard-coded.
If both the "HL in low position" and the "HL in high position" bit is set,
the text "HL in low position" is displayed.
If neither the "Cabin up position" nor the "Cabin down position" bit is
set, and the crane has a movable cabin, the text "Cabin in between" is
displayed; this is hard-coded.
The text for the forks status bits, "Forks position bt 0" et cetera, is
completely ignored; the forks status is hard-coded.
Below, once a set of fields has been selected for editing, is a rough
text-representation of this window:
Crane states - 1
Crane State Names s HL in low position
╔════════════════════════╗┌────────────────────────┐┌────────────────────────┐
║ OK ║│ DELETE ││ HELP │
╚════════════════════════╝└────────────────────────┘└────────────────────────┘
Enter or Modify the Countries
This is a "Maintenance Viewing Data" window that lists each of the
countries. These are defined to assist in the entry of address of
customers, providing, not only the full country name but also the ISD code
and the format of the post (or "zip") code for that country.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Enter or modify the countries
Select Change Restrict Where Match Expand Insert First Last
Australia |#### ^
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
V
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
Database: Countries
Country's name Australia
The "Set of Fields" includes the name of the country, its ISD code (both
unique "Name" fields), and its post code mask (a "Post Code Mask" field).
For editing instructions for these types of fields, please refer to the
sections titled: "Name", and
"Post
Code and Post Code Mask".
Below, once a set of fields has been selected for editing, is a rough
text-representation of this window:
Countries - Australia
Country's name t Australia
Country's ISD (NZ=64) a
Zip mask (Canada: ###-###) a ####
╔════════════════════════╗┌────────────────────────┐┌────────────────────────┐
║ OK ║│ DELETE ││ HELP │
╚════════════════════════╝└────────────────────────┘└────────────────────────┘
The ISD code, along with the STD code for the customer's town, is provided
to assist in the entry of the customer's phone number. For editing
instructions for this type of field, please refer to the section titled:
"Phone
Number".
Enter or Modify the States/Provinces
This is a "Maintenance Viewing Data" window that lists each of the states
or provinces. These are defined to assist in the entry of addresses of
customers, providing, not only the full state's or province's name but also
the country for that state or province, and thereby the ISD code and the
format of the post (or "zip") code for that country.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Enter or modify the states/provinces
Select Change Restrict Where Match Expand Insert First Last
N.S.W. |Australia ^
Victoria |Australia █
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
V
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
Database: States and provinces
State/province name N.S.W.
The "Set of Fields" includes the name of the state or province (a unique
"Name" field) and the country (a "Symbolic Name" field). For editing
instructions for these types of fields, please refer to the sections
titled: "Name", and
"Symbolic
Name".
If the name of a state or province should be used by more than one country,
you should make the subsequent name unique by adding to the name the
vertical line character ("|") followed some indication of the country.
When printing the customer's delivery instructions, or in other reports on
the customer, characters in the state or province name from the vertical
line character onwards will not be printed.
Below, once a set of fields has been selected for editing, is a rough
text-representation of this window:
State/province - N.S.W.
State/province name t N.S.W.
State in country t Australia
Country's ISD (NZ=64) a
Zip mask (Canada: ###-###) a ####
╔════════════════════════╗┌────────────────────────┐┌────────────────────────┐
║ OK ║│ DELETE ││ HELP │
╚════════════════════════╝└────────────────────────┘└────────────────────────┘
Enter or Modify the Towns/Suburbs/Cities
This is a "Maintenance Viewing Data" window that lists each of the towns or
suburbs. These are defined to assist in the entry of addresses of
customers, providing, not only the full town, suburb or city name, along
with the post (or "zip") code and STD code, but also the state's or
province's name, along with the country for that state or province, and
thereby the ISD code and the format of the post (or "zip") code for that
country.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Enter or modify the towns/suburbs/cities
Select Change Restrict Where Match Expand Insert First Last
Campbellfield |Victoria |3047 |3 ^
Girraween |N.S.W. |2145 █
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
V
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
Database: Towns and Suburbs
Town or suburb name Campbellfield
The "Set of Fields" includes the name of the town or suburb (a unique
"Name" field) the state or province (a "Symbolic Name" field) and
the post code (a "Post Code" field) and the STD code (a "Name" field). For
editing instructions for these types of fields, please refer to the
sections titled: "Name",
"Symbolic
Name", and "Post
Code and Post Code Mask".
If the name of a town or suburb should be used by more than one state or
province, you should make the subsequent name unique by adding to the name
the vertical line character ("|") followed some indication of the state or
province. When printing the customer's delivery instructions, or in other
reports on the customer, characters in the town or suburb name from the
vertical line character onwards will not be printed.
Below, once a set of fields has been selected for editing, is a rough
text-representation of this window:
Town or suburb - Campbellfield
Town or suburb name t Campbellfield
Town in state/province t Victoria
State in country t Australia
Country's ISD (NZ=64) a
Zip mask (Canada: ###-###) a ####
Town or suburb post code a 3047
Town STD (Melb=3) a 3
╔════════════════════════╗┌────────────────────────┐┌────────────────────────┐
║ OK ║│ DELETE ││ HELP │
╚════════════════════════╝└────────────────────────┘└────────────────────────┘
The STD code, along with the ISD code for the corresponding country is
provided to assist in the entry of the customer's phone number. For
editing instructions for this type of field, please refer to the section
titled: "Phone Number".
Enter or Modify the Customers
This is a "Maintenance Viewing Data" window that lists each of the
customers. These provide the customer's street address, town or suburb,
telephone and facsimile numbers and standard delivery instructions.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Enter or modify the customers
Select Change Restrict Where Match Expand Insert First Last
P & O Cold Storage |69 Mandoon Road |Girraween ^
W & D Engineering Pty Limited |25 Glenbarry Road |Campbellfiel█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
V
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
Database: Customers
Customer name P & O Cold Storage
The "Set of Fields" includes the customer's name (a unique "Name" field),
the street address (a "Name" field), the town or suburb (a "Symbolic Name"
field), the telephone and facsimile numbers (both "Phone Number" fields)
and the standard delivery instructions (a "Name" field). For editing
instructions for these types of fields, please refer to the sections
titled: "Name",
"Symbolic
Name", and "Phone
Number".
The standard delivery instructions will be printed followed by any order
specific instructions entered in the order specification.
Below, once a set of fields has been selected for editing, is a rough
text-representation of this window:
Customer - P & O Cold Storage
Customer name t P & O Cold Storage
Customer address t 69 Mandoon Road
Customer town or suburb t Girraween
Town in state/province t N.S.W.
State in country t Australia
Country's ISD (NZ=64) a
Zip mask (Canada: ###-###) a ####
Town or suburb post code a 2145
Town STD (Melb=3) a
Customer's phone number a 96362666
Customer's facsimile no. a 96882610
Customer's delivery notes s
╔════════════════════════╗┌────────────────────────┐┌────────────────────────┐
║ OK ║│ DELETE ││ HELP │
╚════════════════════════╝└────────────────────────┘└────────────────────────┘
Enter or Modify the Products
This is a "Maintenance Viewing Data" window that lists each of products for
the pick areas. In this case each product definition includes a catalogue
number, recording artist and the recording's title.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Enter or modify the products
Select Change Restrict Where Match Expand Insert First Last
A&M 393601-2 |Carpenters ^
A&M 393614-2 |Joan Baez █
A&M 540 728-2 |Phil Ochs █
A&M CD 4257 |Fairport Convention █
ABC COUNTRY/EMI 4796522 |_Miscellaneous █
ABC JAZZ/EMI 4796232 |James Morrison █
ABKCO 820 140-2 |Rolling Stones, The █
AHS 5-1 |Glenn Miller █
ALBERT 465396 2 |Easybeats, The █
ALTRAX 595 |Dave Swarbrick █
AMERICAN 9 43104-2 |Donovan █
ARIO 883 948|HYCD 200 128|Bert Jansch █
ARISTA ACD2-8634 |Grateful Dead █
ARISTA ARCD-8575 |Grateful Dead █
ARISTA ARCD-8643 |Yes █
ARISTA ARCD85-90126 |Anderson, Bruford, Wakeman, Howe █
ARISTA VPCD 7528 |Sky █
ARISTA/BMG 74321-13697-2 |David Bowie █
ARISTA/BMG 74321-17004-2 |David Bowie V
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
Database: Recordings
Item's catalogue number A&M 393601-2
The "Set of Fields" includes, in this instance the catalogue number (a
unique "Name" field) and the recording artist and recording's title (both
"Name" fields). For editing instructions for this type of field,
please refer to the section titled:
"Name".
Below, once a set of fields has been selected for editing, is a rough
text-representation of this window:
Recording - ARIO 883 948|HYCD 200 128
Item's catalogue number a ARIO 883 948|HYCD 200 128
Item's recording artist t Bert Jansch
Item's recording title t From the Outside
╔════════════════════════╗┌────────────────────────┐┌────────────────────────┐
║ OK ║│ DELETE ││ HELP │
╚════════════════════════╝└────────────────────────┘└────────────────────────┘
Enter or Modify Palletiser Alarms
This is a "Maintenance Viewing Data" window that lists each of the
palletiser alarms. These are defined to associate text with the alarms
raised.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Enter or modify palletiser alarms
Select Change Restrict Where Match Expand Insert First Last 1-nine
1|Open case flap ^
2|Infeed guide fault 1 4 █
3|Meter belt PE █
4|Turn peg PE █
5|Row entry PE █
6|Row gate A PE █
7|Row gate B PE █
8|Row gate C PE █
9|Row gate D PE █
10|Row gate E PE █
11|Row gate F PE █
12|Row sweep intrusion █
13|Row sweep failed █
14|Layer exit gate flt █
15|Layer side fault █
16|Layer transfer fail █
17|Layer VSD fault █
18|Apron side fault █
19|Apron end fault V
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
Database: Palletiser alarms
Palletiser alarm name Open case flap
The "Set of Fields" includes the palletiser alarm description (a unique
"Name" field) and the palletisers that share this alarm (a "Crane or
Palletiser Alarm" field). For editing instructions for these types of
fields, please refer to the sections titled:
"Name", and
"Crane
and Palletiser Alarms".
Below, once a set of fields has been selected for editing, is a rough
text-representation of this window:
Palletiser alarm - 2
Palletiser alarm name s Infeed guide fault
Palletiser alarms 1 4
╔════════════════════════╗┌────────────────────────┐┌────────────────────────┐
║ OK ║│ DELETE ││ HELP │
╚════════════════════════╝└────────────────────────┘└────────────────────────┘
Enter or Modify Palletiser Patterns
This is a "Maintenance Viewing Data" window that lists each of the
palletiser patterns. These are defined to direct the operation of the
palletiser and are also used by the Movement Controller to display the
palletiser status.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Enter or modify palletiser patterns
Select Restrict Change Match Expand Insert First Last Pattern rows View
6U2 |1| 8| 3| G ^
8S1 |1| 4| 3| G █
9D1 |2| 4| 3| G █
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
V
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
Database: Palletiser Patterns
Pattern name a 8S1
The "Set of Fields" includes the pattern name (a unique "Name" field), the
pattern infeed guide position, pallet alignment position, the pallet
overrun position, the default number of layers, the number of cases allowed
beyond the glue spray unit, the number of cases allowed beyond the metering
belt, the number of cases allowed beyond the turn peg and the compacting
pressures (all "Numeric" fields) and whether the pattern requires glue by
default (a "Character" field). For editing instructions for these types of
fields, please refer to the sections titled:
"Name",
"Numeric", and
"Character".
Below, once a set of fields has been selected for editing, is a rough
text-representation of this window:
Pattern - 8S1
Pattern name a 8S1
Pattern infeed guide <0-15> 2 1
Pattern no. of layers <0-99> 4
Max cases post glue <0-9> 1 2 2
Compress pressure 1 <0-100> 4 4 4
Pattern requires glue <G>a G
╔════════════════════════╗┌────────────────────────┐┌────────────────────────┐
║ OK ║│ DELETE ││ HELP │
╚════════════════════════╝└────────────────────────┘└────────────────────────┘
Edit Row Definition
After entering this data you will need to specify the row data for the odd
and even layers. To do this, first type "P" then enter "O" to edit the odd
layer or "E" to enter the even layer.
If you are modifying existing layers, a string of special characters
(resembling a row) at the top left of the window. These correspond to the
rows, commencing from the left for the first.
If the layer has yet to be defined you will need to press [INSERT] to
create a row, then edit the set of fields that will be presented. Whereas
if you desire only to modify existing rows, move the cursor along the
string to the row of interest and press [ENTER].
This "Set of Fields" includes the turn peg pattern (a "Turn Peg Pattern"
field), the number of cases before each row gate is to rise and which layer
gate if any is to be used (both "Numeric" fields) and whether the end stop
is to be used (a "Character" field). For editing instructions for these
types of fields, please refer to the sections titled:
"Turn
Peg Pattern", "Numeric", and
"Character".
Below, once some rows have been defined, is a rough text-representation of
this window:
Odd or Even layer <O/E>a O
Row turn-peg pattern 3TT_ 1
N cases beyond gate A <0-15> 3 3 3 3 3 3
Row requires End stop <E>a
Row's layer gate <0-4>
■■■
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
Repeat the above procedure for each row of the layer, then type [ESCAPE] to
exit to return for the other layer.
Viewing Patterns
Once both layers have been specified, and you have exited from the row
definition, you may observe the pattern you have created by typing "V",
then entering the number of the palletiser you wish to view it with and the
product.
The window will appear as shown overleaf:
This window shows eight views of the pattern, four for the odd layer and
four for the even layer. Of each four views, the first shows the cartons
of each row in the row form area, the next after sweeping into the layer
form area, the next after the side compress in the layer form area and the
last after the side and end compress in the apron area.
Any one of these views can be highlighted, using the cursor control keys to
move the highlight. The view of the highlighted view may be zoomed in by
typing "Z".
The highlight can be shifted by clicking on the desired view, while a view
may be zoomed by double clicking on it.
The window will appear as shown overleaf:
While zoomed in, the cursor control keys may be used to change the view to
be zoomed. By using the [LEFT] and [RIGHT] keys you can simulate an
animation. The left and right mouse buttons may be used in place of the
[LEFT] and [RIGHT] keys, with the added feature that left or right clicking
past the end wraps you around to the first image. Be careful not to double
click, or you will be returned to window showing all eight views.
To return to the non-zoomed mode, type "Z" a second time. You can also
double click within the window.
To exit from viewing the patterns, type [ESCAPE].
Applying the Patterns
After defining a pattern it is necessary to enter this pattern against a
palletiser before that pattern can be used by the given palletiser. Refer
to the section titled:
"Enter
or Modify the Palletisers".
It is necessary to write to the PLC after making changes to the following
"Specific Instructions" windows:
Once the palletiser has the pattern registered with it, refer to the
section titled:
"Writing
Pattern Data".
The palletiser status and commands windows may be called up from the
Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor diagram by zooming into a related conveyor
position. This correspondence between these windows and the conveyor
positions needs to be specified; to do this refer to the section titled:
"Conveyors
from which to Zoom".
As you exit this window, you will be asked whether you wish to write the
pattern information to the palletisers. To do so, type [F1].
Enter or Modify Palletiser Product Data
This is a "Maintenance Viewing Data" window that lists each of the products
to be palletised. These are defined to associate barcodes with the
products, and the products with the patterns and to set product specific
data for the palletising pattern.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Enter or modify palletiser product data
Select Change Restrict Where Match Expand Insert First Last
1234|1234 |8S1 | 2| 2| 8| .357| .443| .219| 1| 1| 1|N|1 ^
1235|1235 |9D1 | 1| 1| 4| .357| .396| .434| 2| 2| 2|N|1 █
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
V
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
Database: Palletiser product data
Product number <0-9999> 1234
The "Set of Fields" includes the product code (a unique "Numeric" field),
the barcode (a "Name" field), the pattern (a "Symbolic Name" field), the
infeed guide position, the pallet alignment position, the pallet overrun,
the number of layers in the pattern, the dimensions of the cartons and the
pressures for the compressing of the load in the layer form (all "Numeric"
fields) and apron areas and whether the product requires gluing (a
"Character" field). For editing instructions for these types of
fields, please refer to the sections titled:
"Name",
"Symbolic
Name", "Numeric", and
"Character".
Below, once a set of fields has been selected for editing, is a rough
text-representation of this window:
Product - 1234
Product number <0-9999> 1234
Product barcode a 1234 8S1
Product infeed guide <0-15> 2 2
Product no. of layers <0-99> 8
Product case width <0.000-9> .357 .443 .219
Compress pressure 1 <0-15> 1 1 1
Product requires glue <N/G>a N 1
╔════════════════════════╗┌────────────────────────┐┌────────────────────────┐
║ OK ║│ DELETE ││ HELP │
╚════════════════════════╝└────────────────────────┘└────────────────────────┘
Values left at zero or blank will be replaced by the values specified for
the pattern.
It is necessary to write to the PLC after making changes to the following
"Specific Instructions" windows:
The palletiser status and commands windows may be called up from the
Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor diagram by zooming into a related conveyor
position. This correspondence between these windows and the conveyor
positions needs to be specified; to do this refer to the section titled:
"Conveyors
from which to Zoom".
As you exit this window, you will be asked whether you wish to write the
pattern information to the palletisers. To do so, type [F1].
Enter or Modify Machine States
A "machine" is a mechanism that requires more status monitoring than is
afforded by the definition of devices within the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor
System and has not had explicit software developed for it (as in the case
of cranes and palletisers).
To accommodate these devices, first a machine definition needs to be
entered, which gives the machine a name, tells the software on which PLC it
is located and in which PLC data file the status and alarms are presented.
Secondly, the bits within the status, alarm, and control words need to be
described so that the status and alarms may be presented meaningfully.
This is a "Maintenance Viewing Data" window that lists each of the states
for each machine.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Enter or modify machine states
Select Change Restrict Where Match Expand Insert First Last 1-nine
1.00 |Rise-fall to rise |Unload lift ^
1.01 |Rise-fall up |Unload lift █
1.02 |Rise_fall down |Unload lift █
1.03 |Fingers to close |Unload fingers █
1.04 |Fingers closed |Unload fingers █
1.05 |Finger grippers open|Unload fingers █
1.06 |Lift stop go down |Unload sweep area █
1.07 |Lift plate stop up |Unload sweep area █
1.08 |Lift plate stop down|Unload sweep area █
1.09 |Lift plate stop made|Unload sweep area █
1.10 |Lift plate raise |Unload lift █
1.11 |Lift plate lower |Unload lift █
1.12 |Lift plate fully up |Unload lift █
1.13 |Lift plate down |Unload lift █
1.14 |Acc'n PE blocked |Unload lift █
1.15 |Cans above sweep |Unload sweep area █
1.16 |Sweep run forward |Unload sweep area █
1.17 |Sweep run reverse |Unload sweep area █
1.18 |Sweep carriage back |Unload sweep area V
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
Database: Machine states
Machine state description s Rise-fall to rise
At the start of each line is the record number expressed as a machine
number followed by a period (full-stop, dot or ".") followed by the bit
number. This is followed by the "set of fields".
The "Set of Fields" includes the descriptions for the status bits for this
bit of this machine (a unique "Name" field), and the window area where the
status will be presented graphically (a "Symbolic Name" field) a sequence
number to assist in grouping and ordering inputs for graphical presentation
(a "Numeric" field), and whether the input is a word (16 bits) rather than
a single bit (a "Character" field). For editing instructions for these
types of fields, please refer to the sections titled:
"Name",
"Symbolic
Name", "Numeric", and
"Character".
Below, once a set of fields has been selected for editing, is a rough
text-representation of this window:
Machine input - 1.00
Machine state description s Rise-fall to rise
Screen area for input s Unload lift
Sequence (0=first) <0-255>
Machine state 16 bits <W>a
╔════════════════════════╗┌────────────────────────┐┌────────────────────────┐
║ OK ║│ DELETE ││ HELP │
╚════════════════════════╝└────────────────────────┘└────────────────────────┘
Enter or Modify Machine Alarms
A "machine" is a mechanism that requires more status monitoring than is
afforded by the definition of devices within the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor
System and has not had explicit software developed for it (as in the case
of cranes and palletisers).
To accommodate these devices, first a machine definition needs to be
entered, which gives the machine a name, tells the software on which PLC it
is located and in which PLC data file the status and alarms are presented.
Secondly, the bits within the status, alarm, and control words need to be
described so that the status and alarms may be presented meaningfully.
This is a "Maintenance Viewing Data" window that lists each of the alarms
for each machine.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Enter or modify machine alarms
Select Change Restrict Where Match Expand Insert First Last 1-nine
1.00 |No 24VDC ^
1.01 |Front sweep up/down █
1.02 |Fingers open/close █
1.03 |MCR is off █
1.04 |Sweep fwd/back fault █
1.05 |Light curtain blockd █
1.06 |Motor overload █
1.07 |Emergency stop █
1.08 |Access gate open █
1.09 |Lift plate up/down █
1.10 |Rise-fall up/down █
1.11 |Speed controller flt █
1.12 |Lift stop up/down █
1.13 |Cans above sweep flt █
1.14 |Lift stop obstructed █
1.15 |Motor overload █
1.16 | █
1.17 | █
1.18 | V
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
Database: Machine alarms
Machine alarm description s No 24VDC
At the start of each line is the record number expressed as a machine
number followed by a period (full-stop, dot or ".") followed by the bit
number. This is followed by the "set of fields".
The "Set of Fields" includes only the description for the alarm bit for
this bit of this machine (both unique "Name" fields). For editing
instructions for this type of field, please refer to the section titled:
"Name".
Below, once a set of fields has been selected for editing, is a rough
text-representation of this window:
Machine alarm - 1.00
Machine alarm description s No 24VDC
╔════════════════════════╗┌────────────────────────┐┌────────────────────────┐
║ OK ║│ DELETE ││ HELP │
╚════════════════════════╝└────────────────────────┘└────────────────────────┘
Enter or Modify Machine Controls
A "machine" is a mechanism that requires more status monitoring than is
afforded by the definition of devices within the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor
System and has not had explicit software developed for it (as in the case
of cranes and palletisers).
To accommodate these devices, first a machine definition needs to be
entered, which gives the machine a name, tells the software on which PLC it
is located and in which PLC data file the status and alarms are presented.
Secondly, the bits within the status, alarm, and control words need to be
described so that the status and alarms may be presented meaningfully.
This is a "Maintenance Viewing Data" window that lists each of the controls
for each machine.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Enter or modify machine controls
Select Change Restrict Where Match Expand Insert First Last 1-nine
1.00 |Extend Skates |EXTEND |SKATES ^
1.01 |Retract Skates RETRACT SKATES █
1.02 |Inflate Skates INFLATE PADS █
1.03 |Deflate Skates DEFLATE PADS █
1.04 |Spare control █
1.05 |Spare control █
1.06 |Supply truck details SUPPLY DETAILS █
1.07 |Start Unloading GET FR. TRUCK █
1.08 |Induct or reject CONFIRM/ REJECT █
1.09 |Start Loading PUT IN TRUCK █
1.10 |Reels On Dock TRUCK EMPTIED █
1.11 |Spare control █
1.12 |Dock Set Emergency UNSAFE DOCK █
1.13 |Dock Set Override HELD IN POSIT'N █
1.14 |Dock Set Automatic AUTO MODE █
1.15 |Dock Set Manual MANUAL MODE █
1.16 |Left Up LEFT UP █
1.17 |All Down DOWN BOTH █
1.18 |Right Up RIGHT UP V
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
Database: Machine outputs
Machine output description s Extend Skates
At the start of each line is the record number expressed as a machine
number followed by a period (full-stop, dot or ".") followed by the bit
number. This is followed by the "set of fields".
The "Set of Fields" includes the description for the control bit for this
bit of this machine (a unique "Name" fields), the text for the two lines to
be presented on the push button (both "Name" fields), and whether the push
button will be momentary action (a "Character" field). The term
"momentary" implies that you will need to keep your finger on the
button for it to remain active, rather than have it toggle between states
on successive touches. For editing instructions for these types of fields,
please refer to the sections titled:
"Name", and
"Character".
Below, once a set of fields has been selected for editing, is a rough
text-representation of this window:
Machine output - 1.00
Machine output description s Extend Skates
Machine control (line 1)a EXTEND
Machine control (line 2)a SKATES
Machine monentary control<M>
╔════════════════════════╗┌────────────────────────┐┌────────────────────────┐
║ OK ║│ DELETE ││ HELP │
╚════════════════════════╝└────────────────────────┘└────────────────────────┘
Maintenance
This menu provides access to the windows required to maintain the
configuration, live and historic data.
Below is a rough text-representation of this menu:
Movement Controller (C) Copyright 1998 to 2009 Woodgrove Digital Engineering
File View
┌─-─────────────────────┐
│New User │
│Operations >│
│Reports >│
│Communication reports >│
│Configuration >│ ┌─-───────────────────────────────────┐
│Maintenance███████████>│ │Set network definition data │
│Definition >│ │Set the time and date │
│Special Functions >│ │Modify list of users │
│Exit │ │Archive list of events to floppy disc│
└─-─────────────────────┘ │Archive load movements to floppy disc│
│Backup database to floppy disc │
│Restore database from floppy disc │
└─-───────────────────────────────────┘
The "Archive ...", "Backup ...", and "Restore ..." functions are only
available at the main computer. When using these functions, the computer
will make a sound while it is expecting you to service the disc drive.
Set Network Definition Data
This screen allows you to alter certain configuration variables in a
straight-forward manner:
find the line describing the quantity you wish to change,
double click on this line, and,
when the dialogue window opens, enter the new value.
Full Description of this Window
This is a very limited version of the "Maintenance Viewing Data" window
that lists certain records from the "Configuration Data" database. The
[LEFT] and [RIGHT] keys are still effective for setting restrictions
(should you want to) however their action is not visible on the window and
has no effect on the operation of the "C" key used to change the contents
of a field. Instead, the "C" key always refers to the setting of the
miscellaneous data and never its description. Also typing the "S", [ENTER]
or [RETURN] key has the same effect as typing "C". You may also double
click the line.
The "Configuration Data" database includes the "Miscellaneous Name" field
(a unique "Name" field), "Miscellaneous Data" field (a "Miscellaneous Data"
field) and the "Initial/Run/Network <I/R/N>a" field (a "Character" field).
For editing instructions for these types of fields, please refer to the
sections titled: "Name",
"Character",
and "Miscellaneous
Data".
Only those records of the "Configuration Data" with the
"Initial/Run/Network <I/R/N>a" field set to "N" will be included on
this window. Please refer to the section titled:
"Configuration
Data". You should also refer to that section of the manual for more
information about the meaning of the records presented here.
The miscellaneous data field is also coloured to highlight those fields not
containing 0 and therefore likely to be in the abnormal state.
The records from the "Configuration Data" database chosen for inclusion on
this window are those records that provide the network definitions required
by the Movement Controller to enable it to communicate with the
host_computer as well as the standby computer.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Network definition
Select Change Restrict Where Match Expand Insert First Last 1-nine
TCP/IP server host (1.2.3.4) | 165.69.72.10 ^
TCP/IP local host (1.2.3.5) | 165.69.72.22 █
FTP control port (eg. 0,21) | 0,21 █
FTP data port (eg. 0,20) | 0,20 █
Standby link port (eg.0,128) | 0,128 █
FTP user name a | REEL █
FTP password a | █
FTP account a | █
FTP user name for PCS use a | PCSCOM █
FTP password for PCS use a | █
FTP account for PCS use a | █
FTP run command after STOR a | █
FTP report interval (secs) | 10 █
FTP max action reports/file | 10 █
FTP max conveyr reports/file | 10 █
FTP max racking reports/file | 10 █
FTP max barcode reports/file | 10 █
FTP max emula'n reports/file | 10 █
FTP max reply reports/file | 10 V
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
Database: Configuration Data
TCP/IP server host (1.2.3.4) 165.69.72.10
The Variables Intended to be Presented
As was described in the section titled:
"Full
Description of this Window", which variables are included in this window may
be altered by yourself, from the set of variables contained in the
"Configuration Data" record set.
The variables that are included in this window by default are described in
the following sub-sections.
TCP-IP Addresses
The TCP/IP server and local hosts are both "TCP-IP Host" fields. The
"TCP/IP local host" is the IP address of the Movement Controller, and
is used in constructing the FTP PORT command. The "TCP/IP server host" is
used to provide the address of the host_computer, with which it is to
exchange files.
For information on the communications with the host_computer, please
refer to the section of the TECHNICAL MANUAL titled:
"Host
Computer System".
The TCP/IP server host IP address may be overridden, using a command line
switch when the main program is run, with an alternate IP address or a
domain name. For information on overriding the server host IP address,
please refer to the section of the TECHNICAL MANUAL titled:
"Server
IP Address".
For instructions on editing "TCP-IP Host" fields, please refer to the
section titled "Entering
Information", and its subsection:
"TCP-IP
Host".
TCP-IP Ports
TCP-IP ports are used for the operation of FTP ("FTP control port" and "FTP
data port), the remote terminal interface to the Movement Controller ("R.T.
control port" and "R.T. data port"), a link to a standby computer ("Standby
link port"), on which a copy of the database is kept, and, sometimes, for
custom purposes ("Custom control" and "Custom data port"). These port
values are to be specified the corresponding "TCP-IP port" field.
The "FTP control port" and the "FTP data port" specify the control and data
ports used for FTP. The two comma separated values can range from 0 to
255. The data port used by the server is determined by the
host_computer. The data port used by the client is changed for each
file, by incrementing the offset from "4,0" to "5,0" to ... "255,0" then
back to "4,0", and adding that to the value specified here, "0,20". We
start and wrap to "4,0" because of experience with computers refusing to
allow connections with lower values than the resulting "4,20".
The "R.T. control port" and "R.T. data port" specify the control and data
ports used for implementing a remote operator interface. The two comma
separated values can range from 0 to 255. The remote terminal data port
number must be one greater than the remote terminal control port. The
remote terminal control port must be specified in the command line when
running the "connect" program, to which an operator interface on a remote
computer must communicate.
Typically, batch files would be used to run the connect.exe programs that
allow operator interfaces on remote computers to access the main program
(main.exe). These batch files would contain the line:
connect 192.158.10.69 129
where "192.158.10.69" is the IP address of the main computer, and "129" is
the control port used. The connect program will assume that its data port
is one greater than its control port. If you specify a control port such
as "4,129", you will need to multiply the first number by 256, then add it
to the second to specify the control port, which, in this case, would be
"1153".
The "Custom control" and "Custom data port" specify the control and data
ports used for other uses of the TCP-IP communications. The two comma
separated values can range from 0 to 255.
The "Standby link port" specifies the port to be used when securing the
database to a dedicated standby computer.
For instructions on editing "TCP-IP Port" fields, please refer to the
section titled "Entering
Information", and its subsection:
"TCP-IP
Port".
All these ports are discussed in greater detail in the section titled:
"Configuration
Data".
FTP User Text Fields
When using FTP, user names, passwords, and, sometimes, account names, need
to be specified for use by both the Movement Controller when connecting to
the host_computer and vice-versa. These are to be typed into the
corresponding "Name" fields.
The passwords are not displayed until the cursor is moved into the field.
It is removed from window immediately after the cursor is moved out of the
field.
For editing instructions for these types of fields, please refer to the
sections titled: "Entering
Information", and its subsection:
"Name".
Directories for Host Communications
Communications with the host_computer may be conducted by exchanging
files by placing them in specific directories.
The variables used to hold these directory names are:
Path for file transfers (Tfr_D)
Path for finished transfer (TfrDD)
Path for transfer failures (TfrDE)
Path for XML reports (RptDX)
Path for other reports (Rpt_D)
The specific use of these variables is discussed in greater detail in the
section titled:
"Configuration
Data". The records that will interest you will be those described as
"Tfr_D:", "TfrDD:", "TfrDE:", "RptDX:", and "Rpt_D:". The
correspondence between these records and the variables, as described in
this window, is shown in the above list.
If either of the variables, "TCP/IP server host (1.2.3.4)" or "TCP/IP
server latter numbers", is set and the variable, "FTP L USER:", is also
set, the "Rpt" directory variables will be ignored. These two "TCP/IP
server" variables are presented as a single value in the "Set Network
Definition Data window (as described in the section titled:
"Set
Network Definition Data", and, in particular, its subsection titled:
"TCP-IP
Addresses".
Blanking both of the variables, "TCP/IP server host (1.2.3.4)" and "TCP/IP
server latter numbers", or the one variable, "FTP L USER:", will allow you
to switch over to reporting via the "Rpt" directories. Should those
variables be set, reporting via the "Rpt" directories will be disabled.
Set Current Time and Date
This window provides a "Set of Fields" comprising two data. The first, a
"Symbolic Name" field, indicates "Eastern Standard" or "Daylight
Saving", while the second, a "Current Time" field, contains the current
time and date.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Set current time and date
Time Standard Eastern Standard
Current Time 16:28:26 19-JAN-99
╔════════════════════════╗┌────────────────────────┐┌────────────────────────┐
║ OK ║│ DELETE ││ HELP │
╚════════════════════════╝└────────────────────────┘└────────────────────────┘
Upon entry into the window, the cursor will be located in the time standard
field. The time standard may be set to either "Eastern Standard" or
"Daylight Savings". When the time standard is changed, the time is
adjusted by one hour in the appropriate direction.
Modify List of Users
This is a "Maintenance Viewing Data" window that lists each of the users.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Modify list of users
Select Change Restrict Where Match Expand Insert First Last 1-nine
Gregory Wood | |3 ^
Mike Dally | |3 █
Operator 1 | |1 █
Operator 2 | |2 █
Roger Bayly | |3 █
Wendy | |3 █
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
V
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
Database: Users
User name Gregory Wood
The "Set of Fields" includes the user name (a unique "Name" field), the
password (a "Password" field) the privilege level (a "Numeric" field), and,
for some sites, whether you would prefer to use the more DOS-like interface
and whether you are a "generic" user (both "Character" fields). For
editing instructions for these types of fields, please refer to the
sections titled: "Name",
"Password",
"Numeric", and
"Character".
For details on the use of the user names, passwords and privilege levels,
refer to the section titled: "Log Off".
The more DOS-like interface provides a window based menu system, rather
than the horizontal menu bar, and allows the user to open only one window
at a time. That window is then sized to fill the display. Because there
is only one window open at a time, it saves the confusion when the operator
has not noticed which window currently has focus and types in keys intended
for another window.
A user that is flagged as "Generic", will not be allowed to perform certain
operations, without first identifying himself specifically, and entering
his password. This allows a terminal to be logged on generically, so that
a number of people may have access to it, but still provide extra security
for certain operations.
Archive List of Events to Floppy Disc
This window allows you to archive the event log file to a floppy disc.
This floppy will contain all event logs still in the log file, which have
not yet been backed up. When a log file approaches the full level, a
warning appears on the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyors diagram. Refer to the
section titled:
"Heavy-Unit-Load
Conveyors".
You will be instructed to install a blank, formatted disc in Drive A and
then to type [F1]. Should you decide at this stage not to proceed, type
[ESCAPE] to return to the menu. Otherwise, install the blank disc, then
type [F1] as instructed.
If the file overflows the disc you will be instructed to install a second
blank disc, and so forth.
When the archive is complete, an appropriate message will be displayed and
you should then remove and store the archive disc, then type [ESCAPE] to
return to the menu.
The filename of the file written to the archive disc is composed of six
digits, representing the date in a straight-forward manner. You may,
contrary to the above instructions, use a disc that has been previously
used to archive this file (and so is not blank), as the first disc,
provided that the disc was last used on another day. When the file
overflows, a blank disc should then be used.
This procedure provides for efficient use of discs, leaving no wasted
space.
The first two bytes of the file on the archive disc contain the sequence
number, which is 0x0000 for the first disc, and increments for each
subsequent disc. The remainder of the file contains records in the same
form as they are printed (expanded from the form on the hard disc).
Archive Load Movements to Floppy Disc
This window allows you to archive the load movements file to a floppy disc.
This floppy will contain all load movements still in the log file, which
have not yet been backed up. When a log file approaches the full level, a
warning appears on the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyors diagram. Refer to the
section titled:
"Heavy-Unit-Load
Conveyors".
You will be instructed to install a blank, formatted disc in Drive A and
then to type [F1]. Should you decide at this stage not to proceed, type
[ESCAPE] to return to the menu. Otherwise, install the blank disc, then
type [F1] as instructed.
If the file overflows the disc you will be instructed to install a second
blank disc, and so forth.
When the archive is complete, an appropriate message will be displayed and
you should then remove and store the archive disc, then type [ESCAPE] to
return to the menu.
The filename of the file written to the archive disc is composed of six
digits, representing the date in a straight-forward manner. You may,
contrary to the above instructions, use a disc that has been previously
used to archive this file (and so is not blank), as the first disc,
provided that the disc was last used on another day. When the file
overflows, a blank disc should then be used.
This procedure provides for efficient use of discs, leaving no wasted
space.
The first two bytes of the file on the archive disc contain the sequence
number, which is 0x0000 for the first disc, and increments for each
subsequent disc. The remainder of the file contains records in the same
form as they are printed (expanded from the form on the hard disc).
Backup Database to Floppy
This window allows you to backup the database file to a floppy disc. The
database is initially loaded from the hard disc, and kept in memory. As
alterations are made to the database they are written away to the hard
disc, however it is advisable to maintain a backup of the database on a
floppy disc in case the hard disc becomes damaged.
Please note that the contents of "memo" files will not be backed up - only
the first line, which is contained within the database. Please refer to
the section titled: "Memo",
You will be instructed to install a blank, formatted disc in Drive A and
then to type [F1]. Should you decide at this stage not to proceed, type
[ESCAPE] to return to the menu. Otherwise, install the blank disc, then
type [F1] as instructed.
When the backup is complete, an appropriate message will be displayed and
you should then remove and store the backup disc, then type [ESCAPE] to
return to the menu. A message will then be printed confirming the backup
took place.
Restore Database from Floppy
This window allows you to replace the database read from the hard disc with
that on a backed-up disc.
You will be instructed to install a disc, containing the replacement
database, in Drive A and then to type [F2]. Should you decide at this
stage not to proceed, type [ESCAPE] to return to the menu. Otherwise,
install the backed-up disc, then type [F2] as instructed.
When the loading is complete, an appropriate message will be displayed and
you should then remove and store the backup disc, then type [ESCAPE] to
return to the menu.
System Definition
This menu provides access to windows designed for the site definition.
Below is a rough text-representation of this menu:
Movement Controller (C) Copyright 1998 to 2009 Woodgrove Digital Engineering
File View
┌─-─────────────────────┐
│New User │
│Operations >│
│Reports >│
│Communication reports >│
│Configuration >│
│Maintenance >│ ┌─-───────────────────────────────────────┐
│Definition████████████>│ │Initial software configuration │
│Special Functions >│ │Enter or modify the device types │
│Exit │ │Fast definition of conveyors │
└─-─────────────────────┘ │Enter or modify the conveyors │
│Enter or modify the transfers │
│Enter or modify explicit P.E. placements │
│Enter or modify explicit device alarm │
│Create, edit, compile and execute │
│Define the crane and rack arrangement │
│Enter or modify the carton conveyors │
│Enter or modify the palletisers │
│Enter or modify machine definition │
└─-───────────────────────────────────────┘
Use of these windows should be restricted to experienced personnel.
Initial Software Configuration
This screen allows you to alter certain configuration variables in a
straight-forward manner:
find the line describing the quantity you wish to change,
double click on this line, and,
when the dialogue window opens, enter the new value.
Full Description of this Window
This is a very limited version of the "Maintenance Viewing Data" window
that lists certain records from the "Configuration Data" database. The
[LEFT] and [RIGHT] keys are still effective for setting restrictions
(should you want to) however their action is not visible on the window and
has no effect on the operation of the "C" key used to change the contents
of a field. Instead, the "C" key always refers to the setting of the
miscellaneous data and never its description. Also typing the "S", [ENTER]
or [RETURN] key has the same effect as typing "C". You may also double
click the line.
The "Configuration Data" database includes the "Miscellaneous Name" field
(a unique "Name" field), "Miscellaneous Data" field (a "Miscellaneous Data"
field) and the "Initial/Run/Network <I/R/N>a" field (a "Character" field).
For editing instructions for these types of fields, please refer to the
sections titled: "Name",
"Character",
and "Miscellaneous
Data".
Only those records of the "Configuration Data" with the
"Initial/Run/Network <I/R/N>a" field set to "I" will be included on
this window. Please refer to the section titled:
"Configuration
Data". You should also refer to that section of the manual for more
information about the meaning of the records presented here.
The miscellaneous data field is also coloured to highlight those fields not
containing 0 and therefore likely to be in the abnormal state.
The records from the "Configuration Data" database chosen for inclusion on
this window are those records that provide the most basic system definition
options.
Some of the changes made here will not come into effect until the software
is restarted.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Initial software configuration
Select Change Restrict Where Match Expand Insert First Last 1-nine
Run fr clock interrupt <N/C> | N ^
Emulate period 10msec <1-99> | ## █
Digicom or ComXi <D/C> | D █
KTXD ch 1 DH+ or 485 <D/4> | D █
Single step system build <S> | █
Load square Circle/Big <C/B> | █
Rise-fall device type t | Rise Fall █
Turn-table device type t | Turntable █
Elevator device type t | Elevator █
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
V
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
Database: Configuration Data
Run fr clock interrupt <N/C> N
The Variables Intended to be Presented
As was described in the section titled:
"Full
Description of this Window", which variables are included in this window may
be altered by yourself, from the set of variables contained in the
"Configuration Data" record set.
The variables that are included in this window by default are described in
the following sub-sections.
Selection of Communications Boards
There are two styles of asynchronous serial communications boards used.
The "ComXi" board has certain protocols down-loaded to it at system
start-up and the interface to it is therefore very different to the
interface to more standard communications boards.
If we are using a KTxD card, channel 1 may be used for Data Highway plus
(DH+) or DH-485 communications.
Presentation of Loads
Heavy-unit loads can be displayed as squares (representing pallets of
cartons) or as circles to represent reels, coils or baskets. If
representing reels, coils, or baskets you can opt for a larger
representation of the reel, however, this results in decreased visibility
of the conveyor state beneath the load. Enter a [SPACE] if you require a
square load, a "C" for the regular circular load, or a "B" for the larger
circular load.
Defining the Conveyor System
When we are developing the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyors diagram, there is the
option to step through it, conveyor by conveyor as it is built. This is
handy for debugging.
There are three intrinsic devices to the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor Systems.
These are the rise-fall conveyors, the turntables and the elevators. Their
treatment is partially hard coded and partially customisable via the
configuration of the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor devices window. Here these
intrinsic devices are related to the customisable device definitions.
When you come to modify (or create) the definitions of these devices, the
rise-fall device must be given the type code "RF", the turntable "T" and
the elevator "E". You will also need to supply the names for the macros
for the conveyor interlock, device control and device emulation for each of
these. You will then need to enter details all alarms, outputs (including
push-button specifications) and inputs. You should not enter any input
conditions. Refer to the section titled:
"Enter
or Modify Device Types".
Delay Between Crane Test Cycles
When you are exercising the crane, using the "Run Test Cycles" command,
this can result in causing its drives to overload, as in normal operation,
for which they are designed, there is usually a period of rest between
journeys in order to access the load. If this is a problem, you can use
the variable, "Crane test cycle delay", to specify the number of seconds
the crane should be rested between test cycles.
Defining the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System
The definition of the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System is achieved using the
following windows:
Enter or Modify Device Types
Fast Definition of Conveyor System
Enter or Modify the Conveyors
Enter or Modify the Transfers
Create, Edit, Compile and Execute
The object is to describe the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System sufficiently
accurately to allow the generation of PLC software for its control and
monitoring and graphics for its operator interface.
The first stage of the generation of the PLC code is to create source code,
which is to be compiled into a form that may be imported into the PLC
programming software or, for the purposes of emulation, imported into this
software.
The creation of the PLC code involves combining standard hand-written
source code, application-specific hand-written source code and
application-specific software-written source code based on tables of data
entered to describe the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System.
The graphical presentation of the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System is mostly
based on the same tables describing the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System
itself, combining hard-coded conveyor representations with configurable
representations of other devices.
PLC Source code
It is conceivable that an application can be created without explicitly
writing any PLC source code. However, you are most likely to need to add
device macros to the "Devices.Mac" file to accommodate any new device
types, add logic to the main module to handle system startup and add logic
to "Traffic1.Sbr" to arbitrate between competing transfers - we refer to
this as the "high level control of transfers".
This section introduces you to the structure of the modules that are used
to create the heavy unit load conveyor PLC program. For the detailed
programming instructions, refer to the section titled:
"Syntax
of the PLC Source Code".
The PLC source code files normally reside in the working directory,
however, you may also specify upto three other directories, in which the
files may be placed. These other directories will only be searched if the
file is not found in the working directory. These directories are
specified in the "Configuration Data" records, titled "Compile 1", "Compile
2", and "Compile 3". Please refer to the section titled:
"Configuration
Data".
The PLC source code consists of a main module, "POCOLDME.boo", which will
typically contain a mixture of standard and non-standard code, and will
"include" the following modules:
#Include Devices.Mac
STANDARD Contains the macro definition for the
various types of devices about the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System. This
file should be modified to add macros as new device types are defined.
#Include Configur.Mac
SOFTWARE-WRITTEN This file defines the offsets for
each conveyor within the conveyor data files, the transfers within the
transfer data files, the devices within the device data files and the
alarms within the alarm data files.
It also defines the number of loads on each conveyor, which photocells are
fitted and definition of other miscellaneous constants and the declaration
of various data units.
It's major job however is the declaration of the data files for the
conveyors, transfers, alarms and devices, along with calls to the device
declaration macros contained within the "Devices.Mac" file for the
declaration of the miscellaneous data units required for the devices.
#Include Conveyor.Mac
SOFTWARE-WRITTEN This sets the contents of a data
file, created by "Configur.Mac" at the file number specified in the system
definition. All other files created by "Configur.Mac" number from after
this one.
This data file contains the file numbers and other information to enable
the Movement Controller to find the data it needs for the control and
monitoring of the PLC. The first word in this file is the length of the
file, allowing the Movement Controller to continue to work with PLC
software created from various versions of the generating software.
#Include RTransfr.Mac
STANDARD This file contains the macro definitions
used by the software-written subroutines. This approach allows a greater
level of flexibility in what is finally produced from the software-written
subroutines. This file can include non-standard code that will come into
effect for nominated transfers.
This file includes extensive documentation of its major macro definitions,
"RunTransfer" and "RunIndex". These macros are invoked from the
series of software-written subroutines, "M___M___.Sbr", which are all
called from the software-written subroutine, "Transfrs.Sbr".
The other macro definitions are "EmulateTransfer", "EmulateIndex", and
"Conveyor". The macros, "EmulateTransfer", and "EmulateIndex", are
invoked from the software-written subroutine "Emulate.Sbr", while
"Conveyor" is invoked from the standard subroutine "Control2".
#Include Presets.Mac
NON-STANDARD This file contains the settings of the
transfer watchdog timers. This module is optional and is usually only
provided once the tuning of the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System has been
performed, providing the results of this tuning for future generations of
the PLC code.
The main module, "POCOLDME.boo", will also include calls to the major
subroutine modules. The recommended sequence of calling the major
subroutines is:
FirstScan.JSR.Initiali;
!RunMode&&!TestMode&&ProgMode.JSR.Emulate; \ One or other of
(RunMode||TestMode||!ProgMode).JSR.Inputs; / these only.
.JSR.Control1;
.JSR.Traffic1;
.JSR.Transfrs;
.JSR.Traffic2;
.JSR.Control2;
.JSR.Traffic3;
.JSR.Interloc;
.JSR.Control3;
.JSR.Outputs;
Where "FirstScan" is the PLC flag indicating that this is the first proper
scan of the program since the software has started, "RunMode" is the PLC
flag indicating that the PLC is in run mode, "TestMode" is the PLC flag
indicating that the PLC is in test mode and "ProgMode" is the PLC flag
indicating that the PLC is in program mode.
The program can not be executed within the PLC unless the PLC is in either
run or test mode so "Emulate" will never be called from within the PLC.
Conversely, when the program is executing within the Movement Controller in
simulation, the "ProgMode" bit will always be set, so "Emulate" will be
called rather than "Inputs".
The function of the PLC source code files are:
project_name.boo
STANDARD This file specifies the type of PLC used,
certain compiler options, global flag settings to control the compilation
of subsequent code and modules, definition of constants, declaration of
miscellaneous data units, inclusion of macro definition files, definition
of photocell overrun macros, calls to the read the inputs or to simulate
the inputs, various overhead code and calls to the major software-written
and hand written modules, and finally the call to the module to set the
outputs.
INITIALI.SBR
STANDARD This subroutine sets to zero various data files, sets
other data units to preset values, calls the software written subroutine
"SetData.Sbr" to set the bulk of the preset values. After this call
will typically be included some non-standard software to flag certain
conveyors as supporting simultaneous transfers.
SETDATA.SBR
SOFTWARE-WRITTEN Each conveyor position is allocated six
photocells. This subroutine flags which of these photocells are actually
implemented. It then sets the flags to indicate whether each conveyor is
part-taking in a transfer as a source or destination. This information can
become compromised if the PLC scan is interrupted.
INPUTS.SBR
SOFTWARE-WRITTEN The existence of the bulk of the inputs is
known to the software from information in the tables describing the
Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System. The software generates a dummy input
definition file, "POCOLDME.AIN", which is to be edited (during the
definition phase - after the generation of the software and before the
compilation of the software) to provide the physical addresses for the
inputs and outputs in place of the underscores ("___") within the file.
This file should not be altered but copied into (not "copied to" as there
may be other records in the destination file other than those associated
with the I/O) "POCOLDME.ASC" before editing.
The "Inputs.Sbr" is created by the software to map these inputs to a "bit"
data file in a more useful arrangement.
EMULATE.SBR
SOFTWARE-WRITTEN This subroutine simulates the operation of
the inputs given the outputs. It invokes the transfer emulation macros
from within "RTransfr.Mac". Transfer specific code may be added to the
emulation macros within "RTransfr.Mac", should some special case need to be
simulated.
This subroutine also invokes the device emulation macros from within
"Devices.Mac".
CONTROL1.SBR
STANDARD This subroutine reports alarms to the Movement
Controller and generates the conveyor contactor feedback alarms and
photocell discrepancy alarms, changes the destination for loads under
instruction of the Movement Controller, processes the manual commands from
the Movement Controller (erasing them when communications is lost) and
initialises data for the control of transfers and conveyors.
RFTAGBIT.SBR
SOFTWARE-WRITTEN A fundamental concept of the Heavy-Unit-Load
Conveyor System is that of rise-fall conveyors, along with turntables and
elevators. The rise-fall conveyors are defined independently of the
conveyor position they are rising from. The rise-fall is then related to
this conveyor position, as a result we have a single physical position (at
least from the photocell view-point) with two logical positions. The file
"Control1.Sbr" has set a bit file to reflect the logical arrangement
of loads about the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System. The subroutine,
"RFTagBit.Sbr", is needed to patch this information to make up for
this physical-versus-logical discrepancy, prior to the generation of
photocell alarms. It is called from "Control1.Sbr".
TRAFFIC1.SBR
NON-STANDARD This subroutine is called prior to calling the
"Transfrs.Sbr" subroutine, which provides for the high level control
of the transfers of loads from one conveyor position to another. These
transfers are dependent upon (among other things) a permission bit being
set. In order to provide preference to one transfer over another, code
should be included here to reset the permission bit of the opposing
transfer until the favoured transfer has started. The state of these bits
is ignored once the transfer is in progress.
TRANSFRS.SBR
SOFTWARE-WRITTEN This subroutine provides the high-level
control of the conveyor software, deciding which transfers to start,
whether they can run, processing their completion and checking that they
complete in time.
This subroutine makes calls to the series of software-written subroutines,
"M___M___.Sbr", which each look after a straight run of transfers.
These subroutines make use of macros files from "RTransfer.Mac", while the
subroutine "Transfrs.Sbr" makes use of macros files from "Devices.Mac".
The "M___M___.Sbr" subroutines are created to structure the PLC code more
conveniently and to avoid the PLC limitation on the number of labels in a
single subroutine (256).
TRAFFIC2.SBR
NON-STANDARD This subroutine is called after calling the
"Transfrs.Sbr" subroutine, which provides for the high level control
of the transfers of loads from one conveyor position to another. This
subroutine is rarely implemented. On the occasion it was implemented, it
was used to drive the next conveyor motor in an instance where a conveyor
load position was shared by two conveyors so that a door could operate
between these conveyors in the centre of the position.
CONTROL2.SBR
STANDARD This subroutine looks after recovering from load
overruns on conveyors that have bidirectional control and overrun
photocells at each end (typically shuttle cars, turntables and elevators).
It then combines these resulting conveyor requests with the requests from
"Transfrs.Sbr" and "Traffic2.Sbr" and the manual requests from the
Movement Controller in preparation for "Interloc.Sbr".
TRAFFIC3.SBR
NON-STANDARD This subroutine is called after "Control2.Sbr"
and prior to "Interloc.Sbr" to add to the conveyor requests from any
hard-wired push-button control requests.
INTERLOC.SBR
SOFTWARE-WRITTEN This subroutine takes the requests for
conveyor motion and checks that they do not offend any interlocks. Some of
these interlocks relate to devices on the conveyors and will be defined
within "Devices.Mac".
CONTROL3.SBR
STANDARD The subroutine "Interloc.Sbr" sets for each conveyor
a forward and a reverse bit. If you require a run and a reverse bit this
subroutine can provide the conversion. This subroutine is also responsible
for summarising the status for reading by the Movement Controller.
OUTPUTS.SBR
SOFTWARE-WRITTEN This subroutine calls the device control
macros from "Devices.Mac" to control the devices along the Heavy-Unit-Load
Conveyor System, then takes the forward and reverse (or run and reverse)
bits and maps these to the outputs.
You should refer to the sample subroutine files supplied and base your
subroutines on these.
Graphical Representation
The topology of the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System is derived from the
data tables entered to define the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System. The
topology is enhanced further by information within these tables, which
indicates the number of loads on each conveyor, providing some indication
of the length of each conveyor.
This is combined with the tables placing devices of varying types along and
about the conveyor. The definition of the device types provides the
graphics to represent the device on the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System.
From this information the system definition software makes a stab at
generating the graphical representation of the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor
System. In most systems, however, a little stretching and pushing is
required for the representation to more closely reflect the physical
system. This is particularly the case if one part of the system is
isolated from the rest.
The image may also be rotated in 90 degree increments and the overview may
be expanded in either or both the X (width) and Y (height) directions.
This stretching, pushing, rotating and expanding is not part of the system
definition, but is carried out on the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyors window.
Refer to the section titled:
"Heavy-Unit-Load
Conveyors".
The rotating and expanding is individually set for each terminal on the
system.
Windows may be assigned to specific conveyor positions, allowing these
windows to called up by "zooming into" these conveyor positions. To assign
windows to conveyor positions for this function refer to the section
titled: "Conveyors
from which to Zoom".
Steps in the System Definition
The following is a sequence in which the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System is
most conveniently defined, however, in reality you will most likely be
going back and forth between these points:
1
Define any additional device types needed.
2
Erase any previous definition.
3
Enter the runs of conveyors.
4
Define the rise-fall conveyors and set the number of loads to be
accommodated by the longer conveyors.
5
Set the destination values for the decision points.
6
Place the devices on and about the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System.
7
Generate the software-written PLC code and the graphics.
8
Review the non-standard PLC code and add device type macros as
required.
9 *
Set the physical I/O addresses into "POCOLDME.ASC" using
"POCOLDME.AIN".
10
Compile the PLC source code.
11
View the error listing if necessary
12
Load the PLC code into the Movement Controller and execute it.
13
Test the PLC code.
14 *
Import the PLC code into the Allen-Bradley programming software.
15 *
Download the PLC code to the PLC, connect the PLC to the Movement
Controller and start commissioning.
16 *
During commissioning the times taken for transfers to complete are
recorded to assist in tuning the system.
17 *
Once tuned, set the timer presets into "Presets.Mac", to save retuning
in the case where the software generation needs to be repeated.
The above points flagged with an asterisk ('*') require software and/or
hardware beyond the scope of the Movement Controller software and its host
hardware.
Enter or Modify Device Types
This window is used to define the types of devices that may be used on the
Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System.
The window will appear as shown overleaf:
This window has five selection windows, which will be displayed across the
top of the main window. Of these selection windows, one will be active at
any given point in time and one line from this selection window will be
active. The remainder of the main window, below these selection windows
will be used to service the active line of the active selection window.
The five selection windows are:
DEVICE TYPES
lists the existing device types, which may be modified,
and allows new types to be added.
DEVICE'S ALARMS
lists the existing alarms for the active device type,
which may be modified, and allows new alarms to be added to the device
type.
DEVICE'S OUTPUTS
lists the existing outputs for the active device type,
which may be modified, and allows new outputs to be added to the device
type.
DEVICE'S INPUTS
lists the existing inputs for the active device type,
which may be modified, and allows new inputs to be added to the device
type.
CONDITIONS
lists the existing conditions for the active group of
inputs for this device type, and allows new conditions to be added to the
device type's group of inputs. A group of inputs commences with the first
in sequence to have no conditions set for it and ends with the first to
have conditions set for it (in fact set for the group). If each input has
one or more conditions set, then each group of inputs comprises a single
input.
For each device type, a number of alarms, a number of outputs and a number
of inputs may be defined. The inputs may be viewed independently or in
groups, in either case, for each input or group of inputs, a number of
conditions may be defined. These windows are used to define these device
types, alarms, outputs, inputs and conditions.
Navigating the Selection Windows
The active window is identified by its surround being highlighted. The
next or previous windows may be made active by typing either [RIGHT] or
[LEFT] respectively.
The line pointer may be moved up or down using [UP] and [DOWN]
respectively.
These navigating features also correspond to push-buttons presented at the
bottom of the window, and so are also available using the letters "R", "L",
"U" and "D" in place of [RIGHT], [LEFT], [UP] and [DOWN] respectively.
The selection window and line may be selected by clicking on it. Also a
pointer may be moved up and down, or the window scrolled by clicking on the
selection window frame immediately above or below the pointer.
In the area beneath these windows the data relating to the active line of
the active window will be displayed. In most cases, this data will be a
list of database fields, however, in the case of the fifth window, the
overview and zoomed images corresponding to the active condition will be
presented.
Modify, Add and Cancel Lines
No matter which window is open, lines may be modified, added or cancelled
(deleted) by typing "M" (or [ENTER]), "A" (or [INSERT]) or "C" (or "D" or
[DELETE]) respectively. A line may also be modified by double clicking on
it.
If an attempt is made to delete a line, a check is first made to ensure
that the line is not in use. If it is in use, you will be presented with a
message such as "Record is referenced by database number 145 - "Device's
type"".
Otherwise you will be presented with the message "Are you sure? Press F1 to
confirm intention to DELETE ... STRIKE A KEY". If you strike any key other
than [F1] the line will not be deleted, otherwise it will be.
When modifying or adding lines in the first four windows, you will need to
enter a number of data fields, depending upon which window you are adding
lines to.
When modifying or adding lines to the "Conditions" window, a new window
will be presented allowing you to define the condition and the graphic
images used to represent this condition on the overview and zoomed
Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor Systems.
Defining the Device Type
When a line from the "Device Type" window is selected for modification, the
area below the windows will display the details corresponding to the device
type. These may now be edited.
The data you need to enter to define the device type, prior to defining the
alarms, outputs, inputs and graphics, is:
The name of the device type
The device type code. This is a two character code to which is appended
first the conveyor position designation (minus its first character -
maximum of four characters) then the four (for alarms) or three (for
outputs and inputs) characters to identify the alarm, output or input. In
the case of inputs an additional character, "I", will appended to represent
the image of the input transferred to a bit file, While in the case of
outputs, a "1" will be appended to represent the manual control from the
Movement Controller to turn the output on and a "0" will be appended to
represent the manual control to turn the output off.
You can create "null devices" by leaving this field blank. If you do so,
there is little point in filling in the remaining fields nor in creating
alarms or outputs for the device type. The purpose of "null devices" is to
be able to place fixed images on the window at points where there are no
real devices defined. You will need to create a single input for these
types of devices; what you enter in the fields is unimportant, however it
is better to enter something so that the entry can be seen. You will then
need to create an image for the input, specifying "X" as the condition
value. These steps are described, in general, in the subsequent sections.
Will the device require the load to pause? This is a single digit in the
range 0 to 3 and is interpreted as described in the section titled:
"Heavy-Unit-Load
Conveyor Device Pause Need".
The name of the declarations macro, if any. If devices of this type
require bits, words or timers to be associated with them and referenced by
non software-written PLC code, or by multiple macro definitions for the
device type, then the declarations for these data elements need to be
included in a macro file, which is to be invoked in the "Configur.Mac" file
so that the element is globally accessible.
On the other hand, if the element is only referenced within a single macro
definition, it may instead be declared within that macro definition, not
requiring a separate macro for its definition.
Macro definitions of this type are introduced with the string "#Macro
XXXXXXXXXX( DeviceName )" where "XXXXXXXXXX" is the name you have entered
into this field. The body of the macro will have entries such as "#Declare
Bit DeviceName1234;" where "1234" are the last four characters of the
declared element's symbol. The remainder of this symbol is passed to the
macro when it is invoked and will consist of the device type code and the
conveyor position designation (minus its first character).
The macro must be terminated, as with all macros, by "#EndM".
The name of the source transfer macro, if any. If there are conditions
for which a load should remain at the device's conveyor position and not
move on (other than the general safety interlocks associated with this type
of device), then these conditions should be stated in the source transfer
macro and its name should be entered here.
For example, in the case of an alignment bar, such a condition would be
that the load has not been aligned yet.
Macro definitions of this type are introduced with the string "#Macro
ALIGNPERM( DeviceName, ConveyorName, Number, Position, Control, Reverse)"
where "ALIGNPERM" is the name you have entered into this field. The
invocation might be something like, "ALIGNPERM( AB89A, M89, 89, A, 1, 0)".
The "AB89A", the "DeviceName", to which must be appended alarm, input,
output or other one to four character codes, to form data element symbols.
The "M89", the "ConveyorName", is the name of the conveyor, where as the
"89 is the name of the conveyor minus its first character. The "A"
represents the position along the conveyor at which the device is
positioned, which is appended to the "ConveyorName" to form the name of the
conveyor position.
The "1", the "Control", can be either "1", "2" or "3", to indicate to the
macro definition whether the invocation is on behalf of the conveyor
position itself ("1"), a rise-fall at this conveyor position ("2") or a
rise-fall somewhere else along the conveyor.
The "0", the "Reverse", can be either "0" or "1", to indicate to the macro
definition whether the invocation is referring to the normal forward ("0")
operation of the conveyor or its reverse ("1") operation.
The body of the macro would generally have data element references "and"ed
or "or"ed together and sandwiched between "#<" and "#>" pairs. An example
could be "#< DeviceNameLBKI && DeviceNameRBKI #>"
The macro must be terminated, as with all macros, by "#EndM".
The name of the destination transfer macro, if any. If there are
conditions under which a load should not start to transfer into the
device's conveyor position, (other than the general safety interlocks
associated with this type of device), these conditions should be stated in
the destination transfer macro and its name should be entered here.
For example, in the case of a scissor lift, such a condition would be that
the lift is up (or down as appropriate) before the load may enter.
This condition is, unlike the source transfer macro, a basic interlock,
which can not be circumvented with manual control. If not satisfied, the
corresponding conveyor will be able to run, however, a conveyor feeding
this will only be able to run so long as the photocell at the head of the
conveyor is clear.
These macros have a similar definition to the source transfer macro.
The name of the conveyor interlock macro, if any. If there are conditions
related to this type of device, under which the conveyor associated with
the device should not be allowed to run, these conditions should be entered
here.
For example, in the case of an alignment bar, such a condition would be
that the alignment bar is back (retracted).
This condition is a basic interlock, which can not be circumvented with
manual control. If not satisfied, the corresponding conveyor will not be
able to run.
These macros have a similar definition to the source transfer macro.
The name of the device control macro, if any. This macro is necessary if
devices of this type have, associated with them, alarms or outputs. In
this macro you will need to define the logic controlling this type of
device, and generating alarms from its behaviour.
It is in this macro that automatic control, manual control and interlocks
for devices of this type are all to be specified.
Macro definitions of this type are introduced with the string "#Macro
TURNTABLE( DeviceName, ConveyorName, Number, Position)" where "TURNTABLE"
is the name you have entered into this field. The invocation might be
something like, "TURNTABLE( TT89A, M89, 89, A)".
The "TT89A", the "DeviceName", to which must be appended alarm, input,
output or other one to four character codes, to form data element symbols.
The "M89", the "ConveyorName", is the name of the conveyor, where as the
"89 is the name of the conveyor minus its first character. The "A"
represents the position along the conveyor at which the device is
positioned, which is appended to the "ConveyorName" to form the name of the
conveyor position.
The body of the macro may be quite elaborate. You are best to refer to
examples of such macros already developed.
The macro must be terminated, as with all macros, by "#EndM".
The name of the device emulation macro, if any. This macro is needed if
devices of this type have inputs and you need to provide logic to simulate
these devices to test your code.
These macros have a similar definition to the device control macro.
The remaining macros are in anticipation of future software that will be
used to perform more efficient bulk control of the all devices of a given
type. These should not be filled in for the time being.
For each macro name specified, the corresponding macro definition should be
written to the "Devices.Mac" file.
Macros are formally described in the section titled:
"Macros".
Defining the Device Type's Alarm
When a line from the "Device's Alarms" window is selected for modification,
the area below the windows will display the details corresponding to the
selected alarm for the selected device type. These may now be edited.
Unless the device is an abnormally complex device, such as a pallet
detierer or perhaps a destacker, only a single alarm would be required for
devices of the type.
The data you need to enter to define an alarm for the device type is:
The four character code to be appended to the device name to form a symbol
to uniquely identify this alarm bit.
The name used to describe this alarm in the above window. This is of no
importance beyond this window.
The remainder of the PLC address comment for the data element representing
the alarm. This consists of three lines of ten characters. The full
address comment is composed of the symbol (the first line), the name of the
device (the second line) and then this text.
For example, if the four character code were "2SLO", and the device type
code were "SD", and the text entered for this field was
"too slow to reach the top"
, then after system generation, the address
comment for this alarm at conveyor position M89A would be:
The text presented in the alarm window when this alarm is raised. Within
this text should be a per cent sign ("%"), which will be replaced by the
device names when the system is generated.
For example, you could enter "Scissor lift % failed to rise in the time
allowed". When the system is generated, a number of alarms will be created
such as "Scissor lift SD89A failed to rise in the time allowed".
The type of alarm. Alarms may be grouped into generic types, which have
generic text defined to advise the operator what the problem is likely to
be and what action should be taken to remedy the fault. You can either
reference a previously defined type, or create a new generic type. For
editing instructions for these types of fields, please refer to the
sections titled:
"Symbolic
Name", and "Fault
Assistance".
Defining the Device Type's Output
When a line from the "Device's Outputs" window is selected for
modification, the area below the windows will display the details
corresponding to the selected output for the selected device type. These
may now be edited.
The data you need to enter to define an output for the device type is:
The three character code to be appended to the device name to form a
symbol to uniquely identify this output bit. Appended again to this will
be a "1" or a "0" to uniquely identify the manual control to turn on or off
this output bit.
The name used to describe this output in the above window. This is of no
importance beyond this window.
The remainder of the PLC address comment for the data element representing
the output and its manual control bits. This consists of three lines of
ten characters, as in the case of the similar field in the definition of
the alarms.
The text for the top and lower lines of the push buttons used to effect
the manual turning off or on of this output. There is no obligation to
enter this data if you do not require manual control for this output.
Whether the manual controls for this output should be latching or
momentary-action.
On the other hand, if there are several outputs, you may only need to
define these buttons for some of these outputs.
The Movement Controller will set the manual control bits in response to the
operator typing the key corresponding to the first letter in the top line
of the push-button. What this bit does is under control of the device
control macro, which you are to write.
Defining the Device Type's Input
When a line from the "Device's Inputs" window is selected for modification,
the area below the windows will display the details corresponding to the
selected input for the selected device type. These may now be edited.
The data you need to enter to define an input for the device type is:
The three character code to be appended to the device name to form a
symbol to uniquely identify this input bit. Appended again to this will be
an "I" to describe the image of the input copied to a bit file. This
should be the bit your macros refer to, rather than the actual input, so
that the emulation macro can be effective.
The name used to describe this input in the above window. This is of no
importance beyond this window.
The remainder of the PLC address comment for the data element representing
the input and its bit file image. This consists of three lines of ten
characters, as in the case of the similar field in the definition of the
alarms.
Defining the Device Input's Condition
The image to be displayed for a group of inputs is determined by matching
the state of the group with values set in this window, then presenting the
corresponding image.
The order in which the conditions are listed is significant if several may
satisfy a single combination of the states of the inputs. In creating the
image, the conditions matching the input states are executed from the top
of the list, so those lower down may overwrite those above. If you need to
rePosition a condition, highlight it then type "P". You may then raise or
lower the record using the [UP] and [DOWN] keys (or "U" and "D") to
relocate it. Once you have reached the new location among the conditions,
type "P" (or [ESCAPE]) to finish the rePositioning of this record.
To enter the data for a condition, a new window is presented, with four
areas. These areas are titled:
Condition Matching
specifying the input states
Overview Colour
setting the colour for the overview image
Graphical Overview
setting the pixels for the overview image
Graphical Mode Zoomed
specifying the shapes and colours for the zoomed
image
The window will appear as shown overleaf:
The cursor keys may be used to move the highlight to other areas.
Once the area to be edited is highlighted, you will need to type "M" or
[ENTER] before you can commence to edit the area.
The overview and zoomed images are normally shown beside the corresponding
conveyor representation. These images can also be overlaid on their
corresponding conveyor images by typing "O". To turn this feature off,
type "O" a second time. While this feature is on the "OVERLAY CONVEYR"
push-button will be highlighted.
The navigating features also correspond to push-buttons presented at the
bottom of the window, and so are also available using the letters "R", "L",
"U" and "D" in place of [RIGHT], [LEFT], [UP] and [DOWN] respectively.
The highlight may be moved from area to area by clicking on the area.
Double clicking on an area selects it for modification.
Specifying Device Condition Matching
When defining these device types, a number of inputs can be grouped
together to select a graphic image to reflect the implied condition. This
group of inputs can be represented by a number of such images, depending
upon which "condition" their state currently reflects. Refer to the
section titled:
"Heavy-Unit-Load
Conveyor Device Condition".
When at least one condition has been defined for an input, its description
in the "Device's Inputs" window will be shown white. Otherwise its
description will be shown yellow. If while in the "Device's Inputs" window
you move the line pointer down past, say, two yellow inputs to the next
line, then move across to the "Conditions" window, the conditions you then
add to or modify within the window will apply to the group of inputs
including the active input and the yellow inputs above it.
After selecting a condition for modification or adding a new condition, the
first information you will be required to enter is what state or states
each input in the group should be in to match the condition and cause the
images you are about to define to be displayed on the Heavy-Unit-Load
Conveyors diagram.
Corresponding to each input you can specify either "0", "1" or "X" to imply
that the input must be 0, 1 or anything respectively to match the
condition.
The [UP] and [DOWN] keys may be used to specify the input to be matched.
By then typing "1" (or [ENTER]), "0" or "X" the condition value may be set
to "1", "0" or "X" respectively. You can also specify the input by
clicking on it, and set and set the condition value by double clicking to
cycle through the three possibilities.
Once you have set the condition values for each input in the group, type
"E" (or [ESCAPE]) to exit from editing the condition-matching
specification.
Overview Image Colour
To define an image to be presented on the overview in the event of this
condition being matched, you need to first select a colour for this image.
To do this, move the highlight to the colour selection area, then type
[ENTER]. Then specify the colour by its purpose, and type [ENTER].
This selection is not by the name of the colour but by the purpose the
colour serves, such as to indicate that a device is in automatic. This
allows the colour scheme to be more easily adjusted. This purpose is a
"Symbolic Name" field. For editing instructions for this type of
field, please refer to the section titled:
"Symbolic
Name".
To familiarise yourself with the purposes for the colours, refer to the
section titled: "Changing the
Colours".
Once the name of the purpose has been typed in, type [ENTER] to confirm
this as the colour and exit from specifying the overview image's colour.
Overview Image Pixel Editing
The next step in the definition of the overview image is to define the four
pixel maps, each containing sixteen rows by eight pixels. Each map
corresponds to a possible orientation of a conveyor.
After moving the highlight to this area, type [ENTER]. The text "LEFT"
will be highlighted, below the pixel representation for the image used when
the conveyor is orientated on the window so that its forward direction is
left.
You can use the "L", "R", "U" and "D" to highlight the text corresponding
to the alternate orientations, left, right, up and down respectively. The
cursor keys may also be used, though not with their natural function;
typing [LEFT], [RIGHT], [UP] and [DOWN] will call up, directly and
respectively, the orientations, left, right, up and down.
After highlighting the text of an image, the pixel map may be edited by
typing "M" (or [ENTER]). In response, the "MODIFY PIXELS" push-button is
highlighted and a new window is created, in which each pixel is represented
by a sixteen-by-eight pixel character, either a solid block or an "X" or a
space.
Once a pixel map has been defined, this map may be copied to memory
(presented in the centre of the square defined by the four orientations) by
typing "C". Any other pixel map can then be set to the map in the memory
or exchanged with it by, first, highlighting the other orientation, then
typing "G" to get the pixel map from the memory, or "S" to swap its pixel
map with that in the memory.
When done modifying the pixel maps for the overview images, type [ESCAPE]
to exit from editing the overview pixel maps.
Zoomed Image Editing
To create the zoomed image, we need to enter the specification of a number
of shapes to be presented within a conveyor load position cell. These
cells each measure sixty-four pixels by sixty-four pixels.
These specifications are presented on subsequent lines within the
"Graphical Mode Zoomed" area. After pressing [ENTER], the first
specification will be highlighted and the shape corresponding to this will
be shown in black rather than its specified colour, unless its specified
colour was black, in which case it will be shown in white. The full
details of this specification will be shown in a new area at the top left
of the window.
There are up to eight details associated with each specification. The
first four are mandatory and consistent for all shapes and are:
"Shape"
"Colour"
"X Coordinate"
"Y Coordinate"
The available shapes are circles, characters, lines, rectangles,
semi-circles, numbers, and bargraphs. For circles and semi-circles, the x
and y coordinates refer to the centre from which they are generated, while
for characters and numbers, they refer to the upper left corner of the
character, for rectangles and bargraphs, they refer to one corner and, for
lines, they refer to one end.
Circles
For circles, the remaining details are the radius and thickness. The
thickness should be less than or equal to the radius, and if equal to it
will result in a solid circle.
Characters
For characters, the remaining details are the ASCII code for the character
in hexadecimal (extended ASCII characters refer to the IBM PC extended
character set), and the thickness for each logical pixel. The characters
are defined in sixteen rows by eight pixels, setting the thickness to 1
will present a character this size, to 2, twice this size, to 3, three
times et cetera.
Lines
For lines, the remaining details are the coordinates for the other end of
the line and the thickness of the line. If the thickness is other than 1,
lines will be thickened to the left, looking from the first coordinates
towards the second.
Rectangles
For rectangles, the remaining details are the coordinates for the opposite
corner. Rectangles are always orientated with their sides parallel to the
borders of the window.
Semi-Circles
For semi-circles, the remaining details are as per circles, plus a
direction, which is either left, up, right or down.
Numeric Display
For semi-circles, the remaining details are the number of digits, the
number of decimal places and the base.
Bargraph
For bargraphs, the remaining details are as per rectangles, plus a
direction, which is either left, up, right or down, and a maximum value,
which, if negative, implies bidirection presentation.
With unidirectional (not bidirectional) presentation, the bargraph will
represent "0" and negative values as a line across the end of the defined
rectangle, perpendicular to the nominated direction, while it will present
positive values as a rectangle, extending from this line in the direction
nominated.
With bidirectional presentation, the bargraph will represent "0" as a line
across the centre of the defined rectangle, perpendicular to the nominated
direction, while it will present positive values as a rectangle, extending
from this line in the direction nominated, and negative values as a
rectangle, extending in the opposite from this line direction.
Change or Add Specifications
The highlight may be moved to other listed specifications using the [UP]
and [DOWN] keys (or "U" and "D"). To edit an existing specification,
highlight the specification then type "M" (or [ENTER]). To add a new
specification, type "A" (or [INSERT]). In either case you will be
presented with the form to fill in to define the shape.
The highlight may be moved by either clicking on the image of the
specification or the line corresponding to this image. If the position
clicked is shared by more than one specification's image, subsequent clicks
will cycle through these specifications. Double clicking will enable you
to edit the specification.
After changing or adding a specification, the image display will be updated
to reflect this.
Conveniently Add Text Strings
Type "L", or click on "Letters". In response, a dialogue window will be
opened, requesting the colour in which they are to be presented (a
"Symbolic Name" field), the coordinates at which the string will start
(both "Numeric" fields), the size of the letters (1 to 4, a "Numeric"
field), the string of letters themselves (a "Name" field), and whether you
want this string to replace all other letters currently defined for this
condition (a "Character" field).
After entering this information, the image display will be updated to
reflect this.
Reordering Image Specifications
The order in which the specifications are listed is significant if there is
an overlap between them. In creating the image, the specifications are
executed from the top of the list, so those lower down may overwrite those
above. If you need to rePosition a specification, highlight it then type
"P". You may then raise or lower the record using the [UP] and [DOWN]
keys (or "U" and "D") to reposition it. Once you have reached the new
location among the specifications, type "P" (or [ESCAPE]) to finish the
rePositioning of this record.
The specification to be repositioned may be changed by either clicking on
the image of the specification or the line corresponding to this image. If
the position clicked is shared by more than one specification's image,
subsequent clicks will cycle through these specifications.
Relocating the Entire Image
Should you need to shift (horizontally or vertically) or rotate the image
you have constructed, consisting of several shape specifications, first
type "S" for "SHIFT IMAGE", then type "L", "R", "U", "D" or "9",
corresponding to moving the image left, right, up, down and rotating the
image by 90 degrees respectively. Alternatively, typing [LEFT], [RIGHT],
[UP] and [DOWN] will call up directly and respectively the shift
directions, left, right, up and down.
Had you requested to shift the image (as distinct to rotating it) you will
then be prompted to enter the number of pixels by which the image is to be
moved. Once you enter this number, the specifications will be adjusted
accordingly and the image will be redisplayed in this new position.
On the other hand, had you requested to rotate the image, the
specifications would have been adjusted. When rotating the image,
characters are not rotated.
The effect of typing "S" remains in force, so to make further adjustments,
simply type "L", "R", "U", "D" or "9", again then, if required, enter the
distance.
When done relocating the image, type "E", [ESCAPE] or [ENTER], to return to
the editing of the specifications.
Duplicating Images
Often, the images for one condition may form a convenient basis from which
to build the images for another condition of the same inputs or a condition
of an entirely different set of inputs. By typing "F", you can have these
images recorded. In response the "FLAG ALL IMAGES" push-button is
highlighted, while the "GET FROM FLAGGED" push-button remains darkened.
Initially the "GET FROM FLAGGED" push-button was darkened because no images
were flagged. It is now darkened because the flagged images are its own.
If you were to exit the entering of data for this condition and select an
alternate condition (or create one), you will find that the "FLAG ALL
IMAGES" push-button is no longer highlighted, while the "GET FROM FLAGGED"
push-button is highlighted. By typing "G" at this time, the condition
matching specification will be reset and the colours and images will be set
to be identical to those flagged.
Fast Definition of Conveyor System
This window provides a more efficient method of entering the tables upon
which the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System definition is based. The results
of this exercise are written to two tables (one for the conveyors and one
for the transfers between conveyor positions), which can be directly
accessed by the
"Enter
or Modify the Conveyors" window and the
"Enter
or Modify the Transfers" window.
One of the steps in this section is merely to provide access to the
"Enter
or Modify the Conveyors" window at the appropriate point in the system
definition. At this stage you will be referred to the documentation of
this window for further instruction.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Fast definition of conveyors
HELP ESCAPE:exit
The fast definition of the conveyor system is accomplished through these steps:
STEP 1 Erase any previous system definition.
STEP 2 Enter the runs of conveyors, beginning with the rear conveyor in each
run. If transfers are to occur in both directions, repeat starting at
the other end and work backwards. It is best to do all transfers for
all conveyors with a given orientation before moving onto those with
another orientation.
STEP 3 Enter the number of loads which can be accommodated by each conveyor,
where this number is other than one, then stipulate where the rise-fall
conveyors are located. You should at this stage specify which conveyors
are elevators. When setting a conveyor as an elevator, it may be
necessary to lower its level and, if so, move its "1st Position" to its
"2nd Position".
STEP 4 Set the destination numbers for the points at which there are alternative
paths open to a load. A transfer can be enabled if the load's destination
is one of up to six specified numbers or else all but one of the
specified numbers.
STEP 5 Enter the user-definable devices, specifying the device type, associated
or nearest conveyor and its distance from it.
When complete, go to the "Create, edit, compile and execute" display.
The first step, if you are starting a new system definition, is to erase
any previous system definition.
Having done this, the next step is to enter the runs of conveyors,
beginning with the rear conveyor in each run.
The next step uses the
"Enter
or Modify the Conveyors" window to enable you to provide further detail on
some of the conveyors.
The fourth step runs you through the decision points in the system, so that
the destination numbers may be set. When loads move about the
Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System, they are tracked with a word of data.
Contained in this word is the destination for the load. When it reaches a
decision point, the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System is to send it one way
or the other depending on the value it carries. What you need to do at
this point is to provide the basis upon which the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor
System will make its decision.
The final step is to enter the miscellaneous devices along the
Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System. These devices are any other than
elevators, turntables and rise-fall conveyors. In this sense, an elevator
is a device that takes a load from conveyors on one level to conveyors on
another level. If your system does not have conveyors passing above
others, it is better to represent the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System on a
single level, with no elevators - only scissor lifts.
To use this window you may type the step number, or click or use the [UP]
and [DOWN] keys to highlight the desired step number then type [ENTER], or
double click on the desired step number. Subsequently, after exiting the
step, the highlight will be advanced to the next step in the process.
When you have completed all the steps of this window, you are ready to
generate the system, edit the file, "POCOLDME.AIN", and any PLC source code
files, then compile the software, then load the software into the emulator
and execute it. At this stage you should refer to the section titled:
"Create,
Edit, Compile and Execute".
Erase System Definition
This is the first step in the process and will erase all the information in
the conveyor and transfer definition tables.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Erase system definition
Erase definitions <E/N>a N
To confirm that you indeed intend to erase these tables, enter "E".
Otherwise type [ESCAPE] or enter "N".
This is all that this step entails.
Enter Run of Conveyors
This is the second step in the process and it is here that the bulk of the
information for the conveyor and transfer definition tables is provided.
Enter the Details of Rear Conveyor
You are first prompted to enter the name of the rear conveyor in a run of
conveyors. Should you enter a blank field, you will leave this step. This
is the usual method of finishing; instructions to this effect are presented
at the base of the window.
The conveyor name may have up to four characters. The first character is
used to identify it as a conveyor (usually "C" or "M") and the subsequent
three characters to uniquely identify this conveyor from other conveyors.
These three characters will also be appended to the one or two characters
used to identify a device type to form a device name. You should bear this
in mind to ensure that the resulting conveyor and device names can not be
confused.
After entering the conveyor name, the software checks to see if the name
already exists or not. If it does not, it will create a new entry in the
conveyor definition table with this conveyor name, otherwise it will call
up the existing entry.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Rear conveyor Details - M047
Conveyor number a
Conveyor level <1/2> 1
Fwd direction <N/S/E/W>a S
One-way or Reversible <O/R>a O
Single or Dual speed <S/R>a S
Contactor feedback <N/F>a N
Isolated if open, ... s
Overloaded if open, ... s
╔════════════════════════╗┌────────────────────────┐┌────────────────────────┐
║ OK ║│ DELETE ││ HELP │
╚════════════════════════╝└────────────────────────┘└────────────────────────┘
You are presented here with a "Set of Fields" presenting some of the
information required for the definition of the conveyor. Refer to the
section titled: "Set of Fields".
This "Set of Fields" includes the conveyor name (a unique "Name" field),
the level of the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System ("1" or "2") on which the
conveyor resides, the nominal orientation of the conveyor - north, south,
east or west - whether the conveyor is capable of running in reverse,
whether the conveyor is capable of slow speed, whether the conveyor has a
contactor feedback input allocated to it, (these are all "Character"
fields), and the input identifications for the isolated and overload
indications (both "Symbolic Name" fields). For editing instructions for
these types of fields, please refer to the sections titled:
"Name",
"Symbolic
Name", and "Character".
This system supports conveyors on two levels, allowing conveyors to pass
over one another. Unless your system requires this, enter "1" as the
conveyor level.
The nominal direction does not need to relate to true/magnetic/geographic
north, the top of the drawing is a good enough approximation for this
purpose. The system really needs only to establish at which angle each
conveyor is running with respect to the others.
You need only specify that a conveyor is reversible, if it is not used in
this way in automatic operation. If the automatic operation requires the
conveyor to be reversible, the system definition will discover this soon
enough.
If the conveyor has no input to monitor its isolator, then you should leave
this field blank or enter "No corresponding input".
If the conveyor has an explicit input all to itself for the monitoring of
its isolator, then if this input is on when the isolator is off (isolating)
then you should enter "Contact closed for condition", otherwise enter
"Contact open for condition".
If the conveyor shares this input with a number of other conveyors in the
zone, then your entry should uniquely identify the name of the zone, with a
"Z" (case unimportant) followed by two digits, not include the string
of characters "open" (again case unimportant) unless the input being off
indicates that the isolator is off. An example would be "Z22:M22-25
isolated if opend". It is not necessary for the "Z22" to appear at the
start, however it would prove more convenient if it is there.
The same applies to the overload indication field. If both the isolated
and overload inputs are zoned, you may use the same zone names for each
however the strings entered should not be identical unless the same logic
also applies.
Select Forward or Reverse Transfers
Having filled in this information, you will be asked whether you are
entering the run in the forward direction of the conveyors. This is
normally the case when starting the definition and always the case if there
are no transfers requiring the conveyors to run reverse. Enter "F" for
forward or "R" for reverse accordingly.
You will now see the conveyor name you had just entered appear at the top
left of the window.
Enter Names of Subsequent Conveyors
You are now asked to enter the name of the next conveyor in the run of
conveyors. Enter the name of the conveyor that is fed directly from this
conveyor. This question will be repeated each time it is answered, and the
sequence of previous answers will progress across the top of the window
from the left.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Defining a run of conveyors
M047
Enter the runs of conveyors, beginning with the rear conveyor in each run.
To end a run, make a blank entry; a blank entry as the rear conveyor exits.
If transfers run in both directions, repeat starting at the other end and work
backwards.
It is best to do all transfers for all conveyors with a given orientation before
moving onto those with another.
Next conveyor in the run a M046
╔════════════════════════╗┌────────────────────────┐┌────────────────────────┐
║ OK ║│ HELP ││ ESCAPE: exit │
╚════════════════════════╝└────────────────────────┘└────────────────────────┘
Once you reach a turntable, you should not enter the conveyor that it feeds
unless it feeds this conveyor without needing to turn; if it feeds two
conveyors, enter the name of the conveyor it will feed without needing to
turn.
Once you reach an elevator, you should not enter the conveyor that it feeds
unless it feeds this conveyor at this level; if it feeds two conveyors,
enter the name of the conveyor it will feed at this level.
Each conveyor in the run inherits most of the information entered for the
first conveyor in the run.
Ending the Run of Conveyors
Once you reach the end of a run, make a blank entry. In response, the
window will be cleared and you will again be asked to enter the rear
conveyor of a run of conveyors.
Repeat for the Next Run
Repeat this as often as necessary to define all the strings of conveyors.
Must Be Turntable or Elevator
As each conveyor is entered the software checks whether it knows anything
about it and, is so, whether it is prepared to believe what you have
entered. Should it have found a conveyor in a north-south run, which you
are now entering in an east-west run, you will be asked to confirm that the
conveyor is a turntable. Should it have found a conveyor on level two that
you are now entering on level one, you will be asked to confirm that the
conveyor is an elevator.
Ending the Last Run of Conveyors
When you have entered the last of the conveyors in the last of the runs,
enter a blank conveyor as the next in the run and another blank conveyor as
the rear conveyor of the next run. In response you will exit from entering
the runs of conveyors, ready for the next step.
Multi-Load Two-Way Conveyors Notes
If a conveyor, with accumulation for more than one load, has a rise-fall
anywhere along its length, it is assumed to require an index in the forward
direction. You should bear this in mind when deciding which will be the
forward direction for a reversible conveyor. Hence, if you require a
reversible conveyor to index loads in one direction, you should nominate
this direction as the forward direction.
Please note that bidirectional indexes are not allowed for as yet.
Conveyor Lengths and Rise-Falls
This is the third step in the process. As a result of the previous step,
the system definition now has a number of strings of conveyors, with little
idea of how to interconnect these strings (unless the Heavy-Unit-Load
Conveyor System makes extensive use of turntables).
The most important phase of this step is to tie these strings together.
These strings are physically tied together by the rise-fall conveyors; so
what needs to be done is to enter against the rise-fall conveyors the names
of the conveyors (and the position along the conveyor) on which they are
located.
If there are conveyors in the system with accommodation for a number of
loads, this information must be entered.
If there are conveyors for which the information associated with the head
conveyor of their run does not apply, then the information for these
conveyors should be adjusted accordingly.
When you have made the required modifications, type [ESCAPE] to exit from
entering the conveyor lengths and rise-falls, ready for the next step.
Enter Destinations for Decision Points
This is the fourth step in the process and runs you through the decision
points in the system, so that the destination numbers may be set.
When loads move about the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System, they are tracked
with a word of data. Contained in this word is the destination for the
load. When it reaches a decision point, the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor
System is to send it one way or the other depending on the value it
carries. What you need to do at this point is to provide the basis upon
which the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System will make its decision.
When you enter this window the software will search the system definition
for the first decision point and display the records from the transfer
definition file for this point. Refer to the section titled:
"Enter
or Modify the Transfers".
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Enter destinations for decision points
HOME: first conveyor END: last PG UP: previous conveyor PG DN: next
23 C065 C064 A
140 C063 C63X A
Destinations for conveyor C065 Conflicting destination numbers
Source conveyor C065
The source conveyor in each of these records will either be the same or the
source conveyor in one of these will prove to be a rise fall upon the
other.
The conveyor at which the decision point lies will be indicated at the
lower left of the window, and the software's verdict on the currently
specified set of destination numbers will be indicated to the lower right.
Each of the competing transfers have associated with them a set of
destination numbers that will need to match a load at the source for the
transfer to start. There should be no intersection of these sets of
numbers and the union of these set should represent all possible
destination numbers.
The set of numbers may be specified explicitly, by setting the "All
but/Destinations" field to "D" for destinations, then entering the numbers
of the set into the next six fields.
Alternatively, the set of numbers may be specified implicitly, by setting
the "All but/Destinations" field to "A" for "all but", then entering the
numbers not included in the set into the next six fields.
There will normally be one transfer in each competing set with the set of
numbers specified implicitly and the others specified explicitly.
Initially, there would be no destination numbers set and the "All
but/Destinations" field would be set to "A". The resulting verdict would
be that there are "Conflicting destination numbers" as all sets would
contain all numbers.
If there are destination numbers not covered by any of these competing
transfers, the resulting verdict would be that there are "Missing
destination numbers"
To remedy the situation, select one of these records and fill in the "All
but/Destinations" and the "Destination 1" to "Destination 6" fields
appropriately. Had you not selected the last of these records, once you
complete the entry for the record, the next will be presented.
Below, once suitable entries have been made, is a rough text-representation
of this window:
Enter destinations for decision points
HOME: first conveyor END: last PG UP: previous conveyor PG DN: next
23 C065 C064 A 11
140 C063 C63X D 11
Destinations for conveyor C065 Destination numbers are satisfactory
Source conveyor C065
Once you have set all decision points you will exit from this window. You
can exit this window earlier by typing [ESCAPE].
Enter or Modify the Devices
This is the final step in the process, allowing you to place devices of
previously defined device types along the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System.
This is a "Maintenance Viewing Data" window that lists each of the devices
on the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System (other than elevators, turntables
and rise-fall conveyors).
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
The "Set of Fields" includes the device type, the conveyor (both "Symbolic
Name" fields) and the position along the conveyor with which the device is
associated (a "Numeric" field), whether it is to the left, right, ahead of
or behind the position (a "Character" field) and, if so by how many load
positions. For editing instructions for these types of fields, please
refer to the sections titled:
"Symbolic
Name", "Symbolic
Numeric", and "Character".
Below, once a set of fields has been selected for editing, is a rough
text-representation of this window:
Device types - 1
Device's type t Emergency Stop
Device's conveyor number a M39
Device pos'n (1=rear)<1-256> 1
L/R/Ahead/Behind <L/R/A/B>a R
Distance from conveyor <0-9> 1
╔════════════════════════╗┌────────────────────────┐┌────────────────────────┐
║ OK ║│ DELETE ││ HELP │
╚════════════════════════╝└────────────────────────┘└────────────────────────┘
If a device has no inherent attachment to a conveyor, it must still
reference the conveyor as the naming of the device and the position at
which it is presented on the window - not just the impact of its interlock
macros - is dependent on this information.
When you have entered the last of the devices, type [ESCAPE] to exit from
entering the devices.
Enter or Modify the Conveyors
This is a "Maintenance Viewing Data" window that lists each of the
conveyors. These records define each conveyor by describing its features
and setting its place in the system with respect to the other conveyors.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
the conveyor to which it delivers its loads, without turning or rising,
the number of loads it may accommodate (a "Symbolic Name" field),
whether it is required to pack its loads tight (a "Character" field)
(normally when delivering loads to a conveyor with accommodation for
multiple loads, both conveyors will run until the source photocell has been
cleared; if this flag is set there will need to be a reverse stop photocell
at the rear of the accumulation - the destination - and the destination
will not start until it is blocked. Similarly, when retrieving loads from
a conveyor with accommodation for multiple loads, both conveyors will run
until the source photocell has been cleared; if this flag is set there will
need to be a forward slow photocell at the rear of the destination, and the
accumulation - the source - will stop as soon as it is blocked),
whether it must dispense its loads singly (a "Character" field) (transfers
between conveyors with equal accommodation for loads, will usually involve
all loads being transferred as one; if this flag is set the loads will
instead be transferred singly),
whether it is capable of reversing (a "Character" field),
whether it is capable of dual speed (a "Character" field) (for the dual
speed to be implemented, slow-down photocells will need to be fitted; if
this flag is set, these photocells will be assumed to be fitted),
whether there is an input for its contactor feedback (a "Character"
field),
whether it is a regular conveyor, a turntable or an elevator (a
"Character" field),
whether it is a rise-fall, and if so, which conveyor it is on (a "Symbolic
Name" field),
if it is a rise-fall, where along the conveyor it is (a "Numeric" field),
if it is a rise-fall, which position along it is to rise and fall (a
"Numeric" field) (normally a rise-fall conveyor has only accommodation
for a single load, however some have been encountered with accommodation
for two loads that pivot at one end),
if it is a turntable or elevator, the other conveyor, if any, to which it
delivers its loads (a "Symbolic Name" field),
how its isolator is monitored (a "Symbolic Name" field),
how its overload is monitored (a "Symbolic Name" field) and
whether it needs to communicate with the Movement Controller for each load
(a "Numeric" field) (the Movement Controller will need to interact with the
Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System at the infeeds and outfeeds - other than
interfaces to the cranes - and where certain devices are fitted - e.g.
sizing stations - and will need to identify each of these positions with a
unique number, this number).
Below, once a set of fields has been selected for editing, is a rough
text-representation of this window:
Conveyor - C006
Conveyor number a C006
Fwd direction <N/S/E/W>a S 1
Conveyor delivers to a C008
Number of loads <1-256> 1
One-way or reversible <O/R>a O S N
R/F at conveyor a C069 2 1
Conveyor position 2 fwd a
Isolated if open, ... s
Overloaded if open, ... s
Computer index number <0-63>
╔════════════════════════╗┌────────────────────────┐┌────────────────────────┐
║ OK ║│ DELETE ││ HELP │
╚════════════════════════╝└────────────────────────┘└────────────────────────┘
Enter or Modify the Transfers
This is a "Maintenance Viewing Data" window that lists each of the
transfers between conveyors. These records define each transfer by
referencing the source of the transfer, the destination (if different from
the source - i.e. not just indexing a load along the conveyor) and
specifying the destination numbers the load must possess to be conducted by
the transfer.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Enter or modify the transfers
Select Change Restrict Where Match Expand Insert First Last 1-nine
1|C202|C205|A ^
2|C205|CR05|A █
3|C203|C204|A █
4|C204|CR04|A █
5|C209|C210|A █
6|C210|C211|A █
7|C211|C212|A █
8|C212|C213|A █
9|C213|C214|A █
10|C214|C215|A █
11|C215|CR16|A █
12|C218|C219|A █
13|C219|C220|A █
14|C220|C221|A █
15|C221|C222|A █
16|C222|C223|A █
17|C223|C224|A █
18|C224|CR25|A █
19|C052|C053|A V
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
Database: Transfers
Source conveyor C202
The "Set of Fields" includes the source conveyor, the destination conveyor
(both "Symbolic Name" fields), and the set of the destination numbers of
which a load's destination must be a member to be conducted by this
transfer (a "Character" field and six "Numeric" fields). For editing
instructions for these types of fields, please refer to the sections
titled: "Symbolic
Name", "Symbolic
Numeric", and "Character".
Below, once a set of fields has been selected for editing, is a rough
text-representation of this window:
Transfer - 61
Source conveyor a C165
Destination conveyor a C105
All but/Destinations <A/D>a A
Destination 1 <0-31> 13 14 20
╔════════════════════════╗┌────────────────────────┐┌────────────────────────┐
║ OK ║│ DELETE ││ HELP │
╚════════════════════════╝└────────────────────────┘└────────────────────────┘
Enter or Modify the P.E. Placement
This is a "Maintenance Viewing Data" window that lists each of the conveyor
positions at which the photocell arrangement is not according to that
automatically generated by the code generation phase (please refer to the
section titled:
"Create,
Edit, Compile and Execute" and in particular, its subsection
"Create
PLC Code and Operator Interface").
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
The "Set of Fields" includes the conveyor (a "Symbolic Name" field), the
position along the conveyor (a "Numeric" field, "1" represents the rear of
the conveyor), and the photocell arrangement (a "Photocell Arrangement"
field). For editing instructions for these types of fields, please refer
to the sections titled:
"Symbolic
Name", "Numeric", and
"Photocell
Arrangement".
Below, once a set of fields has been selected for editing, is a rough
text-representation of this window:
Explicit P.E. configurations - 1
Conveyor for explicit pes a MA01
PE cnv pos'n (1=rear)<1-256> 1
Photocell arrangement ---------Slow>>>>>-------------
╔════════════════════════╗┌────────────────────────┐┌────────────────────────┐
║ OK ║│ DELETE ││ HELP │
╚════════════════════════╝└────────────────────────┘└────────────────────────┘
Enter or Modify Explicit Device Alarm
This is a "Maintenance Viewing Data" window that lists each of the device
alarms for which explicit text needs to be set. The definition of the
system depends on associating all devices to a conveyor position, and the
alarm text so generated is referencing the device in this way, which may
not be appropriate for devices whose only association with the conveyor is
due to placement rather than control. This list allows you to sppecify
more appropriate text for such alarms.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Enter or modify explicit device alarm
Select Change Restrict Where Match Expand Insert First Last
Access Gate |NOKY|MA01 | 4|Key (s) is missing from the maintenance/operator^
Access Gate |NOKY|MA01 | 5|The key is missing from the forklift access gate█
Access Gate |NOKY|MD01 | 5|The key is missing from the western gate █
Access Gate |NOKY|MDE2 | 1|The key is missing from the eastern gate █
Access Gate |OPEN|MA01 | 4|The dock-side maintenance/operator's access gate█
Access Gate |OPEN|MA01 | 5|The forklift access gate is open █
Access Gate |OPEN|MD01 | 5|The western access gate is open █
Access Gate |OPEN|MDE2 | 1|The factory-side maintenance/operator's access g█
Access Gate |OPEN|MDE2 | 5|The eastern access gate is open █
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
V
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
Database: Explicit alarms
Explicit alarm device type t Access Gate
The "Set of Fields" includes the device type and the conveyor (both
"Symbolic Name" fields), the alarm code (a "Name" field, which must
match the alarm code field of an alarm defined for the nominated device
type), the position along the conveyor (a "Numeric" field, "1" represents
the rear of the conveyor), and the text for the alarm (a unique "Name"
field). For editing instructions for these types of fields, please refer
to the sections titled: "Name",
"Symbolic
Name", and "Numeric".
Below, once a set of fields has been selected for editing, is a rough
text-representation of this window:
Explicit alarm definition - 1
Explicit alarm device type t Access Gate
Explicit alarm code a NOKY
Conveyor 4 explicit alarm a MA01
Conv posit'n (1=rear)<1-256> 4
Device alarm text s Key (s) is missing from the maintenance/operator
╔════════════════════════╗┌────────────────────────┐┌────────────────────────┐
║ OK ║│ DELETE ││ HELP │
╚════════════════════════╝└────────────────────────┘└────────────────────────┘
This window is intended to guide you through the remaining steps involved
in the creation of the PLC code and operator interface.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Create, edit, compile and execute
HELP ESCAPE:exit
After defining the conveyor system, it is necessary to process the definition to
create the PLC code and the Operator Interface.
STEP 1 Generate the source code for the PLC code compiler, the symbols for the
inputs and outputs for the PLC code (these will need to be assigned to
the actual I/O by editing XXXXXXXX.AIN to XXXXXXXX.ASC), the remaining
symbols for the PLC code, the text for the alarms, the names for the
conveyors and the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyors diagram.
STEP 2 THIS STEP IS OPTIONAL. At this stage you may edit the PLC source code. Do
not make changes to the files marked as generated by the computer as
these files will be overwritten. You will need to edit the source code to
set traffic control algorithms and to write code not directly associated
with the conveyor system. You may also use a text editor on these files.
STEP 3 Compile the PLC source code to generate the ".PC5" file which may be
imported to the A-B programming software as well as this software.
STEP 4 THIS STEP IS SKIPPED IF NO COMPILATION ERRORS. Here the contents of the
error log (contained in the ".LOG" file) may be viewed.
STEP 5 For the purpose of testing or running without an A-B PLC5, you may load
the compiled PLC code (the ".PC5" file) into the software and have it
executing.
To use this window you may type the step number, or click or use the [UP]
and [DOWN] keys to highlight the desired step number then type [ENTER], or
double click on the desired step number. Subsequently, after exiting the
step, the highlight will be advanced to the next step in the process.
Overview of the Steps
There are five steps involved in the creation of the PLC code and the
operator interface, once the definition has been entered. These steps are
1
Generation of PLC source code and mimics from definitions
2
Editing PLC I/O tables and source modules
3
Compiling of PLC source code
4
Listing compilation errors
5
Loading and emulating the PLC code
Overview of the Generation Step
The first step is to instruct the software to take the definition tables
and from these generate the PLC source code and the symbols for the PLC
inputs, outputs, and other data elements. The software will also take
these tables to generate the operator interface, by setting the text for
the alarms, the names for the conveyor positions and the graphics for the
Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyors diagram.
Overview of the Editing Step
One of the files produced in the first step is "POCOLDME.AIN". This file
needs then to be copied into the file, "POCOLDME.ASC", and have the I/O
addresses inserted in it. The file, "POCOLDME.ASC", may contain, as well
as the completed "POCOLDME.AIN" file, the symbols and corresponding address
comments for any symbols you have created in the file, "POCOLDME.boo", and
the ".SBR" files.
Because of improvements to the syntax enable you to set the address
comments for symbols when they are declared in the boolean source code
files ("POCOLDME.boo", and the ".SBR" files), you are discouraged from
using "POCOLDME.ASC" for any purpose other than to contain the I/O
addresses and address comments.
You may, when adding the symbols corresponding to non I/O points, include
the data element address if you do not want the system definition to assign
them.
The format of the file, "POCOLDME.ASC", is the same as the Allen-Bradley
symbol export, ".TXT", files.
At this time you might also need to modify the "Devices.Mac" file and the
standard PLC source code modules, and, perhaps, to write some non-standard
PLC modules.
The syntax of the PLC source code is provided in this section to assist in
the development of these modules, though the sample modules should also be
of considerable assistance.
Overview of the Compilation Step
The third step is to compile this code to create the file, "POCOLDME.PC5"
(or "POCOLDME.SLC") containing the Allen-Bradley exported version of the
PLC-5 (or SLC-500) code and the file, "POCOLDME.TXT", containing the
Allen-Bradley exported symbol table.
Overview of the Listing Step
If errors are encountered in the third step, they can be examined in the
fourth step. Otherwise you should advance to the fifth step.
Overview of the Loading Step
The fifth step enables you to load the Allen-Bradley exported version of
the PLC-5 (or SLC-500) code and to execute it in the simulation
environment. The execution of the code may be monitored via the
Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyors diagram and the display and adjust PLC memory
window. Refer to the sections titled:
"Heavy-Unit-Load
Conveyors", and
"Monitor
and Adjust the PLC Memory".
Syntax of the PLC Source Code
The main functions of the PLC code compiler are to take a program
containing symbolic references to data items and macro definitions and
allocate data file elements to these references, expand the macro
references and produce code in a form suitable for import into
Allen-Bradley PLC programming software.
There is a strong correspondence between the source code and the exported
code, once the macros have been expanded and the symbols translated.
This documentation assumes that you are familiar with Allen-Bradley PLCs,
their programming, the programming software's import/export functions and
the format of these files. If you are not familiar with any of this, you
are referred to the manufacturer's documentation.
In processing the PLC source code, the case of all letters is ignored.
The following description will follow the order in which essential
statements should appear in the PLC source code and then describe the
remaining features.
Program Header
The first statements needed are to specify the type of PLC the software is
to be compiled for.
PLC-5 Series
When producing software for a PLC-5 series programmable controller, the
first line of an exported ".PC5" file must contain a line similar to "START
PLC5_40 SERIES_C REV_D COMPLETE". To instruct the compiler to produce this
line, your source code should begin with the following statement:
Target PLC is a "PLC5_40 SERIES_C REV_D"
For further explanation of this statement, you should refer to the PLC
manufacturer's documentation.
The compiler also tries to match the text specified as the "target PLC" to
an entry in the "ab_plcs.dat" file. If it succeeds, it will extract the
size of the I/O image tables and the status files from this entry. It
needs to match more than the first four characters of the entry and will be
deemed to match the entry with which it has the longest match.
Therefore it is not necessary for this file to have every series and every
revision listed unless the series and revision do not impact on the sizes
of the I/O and status files.
The format of entries in this file corresponding to a PLC-5 series
programmable controller, are similar to the following:
PLC5_40 SERIES_A REV_A > Plc5 I:177 S:127
This entry begins with "PLC5_40 SERIES_A REV_A", which describes the
programmable controller - matching the above example with 15 characters.
The greater-than sign (">") delimits this field. This delimiter should be
followed by "Plc5" (using this capitalisation), with nothing but spaces
between. This is then followed, in any order, by the designation of the
last word in the inputs file and the status file. The input file words are
addressed in octal, while the status file words are addressed in decimal.
The "ab_plcs.dat" file is to be located in the directory specified by the
"KTxD Path" configuration data item. Refer to the section titled:
"Configuration
Data".
SLC-500 Series
When producing software for an SLC-500 series programmable controller, the
first line of an exported ".SLC" file must contain a line similar to "START
1747-L542A". To instruct the compiler to produce this line, your source
code should begin with the following statement:
Target PLC is a "1747-L542A"
Following this statement needs to be the definition of the racks and the
I/O cards contained therein. These statements need to be in the same form
as expected by the ".SLC" file. An example would be:
For further explanation of these statements, you should refer to the PLC
manufacturer's documentation.
The compiler also tries to match the text specified as the "target PLC" to
an entry in the "ab_plcs.dat" file. If it succeeds, it will extract the
size of the status file from this entry. It needs to match more than the
first four characters of the entry and will be deemed to match the entry
with which it has the longest match.
Therefore it is not necessary for this file to have every series and every
revision listed unless the series and revision impact on the size of the
status file.
The format of entries in this file corresponding to a SLC-500 series
programmable controller, are similar to the following:
1747-L542A > Slc500 S:96
This entry begins with "1747-L542A", which describes the programmable
controller - matching the above example with 11 characters. The
greater-than sign (">") delimits this field. This delimiter should be
followed by "Slc500" (using this capitalisation), with nothing but spaces
between. This is then followed by the designation of the last word in the
status file. The status file words are addressed in decimal.
The "ab_plcs.dat" file is to be located in the directory specified by the
"KTxD Path" configuration data item. Refer to the section titled:
"Configuration
Data".
Program Tail
In the case of PLC-5 processors (as distinct from the SLC-500 series), as
well as a header, the resulting PLC instructions import file will need a
"tail", which provides considerable information for the processor, to
which I am not privy.
The tail is to be contained in a file with the same stem as the main PLC
source code file, with the extension ".cfg", that is "POCOLDME.cfg".
The best way to generate this file is to use the Allen-Bradley software to
write a minimal program for the desired processor, and export the processor
memory, then edit the resulting file and copy everything from the line
starting with "FORCE" to the ".cfg" file.
Failure to provide such a file will result in an error message during
compilation, and should you attempt to load the resulting import file into
a processor, you will have difficulty configuring the inputs and outputs.
Setting the Ladder File's Name
The main PLC source code file ("POCOLDME.boo") is compiled to form ladder
program file 2. The name this file is given is specified in the program
name statement. When you come to write the subroutines, you will need to
provide a similar statement to set the name for their ladder program file.
The syntax of the program name statement is:
program_name_statement = text "program_file_name[comment]"
text = any sequence of characters excluding
double quotation marks ("""); it is
discarded.
program_file_name = a letter, followed by up to nine
letters, digits, or an underscore ("_")
comment = a backslash character ("\") followed by
a sequence of characters, not including
a double quotation mark ("""),
providing four lines by ten characters
of address comment. The backslash
character can be used to terminate the
ten character line without padding it
out to ten characters, otherwise each
"line" is assumed to start after each
set of ten characters.
Examples of such a statements are:
Program Name is "MAIN"
and
Program Name is "Initialise\should be\called on\first scan"
Making the Emulator's Task Easier
When Allen-Bradley PLCs execute arithmetical functions, certain flags are
set within the processor's status file. When these functions are executed
by the Movement Controller, similar flags are set within the computer's
microprocessor, however moving these flags to the simulated PLC status file
is inefficient.
If your program does not make use of all these flags, better performance
can be achieved from the emulator by including one or more of the following
statements:
#NoSupportRequiredFor carry
#NoSupportRequiredFor zero
#NoSupportRequiredFor sign
#NoSupportRequiredFor overflow
Specifying Which Data Files to Use
When you come to declare miscellaneous data elements, you will be telling
the compiler only what type of data element it is and providing it with a
name. The compiler will need to add an element to a suitable file and
allocate that element to the declaration.
In order to select suitable files, you will need to tell the compiler which
files to use for which types of data elements.
The syntax of the data file use statement is:
data_file_use_statement = #Use data_file_type file decimaldata_file_type = [ bit | timer | counter
| control | integer ]
decimal = a digit from one to nine followed by
any number of digits.
Examples of such statements are:
#Use bit file 3
#Use timer file 4
#Use counter file 5
#Use control file 6
#Use integer file 7
Definition of Program Constants
If your PLC code makes reference to specific numbers, it is good practice
to assign these numbers to symbols and to refer, instead to these symbols
through your PLC code.
By doing this, if you need to change one of these numbers, it is
conveniently located and needs only to be changed in a single place. This
also provides better documentation for your source code, as the number
itself is largely meaningless.
The syntax of the program constant statement is:
program_constant_statement = #Assign INTEGER namevaluename = a letter, followed by any number of
letters, digits, or the following:
"_", "$", "@", "`", "{", "}".
value = numeric_constantnumeric_constant = [ decimal | binary | octal
| hexadecimal ]
binary = a zero followed by a "b" followed
by any number of "1"s and "0"s
octal = a zero followed by any number of
digits from zero to seven.
hexadecimal = a zero followed by an "x" followed
by any number of digits or the
letters "a" to "f".
The value of a program constant may be altered by a subsequent program
constant statement, using the same name.
There is another form of the "assign" statement, where the text "DATA"
replaces the text "INTEGER". This statement is explained later in the
section titled:
"Setting
Values into Data Elements".
Declaring Data Elements
All data elements used by your PLC code must be declared. The declaration
of data elements will either instruct the compiler to allocate a data
element or to use the data element specified in the statement, then
instruct the compiler what to call the data element, then, optionally
provide a value to the data element.
If the data element is a timer or counter, any value supplied will be
applied to the "preset" sub-element.
The syntax of the declaration statement is:
declare_statement = #Declare declaratordeclarator_list ;
declarator = [ data_address | data_file_type ] { symbol }
{ value { comment } }
declarator_list = [ ,declarator declarator_list | ]
data_address = PLC element address, e.g. S:0/0
symbol = a letter, followed by up to nine letters,
digits, or the following:
"_", "$", "@", "`", "{", "}".
value = [ numeric_constant |
the name of a numeric_constant ]
comment = a sequence of characters, not starting with
white space, not including a comma (",")
nor a semi-colon (";") unless preceded by a
backslash character ("\"), providing four
(three for elements with sub-elements)
lines by ten characters of address comment.
The backslash character ("\") can also be
used to terminate the ten character line
without padding it out to ten characters,
otherwise each "line" is assumed to start
after each set of ten characters.
The declarations of "Starting" and "AlarmT" include address comments.
The last example includes no symbol, it is merely an instruction to the
compiler to create a data file N15 of sufficient size to include the data
element N15:11.
The second last example provides a symbol and comment for an indirect data
element reference. Here "Alarm" is a macro reference, which is translated
as "B18". For information on macros, please refer to the section titled:
"Macros".
Setting Values into Data Elements
If when the variable was declared, you opted not to provide it with a
value, you are able to set that value afterwards.
The syntax of the set data values statement is:
set_data_values_statement = #Assign DATA symbolvalue
Examples of such statements are:
#Assign DATA X001Watchd TransferTimeLimit
#Assign DATA X002Watchd TransferTimeLimit
#Assign DATA X003Watchd TransferTimeLimit
#Assign DATA X004Watchd TransferTimeLimit
#Assign DATA X005Watchd TransferTimeLimit
#Assign DATA X006Watchd TransferTimeLimit
Include Source Code from other Files
Source code for your program may also be written in files to be included in
the main file so that standard modules can be referenced. This is
particularly useful when writing standard macro files, which you will want
to use in many projects, or to interface to software-written modules.
The syntax of the include statement is:
include_statement = #Include filenamefilename = an MS-DOS file name
A PLC rung contains branches, with tests along the branches and, if the
branch reaches the end of the rung, an output at the end of the branch.
The simplest test is the "examine input closed" instruction. The following
shows this instruction at the start of a rung in the ladder, export file
and source code:
LADDER EXPORT SOURCE CODE
║FirstScan SOR XIC S:1/15 FirstScan&&
║ This is
║the first
║scan since
║PLC startd
║ S:1
╟───] [────
║ 15
The "&&" shown in the above is only necessary if this is followed by
another such test.
The next simplest test is the "examine input open" instruction. The
following shows this instruction away from the start of a rung in the
ladder, export file and source code:
LADDER EXPORT SOURCE CODE
FirstScan XIO S:1/15 !FirstScan&&
This is
the first
scan since
PLC startd
S:1
────]/[────
15
The simplest output instruction is the "output enable" instruction. The
following shows this instruction at the end of a rung in the ladder, export
file and source code:
From the above example, you can see how the ( ... || ... ) reflects the BST
... NXB ... BND construct in the export file and the branches in the
ladder. You should also note that there is no equivalent to the start of
rung (SOR) and that the semi-colon (";") is used to represent the end of
rung (EOR).
Test Instructions
Now all other PLC test instructions fit within this structure, replacing
the bit reference (e.g. "FirstScan", "AlarmOn", "Silence") with their
syntax.
The syntax for a multi-operand test instruction is:
Examples of such instructions are "CountSoFar.GRT.MaxNumber" and
"M09ATag.MEQ.0xF,7".
Output and File Instructions
Now all other PLC output instructions fit within this structure, replacing
the "output enable" instruction and its bit reference (e.g. ".OTE.Siren",
"OTE.FlashLamp") with their syntax.
The syntax for non-assignment output instructions is:
output_instruction = .opcode. operand_list
Examples of such instructions are ".OTL. Siren", ".COP. #CStart:0,
#CStarted:0, NConveyorWords" and ".TON. FStarting, 0.01, 500". Note that
current value (".ACC") operands are not needed.
The syntax for assignment style output instructions is:
Examples of such instructions are "TTimeTaken := TWatchdog.ACC", and
"M089Tag := M089Ident .OR. 7".
The PLC file output instructions are triggered by a true-to-false
transition. When coding these in the source code, the compiler will
arrange for them to be triggered every scan.
Subroutines
The jump to subroutine (JSR) is a special output instruction, which is to
be provided with the filename stem of the subroutine file as the first
operand - in place of the ladder program file number.
To the filename stem will be appended ".SBR". This file should contain the
PLC source code for this subroutine. The file will require a program name
statement, then the text to specify the PLC instructions as per usual.
The first PLC instruction should be the subroutine (SBR) instruction if
parameters are to be passed to the subroutine, while the last PLC
instruction should be the return (RET) instruction if it is to return a
result.
The first parameter, after the filename in the JSR instruction, is the
number of parameters that are to be passed to the subroutine, whilst the
actual parameters to be passed follow this. Any further parameters beyond
the number of parameters specified, are the variables that are to receive
the results of the subroutine as returned by the RET instruction.
For example, consider the following two lines (which would be contained in
different program files):
The first line calls the subroutine defined in the file "TRIVIAL.SBR",
passing it five values: 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5. The subroutine, defined in
"TRIVIAL.SBR", places these five values respectively into registers:
N7:101, N7:102, N7:103, N7:104, and N7:105. The return instruction the
places the values 6 and 7 into registers N7:0 and N7:1 respectively.
Jumps and Labels
The jump (JMP) and label (LBL) instructions each require a single operand,
a name, which is used by the compiler to tie the jumps and labels together.
This name is used as the first line of the address comment for the label
and is converted to a number when producing the export file.
The remainder of the address comment may be included with the LBL
instruction, using the following syntax:
label_instruction = .LBL.name[comment]&&
comment = a backslash character ("\") followed by a
sequence of characters, not including two
adjacent ampersand characters ("&&")
providing four lines by ten characters of
address comment. The backslash character can
be used to terminate the ten character line
without padding it out to ten characters,
otherwise each "line" is assumed to start
after each set of ten characters.
Instruction Shorthand
Rather than always using the three-character opcodes, the following
equivalents are available:
*
(Multiply) is the same as ".MUL."
|
(Divide) is the same as ".DIV."
+
(Add) is the same as ".ADD."
-
(Subtract) is the same as ".SUB."
<
(LessThan) is the same as ".LES."
>
(GreaterThan) is the same as ".GRT."
= and ==
(EqualTo) is the same as ".EQU."
!= and <>
(NotEqualTo) is the same as ".NEQ."
>=
(GreaterThanOrEqualTo) is the same as ".GEQ."
<=
(LessThanOrEqualTo) is the same as ".LEQ."
Unsupported or New Instructions
If you need to use an instruction that is unknown to the compiler, you
should enclose the instruction, with its operands within double quotation
marks (""").
Arithmetic Expressions
Arithmetic expressions may be entered in the standard way using the
operators "*", "|", "+" and "-", along with the open and close parentheses
"(" and ")". The compiler will break these into individual PLC
instructions, storing temporary results in a set of words it has set aside
for this purpose.
The compiler will execute arithmetic expressions involving only program
constants. For example, given "X:=A+B*C" where B and C are program
constants equal to 7 and 3 respectively, and X and A are data elements N7:3
and N7:2 respectively, the code produced will be "ADD N7:2 21 N7:3".
Normal rules of precedence apply.
The other option is to enclose the expression within double quotation marks
and provide it as a parameter to the compute (".CPT.") instruction.
Allen-Bradley rules of precedence apply.
Boolean Expressions
This is very much the same as the branch construct introduced earlier.
However, you are permitted to precede the expression with a "not" operator
("!"). The compiler will try to invert the expression appropriately, or,
failing this, will create a rung to hold the expression, setting its result
to a temporary bit it has reserved for this, then examining the temporary
bit using an "examine input open" instruction in the rung in place of the
expression.
For example, the compiler, given "!(A&&B||C&&D).OTE.F;" would first try to
produce "(!A||!B)&&(!C||!D).OTE.F;", but failing this would produce the two
rungs "!(A&&B||C&&D).OTE.Dummy;" and "!Dummy.OTE.F".
Whether it succeeds or fails in its first attempt depends largely on the
complexity of the expression; in the above case it would be expected to
have succeeded.
Precedence of Instructions
Precedence is not applicable to the following operators:
StartOfRung
(SOR)
ContactClosed
(XIC)
ContactOpen
(XIO)
BranchStart
(BST)
NextBranch
(NXB)
BranchEnd
(BND)
EndOfRung
(EOR)
The instructions with the highest precedence (0) are the following:
Label
(LBL)
Subroutine
(SBR)
LimitedProcessing
- "
OpenParenthesis
- (
CloseParenthesis
- )
The instructions with precedence 1 are the following:
Negate
(NEG)
Integer
Sine
(SIN)
Cosine
(COS)
Tangent
(TAN)
ArcCosine
(ACS)
ArcSine
(ASN)
ArcTangent
(ATN)
ToDegrees
(DEG)
ToRadians
(RAD)
NaturalLog
(LN )
LogBase10
(LOG)
SquareRoot
(SQR)
RaiseToPower
(XPY)
Scale
(SCL)
The instructions with precedence 2 are the following:
Multiply
(MUL)
Divide
(DIV)
The instructions with precedence 3 are the following:
Add
(ADD)
Subtract
(SUB)
The instructions with precedence 4 are the following:
Complement
(NOT)
The instructions with precedence 5 are the following:
Mask
(AND)
The instructions with precedence 6 are the following:
ExclusiveOr
(XOR)
The instructions with precedence 7 are the following:
Set
(OR)
The instructions with precedence 8 are the following:
EmbeddedAssign
(:=)
The instructions with precedence 10 are the following:
Compare
(CMP)
LessThan
(LES)
GreaterThan
(GRT)
Limit
(LIM)
MaskedEquate
(MEQ)
EqualTo
(EQU)
NotEqualTo
(NEQ)
GreaterThanOrEqualTo
(GEQ)
LessThanOrEqualTo
(LEQ)
The instructions with precedence 11 are the following:
Not
(!)
The instructions with precedence 12 are the following:
And
(&&)
OneShot
(ONS)
OneShotRising
(OSR)
AlwaysFalseInput
(AFI)
The instructions with precedence 13 are the following:
Compute
(CPT)
BinaryToBCD
(TOD)
Output
(MOV)
Clear
(CLR)
MaskedMove
(MVM)
BitDistribute
(BTD)
Copy
(COP)
Fill
(FLL)
FileSearchAndCompare
(FSC)
FileArithmeticLogic
(FAL)
DiagnosticDetect
(DDT)
ReadWriteMessage
(MSG)
BlockTransferRead
(BTR)
BlockTransferWrite
(BTW)
OutputEnable
(OTE)
Latch
(OTL)
Unlatch
(OTU)
MasterControlRelay
(MCR)
TimeOn
(TON)
TimeOff
(TOF)
RetentiveTimer
(RTO)
ResetTimerCounter
(RES)
CountUp
(CTU)
CountDown
(CTD)
Jump
(JMP)
JumpToSubroutine
(JSR)
SubroutineReturn
(RET)
ImmediateInput
(IIN)
ImmediateOutput
(IOT)
PauseEmulation
(PAW)
The instructions with precedence 14 are the following:
Or
(||)
The instructions with precedence 15 are the following:
NextParameter
(,)
Be careful to distinguish between the "and", "or" and "not" instructions
(Boolean instructions) and the "mask" ("AND"), "set" ("OR") and
"complement" ("NOT") instructions (logical word instructions).
Examples of Instructions
The following are a set of examples, which provide at least one example per
supported instruction.
EXAMPLE 1: The following source code:
Target PLC is a "PLC5_40 SERIES_C REV_E"
Program Name is "MAIN"
#Rem Emulation optimization controls:
#Rem #NoSupportRequiredFor carry
#NoSupportRequiredFor zero
#NoSupportRequiredFor sign
#NoSupportRequiredFor overflow
#Use bit file 3
#Use timer file 4
#Use counter file 5
#Use control file 6
#Use integer file 7
.JSR.Trivial,5,1,2,3,4,5,N7:0,N7:1;
generates:
SOR JSR 5 1 2 3 4 5 N7:0 N7:1 EOR
EXAMPLE 2: The following source code:
Program Name is "TrivialTst\trivial\demonstr'n\program"
#Declare Bit TestBit1 0 Test bit\number 1;
#Declare Bit TestBit2 0 Test bit\number 2;
.SBR.N7:101,N7:102,N7:103,N7:104,N7:105.OTE.TestBit1;
.LBL.Loop1\Destinat'n\for\subsequent\JMP&&
(TestBit1&&!TestBit2||.AFI.)
.JMP.Loop1;
.RET.6,7;
generates:
SOR SBR N7:101 N7:102 N7:103 N7:104 N7:105 OTE B3/0 EOR
SOR LBL 1 BST XIC B3/0 XIO B3/1 NXB AFI BND JMP 1 EOR
SOR RET 6 7 EOR
and sets the comments:
AC 3 "TRIVIALTST TRIVIAL DEMONATR'N PROGRAM"
AC B3/0 " TESTBIT1 TEST BIT NUMBER 1"
AC B3/1 " TESTBIT1 TEST BIT NUMBER 2"
AC 3:LBL1 " LOOP1 DESTINAT'N FOR SUBSEQUENT
JMP"
EXAMPLE 3: The following source code:
Program Name is "TrivialInt\trivial\demonstr'n\interrupt\program"
#Declare Bit TestBit1 0 Test bit\number 1;
#Declare Bit TestBit2 0 Test bit\number 2;
.INT..IIM.I:7.0,7,1;
generates:
SOR INT IIM I:7.0 7 1 EOR
EXAMPLE 4: Miscellaneous instructions:
#Rem the following two lines are equivalent
N7:0:=N7:1;
.MOV.N7:1,N7:0;
#Rem the following two lines are equivalent
N7:0:=0;
.CLR.N7:0;
.MVM.N7:1,0x00F0,N7:0;
N7:0:=.NEG.N7:1;
F8:0:=.SIN.F8:1;
F8:0:=.COS.F8:1;
F8:0:=.TAN.F8:1;
F8:1:=.ASN.F8:0;
F8:1:=.ACS.F8:0;
F8:1:=.ATN.F8:0;
F8:0:=.DEG.F8:1;
F8:1:=.RAD.F8:0;
F8:0:=.LN.F8:1;
F8:0:=.LOG.F8:1;
F8:0:=.SQR.F8:1;
F8:0:=F8:1.XPY.F8:2;
27.LIM.N7:1,50 && N7:0:=N7:1.SCL.N7:2,N7:3;
#Rem the following two lines are equivalent
N7:1.GRT.0 && N7:0:=N7:1.MUL.N7:2;
N7:1.GEQ.0 && N7:0:=N7:1*N7:2;
#Rem the following two lines are equivalent
N7:1>0 && N7:2:=N7:0.DIV.N7:1;
N7:1.GRT.0 && N7:2:=N7:0|N7:1;
#Rem the following two lines are very similar
N7:1.LES.0 && N7:2:=N7:0.ADD.N7:1;
N7:1.LEQ.0 && N7:2:=N7:0+N7:1;
#Rem the following two lines are equivalent
N7:1<0 && N7:2==5 && N7:0:=N7:2.SUB.N7:1;
N7:1<0 && N7:2==5 && N7:0:=N7:2-N7:1;
B3/1.MCR.;
N7:0:=.NOT.N7:1;
N7:2.MEQ.0x00FF,12 && N7:0:=N7:2.AND.N7:1;
N7:0:=N7:2.OR.N7:1;
N7:0:=N7:2.XOR.N7:1;
.CMP."N7:0>=N7:2+N7:1" .CPT.N7:0,"N7:0-(N7:2+N7:1)";
.MCR.;
#Rem the following two lines show various forms of EQU and NEQ.
N7:1==N7:2 && N7:2=N7:3 && N7:3.EQU.N7:4 .OTE.N71_EQ_N74;
N7:1!=N7:2 && N7:2<>N7:3 && N7:3.NEQ.N7:4 .OTE.LORD_KNOWS;
B3/0 .ONS.B3/1 .OTL.B3/2;
B3/0 .OSR.B3/1 .OTU.B3/2;
.TOD.N7:1,N7:2;
.FRD.N7:1,N7:2;
.BTD.N7:1,4,N7:2,12,4;
.COP.#N7:1,N12:0,20;
.FLL.0,N12:0,20;
.FSC.N7:8,20,"#N12:0=5";
.FAL.20,#N12:0,"#N13:0.AND.N14:0";
.DDT.#N12:0,#N13:0,#N7:1,R6:0,320;
R6:2/FD .OTE B3/0;
#Rem Write to me if you need details on this one: .MSG.
.BTR,04,1,3,R6:1,N7:1,1,N;
.BTW,04,1,3,R6:2,N7:2,1,Y;
B3/0 .TON.T4:0,0.01,200;
B3/0 .TOF.T4:1,0.01,200;
B3/0 .RTO.T4:2,1.00,150;
B3/1 .RES.T4:2;
.ONS.B3/0 .CTU.C5:0,200;
.ONS.B3/1 .CTD.C5:1,200;
!B3/2 .RES.C5:1;
.IIN.45;
I:45/0&&I:45/1.OTE.O:23/0;
.IOT.23;
.PAW.;
Breaking Data Elements into Components
In order to make use of the indirect addressing features of the
Allen-Bradley PLCs, it is convenient to be able to refer to the file
number, word number and/or bit number of a data element. The following
constructs provide for this:
File_N(DataElemnt)
returns the file number corresponding to data element
"DataElemnt".
Word_N(DataElemnt)
returns the word number corresponding to data element
"DataElemnt".
Bit_N(DataElemnt)
returns the bit number corresponding to data element
"DataElemnt".
These statements declare four data elements. The last three, "DataFileN",
"DataWordN" and "DataBitN", are declared within data file N7 and are
set to the values, 15, 11 and 3 respectively.
Referencing Subroutines Outside of JSR
You may need to assign a subroutine file number to a PLC status variable in
order for the PLC to call in response to, say, a power failure. Use the
construct "Program_N(ProgFile)" to obtain the PLC file number corresponding
to the subroutine "ProgFile.SBR".
This provides the symbol, "FaultProg", for data element, S:29, along with
four lines of comments, "Fault", "routine", "program", and "file no.", and
sets its initial value to the program file used to hold the contents of
"FaultPrg.SBR".
Remarks - Comments
You can instruct the compiler to ignore the remainder of a line of PLC
source code by placing the text, "#Rem", at this point.
This is usually placed at the beginning of a succession of lines so that
you can describe what you are trying to achieve in the following section of
code.
Conditional Compilation
You can instruct the compiler to ignore certain areas of you source code
depending on the values you have set in your program constants.
The Boolean expressions must contain only program constants (i.e. no
references to the contents of data elements) as they are evaluated at
compile time - not run time. The Boolean expressions may include
relational tests on the results of arithmetic expressions. For example:
where "Emulation", "ButtLoadsTimeLimit", "TransferTimeLimit" and "Window"
are all program constants
Repeated Compilation
You can instruct the compiler to create multiple instances of a section of
your PLC source code. This is not normally useful unless your repeated PLC
source code can then instruct the compiler to produce something different
each time.
For it to be able to do this it must know which iteration of the repeated
code it is. For this purpose, when the code is repeated, the compiler
makes a program constant, "Iteration", available. This constant will have
the value 1 during the first incarnation of the code, 2 for the next and so
on. For example:
In the above example, the iterations work through a sequence of contiguous
words, bits and timers. In other applications, you may wish to work
through a set of parameters that are not contiguous, however, their symbols
have been defined using a common root and an incrementing identifer
appended to this root.
Considering the above example, we might have a set of integers named
"Tag1", "Tag2", et cetera, a set of inputs named "StopPe1",
"StopPe2", et cetera, a set of timers named "PeTimer1", "PeTimer2", et
cetera, and a set of alarms named "StopPeAl1", "StopPeAl2", et cetera.
When we are forming these symbols, within the "repeat", we need to place
"Iteration" within a pair of question marks, so that the new repeat
definition becomes:
This use of question marks instructs the compiler, when expecting a symbol,
to evaluate the following text as a program constant, convert that program
constant to an ASCII string representing the value in base 10, then include
the result within the symbol that is in the process of being extracted from
the code. This can be used with other program constants and outside
"repeat" definitions.
The second question mark, in the above examples, is optional, as the end of
the program constant would be suitably delimited anyway. The second
question mark is necessary where the program constant is to be imbedded
within the symbol and is generally good practice.
Macros
Macros are templates for PLC source code, whereby the source code needed to
control devices of the same type can be specified once for all devices of
the type, then invoked individually for each device of the type.
The syntax for the macro definition header is:
macro_header = #Macro name { ( formal_parameter_list ) }
formal_parameter_list = [ formal_parameter
{ , formal_parameter_list } | ]
formal_parameter = a sequence of characters, starting with
a printable character and not containing
semi-colons, commas, close parentheses,
or end-of-line.
Following this header is the body of the macro definition. Any sequence of
characters within the body of the macro that matches a formal parameter
will be replaced with the corresponding parameter from the macro invocation
when the macro is invoked.
To avoid inadvertent parameter matching, your formal parameters should
contain strings unlikely to appear naturally. For example, you could
prefix and suffix each formal parameter with, say, "$".
Should you need to break your formal parameter list up over several lines,
a "new line" indication may be placed after the open parenthesis ("(") or
after a comma (",") and a space - i.e. a space must appear between the
comma and the "new line" indication.
The end macro instruction, "#EndM", is placed after the body of the macro,
terminating the macro.
Due to the structure of the macro definition, the macro will normally
contain end-of-line characters. In some instances this can be undesirable,
so in these instances you can restrict the extent of the macro body using
the text, "#<" to set the start of the macro body and the text, "#>", to
set the end of the macro body.
This resulting code also contains a macro definition and invocation, "Tag".
When this invocation is executed, the resulting code generated would be:
#Declare N15:(12-1) ;
In this way we have created a name with which to refer to a PLC data file.
Evaluating Constants Earlier
Previously, we have advocated the use of the program constant statement,
which assigns a name to a value, allowing you to use the name in place of
the value throughout the PLC source code. If, however, you pass this name
to a macro invocation, it will be the name that replaces the formal
parameter, not the value.
For example, consider the following program constant statements and macro
invocation:
The compiler will have no problem evaluating "(FileLength-1)" and coming up
with the value 11, however it will have no idea of what to do with the
entity "NFileNumber". To overcome this situation, we prefix the parameter
with the text "EVALUATE(" and suffix it with ")", so that the new
invocation becomes:
Note that the question mark construct, introduced in the section on the
"repeat" definition, could also have been used to help out here.
The question mark and evaluate constructs are effective except within macro
definitions; within macro definitions they are treated as text and stored
with the definition ready to be executed when the macro is invoked.
Question mark constructs and evaluate constructs may be nested within other
question mark and evaluate constructs, except that question mark constructs
may not be nested, directly, within question mark constructs. You may nest
a question mark construct within an evaluate contstruct, which is in turn
nested within a question mark construct.
The first three, if "_CN_" and "NTags26" were, say, 26 and 4 respectively,
would result in:
Tag29<>0.OTE.Occupied;
The final example would, in attempting to evaluate "_CN_+NTags", raise an
error, complaining that "NTags" had not been declared. It would probably
follow this with several other warnings.
Embedding Macro Calls into Symbols
Your program may contain a range of symbols that are based on a common
stem, which, in turn, may also contain an identifying number. Consider,
for example, a number of shuttles, 1, 2, and 3, which might be known as,
"SHS11B", "SHS21B", and "SHS31B", which each have a number of
variables associated with them, which are identified using these stems with
various "tails", such as, "AtDE", "LdRq", and "UlRq".
You may need to construct the symbol for a given input, having only the
shuttle number to work with.
First you will need to define a macro that constructs the stem from the
provided shuttle number. Here we use the concept introduced in the section
titled: "Evaluating
Constants Earlier".
Next we need to construct the variable from the stem, in such a way that
the compiler knows that it needs to recognise the first part of the symbol,
the "stem", as a macro call. We achieve this by isolating the stem from
the tail, using the "##" construct as follows:
.OTU.ShuttleDeviceName##LdRq;
Had "ShuttleN" been 2, the resulting instruction would be:
.OTU.SHS21BLdRq;
Create PLC Code and Operator Interface
This is the first step in the assembly process. Once you enter this window
the software commences to create the software, listing the stages as it
executes them, and reporting errors as it finds them. You will need to
acknowledge each error individually.
The files "configur.mac", "conveyor.mac", "inputs.sbr", "setdata.sbr",
"transfrs.sbr", "interloc.sbr", "outputs.sbr" and "emulate.sbr"
comprise the PLC source code, while the files "____.ain" and "____.tin"
provide the symbols and address comments for the PLC code, where "____" is
the project name. The file "conveyor.mac" is produced with "conveyor.inc".
The files "alarms.asc", "conveyor.asc", "conveyor.inc" and "system.inc" are
produced as the system creates the alarm text and associated details, names
the conveyor positions, defines the operator interface to the conveyor PLC
and creates the conveyor diagram respectively.
The final stage, "Creating system.inc", involves the creation of the
Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System. During this stage the above list is
replaced by a rough conveyor layout. This can be configured to
single-step, requiring operator confirmation as each conveyor is added.
Refer to the section titled:
"Initial
Software Configuration" and, in particular, its subsection titled:
"Defining
the Conveyor System".
If not in single step mode, you will see the conveyor diagram being rapidly
built before exiting from this window, provided errors were not
encountered. Had errors been encountered, the diagram so far will be
presented, along with the error message, such as "Can not fit conveyor
system into the system diagram ...Strike a key". This message will remain
until you acknowledge it by typing almost any key.
Single Step
If in single step mode, as each conveyor is added to the diagram, the
prompt, "Control:<U/D/L/R/1/2/9/C/G>a" will be presented. The result of
typing one of the offered keys is as follows:
"U"
The view of the diagram is raised, bringing the upper parts of the
diagram to the window.
"D"
The view of the diagram is lowered, bringing the lower parts of the
diagram to the window.
"L"
The view of the diagram is shifted left, bringing the left-most parts
of the diagram to the window.
"R"
The view of the diagram is shifted right, bringing the right-most parts
of the diagram to the window.
"1"
Conveyors on level one will be displayed.
"2"
Conveyors on level two will be displayed.
"9"
The view will be rotated by 90 degrees.
"C"
The next conveyor will be added to the diagram.
"G"
This prompt will no longer be presented, all remaining conveyors will
be added without operator confirmation.
Edit Boolean File
This window allows you to edit the Boolean file defining the PLC code for
the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System. You are first required to enter the
name of this file, or to confirm that the file offered is the file you wish
to edit. You are to click on the "F2: select file" button, or type [F2],
to select a file other than the file offered and to start editing it.
Alternatively, you may click on the "F3: edit" button, or type [F3], to
commence editing the file offered.
This file is assumed to have the ".boo" extension, making it a "main file".
It is this file that is offered for editing when this window is first
entered.
When you enter the editor, the file is loaded into the editor's memory and
any edits you make are applied to this memory - not to the file itself.
When you exit the editor, you will be asked whether you wish the changes
discarded or written to the file.
Below, once you have entered the filename, is a rough text-representation
of this window:
Edit boolean file
Target PLC is a "PLC5_40 SERIES_C REV_D"
Program Name is "MAIN"
#NoSupportRequiredFor carry
#NoSupportRequiredFor zero
#NoSupportRequiredFor sign
#NoSupportRequiredFor overflow
#Use bit file 3
#Use timer file 4
#Use counter file 5
#Use control file 6
#Use integer file 7
#Include Configur.Mac
#Include Devices.Mac
#Declare S:0/0 Carry;
#Declare S:0/1 Overflow;
#Declare S:0/2 Zero;
#Declare S:0/3 Sign;
Editing POCOLDMEine 1 Column 1 Insert
This file and the other source files comprising the suite of files to be
compiled to form the PLC code may be edited by any editor (in non-document
mode if a word-processing editor) however this editor has some features
tailored to its work as editing these files.
Key Assignments
The editor allows you to allocate up to three keys to each function and
supports two modes of "select, cut and paste" in an attempt to allow the
editor to be configured to roughly mimic your usual editor.
This section describes the method used to display and set these
assignments. While this may seem a rather esoteric point to embark on the
description of the editor, we begin here so that you will be able to
configure the editor to best match your previous experience, thereby
reducing the level of learning required to use it.
If you press [F1], you will be presented with a list of the key
assignments.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Edit boolean file
Enter 1c0d e00d ---- Copy 4e2b ---- ----
Up 4800 48e0 ---- Cut 4a2d ---- ----
Down 5000 50e0 ---- Paste 5230 ---- ----
Left 4b00 4be0 ---- Skip word forward 7400 74e0 ----
Right 4d00 4de0 ---- Skip word backward 7300 73e0 ----
Page Up 4900 49e0 ---- Learn 2600 4100 ----
Page Down 5100 51e0 ---- Terminate 1400 ---- ----
Beg Line/Screen/File 4700 47e0 ---- Execute 2d00 4200 ----
End Line/Screen/File 4f00 4fe0 ---- Repeat 1300 ---- ----
Insert Overstrike 5200 52e0 ---- Quit 1000 11b ----
Delete This Char 5300 53e0 ---- Edit Macro File 1200 ---- ----
Delete Previous Char e08 ---- ---- Set Up Keys 1f00 3b00 ----
Delete To End Line 2500 ---- ---- Find 3f00 2100 ----
Delete Entire Line 2000 1519 ---- Find Next 5900 3100 ----
Select 532e ---- ---- Find and Replace 4000 ---- ----
Select Up 4838 ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
Select Down 5032 ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
Select Left 4b34 ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
Select Right 4d36 ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
Select Page Up 4939 ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
Select Page Down 5133 ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
Use arrows to locate key then press ENTER. ESCAPE to exit. Return
Editing POCOLDMEine 1 Column 1 Insert
This displays the key assignments in two columns. Each line of each column
corresponds to one key function. For each key function, the name of the
function and the scan codes of up to three keys are displayed. The three
scan codes are displayed in three columns, with one scan code highlighted.
In the lower right of the window, the scan code highlighted is explained.
In the above case, the highlighted scan code is 1c0d, with the text
"Return" displayed in the lower right area of the window.
The cursor can be moved, using the specified keys for the "Up", "Down",
"Left" and "Right" functions, to each scan code position to present
its translation or to change the key for the function.
To change the key assignment for a given function, move the highlight to
the function, and across to the required scan code column, then type
[ENTER], then type the key you wish to use for this function (or [SPACE] if
you change your mind about wanting to change the key assignment).
You can also use the mouse to select a key function and scan code column by
clicking on the corresponding scan code location. To change the key
assignment, double click on the location, then type the key you wish to use
for this function (or [SPACE] if you change your mind about wanting to
change the key assignment).
If you are calling up this window for help rather than to alter the key
assignments, you can have presented, next to each function description, one
of the key descriptions for the function. The key description presented
will be dependent upon which column the highlighted scan code is in. To
call this up, type [F1] again.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Edit boolean file
Enter Return Copy Grey Plus
Up 8/Up Cut Grey Minus
Down 2/Down Paste SHIFT 0/Insert
Left 4/Left Skip Word Forward CONTROL 6/Right
Right 6/Right Skip Word Backward CONTROL 4/Left
Page Up 9/Page Up Learn ALTERN' L
Page Down 3/Page DownTerminate ALTERN' T
Beg Line/Screen/File 7/Home Execute ALTERN' X
End Line/Screen/File 1/End Repeat ALTERN' R
Insert Overstrike 0/Insert Quit ALTERN' Q
Delete This Char ./Delete Edit Macro File ALTERN' E
Delete Previous Char BackSpace Set Up Keys ALTERN' S
Delete To End Line ALTERN' K Find F5
Delete Entire Line ALTERN' D Find Next SHIFT F6
Select SHIFT ./Delete Find and Replace F6
Select Up SHIFT 8/Up no key assigned
Select Down SHIFT 2/Down no key assigned
Select Left SHIFT 4/Left no key assigned
Select Right SHIFT 6/Right no key assigned
Select Page Up SHIFT 9/Page Up no key assigned
Select Page Down SHIFT 3/Page Down no key assigned
Use arrows to locate key then press ENTER. ESCAPE to exit. Return
Editing POCOLDMEine 1 Column 1 Insert
By typing the specified keys for the "Left" and "Right" functions, in this
mode, the key descriptions for the previous or next columns will instead be
presented. Right clicking on the mouse is equivalent to typing the
specified key for the "Right" function.
You are still able to alter key assignments in this mode. To do so, move
the highlight to the function, and present the appropriate column (as
described above), then type [ENTER], then type the key you wish to use for
this function (or [SPACE] if you change your mind about wanting to change
the key assignment).
To use the mouse to change the key assignment, by double click on the
location, then type the key you wish to use for this function (or [SPACE]
if you change your mind about wanting to change the key assignment).
Once you have finished interrogating or changing the key assignments, type
[ESCAPE] to return to editing you file.
This function is the "Set Up Keys" function, which, according to the above
screen dump, can be called up by typing [ALTERNATE S], whereas this section
has instructed you to type the [F1] key to call up this function. You will
notice on the previous window that two scan codes were presented for this
function, 1f00 and 3b00. These scan codes correspond to [ALTERNATE S] and
[F1] respectively.
Because of the flexibility of this editor, instructions for using it
throughout the rest of the sections of the document will refer to the keys
by their function.
Basic Editing
Most keys, when typed, result in their associated ASCII character being
added to the file's buffer and the appropriate character being displayed on
the window at the cursor position, moving the cursor one place to the
right.
Cursor Movement
The cursor may be moved about the window using the specified keys for the
"Up", "Down", "Left" and "Right" functions, in the natural manner.
The cursor may be set to any text position displayed, by clicking on that
text. You can not place the cursor beyond the end of the line.
Pressing any of the keys specified for the "Enter" function, will move the
cursor to the start of the next line, possibly scrolling the window
upwards.
The cursor may be moved to the beginning or end of the current line by
typing a key specified for "Beg Line/Screen/File" or "End Line/Screen/File"
function respectively when not at the beginning or end of the line
respectively.
The cursor may be moved to the beginning or end of the window by typing a
key specified for the "Beg Line/Screen/File" or "End Line/Screen/File"
function respectively when at the beginning or end of the line respectively
but not at the beginning or end of the window respectively.
The cursor may be moved to the beginning of the current string of
characters (or if already there to the beginning of the previous string) by
typing a key specified for the "Skip Word Backward".
The cursor may be moved to the beginning of the next string of characters
by typing a key specified for the "Skip Word Forward".
Screen Movement
The window displays only a portion of the file. The window can be made to
view other portions of the file by typing any of the keys specified for the
"Page Up" and "Page Down" functions to move the window a number of
lines up or down the file.
The window may be moved to the beginning or end of the file by typing a key
specified for "Beg Line/Screen/File" or "End Line/Screen/File" function
respectively when at the beginning of the first line on the window or at
the end of the last line on the window respectively.
Scroll Bars
There are scroll bars for both horizontal and vertical. Operating the
scroll bars will cause the cursor to be dragged along by the trailing
window edge so that it remains on the screen.
Find
A further means of cursor and window movement may be achieved using the
find functions.
After typing any of the keys for the "Find" function, you will be prompted
to enter the text you wish to find. When you terminate this entry, an
attempt will be made to find the specified text.
The search is conducted from the cursor position to the end of the file.
In matching the text to the file, the case of letters is ignored. The case
is ignored because this editor is explicitly designed to edit files that
are used to create the Allen-Bradley PLC software. These files are to be
compiled by the built in compiler, which itself ignores the case of
letters.
If the text is not found, a message to this effect will be presented, which
you will be required to acknowledge by typing any key.
Had the text been found, the cursor and window will be relocated within the
file to this text.
Once the text has been searched for once, a further search may be initiated
by typing one of the keys for the "Find Next" function.
Find and Replace
You can ask the editor to replace one, several or all occurrences of a
specified text string with another by typing one of the keys for the "Find
and Replace" function.
In response, you will be prompted to enter the text you wish to find and
then the text you wish to replace it with. When you terminate the second
entry (the replacement text), an attempt will be made to find the first
specified text.
The search is conducted from the cursor position to the end of the file.
In matching the text to the file, the case of letters is ignored.
As each occurrence is found, the text will be highlighted and the prompt,
"Replace/No/Global <R/N/G>", will be presented. Enter "R" to replace
the highlighted text, "N" to skip to the next occurrence or "G" to replace
this and all subsequent occurrences. Alternatively you can quit from the
replace cycle by typing [ESCAPE].
The above question is presented just below the window, or else to the right
of the window, or failing both these options, in the middle of the screen.
If the above question appears in an inconvenient location, you should
resize or reposition your editing window so as to allow room for dialogue
windows to appear below or to the right of the window. If you simply
reposition the dialogue window, it will have no effect on the next time it
is presented.
If the first character of the replacement text is upper case, or the first
character of the found text is lower case, the replacement text will be
unmodified as it replaces the found text.
On the other hand, if the first character of the replacement text is lower
case, and the first character of the found text is upper case, the
replacement text will be modified as it replaces the found text. If the
second character of the found text is also upper case, the replacement text
will be converted to upper case as it replaces the found text. Had the
second character of the found text been lower case, only the first
character of the replacement text will be converted to upper case as it
replaces the found text.
You should not be overly concerned with the case of characters, as this is
ignored by the compiler for which these files are created.
Insert or Overtype Mode
Normally as characters are being typed and the cursor is moving to the
right, the text previously at the cursor position is advanced with the
cursor, inserting the new characters between it and the character that was
previously to the left of the cursor.
Also, when typing one of the keys for the "Enter" function, before the
cursor is relocated to the beginning of the next line, the lines below the
cursor are moved down by one line and any characters to the right of the
cursor will be relocated to the start of the new line.
In overtype mode, the character at the cursor position is replaced by the
new character entered. The cursor still moves one place to the right.
Also, when typing one of the keys for the "Enter" function, only the cursor
is relocated; all the text remains where it is.
This mode is toggled between insert and overtype each time one of the keys
corresponding to the "Insert Overtype" function is typed. The current mode
is displayed just left of the centre of the third last line on the window.
Deleting Text
The character at the cursor may be deleted by typing one of the keys for
the "Delete This Char" function. The cursor will be unmoved, and any text
to the right of the cursor will be moved one place left.
The character to the left of the cursor may be deleted by typing one of the
keys for the "Delete Previous Char" function. The cursor will be moved to
the left, and any text at or to the right of the cursor will be moved one
place left.
The remainder of the line, from the character the cursor is at to the end
of the line, may be deleted by typing one of the keys for the "Delete To
End Line" function. The cursor will be unmoved.
The line the cursor is on may be deleted by typing one of the keys for the
"Delete Entire Line" function. The cursor will be unmoved, and any
lines below the cursor will be moved up by one line.
Select, Cut and Paste
The concept of "select, cut and paste" is common to most screen editors.
You are first to define a portion of the document by placing a marker at
the start and end of the portion; this is the "select" phase. You then
remove the text so marked; this is the "cut" phase. You can then relocate
your cursor and insert the saved portion of the document there; this is the
"paste" phase.
As you define an area to cut, the characters to be removed are highlighted.
The character where the cut is started is included in the cut if the end of
the cut is ahead of it, otherwise it will be excluded. Similarly, the
character at the end of the cut is included if the start of the cut is
ahead of it, otherwise it will be excluded. In other words, if the start
and end of the cut are coincident, no characters are included in the cut,
but otherwise either the character at the start of the cut or the character
at the end of the cut will be included in the cut, depending upon which is
the first in the file.
This behaviour is at odds with most editors, with which I have had
experience, however, it is the more correct behaviour, allowing you to
simply cut a number of lines by selecting at the start of one line and
cutting at the start of another. With other editors, this would include
the first character of the line after the cut within the cut. This
behaviour is, however, asymetrical, so if you are in the habit of starting
the selection then extending backwards, you will need to bear this in mind.
There are two methods of "Select, Cut and Paste" employed. Using the first
method, you explicitly flag the beginning of the selection, using one of
the keys for the "Select" function, then move the cursor/window to the
point in the file at which you wish to end the selection. Refer the
sections titled:
"Cursor
Movement", "Screen
Movement", and "Find".
You can then either delete the selection (by typing one of the keys for the
"Delete This Char" function), copy it to the "paste" buffer (by typing
one of the keys for the "Copy" function), or cut it - copy it then delete
it - to the "paste" buffer (by typing one of the keys for the "Cut"
function).
Using this first method, you can cancel a selection by again typing one of
the keys for the "Select" function.
Using the second method, you flag the beginning of the selection the first
time you type a key corresponding to one of the following "Select and Move"
functions to extend or reduce the selection:
Select Up
moves the end of the selection up by one line
Select Down
moves the end of the selection down by one line
Select Left
moves the end of the selection left by one character
Select Right
moves the end of the selection right by one character
Select Page Up
moves the end of the selection up by twenty-two lines
Select Page Down
moves the end of the selection down by twenty-two lines
The selection can then be deleted, copied or cut as described for the first
method.
Using this second method, you can cancel a selection by typing one of the
keys for the "Cursor Movement" or "Screen Movement" functions. Refer the
sections titled:
"Cursor
Movement", and "Screen
Movement".
You can use the mouse to emulate the second method, by clicking down on the
first character to be included in the text to be cut, then with the button
held down, moving the mouse ahead to just past the last character to be
included. Alternatively, you can click down on the first character beyond
the text to be included in the cut and then move the mouse back to the
first character to be included.
As you are moving the mouse, you may also use the keyboard to scroll
through or across the file. In particular, if you type a [SHIFT] key while
the left mouse button is held down, the window will be scrolled by a few
lines and/or columns away from the mouse, if the mouse is sufficiently
close to the corresponding edge or edges of the window.
After creating the selection using the mouse, you may right click on the
mouse to copy the selection, or use the keyboard to cut, copy, or delete
the selection. Also, after creating the selection using the mouse, you may
alter the range of the selection using the keys described above for the
second method.
After copying or cutting a selection to the "paste" buffer, you would
normally move the cursor to another point in the file, then insert the
copied or cut text at this point by typing one of the keys for the "Paste"
function.
Key Sequence Macros - Learning
Sometimes it is necessary to repeat a given sequence of key strokes an
inordinate number of times when editing a file. To alleviate this, the
editor may be instructed to remember these key strokes and to play them
back time and time again.
To start the recording of key strokes, type one of the keys for the "Learn"
function. Then proceed to type the keys you wish recorded; as you do this
the keys will be treated normally, resulting in the expected changes to the
file and window.
During this phase, the text "Learning" will be displayed alongside the
"Insert" or "Overstrike" text in the third bottom line of the window.
Please note that mouse movements are not learnt, so do not mix mouse
operations with your key strokes when recording key strokes. Also bear in
mind that the behaviour of key strokes is modified while the left mouse
button is depressed.
You should take particular care of how you start and end the sequence,
especially if you wish it to be executed a number of times in succession.
In particular, ensure that if you start in "Insert" mode that you end in
"Insert" mode, or if you start in "Overstrike" mode that you end in
"Overstrike" mode.
Once you have completed the sequence of key strokes, type one of the keys
for the "Terminate" function.
To replay this sequence, type one of the keys for the "Execute" function.
The sequence can be terminated and executed immediately by typing one of
the keys for the "Execute" function in place of typing one of the keys for
the "Terminate" function.
During the execution of the sequence, the text "Executing" will be
displayed alongside the "Insert" or "Overstrike" text in the third bottom
line of the window.
Repeating Key Strokes and Macros
The editor may be instructed to repeat any key stroke a given number of
times by first typing one of the keys for the "Repeat" function, then
entering the number of times the key stroke is to be repeated, then typing
the key to be repeated.
The key to be repeated may be one of the keys for the "Execute" function,
allowing you to execute the key-sequence macro a given number of times.
During the execution of the repeated key strokes, the number of iterations
remaining is displayed further to the right of the "Insert" or "Overstrike"
text than the "Learning" or "Executing" text on the third bottom line of
the window.
Edit Other Source Files
This is a special feature of this editor, relating to its application to
the creation of Allen-Bradley PLC software.
As well as the "main file" (the ".boo" file) the source code will typically
include a number of other files. These files are included by either coding
a "JSR" (jump to subroutine) instruction (subroutine files) or explicitly
including the file (included files).
The subroutine files all have extensions ".SBR" and are edited by moving
the cursor to the line containing the "JSR" instruction referencing them
then typing one of the keys for the "Edit Macro File" function. The
parameter to the "JSR" instruction is the eight character filename to which
is appended the ".SBR" extension.
The included files may have any extension (though generally ".MAC") and are
edited by moving the cursor to the line containing the "#Include"
instruction referencing them then typing one of the keys for the "Edit
Macro File" function.
Examples of the "#Include" instruction can be seen in the first screen dump
presented in the section titled:
"Edit
Boolean File".
In the case of either file type, subsequent to typing "Edit Macro File",
you will exit from the editor for this file and enter the editor for the
file in question. Refer to the section titled:
"Exiting
from the Editor".
Exiting from the Editor
To leave the editor, type one of the keys for the "Quit" function. In
response the software will check to see if changes have been made. If none
have been made you will exit from this file without any more ado.
If changes have been made, you will be presented with one of the following
prompts, "Save/discard/continue <S/D/C>" or "Save or discard work <S/D>",
depending upon whether you are exiting to return to the previous file (or
exiting completely) or are exiting to edit a subroutine file (or included
file) respectively. Refer to the section titled:
"Edit
Other Source Files".
If you had been returning or exiting completely and have now decided you no
longer wish to exit, enter "C".
Otherwise, enter "S" to save the changes or "D" to discard them.
Had you been exiting completely, you will be returned to the "Create, Edit,
Compile and Execute" window.
Compile Conveyor Code
Once the system has been defined and generated, the I/O addresses set, all
macros and other source code prepared, the system may be compiled.
Although this compiler was written to create Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor
System code, it is not limited to this application and can be used to
create Allen-Bradley PLC code for most applications. Refer to the section
titled: "Syntax
of the PLC Source Code".
When you enter this window, you will be presented with the project name.
Click on the "Select file" button to change this selection, and enter the
name of some other main module.
When the desired file has been selected, you may click on the "Compile"
button to start compiling the file. During this time, the file currently
being processed will be displayed at the top of the window and beneath this
is the line of code currently being digested. This second line of the
window will normally be changing too fast to be read.
As errors are encountered, the compilation is suspended, and the next ten
lines of the file from this point will be presented, along with the error
description. Once you have noted the error, type a key to proceed with the
compilation or [ESCAPE] to abort it.
Errors are also written to a side file as they are encountered. Once the
compilation is complete, this file may be viewed. Refer to the section
titled: "List
the Compiler Log File".
Upon completion of the compilation, the word "FINISHED" will be displayed.
You will need to press [ESCAPE] to exit this window.
Note: It is possible that errors will not be detected in this step, which
will surface when loading the emulator. It is also possible that the
Allen-Bradley programming software will detect errors not detected here nor
by the emulator; this is due to the ability of both the compiler to produce
code and the emulator to execute code more complex than the PLC can deal
with.
If you experience this, you should try to simplify the corresponding source
code. There is a strong correlation between the source code, the exported
PLC code and the actual PLC code so the identification of the offending
portion of the PLC source code should not be a difficult exercise.
List of Errors
The errors it is possible to receive are grouped and sorted alphabetically
within the groups. The groups are:
Fundamental problems
Mistakes in the source code
Exceeding the compiler limitations
Problems relating to opening or creating files
Internal compiler errors
Fundamental problems
No PLC source file has been specified
The compiler found itself being asked to compile, but the first character
of the filename was found to be a space.
Plc editor/compiler is currently in use by another terminal
This is a multi-user system, however the compiler, editor and other related
functions all make use of a common resource. As it is not anticipated that
these functions are expected to be used simultaneously, or, for that
matter, from any location other than the main console, This is not
anticipated to be of significant inconvenience.
Mistakes in the source code:
A label has been jumped to but not placed
At the end of producing a ladder file, the compiler checks that all jumps
(JMP) have been resolved and all labels (LBL) have been used. In this case
it found a JMP for which it had no corresponding LBL.
A label has been placed but not jumped to
At the end of producing a ladder file, the compiler checks that all jumps
(JMP) have been resolved and all labels (LBL) have been used. In this case
it found an LBL for which it had no corresponding JMP.
Bad syntax
In interpreting a rung, the compiler could not find an instruction where
one was expected.
Else encountered out of context
The "#Else" instruction must be after a "#If" instruction and its
associated "#EndIf" instruction.
End if encountered out of context
The compiler has encountered more "#EndIf" instructions than "#If"
instructions.
End of macro encountered out of context
The compiler has encountered more "#EndM" instructions than "#Macro"
instructions.
End of repeat encountered out of context
The compiler has encountered more "#EndR" instructions than "#Repeat"
instructions.
Expected a subroutine instruction
This is at the start of a subroutine where parameters are being passed to
the subroutine. If parameters are being passed, the subroutine must start
with the SBR instruction.
First parameter must begin with an alpha
The text, "#Assign INTEGER", is expected to be followed by a name. A name
must begin with a letter; this was not the case.
Incorrect file type in symbol's address
The declaration of a symbol, referenced a data file already known to the
compiler, with a file type not matching the file type when the data file
had been introduced previously. Note that the declaration of a symbol can
be included in the PLC source code, in the file, "POCOLDME.ASC", or the
file, "POCOLDME.TIN".
Incorrect number of parameters expected from subroutine
A subroutine call (JSR) expected a different number of parameters from the
subroutine than were provided in the RET instruction for the subroutine.
In this case the JSR was compiled after the subroutine.
Incorrect number of parameters in subroutine
The SBR instruction specified a different number of parameters than the
subroutine call (JSR) passed to it. In this case the JSR was compiled
before the subroutine.
Incorrect number of parameters passed to subroutine
A subroutine call (JSR) specified a different number of parameters to be
passed to the subroutine than were provided in the SBR instruction for the
subroutine. In this case the JSR was compiled after the subroutine.
Incorrect number of parameters returned from subroutine
The RET instruction specified a different number of parameters than the
subroutine call (JSR) expected from it. In this case the JSR was compiled
before the subroutine.
Instructions follow output instruction
After an output instruction, the only instruction allowed is the end of
rung instruction (";" and "EOR"), otherwise it must be at the end of a
branch, with output instructions at the end of all the branches in parallel
with it and no instructions between the branch end (BND) and the end of
rung.
Label must be at start of rung
Subroutine Label must be at start of rung
Label not placed immediately after start-of-rung
Subroutine label not placed immediately after start-of-rung
These errors advise you that the only legitimate place for the LBL and SBR
instructions is at the start of a rung. These two pairs of error messages
are equivalent, however they are produced during different phases of the
compilation.
Missing data memory symbol in "assign data" statement
The text, "#Assign DATA", is expected to be followed by a data element
reference; it was not.
Missing "ENDM" instruction
The compiler has reached the end of the file and a macro definition is
still incomplete; there was a "#Macro" instruction but no corresponding
"#EndM" instruction.
Missing "ENDR" instruction
The compiler has reached the end of the file and a repeat definition is
still incomplete; there was a "#Repeat" instruction but no corresponding
"#EndR" instruction.
Missing "ENDIF" instruction
The compiler has reached the end of the file and an if construct is still
incomplete; there was a "#If" instruction but no corresponding "#EndIf"
instruction.
Missing output instruction
There is no output instruction, or there are branches at the end of the
rung and one of the branches is missing its output instruction.
No output instruction in rung
Every rung must have an output instruction of some kind.
No PLC machine type. Something like "PLC5_40 SERIES_C REV_H".
The program header is missing.
No program name provided. Expect something like "Program_10".
The program name is missing.
One shot instruction must reference a bit
Either there was no data element following the ONS instruction, or that
data element was not a bit reference.
Output instruction is out of place
The output instruction can only appear at the end of a statement or at the
end of a branch, where there are no instructions beyond the branch.
Remainder of program ignored
This would normally accompany other error messages. As a result of those
other errors, the compiler has found that it had not progressed any further
through the source file during it attempt to process the last rung, so, to
prevent itself going into an infinite loop (which appears imminent), it
abandons any further processing of the current file. It may proceed to the
next file.
Subroutine instruction is out of context
The SBR instruction can only appear as the first instruction in a
subroutine.
Symbol used by two addresses
The same symbol has been used to describe two distinct data elements. Note
that the declaration of a symbol can be included in the PLC source code, in
the file, "POCOLDME.ASC", or the file, "POCOLDME.TIN".
Too many closed parentheses
Too few closed parentheses
These errors attempt to detect unmatched parentheses. There is a
limitation in this test - conditional compilation. If, say, an unmatched
open parenthesis appears in the "true" portion and the "false" portion of
an if-then-else construct, the compiler will count two open parentheses,
not just the one for the active portion. If you fall foul of this,
rearrange your if-then-else construct to avoid this.
Two symbols for the same address
Two symbols have been used to describe the same data element. Note that
the declaration of a symbol can be included in the PLC source code, in the
file, "POCOLDME.ASC", or the file, "POCOLDME.TIN".
Unknown constant variable in expression
The compiler has been evaluating an expression, where a constant is
required and has come across what is either a name for a constant, which
has not yet been "assigned" or is a symbol for a data element; data
elements can not be used to evaluate a constant.
Unknown symbol in indirect address specification
The symbol used to indirectly address a data element has not been declared.
Unrecognised file type
The compiler was expecting a file type, but found something that did not
match its knowledge of the types of Allen-Bradley data files.
You have turned off support for CARRY (S:0/0)
A reference to status file bit, S:0/0, has been made even though the
instruction "#NoSupportRequiredFor carry" was used.
You have turned off support for OVERFLOW (S:0/1)
A reference to status file bit, S:0/1, has been made even though the
instruction "#NoSupportRequiredFor overflow" was used.
You have turned off support for ZERO (S:0/2)
A reference to status file bit, S:0/2, has been made even though the
instruction "#NoSupportRequiredFor zero" was used.
You have turned off support for SIGN (S:0/3)
A reference to status file bit, S:0/3, has been made even though the
instruction "#NoSupportRequiredFor sign" was used.
Unknown symbol in FILE_N(XXX)
Unknown symbol in WORD_N(XXX)
Unknown symbol in BIT_N(XXX)
The symbol referenced in these constructs has not been declared.
Exceeding the compiler limitations:
Expression too complex #1
Expression too complex #2
Expression too complex #3
Try simplifying the expression in question.
Include files nested too deeply
An include file is allowed to contain the "#Include" instruction itself.
This is referred to as nesting include files. There is a limit on how
deeply this nesting can go.
Out of room in buffer for instructions
There is no more room in the buffer in which the instructions for the
current rung are being assembled. You may need to simplify your rung.
Out of room in buffer for macros
There is no more room in the buffer that holds the macro definitions.
Repeated code size too large
The amount of code generated by the "#Repeat" instruction is more than the
compiler has catered for.
Too many data tables used
The program uses more PLC data tables than the compiler has catered for.
Too many internal variables used
The program uses more "assign integer" statements than the compiler has
catered for.
Too many labels encountered in the one program file
The program uses more labels in a single PLC ladder file than the compiler
has catered for.
Too many macro definitions
There is a limit on the number of macro definitions allowed.
Too many parameters in macro call
When invoking a macro, the compiler has encountered more parameters than it
ever expected it would need to handle.
Too many parameters in macro definition
When interpreting the macro header, the compiler has encountered more
formal parameters than it ever expected it would need to handle.
Too many parameter references in macro definition
When interpreting the macro body, the compiler has encountered more
references to the macro's formal parameters than it ever expected it would
need to handle.
Too many program files referenced
The program uses more PLC ladder files than the compiler has catered for.
Too many symbols
The total of number of declarations - source code "declare" statements and
lines in the files "POCOLDME.ASC" and "POCOLDME.TIN" - is more than the
compiler has catered for.
Too many temporary variables required for rung
As the compiler interprets the PLC source code statement, it may need to
create PLC code to store interim results in data elements for reference
later in the interpretation of the statement in question. It has a fixed
number of such elements allocated to it, which it may reuse for the next
statement. This PLC source code statement has required the compiler to use
all these elements to store interim results and still need more.
Problems relating to opening or creating files:
Can not open ".ASC" file
The compiler has encountered an operating system error when attempting to
open the file, "POCOLDME.ASC". This is merely a warning. You do not have
to provide this file, its just rare for it to be omitted.
Can not open file "XXXXXXXX.XXX"
The compiler has encountered an operating system error when attempting to
open the specified file. This could be the main boolean file
("POCOLDME.boo"), an included file or a subroutine file.
Can not create ".SY5" file
Can not create ".TXT" file
Can not create ".LOG" file
Can not create ".PC5" file
Can not create ".SLC" file
Can not create "WORKFILE.TMP" file
The compiler encountered an operating system error when trying to create a
file. A possible cause is that you have run out of disc space.
Handle "error_file_handle" is already open
Handle "list_file_handle" is already open
These errors indicate that there is a problem with the Movement
Controller's house-keeping, with respect to opening and closing files.
Invalid include filename
The filename specified in the include statement is too long for an MS-DOS
filename.
Internal compiler errors:
Compiler error 1
Compiler error 2
Data table number is out of range when setting sub-element symbol
Embedded expression did not resolve appropriately
Expression was not resolved
Removing non-existent instructions
Sub-element number is out of range when setting sub-element symbol
Symbol number is out of range when setting sub-element symbol
Unrecognised file type when setting sub-element symbol
These should be referred to us, along with a copy of the database
("MAIN,DAT") and the PLC source code.
List the Compiler Log File
You would normally enter this window after encountering errors in your
compilation. Refer to the section titled:
"Compile
Conveyor Code".
This file contains a log entry for each file opened and each error
encountered. When you enter the file, should you not see your errors, type
any of the keys specified for the "Page Down" function for the boolean file
editor.
When you enter this window, you will be presented with the project name.
Should you wish some other error log, click on the "Select file" button to
change this selection, and enter the name of another main module. When the
desired file has been selected, you may click on the "List" button to view
the error log. Type [ENTER] to confirm that this is the project for you
wish to list the errors. In response the software will open the error log
and present the list of errors encountered.
This file lister shares the same key interpretations as the boolean file
editor. The functions it supports are: Up, Down, Left, Right, Page Up,
Page Down, Beg Line/Screen/File, End Line/Screen/File, Set Up Keys and
Quit. Refer to the section titled:
"Edit
Boolean File".
Below, after paging down, is a rough text-representation of this window:
List the compiler log file
Opening file OUTPUTS.SBR
Opening file SETDATA.SBR
Opening file ETRANSFR.SBR
Opening file EINDEX.SBR
Opening file RFTAGBIT.SBR
Opening file RTRANSFR.SBR
Opening file RINDEX.SBR
Opening file CONVEYOR.SBR
*** ERROR (line 25)Too many closed parentheses
*** ERROR (line 26)Too many closed parentheses
Opening file TURNTABL.SBR
Source listing of POCOLDMEse PAGE UP, PAGE DOWN, UP, DOWN, HOME and END
Type any of the keys for the "Quit" function to exit this window.
Load PLC Emulator
After successfully compiling the PLC source code, the export file can be
loaded for simulation.
When you enter this window, you will be presented with the project name.
Click on the "Select file" button to change this selection, and enter the
name of some other main module.
When the desired file has been selected, you may click on the "Load
emulator" button to start loading the file. During this time, the button
will remain pressed, and the word "Loading" will appear at the left of the
window.
When the loading has completed, the button will return to the unpressed
condition, and the word "Loaded" will appear at the left of the window.
Once the export file has been successfully loaded, you may start the
emulation of the PLC code by clicking the "Run emulator" button. This
operation takes an instant. The word "Loaded" will be immediately replaced
with "RUNNING".
You have now only to click on the "ESCAPE: exit" button, or type [ESCAPE],
and thereby exit the window.
Define the Crane and Rack Arrangement
This window provides a step-by-step method of defining the crane and rack
arrangement.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Define the crane and rack arrangement
HELP ESCAPE:exit
The definition of the crane system is accomplished through these steps:
STEP 1 Erase any previous crane and rack definition. (NB: Need to restart)
STEP 2 Enter the number of cranes (maximum is 8). (NB: Need to restart)
STEP 3 Enter the definitions of the crane racking. This allows you to set
individual cranes as non-existent, set the number of long travel and
hoist level stops.
STEP 4 Enter the correlation between the crane racking outfeed positions and the
conveyors servicing these positions.
STEP 5 Enter the correlation between the crane racking infeed positions and the
conveyors servicing these positions. At this stage, you should also enter
names for the other destinations of the conveyor system. Each conveyor
destination has an associated number which has been used in the conveyor
system definition. This number should be also entered here.
The first step, if you are starting a new crane system definition, is to
erase any previous crane system definition.
Having done this, the next step is to set the number of cranes in your
system.
These steps determine how many tasks will be needed to run to support the
cranes. These will not automatically kill the currently running crane
tasks or start new crane tasks; you must restart the software for this to
occur. You would not normally wish this to happen until you have completed
your definition.
The third step is to enter the definition of the crane racking.
The fourth and fifth steps tie certain rack locations to the
Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor positions, thereby defining the interface between
the systems.
To use this window you may type the step number, or click or use the [UP]
and [DOWN] keys to highlight the desired step number then type [ENTER], or
double click on the desired step number. Subsequently, after exiting the
step, the highlight will be advanced to the next step in the process.
Erase Previous Crane and Rack Definition
If you are starting a new crane system definition, you will need to erase
any previous crane system definition.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Erase pallet racking definition
╔══════════════════╗┌──────────────────┐┌──────────────────┐┌──────────────────┐
║ No, don't ║│ Erase ││ HELP ││ ESCAPE: exit │
╚══════════════════╝└──────────────────┘└──────────────────┘└──────────────────┘
To confirm that it is indeed your intention to erase the previous
definition, enter "E", otherwise type [ESCAPE] or enter "N".
Set the Number of Cranes
After selecting this step, you will be requested to enter the number of
cranes required. Once you do this, you will be ready for step 3.
Define the Racking
This is the third step, requiring that the number of cranes is set before
commencing.
This is a "Maintenance Viewing Data" window that lists each of the cranes
along with the definition of its racking.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Below, once a set of fields has been selected for editing, is a rough
text-representation of this window:
Rack definition - 1
Crane Existent <N>a Crane 1
N long travels side 1<0-255> 100
N hoist levels side 1<0-255> 10
N bays deep, side 1 <1-2> 2
N long travels side 2<0-255> 100
N hoist levels side 2<0-255> 10
N bays deep, side 2 <1-2> 2
Number of load heights <1-9> 1
╔════════════════════════╗┌────────────────────────┐┌────────────────────────┐
║ OK ║│ DELETE ││ HELP │
╚════════════════════════╝└────────────────────────┘└────────────────────────┘
Once you have completed these entries, type [ESCAPE] to exit the definition
of the racking.
Define the Conveyor System Infeeds
In this step we tie certain Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor locations to certain
locations in the racking so that the software will be able to coordinate
the retrieval of loads from the crane with the placement of loads on the
conveyors.
This is a "Maintenance Viewing Data" window that lists each of the outfeeds
from the cranes along with the conveyor position and the racking
coordinates corresponding to this point.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Define the conveyor system infeeds
Select Change Restrict Where Match Expand Insert First Last
Crane1Out |C161A|42:15-C-001-1 ^
Crane2Out |C101A|42:13-C-001-1 █
Crane3Out |C106A|42:11-C-001-1 █
Crane4Out |C111A|41:09-C-001-1 █
Crane5Out |C116A|41:07-C-001-1 █
Crane6Out |C127A|41:05-C-001-1 █
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
V
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
Database: Conveyor infeeds
Source names Crane1Out
The "Set of Fields" includes:
a name for the crane outfeed - not used elsewhere, merely identifying this
record - (a "Name" field),
the conveyor position where the crane will place loads it retrieves - (a
"Symbolic Name" field),
the racking coordinates used by the crane to get the load to this conveyor
position (a "Store Reference" field),
Below, once a set of fields has been selected for editing, is a rough
text-representation of this window:
Sources - Crane1Out
Source names t Crane1Out
Source conveyor a C161A
Source rack WW:RR-H-LLL-Da 42:15-C-001-1
╔════════════════════════╗┌────────────────────────┐┌────────────────────────┐
║ OK ║│ DELETE ││ HELP │
╚════════════════════════╝└────────────────────────┘└────────────────────────┘
Once you have completed these entries, type [ESCAPE] to exit the definition
of the racking.
Define the Conveyor System Outfeeds
In this step we tie certain Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor locations to certain
locations in the racking so that the software will be able to coordinate
the arrival of loads on the conveyors with the storage of these loads by
the crane.
This is a "Maintenance Viewing Data" window that lists each of the outfeeds
from the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System, along with a destination number
for loads looking to reach that destination, and if the location is a crane
infeed, the racking coordinates corresponding to this point.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Define the conveyor system outfeeds
Select Change Restrict Where Match Expand Insert First Last
Crane1In |1 |42:13-A-001-1 ^
Crane2In |2 |42:11-A-001-1 █
Crane3In |3 |41:09-A-001-1 █
Crane4In |4 |41:07-A-001-1 █
Crane5In |5 |41:06-C-001-1 █
Crane6In |6 |42:15-A-001-1 █
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
V
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
Database: Conveyor outfeeds
Destination names C024
The "Set of Fields" includes:
a name for the crane infeed - not used elsewhere, merely identifying this
record - (a "Name" field),
the destination number for the conveyor outfeed position from where the
crane will pick up loads (a "Numeric" field),
the conveyor position where the crane will pick up loads - usually left
blank as this is implied by the destination number, however it is provided
in case the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System has not been developed using
the system definition of this software - (a "Symbolic Name" field),
the racking coordinates used by the crane to pick up the load from this
conveyor position (a "Store Reference" field),
Below, once a set of fields has been selected for editing, is a rough
text-representation of this window:
Destinations - C024
Destination names t C024
Destination values <0-31> 2
At rack? WW:RR-H-LLL-Da 42:13-A-001-1
╔════════════════════════╗┌────────────────────────┐┌────────────────────────┐
║ OK ║│ DELETE ││ HELP │
╚════════════════════════╝└────────────────────────┘└────────────────────────┘
Once you have completed these entries, type [ESCAPE] to exit the definition
of the racking.
Enter or Modify the Carton Conveyors
The definition of the carton conveyor system and picking areas is performed
by the following steps:
1
Defining the types of conveyors. This provides the dimensions and speeds
of the conveyor types, and, of course, assigning a type name so that
conveyor section may reference the type.
2
Defining the pick and dispatch zones. These tie the conveyors to the
picking areas. The zones require a name and type.
3
Specifying the physical layout of the carton conveyor system along with
its associated picking or dispatch zone (if relevant) and the
identification of its motor (if any).
4
Placing the devices along the carton conveyor system.
5
Defining the standard picking compartment sizes. When the pick areas are
later defined, they will be matched to these to determine what type and
quantity of product they can handle.
6
Defining the different formats of the pick areas.
7
Specifying the physical layout of the pick areas, referring to the
previously defined formats.
8
Setting the addresses for the pick area divisions.
The window will appear as shown overleaf:
The lamps on the pick areas are intended to indicate whether the pick areas
are stocked and whether picking is under way. During the system
definition, they will normally reflect whether the pick areas have been
addressed. If the lamp corresponding to a given pick area is:
BLACK
none of its addresses are set in the database
GREY
some of its addresses are set in the database
YELLOW
all of its addresses are set in the database
Push Buttons
There are "push buttons" presented at the foot of this window. The purpose
of these push buttons is indicated by the text within them. The first
letter of this text is larger and is to be typed to "press" the button.
The button may also be clicked with the mouse.
There are also two operating-system-painted buttons. One of which,
"ESCAPE: exit", is for exiting from a "push button" selection or from
the window completely if no such selection is active. The other, "HELP",
calls up the help feature, refer to the section titled:
"Help".
If the button is grey, it is available. If it is dark green with black
text it is unavailable. If it is light green, it is either available with
there being some particular reason that you might wish to "press" it or it
is "pressed".
In response to activating certain push-buttons, the mode of control
changes. This is reflected by a change in the push-buttons available.
Record List
To the right of the push buttons, in the area initially showing the carton
conveyor system alarms, will be a list of records associated with the phase
of the definition currently under way.
Initially, before any definitions have been created, this area will be
blank. As definitions are created (i.e. records are added), they will be
listed in this area to the right of the push buttons, with one entry
highlighted. The highlight may be moved to other entries using the
following keys:
[UP]
Move the highlight up one line
[DOWN]
Move the highlight down one line
[PAGE UP]
Move the highlight up seven lines
[PAGE DOWN]
Move the highlight down seven lines
[CONTROL PAGE UP]
Move the highlight to the first line
[CONTROL PAGE DOWN]
Move the highlight to the last line
The highlight may be moved by clicking the line in question. Double
clicking will normally call up the "Set of Fields" for you to modify.
There will also be a vertical scroll bar for presenting records that do not
fit in the space provided.
In many cases, these definitions relate to portions of the conveyor and
pick-to-light mimic diagram. In these cases, as a record is highlighted,
the corresponding parts of the mimic will be highlighted as well.
The highlight may be moved to the line corresponding to a portion of the
mimic by clicking on that portion. Double clicking will normally call up
the "Set of Fields" for you to modify. Even before a definition phase has
been selected, you can, by clicking on a portion of the mimic, call up one
of the following definition phases: "Defining the Conveyors", "Placing the
Devices", or "Defining the Pick Areas", and highlight the appropriate line.
Defining the Conveyor Types
This window is entered from the first by pressing "T". A conveyor type is
defined by providing it with a name, the dimensions and pitch of its
rollers, the speed of the conveyor and the overall width. A nominal carton
length is also to be specified to allow the simulation to display the
cartons.
The conveyor types are referenced by the conveyor sections and impact on
the presentation of these conveyors and the simulation of the movement of
cartons along these conveyors.
To add a type, you need to press "A" or [INSERT], then enter a name for the
type and the details.
As types are defined, they will be listed to the right of the push buttons,
with one entry highlighted. Please refer to the section titled:
"Record
List".
Once some types and part of the carton conveyor system have been defined,
as an entry is highlighted, the conveyor sections referencing that type
will be shown in white.
The highlighted entry may be modified by pressing "M" or [ENTER] then
re-entering the details. The highlighted entry may be deleted by pressing
"D" or [DELETE]. If the entry is referenced, it can not be deleted.
To return to the first window, press [ESCAPE].
Naming the Zones
This window is entered from the first by pressing "N". A zone is defined
by providing it with a name and indicating whether it is a picking or
dispatch zone.
Picking zones are referenced by pick areas and certain conveyor sections.
The Movement Controller will be told what product is needed for which
cartons. It will find the product in the pick area, then know the zone it
needs the carton to reach. By matching this to the conveyor section with
the same zone reference it will know to where the carton is to be directed
and what needs to be picked when it gets there.
One dispatch zone will be entered for each carton. Once the carton has
finished its picking, the Movement Controller will need to guide the carton
to the conveyor section referencing this dispatch zone.
To add a zone, you need to press "A" or [INSERT], then enter a name for the
zone and whether it is a picking or dispatch zone.
As zones are defined, they will be listed to the right of the push buttons,
with one entry highlighted. Please refer to the section titled:
"Record
List".
Once some zones, part of the carton conveyor system and some of the pick
areas have been defined, as an entry is highlighted, the pick areas
referencing that zone will be shown in light blue while the conveyor
sections referencing that zone will be shown in white.
The highlighted entry may be modified by pressing "M" or [ENTER] then
re-entering the details. The highlighted entry may be deleted by pressing
"D" or [DELETE]. If the entry is referenced, it can not be deleted.
To return to the first window, press [ESCAPE].
Defining the Conveyors
This window is entered from the first by pressing "C". The carton conveyor
system is defined by defining a series of conveyor sections. Each conveyor
section is either straight or a constant radius curve, controlled by one
only motor, though this motor may control several sections.
The conveyor section is defined by specifying the physical location of its
left rear corner, the conveyor section that feeds it (if any) the type of
conveyor it is (these types set the non-length dimensions and the speed of
the conveyor), which zone it services (if any) and which motor drives it
(if any).
When specifying the conveyor that feeds it, the referenced conveyor must
actually feed it, not just end where it starts, as this information is used
to generate the routing.
A straight section of conveyor is completely specified when the entry for
its left rear corner is created and another conveyor section references it
as feeding it. Should it not feed another conveyor, an "end" entry must be
made, with the coordinates of the section's left front corner and
referencing the section as feeding it.
A curved section of conveyor is completely specified when the entry for its
left rear corner is created and a completely specified straight conveyor
section references it as feeding it. Should it not feed another conveyor,
a short straight conveyor section must be completely specified, referencing
the section as feeding it and angled suitably to define the end of the arc.
To add a conveyor section definition, you need to press "A" or [INSERT],
then enter the details as described.
As conveyor sections are defined, they will be listed to the right of the
push buttons, with one entry highlighted. Please refer to the section
titled: "Record
List".
If the highlighted definition completes the specification of another
conveyor section, that conveyor section will be shown on the conveyor
diagram in yellow, while, if the conveyor section corresponding to the
highlighted definition is completely specified, it will be shown on the
conveyor diagram in white.
The highlighted entry may be modified by pressing "M" or [ENTER] then
re-entering the details. The highlighted entry may be deleted by pressing
"D" or [DELETE]. If the entry is referenced, it can not be deleted.
Devices may also be placed on the conveyor from this window by typing "P"
then entering the details, however this is covered in more detail in the
next section.
To return to the first window, press [ESCAPE].
Interactive Conveyor Editing
Once a conveyor section is completely specified its position can be
interactively modified. To do this, first highlight the definition of the
conveyor section, so that its representation in the conveyor diagram is
shown in white, then press "E" to "edit section", then press "I" to set the
increments for orthogonal movements (metres - usually a decimal) and twists
(degrees).
Having set the increments, each time you press "U", "D", "L" or "R" the
conveyor section will be moved by the specified increment in either the up,
down, left or right direction. Similarly, each time you press "t" the
section will be rotated clockwise about the centre of its left edge by the
specified twist increment. Pressing [SHIFT T] rotates the section in the
counter-clockwise direction. The connected conveyor sections will be
distorted accordingly.
Once you are finished interactively editing the conveyor section, press "E"
to return to the definition of the conveyor diagram.
Placing the Devices
This window is entered from the first by pressing "D". The device types
are predefined and include barcode readers, check weighers, tape sealers,
diverters, draw bridges, pop-up stops, tape sealers, merges and diverges.
To place a device, it must be given a name, a type, a conveyor section and
a distance along the conveyor. Do not place the merges and diverges, as
these are done in one key stroke at the end.
To add a device, you need to press "A" or [INSERT], then enter the details
as described.
As devices are defined, they will be listed to the right of the push
buttons, with one entry highlighted. Please refer to the section titled:
"Record
List".
The highlighted device will be shown in yellow on the conveyor diagram.
The highlighted entry may be modified by pressing "M" or [ENTER] then
re-entering the details. The highlighted entry may be deleted by pressing
"D" or [DELETE]. If the entry is referenced, it can not be deleted.
When finished placing the other devices, press "S" to have the software add
the merges and diverges to this list. Check these on the conveyor diagram.
Mistakes in the placement of merges and diverges reflect errors in the
specification of the conveyor sections.
To return to the first window, press [ESCAPE].
Setting Compartment Sizes
This window is entered from the first by pressing "S". The compartment
sizes are used to specify which products and what quantity can be
accommodated by the pick area divisions. To define a compartment size, it
must be given a name, a length and height.
To add a compartment size, you need to press "A" or [INSERT], then enter
the details as described.
As compartment sizes are defined, they will be listed to the right of the
push buttons, with one entry highlighted. Please refer to the section
titled: "Record
List".
The highlighted entry may be modified by pressing "M" or [ENTER] then
re-entering the details. The highlighted entry may be deleted by pressing
"D" or [DELETE]. If the entry is referenced, it can not be deleted.
To return to the first window, press [ESCAPE].
Format of Pick Area Types
This window is entered from the first by pressing "F". By defining types
of pick areas, with formats for each type, we reduce the effort, which
would have otherwise been required to define the pick areas.
To add a pick area type, you need to press "A" or [INSERT], then enter the
name for the pick area type, then its dimensions (length, height and
depth).
Having done this the window will be replaced with a light blue rectangle,
with dimensions proportional to the height and width specified.
Below the rectangle is presented the details of the highlighted "cut"
(initially there will be no cuts).
At the bottom of the window will three push buttons and to the right of
these is presented the details of the largest matching compartment size to
the light blue division.
Typically, the pick area type needs to be divided into shelves with
vertical separations along each shelf. This dividing is achieved by
inserting "cuts" to create "divisions". To insert a cut press "I" or
[INSERT], then enter whether the cut is a horizontal shelf ("L" for long)
or a vertical separator ("C" for cross) then enter the position of the cut
from the left or top, in metres (you will be offered the mid point).
As cuts are made, the original rectangle is divided into a number of
divisions. One division will be shown in light blue, while the rest will
be shown in a deeper blue. Similarly, one cut will be shown in yellow,
while the rest will be shown in black.
The window will appear as shown overleaf:
Using the [LEFT], [RIGHT], [UP] and [DOWN] keys the light blue area may be
moved to any division within the original rectangle. As the light blue
moves, so does the yellow cut, however not all cuts can be made yellow.
The division (and its cut) may be selected by clicking within the division.
As the light blue and yellow move, the compartment size details and the cut
details will be updated to reflect the change.
The yellow cut can be deleted by pressing "D" or [DELETE].
Once all cuts have been made, press "E" or [ESCAPE] to return to the
definition of the types of pick areas.
As pick area types are defined, they will be listed to the right of the
push buttons, with one entry highlighted. Please refer to the section
titled: "Record
List".
If pick areas have been defined, those pick areas employing the highlighted
type will be presented on the conveyor diagram in light blue, while the
rest will be presented in a deeper blue.
The highlighted entry may be modified by pressing "M" or [ENTER] then
re-entering the details. The highlighted entry may be deleted by pressing
"D" or [DELETE]. If the entry is referenced, it can not be deleted.
To return to the first window, press [ESCAPE].
Defining the Pick Areas
This window is entered from the first by pressing "P". The definition of
the pick areas draws on the prior definition of the picking zones and the
pick area types. To define a pick area, it must be given a zone, a name, a
position (x and y), an access angle, and a pick area type.
There is another field provided, the "Right neighbour", which should be
left alone at this stage.
The position coordinates reference the front right hand corner of the pick
area. This information, combined with the dimensions supplied with the
pick area type definition and the access angle are sufficient to display
the pick area on the conveyor diagram.
The pick area is displayed as a blue rectangle with a black edge around
three of its sides. The fourth side is the side from which it is accessed.
To add a pick area, you need to press "A" or [INSERT], then enter the
details as described.
As pick areas are defined, they will be listed to the right of the push
buttons, with one entry highlighted. Please refer to the section titled:
"Record
List".
The highlighted pick area will be presented on the conveyor diagram in
light blue, while the rest will be shown in a deeper blue.
The highlighted entry may be modified by pressing "M" or [ENTER] then
re-entering the details. The highlighted entry may be deleted by pressing
"D" or [DELETE]. If the entry is referenced, it can not be deleted.
This job is usually the most tedious and time-consuming part of the
definition process. If the system is a large one, it may be worth placing
a few pick areas in key positions, then exporting the appropriate records,
editing them with your favourite editor to extrapolate to the remaining
pick areas then importing the resultant file. Refer to the section of the
TECHNICAL MANUAL titled: "Exporting
from and Importing to the Database".
To return to the first window, press [ESCAPE].
Addressing the Pick Areas
This window is entered from the first by pressing "A". Each division
within each pick area must be given a unique address so that messages may
be sent to it along a multi-drop communications channel.
This is performed by the following steps:
1
Setting an addressing pattern (Harness Wiring) for each pick area type.
2
Determine which pick areas are electrically adjacent to which.
3
Provide start addresses for each block of electrically adjacent pick
areas.
4
Set the pick-to-light unit addresses into the database for each pick area
division.
5
Write the pick-to-light unit addresses into the hardware of each pick
area division.
The first three of these steps specify the algorithm for assigning
addresses to the pick areas. The fourth step executes the algorithm to
assign the addresses to the database for each pick area division, while the
final step involves programming these addresses into the hardware.
The vital thing is that the address written to the database must match the
address written to the hardware.
To return to the first window, press [ESCAPE].
Harness Wiring
This window is entered from the "addressing pick areas" window by pressing
"H". Each division within each pick area type must be given a unique
address offset within that type.
The address offset consists of two numbers, separated by a period
(full-stop, dot or "."). The first we will call the wire number and the
second the station number. You can arrange that all addresses within a
single pick area be consecutive, in which case they would all share the
same wire number, normally "1", and have consecutive station numbers
starting from "1".
If a pick area using this type is addressed subsequent to a pick area to
its left, its addresses will be consecutively numbered in the same order as
its station numbers, while if the pick area is addressed subsequent to a
pick area to its right, its addresses will be consecutively numbered in the
reverse order to its station numbers.
If you use several wire numbers, you would normally start from "1" and work
up consecutively. You may have several pick areas alongside one another
and wish all divisions on the same level to be numbered consecutively. For
this you would use a different wire number for each shelf, and number your
station numbers from left to right.
If, rather than using one pick-to-light unit per division, you are using
one per column of divisions, with an LED at each division, then you will
require that the addresses are assigned consecutively in the vertical
direction first, as such units "consume" a consecutive run of addresses.
It is also better to arrange such units vertically, as there is provision
for them to fill in for damaged left or right neighbours - which they can
not do if they are their own neighbour.
This window presents the pick area types in a list to the right of the push
buttons, with one entry highlighted. Please refer to the section titled:
"Record
List".
As the harness wiring becomes defined, the lamps on the pick areas reflect
the status of the harness wiring for that type of pick area. If the lamps
corresponding to a given pick area type are:
BLACK
no harness information is set for the type
GREY
some of the harness information is set for the type
YELLOW
all of the harness information is set for the type
The pick areas employing the highlighted type will be presented on the
conveyor diagram in light blue, while the rest will be presented in a
deeper blue.
The harness wiring for highlighted entry may be created/modified by
pressing "M" or [ENTER].
Having done this the window will be replaced with a blue rectangle, with
dimensions proportional to the height and width specified. One division
will be shown in light blue, while the rest will be shown in a deeper blue.
Similarly, one cut will be shown in yellow, while the rest will be shown in
black.
At the bottom of the window will be a single push button (specific for this
phase) and to the right of this is presented the details of the largest
matching compartment size to the light blue division.
Using the [LEFT], [RIGHT], [UP] and [DOWN] keys the light blue area may be
moved to any division within the original rectangle. As the light blue
moves, so does the yellow cut, however not all cuts can be made yellow.
The division (and its cut) may be selected by clicking within the division.
As the light blue and yellow move, the compartment size details and the cut
details will be updated to reflect the change.
You need to move the light blue to each division and press "M" or [ENTER]
then enter the unique address offset (wire number and station number) for
that division of the pick area type. "Unique", here means that the address
offset is not used elsewhere in this pick area type - most pick area types
will include address 1.1 for example.
To return to the harness wiring window, press [ESCAPE].
Repeat this process for each pick area type.
To return to the addressing pick areas window, press [ESCAPE].
Setting Adjacency
This window is entered from the "addressing pick areas" window by pressing
"A". Given that we know how we are to allocate addresses within each
pick area, we now need to decide how we are going to allocate addresses
from pick area to pick area.
When you first enter this window, having completed all previous steps, but
not having assigned the adjacency between any pick areas, all pick areas
will be listed to the right of the push buttons, with the highlighted pick
area displayed on the conveyor diagram in light blue and the rest in a
deeper blue.
The software will expect you to assign electrical adjacency to physically
adjacent pick areas, but will make no assumptions beyond this. You should
highlight a pick area at the physical left hand end of a row of pick areas
then press "M" or [ENTER].
You will be requested to enter the zone and name of the right hand
neighbour. So long as the software finds physical right hand neighbours,
it will present these as a default. You would normally accept these
defaults. When you run out of defaults, you must decide whether you intend
to link this last pick area to a pick area at the physical left hand end of
a nearby row of pick areas, or to finish this run.
To continue the run, enter the zone and pick area name of the next pick
area, and continue through the defaults again.
To finish a run, enter nothing into the field. You will now notice that
not one, but several pick areas are now shown in light blue and that only
the first of these is presented in the list. If you now move the highlight
to another pick area, those for which you have set the adjacency will be
shown in grey, except the first, which is returned to the deeper blue.
Ultimately, once you have completed setting all required adjacencies, the
only entries in the list will be the starting pick areas for the
adjacencies, while the conveyor diagram will show the pick areas adjacent
to the highlighted pick area in light blue, the first pick areas of the
remaining adjacencies in the deeper blue and all other pick areas in grey.
To return to the addressing pick areas window, press [ESCAPE].
Running the Wires
This window is entered from the "addressing pick areas" window by pressing
"R". Given that we know how we are to allocate addresses within each
pick area, and that we know how the pick areas are interconnected, we can
now assign the start addresses to each adjacency run.
To define an adjacency run, you must first specify the start address, the
first pick area in the adjacency, the first wire number in the pick area
type to use and whether you are starting from the left of the right of the
adjacency.
The software will work its way through the adjacency till it reaches the
end, where it will prompt you to enter the next wire number. If you do
enter the next wire number, the software will then work its way back
through the adjacency to the first where it will again prompt you to enter
the wire number.
If you do not wish the numbers to run forward along one wire number then
backwards along the next, and so on, do not provide a next wire number when
prompted. Instead enter a blank wire number then start a new adjacency run
commencing again at the first pick area, this time specifying the next wire
number.
To add such an adjacency run, you need to press "A" or [INSERT], then enter
the details as described. The start address will be offered by the
software.
As adjacency runs are defined, they will be listed to the right of the push
buttons, with one entry highlighted. Please refer to the section titled:
"Record
List".
As the wiring becomes defined, the lamps on the pick areas reflect this.
If the lamp corresponding to a given pick area is black, no addresses have
been defined for any of its divisions. If the lamp is grey, addresses have
been defined for some of these divisions. If the lamp is yellow, addresses
have been defined for all of these divisions.
The highlighted entry may be modified by pressing "M" or [ENTER] then
re-entering the details. The highlighted entry may be deleted by pressing
"D" or [DELETE]. If the entry is referenced, it can not be deleted.
To return to the addressing pick areas window, press [ESCAPE].
Patch the Shelves
This window is entered from the "addressing pick areas" window by pressing
"P". This window allows you to access the records used to patch the
adjacency runs from one wire number to another.
These records are usually created in the previous section, however direct
access to these records may be of use. To define a patch record, it must
be given a zone and pick area name and the source and destination wire
numbers.
To add a patch record, you need to press "A" or [INSERT], then enter the
details as described.
As patch records are defined, they will be listed to the right of the push
buttons, with one entry highlighted. Please refer to the section titled:
"Record
List".
The highlighted entry may be modified by pressing "M" or [ENTER] then
re-entering the details. The highlighted entry may be deleted by pressing
"D" or [DELETE]. If the entry is referenced, it can not be deleted.
To return to the addressing pick areas window, press [ESCAPE].
Setting the Addresses
This function is invoked from the "addressing pick areas" window by
pressing "S". Given that we have completed all previous steps, we have now
provided enough information for the software to determine which addresses
to assign to each division within each pick area. As soon as we type "S",
the software writes these addresses into the database records corresponding
to each pick area division.
Allocating Communications Channels
This window is entered from the "addressing pick areas" window by pressing
"C". This window allows you to set which communications channels are
to be used for which ranges of pick area addresses.
To allocate a communications channel to a range of pick area addresses, you
must specify the name of the channel, then the first and last addresses it
will use.
To add a channel record, you need to press "A" or [INSERT], then enter the
details as described.
As channel records are defined, they will be listed to the right of the
push buttons, with one entry highlighted. Please refer to the section
titled: "Record
List".
Also as channel records are defined, the lamps on the pick areas reflect
this. If the lamp corresponding to a given pick area is:
BLACK
none of its addresses are allocated to a channel
GREY
some of its addresses are allocated to a channel
YELLOW
all of its addresses are allocated to a channel
The colour of the pick areas will reflect their relationship with the
highlighted channel. If the pick area is:
GREY
none of its addresses are allocated to this channel
DARK BLUE
some of its addresses are allocated to this channel
LIGHT BLUE
all of its addresses are allocated to this channel
The highlighted entry may be modified by pressing "M" or [ENTER] then
re-entering the details. The highlighted entry may be deleted by pressing
"D" or [DELETE]. If the entry is referenced, it can not be deleted.
Once the channel information is set, had the channel not previously been
used for this purpose, and is not allocated to any other purpose, the
channel communications parameters will be set to suitable default values
for this use and a message to this effect will be displayed in the error
line.
Had the channel been found to be allocated to another purpose, a message to
this effect will be displayed in the error line. This message must be
acknowledged by typing almost any key. To find out more about the use of
the channel in question, refer to the section titled:
"Channel
Setup".
The range of addresses specified is then checked against the other channels
and if a conflict is found, a message to this effect is displayed in the
status line.
To return to the addressing pick areas window, press [ESCAPE].
Writing to the Field
Before invoking with this function, the pick-to-light hardware must be
installed, connected to the correct communications channels and powered up.
This function is invoked from the "addressing pick areas" window by
pressing "W". Given that all the pick area divisions have been allocated
addresses, and that these addresses have also been allocated to
communications channels, we now need to inform the hardware of its
addresses.
The intention of all that has gone before is to allocate addresses to the
divisions in a logical fashion that is easily reproduced on the warehouse
floor. This is what we are now about to do.
Having pressed "W", the Movement Controller will broadcast a command to
wipe all addresses from all pick-to-light units.
In response these units will set their displays to "FFF".
You are now to go to each unit in order of ascending address and press the
"ACCEPT" button. The unit will respond by displaying the lowest three
digits of its address. If a unit requires several addresses (because it is
looking after several divisions), the next unit you press will show not the
next address but an address several higher.
For example, if the display units are each responsible for five divisions,
the first unit pressed will show an address of "001", while the next will
show an address of "006".
Once all units have been so programmed, press "W" to turn off this
function. All display units will return to blank. The software and
hardware are now configured.
Global Editing
As you proceed through the definition of the conveyors and the pick areas,
you may find that you have made some big mistakes.
This section describes some of the tools to be used to recover from some of
these.
This window is entered from the first by pressing "G". The window offers
functions to move the entire carton conveyor system, or selected portions
of it either up, down, left or right, and to alter its elevation.
If you wish only to alter part of the carton conveyor system with these
operations, you will need to first specify which parts. Do this press "J"
to enter the "just do some" window. Refer to the section titled:
"Just
Do Some".
After returning from the "just do some" window, had you left restrictions
in force (as was your aim) the "just do some" push button will be
illuminated.
To perform the global editing, press "U", "D", "L" or "R" then enter the
required distance to move the entire conveyor diagram (or a part thereof)
up, down, left or right respectively. To alter the elevation, press "E"
then enter "R" to raise or "L" to lower, then enter the distance the
elevation is to be altered by.
To return to the first window, press [ESCAPE].
Just Do Some
If, when performing global editing, you wish only to alter part of the
carton conveyor system with these operations, you need to first specify
which parts. To do this press "J" to enter the "just do some" window.
This window provides the ability to make the following restrictions to the
conveyor system:
"C"
Restrict global editing to the conveyor sections only. The devices and
the pick areas will be unaffected. This restriction can be released by
typing "C" a second time or by typing "P" or "D".
"D"
Restrict global editing to the devices only. The conveyor sections and
the pick areas will be unaffected. This restriction can be released by
typing "D" a second time or by typing "C" or "P".
"P"
Restrict global editing to the pick areas only. The conveyor sections
and the devices will be unaffected. This restriction can be released by
typing "P" a second time or by typing "C" or "D".
"X"
Restrict global editing to a objects within a range of X values. You
will be prompted to enter the minimum and maximum values in metres. This
restriction can be released by typing "X" a second time then entering blank
values.
"Y"
Restrict global editing to a objects within a range of X values. You
will be prompted to enter the minimum and maximum values in metres. This
restriction can be released by typing "Y" a second time then entering blank
values.
"E"
Restrict global editing to a objects within a range of elevations. You
will be prompted to enter the minimum and maximum values in metres. This
restriction can be released by typing "E" a second time then entering blank
values.
Once restrictions are in place, the responsible push button will be
illuminated and only those objects satisfying the restrictions will be
coloured normally. Conveyor sections with one end satisfying the
restriction and the other end not will be shown in yellow. Objects not
satisfying the restrictions will be coloured grey.
When satisfied that the restrictions are as desired, type "S" or [ESCAPE]
to return to the global editing window. Had you left restrictions in force
(as was your aim) the "just do some" push button will now be illuminated.
Changing the Appearance
The diagram can be scrolled (panned and tilted), rotated, and zoomed.
The [LEFT], [RIGHT], [HOME] and [END] keys are used to horizontally scroll
(pan) the view past the conveyors, with the [LEFT] and [HOME] keys moving
the view left and the [RIGHT] and [END] keys moving the view right. The
[HOME] and [END] keys scroll by larger increments.
The [UP], [DOWN], [PAGE UP] and [PAGE DOWN] keys are used to vertically
scroll (tilt) the view past the conveyors, with the [UP] and [PAGE UP] keys
moving the view "higher". The [PAGE UP] and [PAGE DOWN] keys scroll by
larger increments.
There will be scroll bars that can be used horizontally (pan) and
vertically (tilt) scroll the images.
By typing "R" or [SHIFT R] the display may be rotated or rotated back in 15
degree increments. [CONTROL R] will rotate the display in 1 degree
increments in the reverse direction to the last "R" or [SHIFT R] key.
[ALTERNATE R] will reverse the direction for future typings of [CONTROL R].
Clicking on the "ROTATE SH.: CCW" button, with the left button, rotates the
display clockwise while clicking, with the right button, rotates the
display counter-clockwise.
By typing "Z" or [SHIFT Z] the display may be zoomed in or out. [CONTROL
Z] will zoom by a finer amount in the opposite direction to the last "Z" or
[SHIFT Z] key. [ALTERNATE Z] will reverse the direction for future typings
of [CONTROL Z]. Clicking on the "ZOOM IN SH.: OUT" button, with the left
button, zooms the display in while clicking, with the right button, zooms
the display out.
These changes can be made permanent for this terminal by pressing "W" to
store them. To return to the settings last made permanent, press "L".
Enter or Modify the Palletisers
This is a "Maintenance Viewing Data" window that lists each of the
palletisers. These are defined to specify to the Movement Controller the
name of each palletiser, the PLC data file that contains the PLC and
machine definition and the patterns that are to be used by this palletiser.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Enter or modify the palletisers
Select Change Restrict Where Match Expand Insert First Last 1-nine
1|Palletiser|410|16|8S1 |9D2 |6U2 ^
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
V
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
Database: Palletisers
Palletiser PLC Palletiser 4
The "Set of Fields" includes the palletiser's name (a unique "Name" field),
the PLC data file containing the machine definition and the maximum number
of patterns allowed for in the PLC (both "Numeric" fields) and the patterns
(sixteen "Symbolic Name" fields). For editing instructions for these types
of fields, please refer to the sections titled:
"Name",
"Symbolic
Name", and "Numeric".
It is necessary to write to the PLC after making changes to the following
"Specific Instructions" windows:
The palletiser status and commands windows may be called up from the
Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor diagram by zooming into a related conveyor
position. This correspondence between these windows and the conveyor
positions needs to be specified; to do this refer to the section titled:
"Conveyors
from which to Zoom".
As you exit this window, you will be asked whether you wish to write the
pattern information to the palletisers. To do so, type [F1].
Enter or Modify Machine Definition
A "machine" is a mechanism that requires more status monitoring than is
afforded by the definition of devices within the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor
System and has not had explicit software developed for it (as in the case
of cranes and palletisers).
First a machine definition needs to be entered, which gives the machine a
name, tells the software on which PLC it is located and in which PLC data
file the status and alarms are presented.
Secondly, the bits within the status, alarm, and control words need to be
described so that the status and alarms may be presented meaningfully.
Finally, the graphical presentation of the status and the positioning of
the raw status and alarms on the machine status window needs to be defined.
This window has four selection windows, which will be displayed across the
top of the main window. Of these, one will be active at any given point in
time and one line from this selection window will be active. The remainder
of the main window, below these selection windows will be used to service
the active line of the active selection window.
The four selection windows are:
MACHINES
lists the existing machines, which may be modified, and
allows new machines to be added.
MACHINE'S AREAS
lists the existing window areas for the active machine,
which may be modified, and allows new areas to be added to the machine.
MACHINE'S INPUTS
lists the existing inputs for the active area of the
active machine, which may be modified, and allows new inputs to be selected
for the area.
CONDITIONS
lists the existing conditions for the active group of
inputs for this area of this machine, and allows new conditions to be added
to the machine's group of inputs. A group of inputs commences with the
first in sequence to have no conditions set for it and ends with the first
to have conditions set for it (in fact set for the group). If each input
has one or more conditions set, then each group of inputs comprises a
single input.
For each machine, a number of window areas may be defined; for each of
these window areas a number of inputs may be selected; for each input (or
group of inputs a number of conditions (or states) may be defined - the
inputs may be viewed independently or in groups. These windows are used to
define these machines, window areas and conditions and to organise the
inputs into the window areas.
The machine status windows may be called up from the Heavy-Unit-Load
Conveyor diagram by zooming into a related conveyor position. This
correspondence between these windows and the conveyor positions needs to be
specified; to do this refer to the section titled:
"Conveyors
from which to Zoom".
Navigating the Selection Windows
The active window is identified by its surround being highlighted. The
next or previous windows may be made active by typing either [RIGHT] or
[LEFT] respectively.
The line pointer may be moved up or down using [UP] and [DOWN]
respectively.
These navigating features also correspond to push-buttons presented at the
bottom of the window, and so are also available using the letters "R", "L",
"U" and "D" in place of [RIGHT], [LEFT], [UP] and [DOWN] respectively.
The selection window and line may be selected by clicking on it. Also a
pointer may be moved up and down, or the window scrolled by clicking on the
selection window frame immediately above or below the pointer.
In the area beneath these windows the data relating to the active line of
the active window will be displayed. In most cases, this data will be a
list of database fields, however, in the case of the fourth window, the
images corresponding to the active condition will be presented.
Modify, Add and Cancel Lines
No matter which window is open, lines may be modified, added or cancelled
(deleted) by typing "M" (or [ENTER]), "A" (or [INSERT]) or "C" (or "D" or
[DELETE]) respectively. A line may also be modified by double clicking on
it.
If an attempt is made to delete a line, a check is first made to ensure
that the line is not in use. If it is in use, you will be presented with a
message such as "Record is referenced by database number 456 - "Machine,
area belongs to"".
Otherwise you will be presented with the message "Are you sure? Press F1 to
confirm intention to DELETE ... STRIKE A KEY". If you strike [F1] the line
will be deleted; if you strike any other key it will not be deleted.
When modifying or adding lines in the first three windows, you will need to
enter a number of data fields, depending upon which window you are adding
lines to.
When modifying or adding lines to the "Conditions" window, a new window
will be presented allowing you to define the condition and the graphic
images used to represent this condition on the machine status window.
Defining the Machine
When a line from the "Machine" window is selected for modification, the
area below the windows will display the details corresponding to the
machine. These may now be edited.
The data you need to enter to define the machine, prior to defining the
window areas, inputs, alarms, controls, and graphics, is:
The name of the machine (a unique "Name" field),
The PLC that controls the machine (a "Symbolic Name" field),
The PLC data file containing the machine status and alarm information (a
"Numeric" field),
The background colour for the mimic (a "Symbolic Name" field),
The foreground colour for the alarm text (a "Symbolic Name" field),
The foreground colour for the status text (a "Symbolic Name" field),
The terminal location from which the controls (if there are controls and
if not all locations are to be allowed access to then) may be used (a
"Symbolic Name" field).
For editing instructions for these types of fields, please refer to the
sections titled: "Name",
"Symbolic
Name", and "Numeric".
Defining the Window Areas
A window area is defined by giving it a name and dedicating a rectangular
portion of the window to it. Inputs for a machine are each allocated to a
specific window area, where they are to be presented graphically.
When an input, allocated to a window area, changes, that window area is
erased then repainted. So as to minimise the amount of repainting, the
diagram is divided into these window areas, so that when one input changes,
only a single area of the window is updated.
Breaking the window into areas and developing the graphics in these areas
allows the relative position of the graphics to be simply adjusted to
create a more proportional whole.
When a line from the "Machine's Areas" window is selected for modification,
the area below the windows will display the details corresponding to the
area. These may now be edited.
The data you need to enter to define the machine area, prior to allocating
inputs to it, is:
The name of the machine area (a unique "Name" field),
The machine of which the area is a part - this is automatically set to the
selected machine - (a "Symbolic Name" field),
The start and end X and Y coordinates (all "Numeric" field).
For editing instructions for these types of fields, please refer to the
sections titled: "Name",
"Symbolic
Name", and "Numeric".
To display alarms on the machine status window, create an area of suitable
size (recommended width 168 pixels) and include the string of letters
"ALARM" in the area's name - case is unimportant. The text "ALARM"
will be presented at the top of this area on the machine status window, and
beneath it will be listed the active alarms.
To present control push-buttons on the machine status window, create an
area of suitable size (recommended width 76 pixels per push-button;
recommended height 9 pixels plus 32 pixels per push-button) and include the
string of letters "CONTROL" in the area's name - case is unimportant. The
text "CONTROLS" will be presented at the top of this area on the machine
status window, and beneath it will be listed the active alarms.
To display raw status text on the machine status window, create an area of
suitable size (recommended width 168 pixels) and include the string of
letters "STATUS" in the area's name - case is unimportant. The text
"STATUS" will be presented at the top of this area on the machine
status window, and beneath it will be listed the active inputs.
Select/Organise Inputs for an Area
The inputs for the machine are to be previously defined. The inputs are
selected from these for each of the window areas. As each input is
selected it is removed from the list of available inputs.
When images have been defined for the inputs, they will be presented in the
order in which the inputs are listed in this window, so that the images for
the later inputs will overlay the images for the earlier inputs. When
inputs are grouped together to define a set of images, these inputs must be
consecutive. For both these criteria, the sequence, in which the inputs
are presented in this window, is significant.
The sequence, in which the inputs are presented, is the same as the
sequence in which they are defined in the PLC status file. As this
sequence may not be conveniently altered, this sequence may be overridden
by providing some inputs with a sequence number. As a result all inputs
with the lowest sequence number will be presented first, in the sequence in
which they appear in the PLC status file, followed by the inputs with the
next lowest sequence number.
When this window becomes active, the inputs allocated to the active area,
if any, will be displayed.
The first step is to select inputs for this area. This is done by first
typing "A" or [INSERT]. The contents of this window will be replaced with
a list of the available inputs. Move the pointer to the desired input then
type [ENTER] to select it, otherwise, type [ESCAPE]. In either case, the
window will be returned to displaying the inputs allocated to the active
area. Repeat this process for each input required.
When a line from the "Machine's Inputs" window is selected for
modification, the area below the windows will display the details
corresponding to the input. These may now be edited.
The data you need to enter to modify a machine input, prior to allocating
images to it, is:
The name of the machine input (a unique "Name" field),
The machine area in which the input is to be displayed - this is
automatically set to the selected area - (a "Symbolic Name" field),
The sequence number of the input (a "Numeric" field).
Whether the input is a bit or a word (a "Character" field).
Once you have assembled the inputs required for this window, review the
list, setting sequence numbers so as to order the inputs ensuring those to
be grouped are consecutive and those whose images are to overlay others are
after those others.
It may help to view sequence numbers as group numbers, allocating "0" to
the inputs of the first group, "1" to the inputs of the second and so
forth.
Defining the Machine Input's Condition
The image to be displayed for a group of inputs is determined by matching
the state of the group with values set in this window, then presenting the
corresponding image.
The order in which the conditions are listed is significant if several may
satisfy a single combination of the states of the inputs. In creating the
image, the conditions matching the input states are executed from the top
of the list, so those lower down may overwrite those above. If you need to
rePosition a condition, highlight it then type "P". You may then raise or
lower the record using the [UP] and [DOWN] keys (or "U" and "D") to
relocate it. Once you have reached the new location among the conditions,
type "P" (or [ESCAPE]) to finish the rePositioning of this record.
To enter the data for a condition, a new window is presented, with two
areas. These areas are titled:
Condition Matching
specifying the input states
Graphical Images
specifying the shapes and colours for the image
In the top left, in a cut out the size defined for the area, is presented
the resulting image.
The window will appear as shown overleaf:
The cursor keys may be used to move the highlight to other areas.
Once the area to be edited is highlighted, you will need to type "M" or
[ENTER] before you can commence to edit the area.
The navigating features also correspond to push-buttons presented at the
bottom of the window, and so are also available using the letters "R", "L",
"U" and "D" in place of [RIGHT], [LEFT], [UP] and [DOWN] respectively.
The area to be highlighted can be set by clicking on it, while double
clicking on it will start you editing it.
Specifying Machine Condition Matching
When defining these machines, a number of inputs can be grouped together to
select a graphic image to reflect the implied condition. This group of
inputs can be represented by a number of such images, depending upon which
"condition" their state currently reflects. Refer to the section
titled: "Heavy-Unit-Load
Conveyor Device Condition".
When at least one condition has been defined for an input, its description
in the "Machine's Inputs" window will be shown white. Otherwise its
description will be shown yellow. If while in the "Machine's Inputs"
window you move the line pointer down past, say, two yellow inputs to the
next line, then move across to the "Conditions" window, the conditions you
then add to or modify within the window will apply to the group of inputs
including the active input and the yellow inputs above it.
After selecting a condition for modification or adding a new condition, the
first information you will be required to enter is what state or states
each input in the group should be in to match the condition and cause the
images you are about to define to be displayed on the machine status
window.
Corresponding to each input you can specify either "0", "1" or "X" to imply
that the input must be 0, 1 or anything respectively to match the
condition.
The [UP] and [DOWN] keys may be used to specify the input to be matched.
By then typing "1" (or [ENTER]), "0" or "X" the condition value may be set
to "1", "0" or "X" respectively. You can also specify the input by
clicking on it, and set and set the condition value by double clicking to
cycle through the three possibilities.
Once you have set the condition values for each input in the group, type
"E" (or [ESCAPE]) to exit from editing the condition-matching
specification.
Machine Image Editing
To create the image, we need to enter the specification of a number of
shapes to be presented within a machine window area.
These specifications are presented on subsequent lines within the
"Graphical Image" area. After pressing [ENTER], the first
specification will be highlighted and the shape corresponding to this, in
the window area, will be shown in black rather than its specified colour,
unless its specified colour was black, in which case it will be shown in
white.
There are up to eight details associated with each specification. The
first four are mandatory and consistent for all shapes and are:
"Shape"
"Colour"
"X Coordinate"
"Y Coordinate"
The available shapes are circles, characters, lines, rectangles,
semi-circles, numbers, and bargraphs. For circles and semi-circles, the x
and y coordinates refer to the centre from which they are generated, while
for characters and numbers, they refer to the upper left corner of the
character, for rectangles and bargraphs, they refer to one corner and, for
lines, they refer to one end.
Circles
For circles, the remaining details are the radius and thickness. The
thickness should be less than or equal to the radius, and if equal to it
will result in a solid circle.
Characters
For characters, the remaining details are the ASCII code for the character
in hexadecimal (extended ASCII characters refer to the IBM PC extended
character set), and the thickness for each logical pixel. The characters
are defined in sixteen rows by eight pixels, setting the thickness to 1
will present a character this size, to 2, twice this size, to 3, three
times et cetera.
Lines
For lines, the remaining details are the coordinates for the other end of
the line and the thickness of the line. If the thickness is other than 1,
lines will be thickened If the thickness is other than 1, lines will be
thickened to the left, looking from the first coordinates towards the
second.
Rectangles
For rectangles, the remaining details are the coordinates for the opposite
corner. Rectangles are always orientated with their sides parallel to the
borders of the window.
Semi-Circles
For semi-circles, the remaining details are as per circles, plus a
direction, which is either left, up, right or down.
Numeric Display
For semi-circles, the remaining details are the number of digits, the
number of decimal places and the base.
Bargraph
For bargraphs, the remaining details are as per rectangles, plus a
direction, which is either left, up, right or down, and a maximum value,
which, if negative, implies bidirection presentation.
With unidirectional (not bidirectional) presentation, the bargraph will
represent "0" and negative values as a line across the end of the defined
rectangle, perpendicular to the nominated direction, while it will present
positive values as a rectangle, extending from this line in the direction
nominated.
With bidirectional presentation, the bargraph will represent "0" as a line
across the centre of the defined rectangle, perpendicular to the nominated
direction, while it will present positive values as a rectangle, extending
from this line in the direction nominated, and negative values as a
rectangle, extending in the opposite from this line direction.
Change or Add Specifications
The highlight may be moved to other listed specifications using the [UP]
and [DOWN] keys (or "U" and "D"). To edit an existing specification,
highlight the specification then type "M" (or [ENTER]). To add a new
specification, type "A" (or [INSERT]). In either case you will be
presented with the form to fill in to define the shape.
The highlight may be moved by either clicking on the image of the
specification or the line corresponding to this image. If the position
clicked is shared by more than one specification's image, subsequent clicks
will cycle through these specifications. Double clicking will enable you
to edit the specification.
After changing or adding a specification, the image display will be updated
to reflect this.
Conveniently Add Text Strings
Type "L", or click on "Letters". In response, a dialogue window will be
opened, requesting the colour in which they are to be presented (a
"Symbolic Name" field), the coordinates at which the string will start
(both "Numeric" fields), the size of the letters (1 to 4, a "Numeric"
field), the string of letters themselves (a "Name" field), and whether you
want this string to replace all other letters currently defined for this
condition (a "Character" field).
After entering this information, the image display will be updated to
reflect this.
Reordering Image Specifications
The order in which the specifications are listed is significant if there is
an overlap between them. In creating the image, the specifications are
executed from the top of the list, so those lower down may overwrite those
above. If you need to rePosition a specification, highlight it then type
"P". You may then raise or lower the record using the [UP] and [DOWN]
keys (or "U" and "D") to relocate it. Once you have reached the new
location among the specifications, type "P" (or [ESCAPE]) to finish the
rePositioning of this record.
Relocating the Entire Image
Should you need to shift the image you have constructed, consisting of
several shape specifications, horizontally or vertically, first type "S"
for "SHIFT IMAGE", then type "L", "R", "U" or "D", corresponding to moving
the image left, right, up or down respectively. Alternatively, typing
[LEFT], [RIGHT], [UP] and [DOWN] will call up directly and respectively the
shift directions, left, right, up and down.
You will then be prompted to enter the number by which the image is to be
moved, in pixels. Once you enter this number, the specifications will be
adjusted accordingly and the image will be redisplayed in this new
position.
The effect of typing "S" remains in force, so to make further adjustments,
simply type "L", "R", "U" or "D", again then enter the distance.
When done relocating the image, type "E", [ESCAPE] or [ENTER], to return to
the editing of the specifications.
Duplicating Images
Often, the images for one condition may form a convenient basis from which
to build the images for another condition of the same inputs or a condition
of an entirely different set of inputs, possibly for a different machine.
By typing "F", you can have these images recorded. In response the "FLAG
ALL IMAGES" push-button is highlighted, while the "GET FROM FLAGGED"
push-button remains darkened.
Initially the "GET FROM FLAGGED" push-button was darkened because no images
were flagged. It is now darkened because the flagged images are its own.
If you were to exit the entering of data for this condition and select an
alternate condition (or create one), you will find that the "FLAG ALL
IMAGES" push-button is no longer highlighted, while the "GET FROM FLAGGED"
push-button is highlighted. By typing "G" at this time, the condition
matching specification will be reset and the colours and images will be set
to be identical to those flagged.
Viewing the Assembled Display
Once areas and images have been defined, they may be previewed by typing
"V". In response, the window will be replaced with a dark green
background. Each area for the active machine will be depicted by a thin
rectangle, black, except for the active area that will be yellow.
The image for the first condition for each group of inputs will be
displayed. To view alternate conditions, reposition the alternate
condition to the top of the list of conditions for the input group. Refer
to the section titled:
"Enter
or Modify Machine Definition".
Alternate areas may be made active using the [UP] and [DOWN] keys.
Special Functions
This menu provides access to windows reserved for the site configuration
and on-line fault diagnosis.
Below is a rough text-representation of this menu:
Movement Controller (C) Copyright 1998 to 2009 Woodgrove Digital Engineering
File View
┌─-─────────────────────┐
│New User │
│Operations >│
│Reports >│
│Communication reports >│
│Configuration >│
│Maintenance >│
│Definition >│ ┌─-────────────────────────────────────────┐
│Special Functions█████>│ │Edit databases │
│Exit │ │Monitor communications │
└─-─────────────────────┘ │Monitor and adjust the PLC memory │
│Monitor the securing of the database │
│Monitor threads of execution │
│Restore factory default settings │
│Importing and Exporting from the Database │
└─-────────────────────────────────────────┘
Use of these windows should be restricted to experienced personnel.
Edit Databases
You need to decide what you want to edit.
Most of the database fields are associated with a database, however, there
are many that are not associated with a database and so can only be edited
by selecting them explicitly. Generally it is more convenient to edit a
collection of fields as a database rather than just edit the individual
field, so, if the field is available as part of a database, this is the
better way to edit it.
So, bearing all that in mind, when you first select this menu option, you
will be asked whether you wish to edit a database or a field.
Should you opt to edit a database (which is generally the case), you will
then be asked to enter the name of the database that you wish to edit.
This dialog box contains a "Symbolic Name" field, so please refer to the
section titled:
"Symbolic
Name". Each of the subsections of this section, bar the last, describe one
of the databases.
Should you have opted to edit a field, you will then be asked to enter the
prompt that corresponds to the database field that you wish to edit.
Again, this dialog box contains a "Symbolic Name" field, so please refer to
the section titled:
"Symbolic
Name". Any fields that I have deemed fit to describe are described in the
final subsection of this section, the one titled:
"General".
Once a database or field has been chosen, a "Maintenance Viewing Data"
window, for that database or field, will be presented. Refer to the
sections titled: "Viewing Data", and
"Maintenance
Viewing Data".
Most of the databases that are of interest to you are more accessible from
other windows, however, some of those that may still be of use are
described in the following sections.
Screen Attributes
The screen attributes are used:
by the DOS based software, which makes use of all these attributes,
by some of the windows of the operator interface - mostly those of the
"Viewing Data" variety (these use "Basic Colour", "Symbolic
Match/Expanded", "Editing", "Highlight", "Expanded Highlight", and
"Restrictions/Screen title"),
by the operator interface when viewing a report (this uses "Editing",
"Expanded Highlight", and "Restrictions/Screen title"),
by the operator interface in the dialogue windows' "combo" widget, when
presenting options in pop-up boxes (see "Basic Colour", and "Editing"),
by the operator interface in the dialogue windows' "combo" and "entry"
widgets, when presenting the function key legend (see "Highlight"),
by the operator interface's configuration windows (see "Configure off",
"Configure on", "Configure off selected", and "Configure on
selected").
These records contain two fields:
The name of the attribute (a unique "Name" field). The name is intended
to describe the attribute's use, and either
The value of the attribute to be used by the daemon (an "Attribute"
field). This specifies the colour of the foreground and background of the
screen character position in which the character is to be written, or
The value of the attribute to be used by the operator interface (an
"Attribute for Graphics" field). This specifies the colour of the
foreground and background of the window character position in which the
character is to be written.
For editing instructions for these types of fields, please refer to the
sections titled: "Name",
"Attribute".
The names of these records are:
Basic Colour
This is the attribute used for the bulk of the text inside the windows.
The background colour is ignored. The foreground is also used for the
column headings.
The pop-up windows in the dialogue windows' "combo" widgets use this
attribute for the all options other than the highlighted one.
Symbolic Match/Expanded
When editing a symbolic name field using the DOS software, the characters
beyond those that you have already typed, which have been taken from a
matching name field are shown in this attribute.
Also, when using the viewing data windows, the records may be expanded to
display also the referenced databases. These referenced databases will be
shown using this attribute for both the daemon and the operator interface.
Editing
When editing a field using the DOS software, the field contents will be
shown in this attribute.
Also, when using the viewing data windows, the highlighted field in the
highlighted record will be shown using this attribute for both the daemon
and the operator interface.
Also when viewing a report all characters, other than those to be printed
boldly, will be presented in this attribute.
The pop-up windows in the dialogue windows' "combo" widgets use this
attribute for the highlighted option.
The messages dialogue windows use this attribute to present their message.
Foot Note
This is unused.
Legend
This is unused.
Legend Selected
This is unused.
Highlight
This is unused.
Expanded Highlight
When viewing a report the characters to be printed boldly will be presented
in this attribute.
Screen title
Restrictions are presented on "Viewing Data" windows in the tablet at the
top of the window, using the foreground colour from this attribute.
Foot Note Highlight
This is unused.
Legend Highlight
This is unused.
Attention/Kollection
When a number of records have been identified as belonging to a
"collection", then those records will be presented in this
attribute. For information of collections, please refer to the section
titled: "Multiple
Record Editing (Kollecting)".
Selected Part Load
When retrieving loads by location, part loads selected for this schedule
will be displayed in this attribute. Should the instruction to retrieve
the load be already issued to the crane, it will be shown in the "Basic
Colour". If the load is on another schedule, the load will be shown in the
"Editing" attribute.
Selected Full Load
When retrieving loads by location, full loads selected for this schedule
will be displayed in this attribute. Should the instruction to retrieve
the load be already issued to the crane, it will be shown in the "Basic
Colour". If the load is on another schedule, the load will be shown in the
"Editing" attribute.
Part Load
Part loads on the stores diagram will be shown in this attribute.
Full Load
Full loads on the stores diagram will be shown in this attribute.
Disabled Part Load
Part loads in disabled locations, on the stores diagram will be shown in
this attribute.
Disabled Full Load
Full loads in disabled locations, on the stores diagram will be shown in
this attribute.
Alert
This colour is used to display any character associated with an alarm
condition.
Load Destination 0
Load Destination 1
Load Destination 2
Load Destination 3
Load Destination 4
Load Destination 5
Load Destination 6
Load Destination 7
These attributes are used to identify the destinations to which loads are
being directed. They are eight in number. If there are more than eight
destination numbers, modulo eight is taken from these numbers and used to
index this table of attributes. These attributes are best to be in the
range "8" to "f", and to be unique from other attribute digits used
elsewhere. This range is chosen as the attributes in the range "0" to "7"
are more popular. It is best that these attributes have exclusive use of
these numbers, as there is likely to be a fair bit of fiddling of the
corresponding palette registers in order to get these to display a suitable
set of colours.
Not Running
This is used to display conveyors that are out of service.
Running
This is used to display conveyors that are in service.
Running in Reverse
This is used to display conveyors that are running in reverse.
Down-ender colour
Unused.
Configure off
Configure on
Configure off selected
Configure on selected
When using the "Control Mode of Operation", "Set Network Definition Data"
and "Initial Software Configuration" windows, these attributes are used to
present the data in it zero and non-zero states for the non-highlighted
records and the highlighted record.
Zoom auto mode
Zoom manual mode
Zoom selected
Zoom forward
Zoom reverse
Zoom below
Zoom alignment bar
Zoom photocell on
Zoom photocell off
Zoom up
Zoom in between
Zoom down
Zoom pushbutton on
Zoom pushbutton off
Zoom pushbutton surround
These attributes are used to display the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System in
character graphics, when zoomed in.
Border
Active Border
Active Text
Active Lamp
These attributes are used to display lamps and push-buttons when presented
in character mode.
Menu Text and Security
This database can be used to set, for each function window, the text,
security level, refresh period, location on the screen and the size of the
window. It is not anticipated that you will need alter the text, and the
screen location and window size can be set interactively using standard
windows functions. However, you may need to alter the security level
associated with the window when working out the security arrangements, and
to adjust the refresh period.
Database Privilege
This database can be used to set the prompt and security level associated
with each database field. It is not anticipated that you will need alter
the prompt, however, you may need to alter the security level associated
with the database when working out the security arrangements.
For some sites, there is also incorporated into this database, an ignore
flag, called "Database hidden". If this is set to "H" (for hide) for a
given database field, then that database field will be excluded from
presentation in any database that includes it.
Again for some sites (not necessarily those same sites), there is also
incorporated into this database, the "Database name for "Where"" field.
The names listed on this display may be used in expressions to restrict the
records displayed to those satisfying such expressions. Please refer to
the section titled: "Viewing Data" and its
subsection "Records
Satisfying an Expression".
Crane Commands and Security
This database can be used to set the description and security level
associated with each crane command. It is not anticipated that you will
need alter the description, however, you may need to alter the security
level associated with the command when working out the security
arrangements.
Be warned, that if you change the text, the software may fail to correlate
the command with the text in the manual, by which the command is described.
As a result, it will not be able to call up the correct page of the help in
response to the right-click request (for details on this "request", please
refer to the section titled:
"Operator
Commands").
Crane Manual Commands
This database can be used to set the security level associated with each of
the manual crane commands (push buttons). You might be inclined to set a
higher security level for the high speed operations and fork operations.
Crane Bit Descriptions
This database can be used to set the descriptions of the option bits,
inputs and outputs of the crane PLC, specifying which of these three types
of bits each is and where in its corresponding data file, each is to be
found.
This information is used by the "Save and Restore Crane PLC Configuration"
window to present the last saved crane configuration in a meaningful
format. Please refer to the section titled:
"Save
and Restore Crane PLC Configuration".
The "index" refers to the offset, for the input or output in question,
within a data file that is associated with the inputs and outputs, not
within the actual input and output files themselves. The actual inputs and
outputs are mapped to a standard arrangement.
Palletiser Commands
This database associates privilege levels with the push buttons on the
palletiser status and commands window.
Carton Conveyor Commands
This database associates privilege levels with the push buttons on the
carton conveyor system window.
Path Names
This database contains the names for all the locations within the system
that can accommodate loads. You can change the names goven to these
locations by editing these records.
Configuration Data
This database contains a list of constants used by the software for
"miscellaneous" purposes.
If you are editing them here, you will need to be able to distinguish
between "string" and numeric variables.
Each record has three or more fields:
The name field, which describes the variable.
The screen field, which specifies on which, if any, of the configuration
screens the variable is to be presented.
For some sites, there is a privilege field, which further restricts
whether this variable will be presented on a configuration screen,
depending on the operator's privilege level.
For some sites, there is also the group and sub-group fields, which allow
the records of this database to be presented in a more organised fashion.
The value field, which contains the numeric variable's value, and in which
all variable values, whether "string" or numeric, will be presented.
The "string" variables are stored in the name field, so if you edit them
here, you will need to edit the name field rather than the value field.
The group and sub-group fields are usually flagged as "hidden", and so,
even if existing, will not be presented, however, their effect will be
evident in the sequence of record numbers. Should you wish to alter the
settings in the group and sub-group fields, you should first turn off the
"Database hidden" flag for these database fields (see
"Database
Privilege").
Some of the records of this database, which may be of particular interest,
are:
Ticks Per 4 Seconds
This constant may be used to tune the ratio between your computer's system
ticks and the real time. The ratio may be obtained from information in
your computer's hardware manual or else you could measure the screen saver
time period and adjust this constant so that the screen saver period
reflects the value entered as the "Seconds before screen save".
Seconds before screen save
This constant may be used to set the period needed to elapse between
keystrokes before the screen will be blanked. The screen will be restored
when a key is pressed. Setting this period to zero disables the screen
saving. This period should not be set above 3,400 seconds approximately -
more precisely, the product of this value and the "Ticks Per 4 Seconds"
should
Relative long travel speed
Relative hoist speed
These are used in order to determine which of two positions is closest to
the crane in time. The actual speed is unimportant, only the relative
value of one against the other.
Level: change loads
This constant specifies the privilege level required of an operator before
he can use the plant and store display windows to insert, delete or modify
loads. With less privilege, the operator may still be allowed to access
these windows to monitor the condition of the plant or to observe the state
of the stores.
If this value exceeds 3, then the function is disabled at all privilege
levels.
Level: conveyor alarms
This constant specifies the privilege level required of an operator before
he can use the Conveyor Alarms window to reset conveyor alarms. With less
privilege, the operator may still be allowed to access the Conveyor Alarms
window to find out which alarms are active.
If this value exceeds 3, then the function is disabled at all privilege
levels.
Level: conveyor manual
This constant specifies the privilege level required of an operator before
he can use the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyors diagram to manually control the
Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System. Please refer to the section titled:
"Push
Button Control of the Plant: Overview".
If this value exceeds 3, then the function is disabled at all privilege
levels.
Level: adjust PLC mem.
This constant specifies the privilege level required of an operator before
he can use the monitor and adjust PLC program window to alter the PLC data
memory. Please refer to the section titled:
"Monitor
and Adjust the PLC Memory".
If this value exceeds 3, then the function is disabled at all privilege
levels.
If this value exceeds 3, then the function is disabled at all privilege
levels.
No floppy archive
If this constant is set, the "FLOPPY ACHIVE" button and function will be
removed from the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyors diagram. Please refer to the
sections titled:
"Archive
Log Files (FLOPPY ARCHIVE)".
Using HP DeskJet
This constant specifies the Hewlett-Packard DeskJet PCL language is to be
used to communicate with the printer rather than the IBM printer language.
Print wide reports A4
Print wide in landscape
Lines in portrait
Lines in landscape
These constants control the way reports are printed. Wider reports may be
printed in "condensed" print (by setting the "Print wide reports A4"
record), or, if using an HP DeskJet (or equivalent), in "landscape" (by
setting the "Print wide in landscape" record). If you are using an HP
DeskJet, "landscape" will take precedence over "condensed", otherwise the
"landscape" setting is ignored. Neither of these settings has any
impact on the narrower reports, which will be always printed in "portrait".
Once the decision is made between "landscape" and "portrait" has been made,
you can set the number of lines per page of the report, using the
appropriate "Lines ..." record.
Window maximum x
Window maximum y
Window minimum width
Window minimum height
These constants prevent windows from being set to ridiculus sizes or
positions, which may result in them not being seen. Should you find that,
because your screen resolution is greater than the maximum x and y values
specified here, that you can not size and place windows to take full
advantage of the screen resolution, you will need to adjust these values
accordingly.
Compile 1:
Compile 2:
Compile 3:
These strings tells the Movement Controller where to go looking for source
files for the compiling of the Allen-Bradley PLC code. If they are not
found in the current working directory, the directory specified in "Compile
1" will be checked, then "Compile 2", and finally, "Compile 3".
Programming with AI
The generation of Allen-Bradley PLC code is usually tailored towards the
6200 and APS series of programming software. Set this constant to produce
export files suitable for the AI series of software.
Track extra conv data
This constant tells the Movement Controller that, when it is creating the
Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor software, it should advance, not only the load
tags, but also the extra data (words corresponding to the pallet tags,
residing in the next PLC file).
For detailed instruction on creating the PLC code for a heavy-unit-load
Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System, please refer to the sections titled:
"Defining
the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System".
Run local PLC at start
This constant tells the Movement Controller to execute the PLC code for the
first PLC in the PLC setup database. It will be automatically set upon
loading the export file and having it executed during system definition.
Refer to the sections titled:
"Load
PLC Emulator", and
"PLC
Setup".
Digicom or ComXi fitted
KTXD card is fitted
KTXD ch 1 DH+ or 485
These constants are set depending upon whether the software has detected
the presence of the corresponding card. Each time the software changes
these values, it logs a message to this effect.
KTxD base address 1
KTxD base address 2
These constants tell the Movement Controller where the KTxD dual port
memory resides.
KTxD Path
This string tells the Movement Controller where the binary files needed to
be down-loaded to the KTxD card reside. This is also the directory in
which it will look for the PLC type definition file, "ab_plcs.dat".
Customisation
This constant enables software explicitly written for a given application.
TCP/IP server host (1.2.3.4)
TCP/IP server latter numbers
These two combined specify the IP address of the host_computer. If these
are to be modified using the network definition screen, it is only
necessary to flag the first for inclusion. If you are setting the address
here, rather than via the network definition screen, you will need to enter
the address into both these fields. For more information, please refer to
the section titled:
"Set
Network Definition Data", and, in particular, its subsection titled:
"TCP-IP
Addresses".
TCP/IP local host (1.2.3.5)
TCP/IP local latter numbers
These two combined specify the IP address of the Movement Controller. If
these are to be modified using the network definition screen, it is only
necessary to flag the first for inclusion. If you are setting the address
here, rather than via the network definition screen, you will need to enter
the address into both these fields. For more information, please refer to
the section titled:
"Set
Network Definition Data", and, in particular, its subsection titled:
"TCP-IP
Addresses".
FTP control port (eg 0,21)
FTP data port (eg 0,20)
These specify the control and data ports used for FTP. For more
information, please refer to the section titled:
"Set
Network Definition Data", and, in particular, its subsection titled:
"TCP-IP
Ports".
R.T. control port (eg 0,129)
R.T. data port (eg 0,130)
These specify the control and data ports used for implementing a remote
operator interface. For more information, please refer to the section
titled: "Set
Network Definition Data", and, in particular, its subsection titled:
"TCP-IP
Ports".
Custom control (eg 0,131)
Custom data port (eg 0,132)
These specify the control and data ports used for other uses of the TCP-IP
communications. For more information, please refer to the section titled:
"Set
Network Definition Data", and, in particular, its subsection titled:
"TCP-IP
Ports".
Standby link port (eg 0,128)
This specifies the port to be used when securing the database to a
dedicated standby computer.
FTP L USER:
FTP L PASS:
FTP L ACC.:
These specify the user name, password, and account to be used by the
Movement Controller's FTP client when logging onto the host_computer's
FTP server.
Should you set the user name to blank (or, for that matter, the IP address
of the host_computer's FTP server to all zeros), the FTP client task will
cease to send files to the host_computer's FTP server, until it is, once
again, set to other than blank. Of course, it should be set to the correct
value before the FTP client task needs to reconnect with the
host_computer's FTP server.
FTP R USER:
FTP R PASS:
FTP R ACC.:
These specify the user name, password, and account to be used by the
host_computer's FTP client when logging onto the Movement Controller's
FTP server.
FTP DONE:
This specifies the contents of an RCMD command, which will be sent after
reports are sent to the host_computer's FTP server.
Alternatively, if communications with the host_computer is via a
directory, then this will specify the name of a batch file that will be
executed after each report is written to the directory.
FTP PREP:
This not used for normal FTP configurations (i.e. the Movement Controller
STORing to the host_computer's FTP server, and the host_computer
STORing to the Movement Controller).
If, on the other hand, the Movement Controller is RETRing files from the
host_computer's server, then this specifies the contents of an RCMD that
will be sent prior to performing the RETR, giving the host_computer the
opportunity to prepare a file to be RETRieved.
Alternatively, if communications with the host_computer is via a
directory, then this will specify the name of a batch file that will be
executed prior to checking the directory.
FTP report interval (secs)
This sets the minimum timer that must elapse between reports sent to the
host_computer via FTP.
FTP max action reports/file
FTP max conveyr reports/file
FTP max racking reports/file
FTP max barcode reports/file
FTP max emula'n reports/file
FTP max reply reports/file
FTP max finish reports/file
These limit the number of records to be contained in each report sent via
FTP to the host_computer.
FTP retrieve interval (secs)
This sets the rate at which attempts are made to retrieve files from the
host_computer via FTP. This only has an impact if the Movement
Controller uses an FTP client to retrieve files rather than relying on the
host_computer's FTP client to store them to us.
Tfr_D:
TfrDD:
TfrDE:
RptDX:
Rpt_D:
These allow you to specify directories to be used in place of FTP, for
communicating with the host_computer.
If either of the variables, "TCP/IP server host (1.2.3.4)" or "TCP/IP
server latter numbers", is set and the variable, "FTP L USER:", is also
set, the "Rpt" directory variables will be ignored. These two "TCP/IP
server" variables are presented as a single value in the "Set Network
Definition Data window (as described in the section titled:
"Set
Network Definition Data", and, in particular, its subsection titled:
"TCP-IP
Addresses").
The "Tfr_D:" specifies the location in which files from the host_computer
should be placed. As these files are processed, they will be moved to the
"TfrDD:" directory.
Should there be an error in a file, preventing it from being processed, the
file will be moved to the "TfrDE:" directory, if present, instead of the
"TfrDD:" directory.
Files to be sent to the host_computer will be written to the "Rpt_D:"
directory. As well as specifying this directory, you will need to disable
the FTP reporting by setting the user name to blank - check record "FTP L
USER:".
If the reports are in XML format, you may opt for those files to be placed
in an alternate directory, the "RptDX:" directory. If the report is not in
XML format, or the "RptDX:" directory is unspecified, the reports will be
written to the "Rpt_D:" directory.
As these are "string" variables, in order to set any of these variables,
you will need to alter the name field rather than the value field. To edit
the name field, leave the first six characters (those upto and including
the first colon (":")) in tact, and present the path name from that point
on, so that the name field for the "Tfr_D:" record might become
"Tfr_D:D:\ftp\manifest". Once you do this, you will see
"D:\ftp\manifest" being presented in the value field.
The directory specified must already exist.
Blanking both of the variables, "TCP/IP server host (1.2.3.4)" and "TCP/IP
server latter numbers", or the one variable, "FTP L USER:", will allow you
to switch over to reporting via the "Rpt" directories. Should those
variables be set, reporting via the "Rpt" directories will be disabled.
Log FTP polling?
When logging the TCP-IP communications, the period covered by the log files
can be extended by not including the messages to log on to the FTP servers
and their replies. When this constant is set, the communication via the
FTP control sockets will not be monitored.
Starting data file
This is the first PLC data file to be used by the system definition of the
Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System and will contain the information needed by
the Movement Controller to know how to communicate with this function of
the PLC.
Bits in destin'n mask
The Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System uses a single word of data to track its
loads. This number of bits in the low order of the word will be used to
specify the destination for the load, while the remainder specifies the
load's identity. This is used by the system definition when constructing
the PLC code.
Disable load tracking
This constant is set if the identity of individual loads on the
Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System is of no consequence. This is used by the
system definition when constructing the PLC code and by the Movement
Controller during operation.
Pallet width (m)
Pallet length (m)
These constants are used by the palletiser graphics window to present
pallets to scale.
Load square Circle/Big
This variable determines whether the loads will be depicted as pallets or
as reels of paper. Further, on the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System
overview, you can opt for a larger circular representation by setting this
to "B" for "Big" rather than "C" for "Circular". Leaving it blank selects
the depiction of a pallet.
Move cranes from exits
In some warehouse systems, it is required that the cranes do not remain
parked in the way of the exit tunnels. If this flag is set, the cranes
will be instructed to keep clear of level 1 areas flagged as non-existent.
Many loads to pickface
If this flag is set, the Movement Controller will allow the host_computer
to have more than one instruction outstanding to a single pickface
location.
Crane manual slow down (sec)
When the operator, using the crane remote manual controls, releases the
high-speed push-button, the Movement Controller will engage slow speed in
its stead for this period of time to allow the crane to slow down to a
controlled stop.
International access code
Area access code
These strings are used in the entry of a customer's details to assist with
the entry of the customer's telephone and facsimile details.
Maximum wiring levels
When specifying the "harness wiring" of pick areas, the wire address and
station numbers are combined into a single sixteen bit number by
multiplying the station number by this value, which therefore must exceed
the maximum value of the wire address. Changing this value after setting
the wiring harness will stuff it up. Refer to the section titled:
"Harness
Wiring".
Between adjacent areas (mm)
This constant specifies how close adjacent pick areas must be to be
considered adjacent. Refer to the section titled:
"Addressing
the Pick Areas".
Between adjacent conv's (mm)
This constant specifies how close adjacent conveyors must be to be
considered adjacent. Refer to the section titled:
"Placing
the Devices".
Start of Alarm Report Period
Alarm Report Period
These values are used together to define the periods over which such
incidents as the crane and conveyor alarms are summarised. When the time
passes the "Start of Alarm Report Period" plus the "Alarm Report Period"
number of days, the currently aggregating counts will be captured as the
"last" period counts and then be reset to zero. The "Alarm Report
Period" number of days will then be added to the "Start of Alarm Report
Period".
These values control the checkpointing of the database. In the Microsoft
Windows operating system environment, a file can not be copied whilst
another program has it open, so it does not allow you to save the main
database while the main control program is running.
To get around this, you can specify the number of hours ("Checkpoint period
(hours)"), between subsequent savings of the main database and the name of
the file into which it is to be saved ("Chk_F:").
The time and date of the last saving are saved in the "Database checkpoint"
values, and so if you set the number of hours to a divisor or multiple of a
day, you can use these values to determine the exact time of the save.
Automatic exit to DOS (time)
This value, if set in the range "00:00:00" to "23:59:59", will cause the
software to automatically exit at this time of the day. You can set this
value to "24:00:00" (which is displayed as two blanks followed by ":00:00")
to prevent the automatic exitting of the program.
Read A-B status file (secs)
This value, if other than 0, will set the period between consecutive reads
of the Allen-Bradley PLCs' status file. From this file it can find that
the PLC is experiencing a major fault, is not in run mode, or has a minor
fault, such as its battery being low. If this value is set to zero, the
status file will not be read. If this value is not provided, the status
file will be read every ten minutes. This value specifies the period in
seconds.
Auto logout if >=2 (minutes)
This value, if other than zero, will cause the software to automatically
log out any user, whose privilege is greater than or equal to 2, after the
nominated number of minutes.
Crane test cycle delay
When you are exercising the crane, using the "Run Test Cycles" command,
this can result in causing its drives to overload, as in normal operation,
for which they are designed, there is usually a period of rest between
journeys in order to access the load. If this is a problem, you can use
this constant to specify the number of seconds the crane should be rested
between test cycles.
Automatic crane commands
This field is shows the numbers of the cranes that currently have their
automatic commands disabled. The presentation of this field is identical
to the presentation of the "Crane and Palletiser Alarms" fields, as
described in the section titled:
"Crane
and Palletiser Alarms".
If a crane's number is included, the only commands to be issued to that
crane will be those explictly issued by the operator, via the "Crane
Commands and Alarms" window. This can also be adjusted indirectly via the
"Crane Commands and Alarms" window, so for further information about
this control, please refer to the section titled:
"Turning
Off and On Automatic Commands".
For further information on issuing commands explicitly, please refer to the
section titled:
"Operator
Commands".
Suspend crane retrievals
This field is shows the numbers of the cranes that currently have their
automatic retrievals disabled. The presentation of this field is identical
to the presentation of the "Crane and Palletiser Alarms" fields, as
described in the section titled:
"Crane
and Palletiser Alarms".
If a crane's number is included, the commands will not be issued
automatically to that crane in order to retrieve loads to satisfy the
retrieval schedules. This can also be adjusted indirectly via the "Crane
Commands and Alarms" window, so for further information about this control,
please refer to the section titled:
"Turning
Off and On Retrieval Commands".
For further information on issuing commands explicitly, please refer to the
section titled:
"Operator
Commands".
Freezer PDS fixed
Chiller PDS fixed
These variables are ignored. They were used by the old software to treat
the PDS system differently, until the photocells could be orientated to
look at the loads.
No reject automatically
Normally loads, which can not be scanned, have barcodes that have not been
supplied, or have failed sizing, will be automatically redirected to the
reject. If you set this variable, then the load will wait on the rise-fall
conveyor, at the junction to the reject. The operator is then able to
either correct the load or instruct it to proceed to the reject.
This variable is directly alterable via the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyors
diagram, so for details on this, please refer to the section titled:
"Fast
Putaway (GO ANY-WHERE)".
Loads to correct crane
When things are busy on the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System, pallets may be
put away to cranes, other than the cranes to which they are intended. If
you set this variable, then the Movement Controller will, when things are
less busy, bring these loads back out and put them away to the correct
crane.
No reads HELD at reader
This variable is directly alterable via the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyors
diagram, so for details on this, please refer to the section titled:
"Keep
No-Reads at Scanner (HOLD NO READ)".
Get password: clear crane
There are detectors that look for obstructions along the crane aisles.
Once one of these is tripped, it is up to the operator to ensure that the
aisle is clear before allowing the crane to continue. If this variable is
set, then that operator will be required to enter his name and password
before being allowed to set the crane back into service after such a
stoppage.
Fetch empty ok/auto
This variable can be used to enable the automatic retrieval of the stacks
of empty pallets from the pickface. If set to "A" (which is displayed as
"AUTOMATIC") then anytime that the racking photocells report that
there is something on one of the empty pallet locations in the pickface, a
retrieval schedule will be created (see
"Retrieve
from Stores by Location (new)"), if necessary, and this location will be
added to that schedule. This occurs only when the photocells becomes
blocked, so, once it has become blocked no further requests will be issued
to retrieve the stack. So, should you delete this schedule, it will not be
automatically recreated.
Alternatively, this variable can be set so as to require that the crane
room operator must first approve the retrieval, before it will be done.
This alternative is chosen by setting this variable to "O" (which is
displayed as "OPERATOR CONFIRMS"). When this alternative is set, a button
will be provided on the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyors diagram, "FETCH EMPTIES",
that will highlight when there are stacks of empty pallets in the pickface
that need to be attended to. This button is described in the section
titled: "Retrieve
Empty Pallets (FETCH EMPTIES)". Unlike the "AUTOMATIC" setting, the button
will be highlighted anytime that there is no manual retrieval schedule for
a crane, specifying the empty pallet locations, yet the photocells report
that there are such pallets awaiting pickup.
If this variable is left blank or set to "N" (which will be displayed as
"no automatic" and "NO AUTOMATIC" respectively), then the schedules
will need to be created manually, as described in the section titled:
"Retrieve
from Stores by Location (new)".
Secs for PDS to see
This variable, if other than zero, sets the number of seconds that the
pallet detection system has in which to see a load that has been placed in
the rear of the pick face. If set to zero, then there is no check
performed on the PDS seeing the deposited load.
Should this time be exceeded and still the corresponding PDS photocell
remains unblocked, then a message will be presented to the operator, if the
operator has the
"Heavy-Unit-Load
Conveyors" window open.
In addition to this message being presented, an entry will be made in the
event log file for each such location. Please refer to the section titled:
"Event
Log Historic Report".
Latch PDS for POWER
If this variable is set, the Movement Controller will take care to advise
the host_computer that a PDS photocell has been blocked, even if, by the
time it gets around to sending this message, that photocell has since been
cleared. Should the photocell have cleared before the blocked message is
set, and it remains clear, then a subsequent message will be sent to the
host_computer, advising it that the photocell is now clear.
The purpose for this is to give the host computer a trigger for it to try
once more to send a load to that pick face. Generally, the host_computer
should send a load to the pick face any time that the Movement Controller
indicates that the location is empty, however, should that attempt fail,
for whatever reason, then it can use this flashing of the PDS photocell as
a signal to give it another try.
If this variable is not set, then, whenever the Movement Controller is
sending PDS status to the host_computer, it will send the actual
photocell status at the time.
Rise-falls change minds
This variable affects the behaviour of the generation of source code for
the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor PLC software. Normally, if there is no way
that a pallet can reach the upper conveyor (or the lower conveyor) from
anywhere other than the lower conveyor (or the upper conveyor), then no
code is provided to lower (or raise) the rise-fall in the event that its
destination changes.
If you set this variable, then this code will be generated, allowing you to
redirect loads after they have been lifted (or dropped), provided that they
have not started to transfer from that position. Please refer to the
section titled:
"Defining
the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System".
Flat/Extra conv level
This is not provided unless the system involves multilevel heavy-unit-load
conveyors.
Normally, multilevel Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor Systems are shown as such,
requiring that you select the level you wish to view.
If the conveyors are not intertwined between the levels (for example, you
might have two independent conveyor systems, one above the other, but
unconnected), you can opt to present the conveyors as though they were all
on the same level. To do this, enter an "F" into this field.
Alternatively, you can opt to leave the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System as
multilevel, requiring that you use the "LEVEL CHANGE" button to select the
level, but have an "extra level", which, when selected, summarises, as best
it can, the information from all levels. To do this, enter an "E" into
this field.
Since it has become apparent that, at least at Arnott's, that connections
between the Movement Controller and its remote terminals can be broken
without that information being returned to the Movement Controller in the
normal way, the remote connection has been designed to send regular
messages, at the rate set in this variable, so that the Movement Controller
has an assurance that the connection is, indeed, still in tact. Should it
not hear from the remote terminal within a period three times this number
of seconds, it will close the connections to the remote terminal in
question, freeing up that channel for future use.
Fault Assistance
This database lists the titles of the generic conveyor fault types along
with the first line of the assistance message that accompanies the
presentation of these alarms. The fault type title is a unique "Name"
field and the first line of the assistance message is a "Screen Editing"
field. There may also be a field that indicates whether or not you are
allowed to reset alarms of this category (a "Character" field); this should
only be permitted for alarms that complain of an action not happening in a
timely fashion (what we refer to as watchdogs).
These records may be edited via the fault category reference field of the
conveyor alarms while editing the details of a conveyor alarm. This is
done by pressing [SHIFT F11] - refer to the section titled:
"Key".
However to review the fault assistance in general, it is best to edit these
records here.
This database sets the text displayed for the alarms from the carton
conveyor PLC. Add records to this database as you add alarms to the carton
conveyor PLC.
Terminal Configuration
This database can be used to set the terminal type (IBM PC or VT-220) and
the communications channel used for the remote terminals that use serial
communications.
Carton Conveyor PLCs
This database specifies which PLCs include the carton conveyor function and
which data file in these PLCs is used to hold the definition of how the
Movement Controller interfaces to the carton conveyors.
Conveyor PLC Definition
This database is currently under-utilised. The only information currently
used is the PLC reference in the first record. The Heavy-Unit-Load
Conveyor System currently assumes that there is only one PLC for this
function, the first record, and it uses the "Starting data file" record
from the configuration data to determine which data file to access for the
definition of the interface with this PLC.
Zone Channel Definition
This database specifies a number of channels to be used to communicate to
the pick-to-light units and the range of address used on each channel.
Standby Channel Definition
This database specifies which channel should be used to communicate with
the standby computer.
Channel Setup
This database identifies each channel with a name (which should not be
changed significantly), the device name given to this channel in the
Microsoft Windows operating system (which may be a network device, such as
"\\192.62.10.21\COM1" or "\\server\COM2" - for local devices, names
such as "COM1" or "\\.\COM1" are equivalent), a baud rate, parity, number
of data bits, number of stop bits, communications protocol, the home
station number to be used with the protocol, whether the channel is in test
mode, and, for some sites, a read timeout value and/or the last time the
communications port was opened.
The read timeout value, if not available or set to zero, will default to a
reasonable value and is used to determine when the device, to which this
channel is communicating, is deemed to be not communicating.
Certain channels are likely to have more than one unit to communicate with.
Typically the KTxD channels can have a number of PLCs to communicate with,
possibly of differing types.
The highlighted communications port, provided that it corresponds to an
asynchronous serial communications port and it is not in test mode and has
been properly configured, may be closed and reopened with, if you like, new
settings. To do this, after highlighting the appropriate asynchronous
serial communications port, type "O" or click on "Open" in the menu bar,
then, when asked to confirm, type "C" or click on the "Close and reopen"
button. In response to issuing this request, the main program will close
and reopen the port with the new settings. If the database has been
configured with a "Channel last opened" field, then the change to this can
be used as confirmation that the channel has been reopened - you might need
to type "U" or click on "Update" in the menu bar to see this change.
Closing and reopening a port is a useful function if the port is provided
by a terminal server, and that terminal server or its Windows driver has,
unilaterally, decided to close the port. It can also be useful when
experimenting with various port settings.
PLC Setup
This database gives a name to a PLC, a PLC ladder filename (if it is an
Allen-Bradley PLC), a communications channel, the station number of the PLC
(our station number is defined in the setup of the referenced channel) and
the type of PLC. Also, if there are Allen-Bradley PLCs on the site, there
will be the two words that store the minor fault acknowledgements, two
words are needed for the PLC5, since it has two words of minor faults.
The channel setup specifies the communications protocol. This is not
redundant with the specification here of the type of PLC as it is possible
to communicate with the one type of PLC with different protocols and with
different types of PLCs with the same protocol.
Conveyors from which to Zoom
This database allows you to tie a window, and a selection within the
window, to a specific Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor position, so that once you
zoom into this position, a subsequent pressing of the "Z" key will bring up
the nominated window.
You need to specify the conveyor position, the name of the window (as it
appears on the menu), and the selection within the window. The selection
within the window is a number, typically indexing a device handled by this
window, resulting in the window displaying the nominated device rather than
the first device.
You may also specify a device type. If you do, the point from which you
zoom will be the point at which the device of this type, associated with
the specified conveyor position, is displayed. Please bear in mind that
some of the devices, associated with a conveyor position, are presented
away from that associated conveyor position. You may wish to create a
"null device" at this point to advertise the point as a zoom point,
then specify this as the device type. Refer to the section titled:
"Enter
or Modify Device Types".
Usually the device would be selected, after entering the window, by using
function keys, in which case, [F1] would be equivalent to the selection
value 1, [F2] to 2 and so on.
If, for example, you have a palletiser, you would create a record to
reference the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor position the palletiser is
associated with, the palletiser status and commands window and set the
selection value to the record number corresponding to the definition of
this palletiser - this is the number that appears to the left of the entry
for this palletiser in the enter or modify palletiser window.
Another window that would typically be referenced in these records is the
machine status window; the crane status and control window does not require
such records as it is already tied to the crane representations.
Barcode Scanners
This database describes the barcode scanners that are employed about the
Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyors or the carton conveyors. Each record corresponds
to one barcode scanner.
First of all, a description is given to identify the scanner in question.
Next, the scanner must be assigned a communications channel. Unless the
scanners are multi-dropped, the communications channels will be unique.
These are references to the Channel Setup database (please refer to the
section titled:
"Channel
Setup").
The next field is the station number of the barcode scanner, should you be
using the one channel to multidrop to several scanners.
The next field is described as the "Scanner check digit". This field can
be set to a number of options. As well as specifying the check digit
algorithm, it can also be used to specify whether or not an acknowledge is
expected by the barcode scanner.
One and only one of the next two fields must be set. These tie the scanner
to either a specific position within the carton conveyor system or a
specific position within the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System.
Terminal Locations
This database can be used to tie names to IP addresses so the computer can
identify where an operator is and so present his displays orientated
accordingly.
It also allows you, by setting the "Location allowed manual" field
appropriately, to prevent operators at certain locations from exercising
manual control over the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System. Only those
locations listed here, and are, here, flagged to allow manual control (i.e.
the field is set to "M"), will be able to exercise the manual controls.
Similarly, by setting the "Location crane commands" field appropriately,
you can prevent operators at certain locations from using the crane
commands. Set the field to "C" to allow the use of crane commands at the
corresponding location. If this field is not provided, and needed, please
ask for it.
The remaining fields are best set interactively via windows opened at those
addresses.
General
In response to selecting "General" (by whichever method), a dialogue window
will be presented, containing a "Symbolic Name" field. Refer to the
section titled:
"Symbolic
Name".
If one of the fields is chosen, the menu will be replaced by a "Maintenance
Viewing Data" window for that field. Please refer to the sections titled:
"Viewing Data", and
"Maintenance
Viewing Data" for instructions common to all windows of this type.
Small Words
This is a list of words which will be decapitalised if they appear within a
"title" entry field. A "title" entry field is one in which the last
character of the prompt is a "t".
These words will not be capitalised if they appear at the beginning of the
entry, nor at the end of the entry, unless a space is entered afterwards.
You can defeat the automatic decapitalisation of these words by typing the
left single quote character "`" after the last letter of the word, prior to
typing the [SPACE]. When you type the [SPACE], it will replace the quote
and not cause the decapitalisation.
These words must be entered with their first letter capitalised, so that
they match the pattern of letters before the decapitalisation takes place.
This is no real concern, as the first letter is automatically capitalised
anyway.
Monitor Communications
This window allows you to get a good idea of the health of the
communications between the Movement Controller and the various systems that
it needs to communicate with over serial communication channels.
The Monitor Communications window defaults to channel 1.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Other channels may be selected by typing "C", or clicking on "Change
channel", the entering the name of the desired "Com" port, or selecting it
from the drop down list.
The channel allocation has been presented in the section of the TECHNICAL
MANUAL titled: "Hardware
Configuration".
After selecting the required channel, the communications may be monitored
by holding down the space bar or "U" or repeatedly clicking on "Update".
To freeze a snap-shot of the communications, release the space bar or "U"
or stop clicking.
At the top of the window is displayed the circular buffer containing the
incoming data. The division between old and new data is shown by the
change in video attribute.
In the lower portion of the window as much of each outgoing message as will
fit on one line is displayed. It is usually the entire message. Each time
the monitor notices a change in the outgoing message buffer, the buffer is
rewritten to the window on the next line. Eventually the newer outgoing
messages will reach the end of the area reserved for them and recommence at
the start, overwriting the older messages. The end of the outgoing
messages is not indicated and should be interpreted from knowledge of the
software.
At the computer's own screen and keyboard, the communications data will be
shown in either hexadecimal or ASCII as appropriate for the channel. This
choice may be switched by pressing [RETURN] or [ENTER], or by typing "A",
or by clicking on "Ascii/hex".
A terse explanation of the protocol used by some of the channels can be
obtained by typing "H" or clicking on "Help on protocol" If further pages
of explanation are available, these will be available by typing "H" or
clicking on "Help on protocol"
Terminal Interface Via Serial Port
This window allows you to send and receive ASCII characters via a serial
communications port.
You will, first, be asked to select a serial communications port over which
to send and receive the characters. It is best not to select a port that
is configured for a PLC or other such device, as you are likely to
interfere with its communications. You will be provided with a symbolic
name field, into which you can enter the name of one of the channels listed
in the "Channel Setup" database. Please refer to the sections titled:
"Symbolic
Name" and "Channel
Setup".
Having selected a serial communications channel over which to converse, you
are ready to type characters to it. As you type, characters are sent over
the communications channel and echoed to the window.
After each character is transmitted, if a character is received immediately
(as would happen if a loopback connection were made, or the link is
half-duplex), this character is ignored. As a result, this alone can not
be used to establish whether a loopback connection is in effect. If you
need to see whether the characters transmitted are being looped back,
please refer to the Monitor Communications window. Please refer to the
section titled:
"Monitor
Communications".
Monitor and Adjust the PLC Memory
The Monitor and Adjust the PLC Memory window defaults to word 0 of file 7
of the first PLC. The keys "0" to "9" may be used to select the other
PLCs.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Monitor and Adjust the PLC mmeory
Change decimal Hexadecimal change Program Toggle bit Data 0-nine: other plc
Outside conveyors
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09
000 128 75 4
010 105 4 4 328
020
030
040
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09
000 80 4b 4
010 69 4 4 148
020
030
040
N 7:000 : 00000001 00000000< PalletTime
time taken
Base Address: for pallet
Data area: N 7 to pass
0:Outputs 1:Inputs 2:Status 3:Bits a point
4:Timers 5:Counter 6:Control 7:Integer
The body of this window shows 50 contiguous words of the PLC memory
displayed twice. The upper window shows the values in signed decimal,
while the lower window shows the same words in unsigned hexadecimal.
Warning: negative numbers in the first column result in their minus sign
obscuring the lease significant digit of the row address.
There is a reverse video area, which may be moved among the 50 words, using
the cursor control keys or by clicking the mouse. This assists in tying
together the two representations of the word.
The word displayed in the reverse video area is also displayed below these
two areas in binary notation, arranged in two groups of eight digits. Its
address is shown at the left of these digits.
The individual bits of the reverse video word may be singled out, by typing
[CONTROL LEFT] or [CONTROL RIGHT]. In response, the less than sign, "<",
at the right of the binary digits, will become a circumflex, "^", and be
positioned beneath the first or last of the binary digits respectively.
The bit may be singled out by clicking on it.
The address of the indicated bit will now be shown at the left of the
digits in both the "file:word/bit" format and the "file/bit" format.
If the PLC is an Allen-Bradley PLC and the ladder filename has been
supplied via the PLC setup (see
"PLC
Setup"), and the exported symbol table is available, the symbol associated
with the highlighted data element is displayed at the lower right of the
window.
Once the circumflex appears, the operation of the [LEFT] and [RIGHT] keys
becomes equivalent to the [CONTROL LEFT] and [CONTROL RIGHT] keys, moving
the circumflex further left or right until it is moved past the end of the
binary digits (in either direction). At this time the normal operation of
the [LEFT] and [RIGHT] keys is restored.
The reverse video area may also be moved beyond the 50 words to the Base
Address and the Data Area.
The word shown in reverse video may be changed by typing "C", [RETURN] or
[ENTER], or double clicking on it, and entering the new value in decimal
notation, or by typing "H" and entering the new value in hexadecimal
notation. The base address and data areas are always specified in decimal,
even if altered by typing "H".
The base address field may also be altered using the [PAGE UP] key to
subtract 50 from it and [PAGE DOWN] keys to add 50 to it.
The data area field may also be changed by typing "D", then entering the
new file number.
If an individual bit has been singled out, its state may be toggled by
typing "T" or double clicking on it.
Ladder Program Display
If the PLC is an Allen-Bradley PLC and the ladder filename has been
supplied via the PLC setup (see
"PLC
Setup"), and the exported PLC code is available, the ladder diagram may be
displayed, with animation, by typing "P".
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Monitor and Adjust the PLC mmeory
Data display Comment level Go to rung Program list Base hex/dec Search
PROGRAM POCOLDM2 FILE MAIN POSITION 2: 0
│FirstScan INITIALISE │^
│ First │█
│ program │█
│scan after │█
│ power on │█
│ S:1/15 ╒ JSR ══════════════╕│█
├────] [─────────────────────────────────────────────────┤ JUMP TO SUBROUTINE├┤█
│ │ Prog f 3 ││█
│ ╘═══════════════════╛│█
│ CW01Startd │█
│ CW01 is │█
│ running │█
│ │█
│ │█
│ ╒ COP ══════════════╕│█
├────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤ COPY FILE ├┤█
│ │ Source #B38:0 ││█
│ │ Dest #B39:0 ││█
│ │ Length 9 ││█
│ ╘═══════════════════╛│█
│ AW01STATUS │V
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
You can return to the data display by typing "D". The data file and
element displayed upon return will be the data element at the cursor at the
time you typed "D".
By default, this window will be presented with five lines of comments. As
this can restrict the amount of ladder program that can be shown, you can
select the number of lines of comment you want displayed by typing "C" then
entering a number from zero to five.
Below, after entering "1" for the number of comment lines, is a rough
text-representation of this window:
Monitor and adjust the PLC memory
Data display Comment level Go to rung Program list Base hex/dec Search
PROGRAM POCOLDM2 FILE MAIN POSITION 2: 0
│FirstScan INITIALISE │^
│ S:1/15 ╒ JSR ══════════════╕│█
├────] [─────────────────────────────────────────────────┤ JUMP TO SUBROUTINE├┤█
│ │ Prog f 3 ││█
│ ╘═══════════════════╛│█
│ CW01Startd │█
│ ╒ COP ══════════════╕│█
├────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤ COPY FILE ├┤█
│ │ Source #B38:0 ││█
│ │ Dest #B39:0 ││█
│ │ Length 9 ││█
│ ╘═══════════════════╛│█
│ AW01STATUS │█
│ ╒ FLL ══════════════╕│█
├────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤ FILL FILE ├┤█
│ │ Source 0 ││█
│ │ Dest #B41:0 ││█
│ │ Length 54 ││█
│ ╘═══════════════════╛│█
│ Permission│█
│ B3/44│V
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
You can move about the ladder program in several ways:
[LEFT]
moves the cursor to the next instruction to the left
[RIGHT]
moves the cursor to the next instruction to the right
[UP]
moves the cursor one line up
[DOWN]
moves the cursor one line down
[PAGE UP]
moves the cursor one rung up
[PAGE DOWN]
moves the cursor one rung down
[HOME]
if the cursor is not at the start of a line, it will be moved
there, otherwise if not at the top of the window, it will be moved there,
otherwise if not at the top of the file, it will be moved there
[END]
if the cursor is not at the end of a line, it will be moved
there, otherwise if not at the bottom of the window, it will be moved
there, otherwise if not at the bottom of the file, it will be moved there
"G"
You will be prompted to first enter the program file number you
want to move to, then the rung number you want to move to
"S"
You will be prompted to enter a string to search for. This
string must match exactly text from the export file, so it helps if you are
familiar with the nature of such files
"P"
You will be presented with a list of the program files. You
can move up and down this list using [UP], [DOWN], [PAGE UP], [PAGE DOWN],
[CONTROL PAGE UP] or [HOME], and [CONTROL PAGE DOWN] or [END] in the usual
way, then select the desired program file by typing [ENTER]
There is also a vertical scroll bar, which can be used to scroll through
the program. You may also move the cursor by clicking on a point on the
ladder diagram.
Below, after typing "P", is a rough text-representation of this window:
Monitor and adjust the PLC memory
Select program file 1-nine, zero-nine, enter FILE PROGRAM NAME PROGRAM SIZE
PROGRAM POCOLDM2 FILE MAIN POSITION 2: 0
│FirstScan 2 MAIN 160 rungs^
│ S:1/15 3 INITIALISE 61 rungs█
├────] [─────────────────────────────────────── 4 EMULATE 1266 rungs█
│ 5 INPUTS 633 rungs█
│ 6 CONTROL_1 81 rungs█
│ 7 TRAFFIC_1 103 rungs█
│ 8 TRANSFERS 3245 rungs█
├────────────────────────────────────────────── 9 TRAFFIC_2 7 rungs█
│ 10 CONTROL_2 21 rungs█
│ 11 TRAFFIC_3 4 rungs█
│ 12 INTERLOCKS 95 rungs█
│ 13 CONTROL_3 12 rungs█
│ 14 OUTPUTS 575 rungs█
│ 15 SETDATATBL 172 rungs█
├────────────────────────────────────────────── 16 RFCTAGBITS 86 rungs█
│ █
│ █
│ █
│ █
│ █
│ V
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
The vertical scroll bar will now reflect the portion of the program list
that could be displayed and can be use to scroll through the program list.
You can also move the cursor to a line by clicking on that line.
Below, after having selected, say, program file 8, is a rough
text-representation of this window:
Monitor and adjust the PLC memory
Data display Comment level Go to rung Program list Base hex/dec Search
PROGRAM POCOLDM2 FILE TRANSFERS POSITION 8: 0
│ M01ATag P433STATUS A561WASBAD │^
│╒ EQU ══════════════╕ B41:27/1 B15:35/1 │█
├┤ EQUAL ├─────] [───┬─────────────────────────────────────(U)───┬┤█
││ Src A N16:1 │ │ M01AInfT ││█
││ │ │ ╒ TON ══════════════╕││█
││ Src B 0 │ ├──────────────────────┤ TIMER ON DELAY ├┤│█
││ │ │ │ Timer T4:163 │││█
│╘═══════════════════╛ │ │ T base 0.01 │││█
│ │ │ Preset 1500 │││█
│ │ │ Accum 1520 │││█
│ │ ╘═══════════════════╛││█
│ │ M01AInfT M01CCCAck M01ReqCCC ││█
│ │ T4:163/DN N57:11/0 N57:1/0││█
│ └────] [────────]/[───────────────────(L)───┘│█
│ M01ATag P433STATUS M01CCCAck M01ReqCCC │█
│╒ NEQ ══════════════╕ B41:27/1 N57:11/0 N57:1/0│█
├┤ NOT EQUAL ├─────]/[────────] [───────────────────────────────(U)───┤█
││ Src A N16:1 │ │█
││ │ │█
││ Src B 0 │ │█
││ │ │V
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
The animation of the window indicates which "examine input" instructions
are conducting and the values of data words. By default the data words are
shown in decimal. To display these in hexadecimal instead, type "B".
Below, after typing "B", is a rough text-representation of this window:
Monitor and adjust the PLC memory
Data display Comment level Go to rung Program list Base hex/dec Search
PROGRAM POCOLDM2 FILE TRANSFERS POSITION 8: 0
│ M01ATag P433STATUS A561WASBAD │^
│╒ EQU ══════════════╕ B41:27/1 B15:35/1 │█
├┤ EQUAL ├─────] [───┬─────────────────────────────────────(U)───┬┤█
││ Src A N16:1 │ │ M01AInfT ││█
││ │ │ ╒ TON ══════════════╕││█
││ Src B 0 │ ├──────────────────────┤ TIMER ON DELAY ├┤│█
││ │ │ │ Timer T4:163 │││█
│╘═══════════════════╛ │ │ T base 0.01 │││█
│ │ │ Preset 5dc │││█
│ │ │ Accum 5f0 │││█
│ │ ╘═══════════════════╛││█
│ │ M01AInfT M01CCCAck M01ReqCCC ││█
│ │ T4:163/DN N57:11/0 N57:1/0││█
│ └────] [────────]/[───────────────────(L)───┘│█
│ M01ATag P433STATUS M01CCCAck M01ReqCCC │█
│╒ NEQ ══════════════╕ B41:27/1 N57:11/0 N57:1/0│█
├┤ NOT EQUAL ├─────]/[────────] [───────────────────────────────(U)───┤█
││ Src A N16:1 │ │█
││ │ │█
││ Src B 0 │ │█
││ │ │V
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
Emulation Break-Points
In either data or program mode, (or from the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyors
diagram) you can pause the execution of the PLC code or set a break-point
by typing [CONTROL P] or [CONTROL B] respectively.
In response to typing [CONTROL P], the emulation software will stop
executing the PLC code, leaving the data frozen for examination.
In response to typing [CONTROL B], you will be prompted to enter the word
or bit address of a data element. Once you do this, the emulation software
will check this element at the end of each scan of the PLC code. When it
finds it has changed, it will stop executing the PLC code, leaving the data
frozen for examination.
Subsequent typings of [CONTROL P] will set the emulation software going.
Subsequent typings of [CONTROL B] will remove the break point.
While the emulation software has stopped, you can instruct it to execute a
single additional scan of the program by typing [CONTROL T] or [CONTROL S].
Typing [CONTROL T] also advances the timers by one second.
If a break point is in effect, the text "BREAK" will be displayed on the
Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyors diagram. If the emulation software has stopped,
the text "PAUSE" will be displayed on the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyors
diagram.
Monitor Securing to Standby
The Monitor Securing to Standby window shows in what state the securing of
data to the standby is.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Monitor the securing of the database
╒══════════ MAIN.DAT ══════════════════════════════════╕ COMMUNICATION
│ │ Healthy
│ │ Idle
│ │
│ │
│ -------------------------------------------------│
│----------------------------------------------------------------│
│----------------------------------------------------------------│
│----------------------------------------------------------------│
╘════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
P1: 4
FRONT END PROCESSOR'S BUFFER E1: 4
╞══╤══╪══╤══╪══╤══╪══╤══╪══╤══╪══╤══╪══╤══╪══╤══╪══╤══╪══╤══╡ P2: 125
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100% E2: 125
This window presents a map showing those portions of "MAIN.DAT" that have
yet to be sent via the front end processor (the RS232C ComXi board) for
transmission to the standby. Areas of the map that are beyond the end of
the file are presented as hyphens.
Beside this map is shown whether communications with the standby is healthy
(based on the time taken to receive the last acknowledge) and whether the
front end processor is busy or idle (based on whether messages remain in
its buffer ready for transmission to the standby).
If the securing to the standby is implemented with Ethernet, the "idle"
status will not be displayed and in place of the healthy message will be:
NO TCP/IP 0
No TCP/IP driver, or else it refuses to attach
ATTACHED 1
The TCP/IP driver refuses to bind or listen
LISTENING 2
Waiting for the standby to connect to us
CONNECTED 3
We are connected to the standby; bombs away!
Below this map is a graph showing what portion of the buffers within the
front end processor have yet to be secured to the standby. In addition to
these graphs, are the values of the four pointers controlling these
circular buffers.
The first two, "P1" and "E1", are associated with the front end processor's
interface buffer, with "P1" pointing to the last message given to the front
end processor, and "E1" pointing to the last message transferred to the
larger cache buffer.
The second two, "P2" and "E2", are associated with the front end
processor's cache buffer, with "P2" pointing to the last message
transferred to this buffer, and "E2" pointing to the last message sent to
the standby computer.
When all is secure, no Highlighted blocks should be displayed on the
window.
As the Movement Controller scans the map, the position of its pointer is
indicated by one point in the maps that is differently highlighted. So
that this highlighted point may be seen when the point is secure, a "."
character (dot or full stop) will be presented instead of the space.
If the securing to the standby is implemented with Ethernet, there will be
no display of the contents of the front end processor's buffer.
Monitor Threads of Execution
The body of this window presents information relating to each of the
threads of the Movement Controller daemon.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
The left hand column shows the process identifier (PID), so that the thread
may be monitored by standard Linux utilities that need this number.
In the next column is its state. This state may be:
Waiting
The task is waiting for an event before becoming "Ready"
Sleeping
The task is waiting for a time before becoming "Ready"
Ready
The task is either running or waiting for the main mutex
Die
The task has been scheduled to die
Dying
The task has terminated, its status needs to be received
Inactive
The task is either suspended or dead (status received)
Corrupt
The task structure contains an illegal value
The next set of columns, "Period and duration (usecs)" contain the average
period of time between executions of the task, then an open parenthesis,
then the number of samples this average was taken over, followed by a
hyphen, then the number of samples the next column was averaged over, then
a close parenthesis, then, finally, the average execution time of the task.
All times are in seconds, with six decimal places, providing microsecond
resolution. All times are elapsed times, and so include periods when some
process outside the Movement Controller's daemon was executing.
The next column contains a single character, which provides an indication
for the Movement Controller daemon's programmer as to what the process is
currently doing.
The next column contains the name of the process. The scope of this name
is restricted to the Movement Controller software. In order to obtain
information about the process from other software, the process identifier
(presented in the first column) must be used.
The next column provides the percentage of time used by this process, that
is the duration divided by the period. The last column presents this
percentage as a bar graph with the hungriest process set to full scale, and
the others scaled against this.
Restore Factory Default Settings
This allows you to restore some of the static databases from the factory
default settings. It first presents a menu.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Restore factory default settings
Select 1-nine, zero-nine, enter
1|Restore text for this list ^
2|Erase data restrictions & function keys █
3|Erase record of PLC data et cetera █
4|Set time standards and current standard █
5|Set crane command, status and alarm text █
6|Set database prompts and privileges █
7|Set user database █
8|Set names for the lists of loads █
9|Initialise log files: events, loads etc █
10|Initialise communications log files █
11|Set prompts for the configuration data █
12|Set the configuration data itself █
13|Set text and character graphics colours █
14|Set graphic shape names and colours █
15|Set menu text and associated privilege █
16|Set menu structure █
17|Set small words for non-capitalisation █
18|Set default keys for the editor █
19|Set PLC communications hardware options V
<████████████████████████████████████░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░>
Factory settings options s Restore text for this list
Much of the system is user-customisable, however, as a result, an
over-adventurous user can find that he has screwed it up somewhat in his
attempts to tailor it. These options are useful in restoring some of the
databases to reasonable values in this event.
The first item on the list is to restore the list itself. This is best to
do before restoring other databases from the factory settings, as this will
ensure that you will be doing what the text is indicating.
After an item has been selected, the item will be presented to you for
confirmation. To confirm, enter "S" for "sure".
When you exit this window, the databases are resorted.
Restore text for this list
This option, always the first on the list, restores the list of factory
default settings. This should be done before selecting other options in
case the text does not reflect the option.
Erase data restrictions & function keys
This option erases any data restrictions that may be left in place and all
function key settings for fast data entry.
Erase record of PLC data et cetera
This option erases the contents of the database that stores the state of
the communications between the Movement Controller and the various PLCs and
the host_computer.
This would be useful if you find the system is suffering some confusion
after a new system definition is loaded.
Set time standards and current standard
This option sets the time standard text to reflect eastern standard time
and eastern summer time and the current standard to be eastern standard.
Set database prompts and privileges
This option sets the prompts and privilege levels for all database fields.
I would typically use this after adding database fields to the system. The
privilege level is the minimum user privilege needed by an operator to make
changes to the given database field.
Set user database
This creates a single user, "Gregory Wood", with password.
Set names for the lists of loads
The system inventory of heavy-unit loads outside the warehouse racking is
maintained in sets of linked-lists. For example, there would be a
linked-list for all loads on the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System. This
option sets the names of these linked-lists.
Initialise log files: events, comms etc.
This option removes all entries from all log files (excluding the
communications log files), and sets their static configuration. This would
typically be done when configuring the system for a new application,
removing traces of the previous application.
Also, these files may contain references to other databases, preventing the
deletion of certain records from within these databases until these
references have been removed. By erasing these records, you may enable the
deletion of these records, provided they are not also referenced elsewhere.
Initialise communications log files
This option removes all entries from all communications files, and sets
their static configuration. This would typically be done when configuring
the system for a new application, removing traces of the previous
application.
Set prompts for the configuration data
The configuration data is a set of miscellaneous data values and strings
that are used to select certain options in the configuration or operation
of the Movement Controller. This option sets the prompts for these
options, carefully avoiding the configuration strings, which are kept in
the same database as the prompts. It also sets which windows will be used
to preset individual records from these databases, if any.
The configuration data is a set of miscellaneous data values and strings
that are used to select certain options in the configuration or operation
of the Movement Controller. This option sets this data to common settings.
This sets the names of the colours, the colours and the palette registers
for character mode windows.
This option would normally be used to put the colours back to some
reasonable condition after someone who thought they could do a better job
found they couldn't
Set graphic shape names and colours
This option relates to the graphical (pixel based) windows.
It firstly sets the palette registers, and names these by colours. It then
sets the colour purpose text and points each colour purpose to one of the
colours in the palette registers.
It then sets the names of shapes used to define the zoomed images of the
various device types and the corresponding names for the parameters needed
to complete the definition of the shapes.
This option would normally be used to put the colours back to some
reasonable condition after someone who thought they could do a better job
found they couldn't.
Set menu text and associated privilege
This option sets the text for the window titles as they are presented on
the menus, and sets the privilege level an operator must have to access
them.
It also sets the names of the databases; this is the menu first presented
by the database editor. Refer to the section titled:
"Edit
Databases".
Set menu structure
This option, after examining the system definition, sets the default menu
structure to pretty much reflect the structure in which the windows have
been described in this document.
Should you be intending to extend the system definition to, say, include
palletisers for the first time, you will need to add the necessary system
definition window to the menu structure, using the database editor, then
use this window to indicate that there are now palletisers in the system
definition, then run this option to have the other windows need for
palletisers added to their appropriate menus, as well as relocating the
system definition window to its regular position, in case this is not where
you installed it. Refer to the section titled:
"Edit
Databases".
Set small words for non-capitalisation
When entering the title of something in a database field, all major words
are capitalised. This database is a list of the words that are not to be
capitalised. This option will restore this list to its default state.
Set default keys for the editor
The boolean file editor is pretty much a standard text editor. However the
last thing anyone wants to do is learn another editor. So as to minimise
learning, this editor is easily configured to suit someone's previous
experience. Should you find the keys have been set unsuitably, this may
provide a better starting point from which to customise the keys to your
experience.
Set terminal locations
This sets the terminal location name for the computer's console, and the
Telnet terminals.
Set types of PLCs
This option sets the names of the programmable controllers supported by the
Movement Controller.
Set PLC communications hardware options
This option sets the names for the serial communications protocols
supported by the Movement Controller.
Set heavy-unit-load device pause scenarios
This option sets the text that describes the significance of the values set
for a Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor devices to determine under which conditions
loads on the associated conveyor will be required to stop.
Set Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor names
This option loads the text that describes the names of the Heavy-Unit-Load
Conveyors, from the file generated during the creation of the
Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System. This file is "CONVEYOR.ASC".
Set Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor alarm names
This option loads the text that describes the alarms of the Heavy-Unit-Load
Conveyors, along with other associated data, from the file generated during
the creation of the Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor System. This file is
"ALARMS.ASC".
Erase crane retrievals
This option erases all manual retrieval schedules.
Set crane command, status and alarm text
This option sets the text for the crane commands, status and alarms and the
security levels for the crane commands.
Set crane manual commands
This options sets the descriptions of the purpose of the crane manual
control window push-buttons and the security level you need to use them.
Set crane bit descriptions
This options sets the descriptions of the option bits, inputs and outputs
of the crane PLC, specifies which of these three types of bits each is and
where in its corresponding data file, each is to be found. This
information is used by the "Save and Restore Crane PLC Configuration"
window to present the last saved crane configuration in a meaningful
format. Please refer to the section titled:
"Save
and Restore Crane PLC Configuration". The "index" refers to the files
associated with the inputs and outputs, not the actual input and output
files them selves.
Set shelf digit and special request data
This merely sets the names of the pick-to-light digits - Units, Tens,
Hundreds and the Separate LED.
Set PTL RAM memory location descriptions
The Movement Controller allows you to view the memory of the
microprocessors of the pick-to-light (PTL) hardware. In order to do this
with some assistance, descriptions of the read/write memory of the
microprocessor is displayed as you examine the bits and bytes of this
memory.
This database holds this information.
Set carton conveyor device types
The carton conveyor device types are hard-coded, as distinct from the
Heavy-Unit-Load Conveyor device types, however their descriptions are not.
This option allows you to restore these descriptions to the default
settings.
Set carton conveyor alarms
This option sets the text used to describe each alarm from the carton
conveyor system.
Set carton command names & security
This options sets the descriptions of the purpose of the carton conveyor
system window push-buttons and the security level you need to use them.
Set barcode scanner fixed data
This option assign the names to the supported barcode scanner check digit
algorithms.
Set palletiser alarm text
This option sets the text used to describe each alarm from the palletisers.
Set palletiser command names & security
This options sets the descriptions of the purpose of the palletiser window
push-buttons and the security level you need to use them.
Set channel names
This option sets the names for Com 1, Com 2, the extended asynchronous
serial communications channels and the KTxD communications channels.
Set baud rate definitions
There are three sets of baud rates, those for the asynchronous serial
communications channels, those for the KTxD in Data-Highway Plus or Scanner
mode and those for the KTxD in DH-485 mode.
This option sets the names of all these baud rates, and, in the case of the
asynchronous serial communications channels, the values to be written to
the divisor latches to achieve these rates.
Set Allen-Bradley file definitions
This option sets the definition of the types of files supported by
Allen-Bradley PLCs (PLC-5 and SLC-500). This definition includes the file
type identify characters (N, T, BT ...) the names of the file types
(Integer, Timer ...) the names for the sub-elements of the file (Preset,
Accumulator, ...) and to support the SLC-500, the file type (a parameter
needed in interrogating the SLC-500).
Set customisation option text
All efforts are made to make the system as configurable as possible,
however, applications often need variations to the standard source code,
the customisation database is used to enable the customisations for
particular projects. This option sets the names of the supported
customisations to date.
Frequently, these customisations are a convenient way to make changes on
site without impacting other projects. When away from the coal face, many
of these are reincorporated into the configurability of the system and the
need for the customisation can be removed.
Import to and Export from the Database
This allows you to export all records of selected fields from the database
to a file, or to import selected fields into the database from a file.
The files to be exported to, or imported from, will/must be in the current
working directory.
You must first select whether you intend to
export
data from the database, that is copy data from the database to a
file, leaving the database unaltered, or
import
data into the database, thereby changing the contents of the
database to reflect the contents of a file.
Your second choice is whether you wish to import or export
a number of fields together, in a format described by a "definition file",
which you will need to nominate, or
a single field (which you will need to nominate), converting the data into
ASCII (if necessary), and appending a new line to the end of each datum, so
that it is human readable using most text editors, or
a single field (which you will need to nominate), leaving the data in its
native form (which may not be human readable using most text editors) and
without formatting into lines.
Your choices effectively allow you to run the equivalent programs to the
off-line ancillary programs, "export", "import", "unpack", "pack",
"isolate", and "deisolat". The following table illustrates this
correspondence:
┌───────────────────────────────┬────────────┬────────────┐
│ FIRST CHOICE: │Export from │ Import to │
│SECOND CHOICE: │ database │ database │
├-──────────────────────────────┼────────────┼────────────┤
│Use definition file │ export │ import │
│Single field converted to ASCII│ unpack │ pack │
│Single field in binary │ isolate │ deisolat │
└───────────────────────────────┴────────────┴────────────┘
Had you chosen "Use definition file" as your second choice, you will need
to specify the filenames of the definition file and the target or source
file. The filenames are each expected to consist of one to eight
characters, followed by a period (full-stop, dot or ".") then a
one-to-three character extension. Any pair of legal filenames will
suffice, provided their length is less than or equal to twelve characters.
The definition file will be checked for read access, and, had you selected
"Export from database" as your first choice, the target file will also
be checked.
Had you instead chosen either of the "Single field" options as your second
choice, you will need to select a database field. The target or source
filename will be derived from the number that is presented against the
prompt for this field when the database prompt field (the field
corresponding to the prompt, "Database prompt") is selected for editing.
The target or source file name will be the three digit representation of
this number, right justified in a field of zeros. For example, had you
chosen the "MenuEntryName" field, whose prompt is "Menu entry name", which
corresponds to the database field number 25, then the target or source
filename would be "025". Had you selected "Export from database" as your
first choice, the target file will also be checked for read access.
After making your choices and entering the corresponding information, type
[ENTER]. The information is then checked, and if sound, the requested
operation is performed, and the window is closed. Otherwise there will be
a message indicating what information is unsuitable, and you will be
required to reenter the information.
This allows you to record the current configuration data from any of the
crane PLCs, and to store these in a file. It also allows you to, later,
read this file and write its contents to the crane PLC.
You may also view the saved configuration for a crane, to ensure that it is
appropriate, before restoring it to a crane.
A new crane may have some of its configuration data files initialised from
the Movement Controller's database.
Below is a rough text-representation of this window:
Save and restore crane PLC configuration
This display allows you to save the configuration of a crane plc to hard disc,
or to read a previously saved configuration from the hard disc and write it to
a crane plc.
active keys:
1-... : SELECT the crane whose configuration you wish to SAVE or RESTORE
S : SAVE the crane plc configuration to hard disc. This first loads the
crane dimensions database, which lets us know which configuration
data files are present in the crane and what size they are. We then
write the data from this data file to the hard disc, followed by the
data from each of the referenced configuration data files. The file's
name will be CRANE1.DAT for crane 1 and so forth. This should be done
after changing any of the crane's configuration data files.
R : RESTORE the crane plc configuration from hard disc. This first loads
the crane dimensions database, which lets us know which configuration
data files are present in the crane and what size they are. We then
read the remaining configuration data files from the disc and write
as much as will fit to the data files nominated in the dimensions
data file. This should be done after downloading a program to the
crane PLC.
Crane 1
The "save" operation saves the crane PLC configuration to hard disc. This
first loads the crane dimensions database, which lets us know which
configuration data files are present in the crane and what size they are.
We then write the data from this data file to the hard disc, followed by
the data from each of the referenced configuration data files. The file's
name will be "crane1.dat" for crane 1 and so forth. This should be done
after changing any of the crane's configuration data files.
The "restore" operation restores the crane PLC configuration from hard
disc. This first loads the crane dimensions database, which lets us know
which configuration data files are present in the crane and what size they
are. We then read the remaining configuration data files from the disc and
write as much as will fit to the data files nominated in the dimensions
data file. This should be done after downloading a program to the crane
PLC.
The "view" operation allows you to examine the last saved crane PLC
configuration. You might wish to do this prior to restoring the
configuration to the crane.
The "initialise" operation sets the crane's racking disabled configuration
data files and racking load height configuration data files from
information contained in the Movement Controller's rack definition
database.
You must first select a crane, using one of the numeric keys, or typing
either [PAGE UP] or [PAGE DOWN] to adjust the crane number, then select an
operation, either "save", or "restore", or "view", or "initilaise", by
typing "S", or "R", or "V", or "I", respectively. If you do not first
select a crane, you will be prompted to do so when you attempt one of these
operations.
You may also select a crane, or select one of the operations, by moving the
highlight to either the "SELECT ..." line or one of the operation lines,
then pressing [ENTER]. You can also move the highlight using the cursor.
You can also double-click on the line in place of pressing [ENTER].
If the crane is executing a command, you will not be allowed to issue any
of these commands other than to view the saved configuration.
Once the crane and operation have been selected, you will be presented with
the text appropriate to that operation, and asked to confirm that this is
your intention by entering "S", or "R", or "I", for save, or retrieve, or
initialise, respectively.
The saving and restoring operations may take as long as a minute, depending
on the configuration files supported by the crane and the baud rate at
which the communications is running. During this time the Crane Commands
and Alarms screen will indicate which operation is taking place. Refer to
the section titled:
"Crane
Commands and Alarms". It is also normal for communications to appear to
fail during this time, since the regular communications has been
interrupted. As a result, when the operation is completed, you may need to
reset alarms on the crane and set it back into service.
There is no confirmation required for the "view" operation. Instead you
will be prompted to advance to the presentation of the next file, or the
next page if more than one page is required to present the file. Some of
the descriptions of the configuration are taken from the database. Please
refer to the sections titled:
"Crane
Bit Descriptions" and
"Set
crane bit descriptions".
Exit
The final option on the main menu, "Exit", is provided to exit the operator
interface completely. In the event of selecting this option the Movement
Controller's operator interface, at the (virtual) terminal from which this
option was selected, will exit.
Other instances of the Movement Controller's operator interface will be
unaffected, and the Movement Controller's daemon will continue to control
the plant.